PORTA LINGUARUM ORIENTALIUM

Takamitsu Muraoka

CLASSICAL SYRIAC

A BASIC GRAMMAR WITH A CHRESTOMATHY

Second, Revised Edition

A

t^Skrui

:,"«a T<;.:rix,.;:;;n\>«>t .,-v.sil.n*!'

lJS»*# 3 «

a*

:i

Harrassowitz Verlag

Takamitsu Muraoka
Classical Syriac

PORTA LINGUARUM ORIENTALIUM

Neue Serie
Herausgegeben von Werner Diem und Lutz Edzard

Band 19

2005

Harrassowitz Verlag • Wiesbaden

Takamitsu Muraoka

CLASSICAL SYRIAC

A Basic Grammar with a Chrestomathy

With a select Bibliography
Compiled by S. P. Brock

Second, Revised Edition

2005

Harrassowitz Verlag • Wiesbaden

Cover Illustration: Herzog August Bibliothek Wolfcnbuttcl Cod Guelf. 3.1.300 Aug. 2° 215

Bibliographische Information Der Deutschen Bibliothek:
Die Deutsche Bibliothek verzeichnet diese Publikation in der Deutschen
Nationalbibliografie; detaillierte bibliografische Daten sind im Internet
uber http://dnb.ddb.de abrufbar.

Bibliographic information published by Die Deutsche Bibliothek:
Die Deutsche Bibliothek lists this publication in the Deutsche
Nationalbibliografie; detailed bibliographic data is available in the
internet at http://dnb.ddb.de. e-mail: cip@dbf.ddb.de

For further information about our publishing program have a look at our
website http://www.harrassowitz.de/verlag

© Otto Harrassowitz KG, Wiesbaden 2005

This work, including all of its parts, is protected by copyright.

Any use beyond the limits of copyright law without the permission

of the publisher is forbidden and subject to penalty. This applies

particularly to reproductions, translations, microfilms and storage

and processing electronic systems.

Printed on permanent/durable paper.

Printing and binding: Hubert & Co., Gottingen

Printed in Germany

ISSN 0554-7342
ISBN 3-447-05021-7

In memory of my dear teacher

and

a true gentleman

Chaim Rabin V't

(1915-96)

Professor of Hebrew

The Hebrew University, Jerusalem

CONTENTS

PREFACE XV

Literature cited in the grammar and chrestomathy sections XIX

Abbreviations XXHI

Abbreviated titles of the Syriac documents cited in the Morpho-

syntax and Syntax section of the grammar XXV

Some practical suggestions XXVQ

PART ONE: WRITING AND PHONOLOGY 1

§ 1. General 1

§ 2. Alphabet 2

§ 3. Pronunciation. Consonants 4

§ 4. Vowels and their notation 5

a) diacritical dot 5

b) vowel letters 6

c) vowel signs 6

§ 5. Other graphic signs 8

a) qu&aya vs. rukkakha 8

b)seyame 9

c) linea occultans (marhetana) and mehaggeyana 9

d) cantillation marks 10

e) punctuation marks 10

§ 6. Some remarks on phonology 10

A) vowel deletion rule 10

B) e changing to a 10

C) word-initial Alaf 1

D) word-initial Yodh 1

E) diphthongs 1

F) syllable structure 1

G) doubling of consonants 1

H) spirantisation of six plosive consonants 12

I) monoconsonantal proclitic particles 12

VIII Contents

J) aphaeresis of some gutturals 13

K) elision of N in sequence < C*C > 13

L) elision of N in sequence < V>C > 14

M) assimilation of consonants 14

N) assimilation and metathesis 15

O) word stress 16

PART TWO: MORPHOLOGY 17

§ 7. Root 17

§ 8. Gemination of the identical second and third radicals 17

Pronouns 18

§ 9. Independent personal pronouns 18

§ 10. Enclitic forms 18

§ 11. Suffixed personal pronouns 19

§ 12. Personal pronouns attached to verbs 19

§ 12a. Reflexive pronouns 20

§ 12b. Reciprocal pronouns 20

§ 13 Demonstrative pronouns 20

§ 14. Interrogatives 21

§ 15. Relative pronoun 21

§ 16. Independent possessive pronouns 21

§17. Declension of nouns and adjectives 21

§ 18. State 22

§19. Two variant stem forms 22

§ 20. Extra y before the feminine ending 23

§ 2 1 Plural masculine emphatic state ending -ayya 23

§ 22. Absolute and constructus forms of words with plural

masculine emphatic state ending -ayya 24

§ 23 . Plural masculine emphatic state ending -one 24

§ 24. Feminine nouns and adjectives of Third- Yodh or -Waw

roots 24

§25. Expanded plural base -wata 25

§ 26. Plurals with extra h 25

§ 27 . Mismatch between gender and its morphology 26

§ 28. Archaic feminine ending -ay 26

Contents IX

§ 29. Grammatical gender and natural sex 26

§ 30 Formation patterns of nouns and adjectives 27

§ 31. Pattern^v/Z 28

§ 32. Pattern^z/v/ 30

§ 33. Patterned/ 30

§ 34. Patterns Qtil, Qtel, Qtayl 30

§35. Patterns Qtul, Qtol 30

§ 36. Pattern QyttVl 30

§ 37. Patterns with four or more radicals 31

§38. Patterns with prefixes and suffixes 31

§ 39. Diminutives 32

§ 40. Attachment of the suffixed personal pronouns 32

§ 41. Two sets of suffixed pronouns 33

§ 42. Rules in application 34

§ 43. Some irregular nouns 35

§ 44. Numerals 37

a) Cardinals 37

b) Ordinals 38

c) Fractions 39

§ 45 . Some numerals with pronominal suffixes 39

§ 46. Prepositions 39

§ 47. Adverbs 40

Verb 40

§ 48. Verb conjugation: general 40

§ 49. Six patterns 41

§ 50. Passive 42

§ 51. Participle 42

§ 52. Infinitive 43

§ 53. Conjugation classes 43

§ 54. Inflectional affixes: overview 43

§ 55. Triconsonantal regular verb 45

§ 56. Deletion of the stem vowel 46

§ 57 . Beghadhkephath and the verb conjugation 46

§ 58. The e > a rule and the verb conjugation 47

§ 59. Second- Alaf verbs 47

X Contents

§60. Third-Alaf verbs 47

§ 61. First-Nun verbs 48

§ 62. First-Alaf verbs 48

§63. First- Yodh verbs 50

§ 64. Third-Yodh verbs 52

§ 65. Second- Waw or -Yodh verbs 53

§ 66. Geminate verbs 54

§ 67. Some common anomalous verbs 55

§ 68. Verbs with object suffix pronouns 56

PART THREE: MORPHOSYNTAX AND SYNTAX 59

§ 69. Noun: Gender 59

§ 70. Noun: Number 59

§ 71. Noun: State 59

§ 72. Alternative means of expressing determination and

indetermination 60

§ 73 . Status constructus and periphrasis by means of -a 61

§ 74. Independent personal pronouns with a finite verb 62

§ 75. Personal prounouns referring to impersonal objects .. 62

§ 76. Interrogatives followed by -.n 63

§ 77. Relative pronoun .i 63

§ 78. Prepositions plus -.i turned conjunctions 64

§ 79. Impersonal passive 64

§ 80. Eth- conjugations with transitive force 64

§ 81. Perfect 65

§ 82. Imperfect 65

§ 83. Participle 66

§ 84. Passive participle 67

§ 85. Compound tense: t<&a> .?&* /ktav wa/ 67

§ 86. Compound tense: i*&d j=AJL /katev wa/ 68

§87. Compound tense: ^A^ rt&m /hwa katev/ 68

§ 88. Compound tense: rttfco -=>o<k^j /nektov wa/ 68

§ 89. Compound tense: jab£ r^ocnj /nehwe katev/ 68

§ 90. Expansion of nucleous noun 68

§ 91. Expansion through 68

Contents XI

a) attributive adjective 68

b) demonstrative pronoun 69

c) cardinal numeral . 69

d) other quantifier 70

e) another noun or -.i phrase 70

f) Noun phrase transformed into a suffixed pronoun ... 71

g) Position of the adjective in relation to an expanded
noun phrase 71

h) Expansion by -* clause 71

§ 92. Grammatical concord 72

§ 93. Negation 73

§94. Expression of the agent in a passive construction 75

§ 95. Apposition 75

§96. Expansion of adjective: 76

a) through an intensifier 76

b) through a construct phrase 76

c) Comparative degree 76

d) Substantivised adjective 76

§ 97. Expansion of verb: 76

a) direct object optionally marked by the preposition -A 77

b) pronominal object synthetically attached to the verb 77

c) pronominal direct object "them" ^ r* or ^ rg 77

d) pronominal direct object of a participle marked by -A 77

e) marking of a pronominal direct object of an infinitive 77

f) pronominal direct object of a verb other than a parti-
ciple marked by -A 78

g) proleptic object pronouns 78

h-i) double direct objects 78

§ 98. Expansion other than by noun phrases or pronouns: .. 79

a) by the infinitive 79

b) by the imperfect 79

c)by -.i + the imperfect 79

d) by the participle 79

e) Verbs of sense or intellectual perception 79

XII Contents

f) Object complement 80

g) Asyndetic complementation 80

h) Complementation by a circumstantial participle 81

i) Cognate objects 81

j) Lamadh-less infinitive 81

§ 99. Verbs expanded by adverbials or their equivalents .... 82
§ 100. Prepositions modified by prepositional phrase or

adverb 82

§
§
§
§
§
§
§

§
§
§
§
§
§

01. Clause structure: general 82

02. Nominal clause: general 82

03. Bipartite nominal clause 83

04. Tripartite nominal clause 83

05. Four tripartite patterns 84

06. Deletion or otherwise of pronominal subject 84

07. Structural meaning of the various nominal clause
patterns 85

08. Quadripartite nominal clause 86

09. Existence, location and&ur? 86

10. Focusing function of the enclitic cud 87

11. Antecedentless relative clause .. 87

12.Prolepsis 88

13. Compound sentence 89

EXERCISES 91

KEY TO EXERCISES 95

PARADIGMS 103

I. Regular triliteral verbs 104

H. Third- Yodh verbs 107

III. Second-Waw/Yodh verbs 109

IV. Geminate verbs Ill

V. Regular verbs with object suffixes 1 12

VI. Third- Yodh verbs with object suffixes 114

Contents XIII

SUBJECT INDEX 121

SELECT BIBLIOGRAPHY (compiled by S.P. Brock) 127

CHRESTOMATHY 1*

1. An inscription of Serrin (73 C.E.) 3*

2. The great flood of November 201 C.E.: from the

archives of Edessa 4*

3. A deed of sale on parchment from Dura Europos

(243C.E.) 7*

4. Abraham's temptation (Genesis 22:1-19) 11*

5. The raising of Lazarus (John 1 1: 1-57) according to
VetusSyra 13*

6. From A Discourse on Fate by Bardaisan 18*

7. The Odes of Solomon: Odes 1 1 and 42 25*

8. The Acts of Judas Thomas 30*

9. Aphrahaates's Sixth Demonstration: On monks 41*

10. Ephrem's Commentary on Genesis 22 46*

11. Jacob of Serugh on the Apostle Thomas 48*

12. Some juridic decisions 50*

13. Job of Edessa on sleep 51*

14. Ishofdad of Merv on John 11 52*

15. Some light-hearted stories 55*

16. From Bar Hebraeus's Syriac Grammar 56*

GLOSSARY 61*

PROPER NOUNS 87*

PREFACE

One need not perhaps look very far for a reason or two why the
Syriac language still holds some fascination for not a few people.
Among the Semitic languages it is one of the most richtly documented
besides Arabic, Akkadian and Hebrew. Though we do possess some
amount of secular Syriac writings, the bulk of Syriac literature, including
one of its oldest documents, namely the Syriac Bible in its various
versions, attests to the fact that this is the tongue of the Syriac-speaking
church. Thus the knowledge of Syriac is an important key for investi-
gating and appreciating the culture deposited in documents penned in
this dialect of Aramaic over a period of more than a millennium.
Although we are deeply indebted to Payne Smith and Brockelmann for
the solid foundations they laid in the field of Syriac lexicography, and
to NOldeke for his still unsurpassed reference grammar, there still
remains much to claim the attention of Syriac philologists. Especially
on matters of syntax, there are issues to which Ndldeke has paid insuf-
ficient, if at all, attention, and some questions need to be investigated
with a new perspective and methodology, as has been demonstrated
during the past few decades by scholars such as Avineri, Goldenberg,
Joosten, Khan, Van Rompay, and the present writer.O

The present work is meant to replace C. Brockelmann's Syrische
Grammatiky in comparison with which our grammar shows similarities
and dissimilarities alike.

Ours is also an introduction to the Classical Syriac language and
its literature.

Brockelmann introduced some of his original insights in the pho-
nology section, whilst the morphology and syntax, the latter in particular,
were rather brief. We like to believe that in all compartments of grammar
we have attempted to present a more detailed description of the language,
incorporating results of more recent studies on the language, with
special reference to syntax, which is an area where Syriac, with its
only seemingly deceptive simplicity, appears to be capable of expressing

1 On the status quaestionis up to the late thirties of this century, see an excellent
overview in Rosenthal 1939: 179-211.

XVI Preface

rather intriguing subtleties and niceties.

Unlike Brockelmann's our approach has been essentially descriptive
and synchronic, diachronic and comparative details, if presented at all,
being mostly relegated to footnotes.

Generations of students of Syriac have valued the chrestomathy of
considerable extent in Brockelmann's grammar. We also follow this
pedagogically commendable tradition. One important difference, how-
ever, is that each piece of text in our chrestomathy is more or less fully
provided with notes, mostly of grammatical and lexical nature with
frequent cross-references to relevant paragraphs in the grammar. Another
difference is that, whereas the pieces selected by Brockelmann are
almost without an exception ecclesiastical in nature, our anthology, it
is hoped, shows that in this language one can also find texts of secular
nature which can be interesting. In Brockelmann's chrestomathy all the
three Syriac scripts are equally represented, whilst we have shown
partiality to the oldest of them, the Estrangela, not only in the chresto-
mathy, but also in the grammar section. This can be justified by the
growing tendency to use this script in the recent scholarly publications.
We have made this choice, though the wordprocessing software at our
disposal has presented some technical difficulties in cases where a
vowel sign and a diacritic dot or dots, for example, need to be applied
simultaneously. In some such cases we have dispensed with one or
more of such dots. It is hoped that this will not be found by the user
too difficult or confusing. To minimise such a difficulty and in the
interest of pedagogical effectiveness, transliteration in the Latin alphabet
has been extensively used in the phonology and morphology section
and likewise in the chrestomathy. Out of the same pedagogical consid-
eration, the Verb Paradigms have also been provided with trans-
literation.

We would state at this point that we have taken the maximum care
to indicate the twofold pronunciation of the six, so-called Beghadh-
kephath plosives. This is contrary to the practice followed in many
text-editions, even in elementary grammars.

The texts in the Chrestomathy are arranged in a roughly chrono-
logical order of composition.

Another universally acclaimed boon of Brockelmann's grammar
has been its "Literatur." Here again we follow in his steps, and to this

Preface XVII

end we have been able to secure friendly and ready cooperation of Dr.
Sebastian Brock of Oxford, who has compiled a most up-to-date bibli-
ography for which one can only be grateful. It is not meant to be
exhaustive in the strict sense of the word, but it does present a source
of information to which any serious student of Syriac would often like
to turn. The section entitled "Grammatical studies" is designed to be
exhaustive.

Being the author of Classical Syriac for Hebraists, also published
by Harrassowitz (1987; reprinted 1996), I feel obliged to say a few
words over the relationship between it and the present work. My general
approach to Syriac grammar remains the same, though the present
work incorporates some new ideas and details, and is as a whole
somewhat fuller in the presentation of the grammar of the language.
This time no previous knowledge of Hebrew is assumed, so that even
the basic notions peculiar to Semitic languages are fully explained.
Needless to say, such a knowledge would considerably facilitate and
accelerate the study of Syriac, and for the benefit of such students we
have mentioned some phenomena and examples related to other cognates
such as Hebrew and other dialects of Aramaic. No chrestomathy text
is common to both grammars. The Bibliography is, of course, a new
feature. So are a set of basic language exercises with a key to them.
Following an earlier edition of Brockelmann's grammar, a list of proper
nouns occurring in the chrestomathy texts has been appended.

It remains to express my sincere thanks to the editors of the reputed
series, Porta Linguarum Orientalium, Profs. F. Rosenthal and W. Diem,
who did me an inestimable honour by asking me to contribute this
volume to the series. I have also benefited from several reviews published
on my Classical Syriac for Hebraists, and suggestions and corrections
to it made known to me through private correspondence by Prof. B.
Zuckerman of California, and especially Mr O.J. Schrier, M.A., of
Amsterdam. My gratitude goes also to Mr. M. Langfeld of Otto Harras-
sowitz for his encouragement and patience.

October, 1996.

Takamitsu Muraoka
Department of Near Eastern Studies,
Leiden University,
The Netherlands.

XVffl Preface

PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION

It gives us great pleasure to have been offered by the editors of the
series Porta Linguarum Orientalium, now Prof. Diem and Prof. Edzard,
to revise our Syriac grammar. In addition to rectifying plain errors in
the first edition drawn to our attention by various people and noticed
by ourselves, Dr Brock has revised the Select Bibliography. We have
also taken into account a number of reviews on the first edition, and
some valuable remarks and suggestions offered by the series editors,
for all of which we are grateful.

August, 2004.

Takamitsu Muraoka
Oegstgeest, The Netherlands

Literature cited in the grammar and chrestomathy sections^)

Aro, J. 1964. Die Vokalisierung des Grundstammes im semitischen

Verbum. Helsinki: Societas Orientalis Fennica. [Studia Orientalia 31]
Beyer, K. 1966. "Der reichsaramaische Einschlag in der altesten syrischen

Literatim" ZDMG 116:242-54.
Birkeland, H. 1947. "The Syriac phonematic vowel systems," Festskrift

til Professor OlafBroch pa harts 80 Arsdag, pp. 19-39. Oslo.
Blau, J. 1969. "The origin of the open and closed e in Proto-Syriac."

Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 32:1-9.
Bonnet, M. 1903. In R.A. Lipsius and M. Bonnet, Acta Apostolorum

Apocrypha II.2. Leipzig: Hermann Mendelssohn.
Boyd HI, J.L. 1982. "The development of the West Semitic Qal Perfect

of the double- c ayin verb with particular reference to its transmission

in Syriac." Journal of Northwest Semitic Languages 10: 1 1-23.
Brock, S.P. 1981. "Genesis 22 in Syriac tradition," in P. Casetti et al.

(eds), Milanges Dominique Barthelemy (GSttingen), pp. 2-30.
. 2003. "Some diachronic features of Classical Syriac," in M. Baasten

and W.T. van Peursen (eds), Hamlet on a Hill: Semitic and Greek

Studies Presented to Professor T. Muraoka on the Occasion of his

Sixty-Fifth Birthday [OLA 118] (Leuven: Peeters, 2003), pp. 95-111.
Brockelmann, C. 1908-13. Grundrifi der vergleichenden Grammatik

der semitischen Sprachen. 2 vols. Von Reuther & Reichard:Berlin.

. 2 1928. Lexicon Syriacum. Max Niemyer: Halle.

. 9 1962. Syrische Grammatik mit Paradigmen, Literatur, Chrestoma-

thie und Glossar. Leipzig: EnzyklopSdie.
Budge, E.W. Wallis. 1897. The Laughable Stories Collected by Mdr

Gregory John Bar-Hebrceus ... The Syriac Text Edited with an English

Translation. London: Luzac and Co.
Charlesworth, J.H. 1977. Ed. and tr., The Odes of Solomon. Missoula:

Scholars Press.
Dalman, G. 2 1905. Grammatik des jiidisch-palastinischen Aramaisch.

Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs.
Drijvers, H.J.W. 1965. The Book of the Laws of Countries. Dialogue

on Fate ofBardaipan ofEdessa. Assen: Van Gorcum. [a Syriac text

with an English translation]
. 1972. Old Syriac (Edessean) Inscriptions. Edited with an Introduc-
tion, Indices and a Glossary. Leiden: E.J. Brill.

For information on abbreviations used here, see pp. 155-56.

XX Cited Literature

Drijvers, HJ.W. and J.F. Healey. 1999. The Old Syriac Inscriptions of

Edessa & Osrhoene: Texts, Translations and Commentary. Leiden:

E.J. Brill.
Fassberg, S.E. 1990. A Grammar of the Palestinian Targum Fragments

from the Cairo Genizah. HSS 38. Atlanta: Scholars Press.
Gibson, M.D. 191 1. The Commentaries ofIsho c dad ofMerv, Bishop of

Hadatha etc. Luke and John. [Horae Semiticae no. 7, vol. 3, Syriac

text; no. 5, vol. 1, Translation]. Cambridge: Cambridge University

Press.
Goldstein, J.A. 1966. "The Syriac bill of sale from Dura-Europos."

JNES 25: 1-16.
Guidi, I. 1903. Chronica minora. [CSCO. Syr. 1]. Paris: Carlolus

Poussielgue and Leipzig: Otto Harrassowitz.
Hallier, L. 1893. Untersuchungen iiberdie edessenische Chronik. Texte

und Untersuchungen IX, 1 . Leipzig: J.C. Hinrichs'sche Buchhandlung.
Harris, R. and A. Mingana. 1916-20. The Odes and Psalms of Solomon

etc. Manchester, London, New York: Manchester University Press,

Longmans, Green & Company, and Bernard Quaritch.
Janson, A. and L. Van Rompay. 1993. Efrem de Syrier. Uitleg van het

boek Genesis. Ingeleid, vertaald en toegelicht. Kampen: J.H. Kok.
Jespersen, O. 1937. Analytic Syntax. Repr. Holt, Rinehart and Winston,

Inc.: New York, 1969. [originally published in Copenhagen: Munks-

gaard]

Joosten, J. 1989. "The function of the so-called davitus ethicus in Classical

Syriac." Or 58: 473-92.
. 1992. "The negation of non-verbal clause in Early Syriac." JAOS

112:584-88.
. 1996. The Syriac Language of the Peshitta & Old Syriac Versions

of Matthew. Syntactic Structure, Inner-Syriac Developments &

Translation Technique. [Studies in Semitic Languages and Linguistics

22]. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Joilon, P. and T. Muraoka, 1993. A Grammar of Biblical Hebrew. 2

vols. Roma: Pontifical Biblical Institute Press.
Klijn, A.F.J. 1962. The Acts of Thomas. Introduction - Text - Commentary.

Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Lagarde, P. de. 1889-91. Ubersicht iiberdie im Aramdischen, Arabischen

und Hebraischen iibliche Bildung der Nomina nebst Register und

Nachtragen. Gfittingen: Dietrich. Repr. Otto Zeller: Osnabriick, 1972.
Lattke, M. 1979-80. Die Oden Salomos in ihrer Bedeutung fur Neues

Testament und Gnosis. Bd I, Ausfuhrliche Handschriftenbeschreibung,

Cited Literature XXI

Edition mit deutscher Parallel-Ubersetzung etc., Bd la: Der syrische

Text der Edition in Esjrangela, Faksimilie des griechischen Papyras

Bodmer XL [Orbis Biblicus et Orientalis 25/1, 25/la]. Freiburg:

Universitatsverlag and Gottingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.
Lewis, A.S. 1910. The Old Syriac Gospels or Evangelion da-

Mepharreshe etc. London: Williams and Norgate.
Martin, J.P. 1872. (Euvres grammaticales d'Abou'lfaradj dit Bar

Hebraeus y Tome I. Paris: Maisonneuve et Comp.
Mingana, A. 1905. Clefde la langue aramienne ou Grammaire compUte

et pratique des deux dialectes syriaques, occidental et oriental

Mossoul: Imprimerie des peres dominicains.
. 1935. Encyclopedia of Philosophical and Natural Sciences as Taught

in Baghdad about A.D. 817 or Book of Treasures by Job ofEdessa.

Cambridge: W. Heffer & Sons.
Moberg, A. 1907-13. Buck der Strahlen. Die grossere Grammatik des

Barhebraus. Ubersetzung nach einem kritisch berichtigten Texte etc.

Leipzig: Otto Harrassowitz.
. 1922. Le Livre des splendeurs. La Grande grammaire de Gregoire

Barhebraeus. Texte syriaque edite d'apr&s les manuscrits etc. Lund:

C.W.K. Gleerup etc.
Morag, Sh. 1962. The Vocalization Systems of Arabic, Hebrew and

Aramaic. f s-Gravenhage: Mouton.
Muraoka, T. 1976. "Segolate nouns in Biblical and other Aramaic

dialects." JAOS 96:226-35.
_. 1977. "On the Syriac particle >£." BO 34: 21-22.

. 1985. "A study in Palestinian Jewish Aramaic." Sefarad 45: 3-21.

. 1987 [repr. 1996]. Classical Syriac for Hebraists . Wiesbaden: Otto

Harrassowitz.
Naveh, J. 1982. Early History of the Alphabet. Jerusalem: Magnes

Press.
NGldeke, Th. 1966. Kurzgefasste syrische Grammatik. [2nd ed. of 1898

with an appendix by A. Schall]. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buch-

gesellschaft.
Parisot, J. 1894-1907. Aphraat is Demonstrations. Patrologia Syriaca,

Pars prima, 1-2. Paris: Firmin Didot et Socii.
Pierre, M.-J. 1994. Les Odes de Salomon. Traduction, introduction et

notes. Turnhout: Brepols.
Rosenthal, F. 1939 [repr. 1964]. Die aramaistische Forschung seit Th.

Noldekes Verqffentlichungen. Leiden: E.J. Brill.
Segal, J.B. 1953. The Diacritical Point and the Accents in Syriac. Oxford

XXII Cited Literature

University Press: Oxford.

. 1970. Edessa 'The Blessed City. 'Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Selb, W. 1990. Sententiae syriacae. Eingeleitet, herausgegeben, deutsch

ubersetzt etc. [Osterreichische Akademie der Wissenschaften. Phil.-

hist. Klasse. Sitzungsberichte, 567. Band.] Osterreichische Akademie

der Wissenschaften: Wien.
Strothmann, W. 1976. Jakob von Sarug. Drei Gedichte ttber den Apostel

Thomas in Indien. [Gottinger Orientforschung. 1. Reihe: Syriaca Bd.

12.] Wiesbaden: Otto Harrassowitz.
Tonneau, R.-M. 1955. Sancti Ephraem Syri in Genesim et in Exodum

commentarii. [CSCO Syr. 71-72]. Leuven: Peeters.
Wright, W. 1869. The Homilies ofAphraates the Persian Sage. London:
. 1871. The Apocryphal Acts of the Apostles. 2 vols. London/

Edinburgh: Williams and Norgate.

Abbreviations

abs.

absolute (state)

act.

active

adj.

adjective

adv.

adverb

Akk.

Akkadian

BA

Biblical Aramaic

BH

Biblical Hebrew

caus.

causative

conj.

conjunction

CPA

Christian Palestinian Aramaic

est.

construct (state)

dir.

direct

emph.

emphatic

ES

Eastern (Nestorian) Syriac

f .

feminine

fern.

feminine

Gk

Greek

Heb.

Hebrew

Impv.

Imperative

Impf.

Imperfect

Inf.

Infinitive

ind.

indirect

intr.

intransitive

Lat.

Latin

lit.

literally

m.

masculine

masc.

masculine

MH

Mishnaic Hebrew

n.

footnote

obj.

object

pass.

passive

P i.

plural

prep.

preposition

ptc.

participle

sg.

singular

St.

state

suf.

suffix

Syr.

Syriac

tr.

transitive

WS

Western (Jacobite) Syriac

Abbreviated titles of the Syriac documents cited in the
Morphosyntax and Syntax section of the grammar

Acta Thomae: Wright, W. (ed.), Apocryphal Acts of the Apostles. 2

vols. London and Oxford: Williams & Norgate, 1871.
Aphr.: Graffin, R. (ed.), Aphraatis demonstrationes. 2 vols. [Patrologia

Syriaca. 1-2]. Paris: Firmin-Didot et socii, 1904-7.
Bedjan, J. Sarugensis: Bedjan, P. (ed.), Homiliae selectae Mar Jacobi

Sarugensis, 5 vols. Paris: Via Dicta / Leipzig: Harrassowitz,

1905-10.
Ephrem, L'tvangile concordant. Leloir, L., Saint Ephrem : Cowmen-

taire de I'ltvangile concordant. Dublin: Hodges Figgis & Co.,

1963.
Euphemia: Burkitt, F.C. (ed.), Euphemia and the Goth etc. London /

Oxford: Williams and Norgate, 1913.
Josh. Styl.: Wright, W. (ed.), The Chronicle of Joshua the Stylite.

Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1882.
Mart.: Assemanus, S.A. (ed.), Acta sanctorum martyrum orientalium

et occidentalium. Roma: Josephus Collinus, 1748.
Spic: Cureton, W. (ed.), Spicilegium syriacum etc. London: Francis
and John Rivington, 1855.

The Syriac Bible is mostly quoted from the Peshitta version. Where
appropriate, a distinction is made between the Peshitta and Old Syriac
versions of the Gospels by means of "P" and "S" respectively.

Some practical suggestions

1. The following may be considered as useful pedagogic strategy:

a. Study the following matters thoroughly:

1) the Estrangela form of the alphabet (§ 2),

2) the pronunciation of the letters of the alphabet (§ 3),

3) the "Nestorian" vowel signs to go with it (§ 4c),

4) some graphic signs (§ 5)

5) some phonological rules (§ 6 A, B, F, H, I, J, K, L)

6) the basics of morphology: pronouns (§§ 9-12, 13, 15), declension
of nouns and adjectives, and conjugation of verbs (§§ 17, 18,
21, 24, 27, 30, 31, 40-43, 46, 48-57, 61-68).

b. Do the appropriate exercise as you go along, studying the above-
mentioned points.

c. Footnotes, especially lengthy ones, may be initially ignored.

2. Start working through the chrestomathy. The texts nos. 1 and 3 may
be be^t left for a later stage of study. Begin with nos. 4 and 5, both
from the Bible.

3. In studying the texts in the chrestomathy, make good use of the
accompanying footnotes. Cross-references to the grammar ought to
be studied carefully. Start studying simultaneously the paragraphs
of the grammar section not mentioned above, including the Morpho-
syntax and Syntax section.

PART ONE

WRITING AND PHONOLOGY

§ 1 General. Syriac is a language which belongs to the Aramaic
branch of the Semitic language family. It is attested in written form by
inscriptions which date from the first few centuries of the Christian era
and originate from Edessa and its environs^ 1 ) The language of these
inscriptions still shows some affinity with Aramaic of the earlier phases,
and is thus distinct from the fully developed literary idiom of the
subsequent centuries.^ Along with the Aramaic idiom of the Babylonian
Talmud and the idiom used by another Christian community, Mandaic,
this developed form of Classical Syriac represents Eastern Aramaic in
contradistinction to Western Aramaic represented by idioms such as
Palestinian Jewish Aramaic of documents like the Palestinian (or: Jerus-
alem) Talmud and some midrashim, Samaritan Aramaic, and Christian
Palestinian Aramaic.

The growth and development of Classical Syriac is closely bound up
with the spread of Christianity in North Western Syria and subsequently
the whole of Mesopotamia, and even further eastwards. It bloomed
into a lively, literary means of expression during the third to seventh
centuries. Over the centuries, a vast amount of literary works was
produced in this language, covering the entire gamut of intellectual
curiosity and creativity during the Late Antiquity and the immediately
following period. Syriac-speaking scholars are also rightly credited
with having served as conservers and transmitters of classical scholarship
and as tutors and mentors for emerging, but still largely unlettered
Islamic leadership. After the emergence of Islam in the region the
language gradually began to decline, though its use as a literary idiom
was kept alive well into the thirteenth century.

As a result of the famous Christological controversy during the fifth
century the Syriac-speaking church split into two camps: the dyophysite

Useful collections of such inscriptions are Drijvers 1972; Drijvers amd Healey
1999.

2 On this, see Beyer 1966.

2 Writing and Phonology

East Syrians (Nestorians) on the one hand, who came under the Persian
sphere of influence, and the monophysite West Syrians (Jacobites) on
the other, who remained within the Roman sphere of influence. These
ecclesiastical developments came to leave some traces at language
level as well in that each branch began to develop its own form of
alphabet and there are some differences in phonology between the two
dialects.

It now appears that Syriac, in a variety of vernacular forms, managed
to survive down to the modern times. Towards the end of the 19th
century attempts were made by Western missionaries to create modern
literary idioms on the basis of Classical Syriac, and these vernaculars
achieved a remarkable measure of success. Not only are a number of
distinct Syriac idioms today in actual use as oral means of communication
in pockets of the Middle East and communities of Modern Syriac
speakers settled in various parts of the Western world including Australia,
but there also exists a considerable amount of literary output.

§ 2 Alphabet. Like other indigenous Semitic scripts, the Syriac
alphabet is essentially consonantal. ( 3 ) Each of its twenty-two letters
was originally designed to represent a single consonantal phoneme.
However, already the earliest inscriptions show that some letters had
begun to be used to mark vowels, notably the letter Waw for o or u
and the letter Yodh for i or e. Moreover, the first letter of the alphabet,
Alaf , had ceased to be pronounced under certain conditions, and thereby
appeared to be a vowel letter by default. These three letters then are
bivalent, being either consonantal or vocalic or having no phonetic
value, the latter applying to Alaf. All the remaining letters are conso-
nantal.

The Syriac alphabet is known in three distinct forms: the earliest is
called Estrangela, and the above-mentioned split within the Syriac
church led to the emergence of two distinct scripts, Serto or Serta in
use among the Jacobites, and the Nestorian in the east.

3 The earliest known form of the Syriac script appears to be related to the cursive
Palmyrene ductus developed in Northern Mesopotamia towards the closing centuries
of the pre-Chrisitan era. See Naveh 1982: 143-53.

Alphabet

Table of the alphabet

Estrangela

Serto

Nestorian

Hebrew

58
p

I

the nght
Unattached

Joined to
the left
Joined to

Joined to the
right and left

the right
Unattached

the left
Joined to

right and left
Joined to

O

8

the nght
Unattached

the left
Joined to

nght and lett
Joined to

■S 1

3'

. 5

Alaf

t<

r*

j

i

I

I

K

Beth

_=.

J -3

_=

o ,

J

j

JD J3 * JS 3

Gamal

\ W \

^ ^

^ "^

*\

*\ \

\ 3

Dalath

.1

.1

•

•

3

•

•

i

He

CD

CD

oi

oi

01

91

n

Waw

O

CI

o

o

i

Zai(n)

\

1

J

J

*

>

T

Heth

•

teth

\,

\, A,

A,

4>

>

J>

*

•V ^ V \r

Yodh

•

• -»

^

a

«J

J

j

4X

4*

j

j '

Kaf

°\ °\ A

^

7

7

JD

D

J

s.

A

* T3

Lamadh

i A

A A

A

^

^

^

Ni

^

^

^

^ «?

Mim

V

3° -5*

2A

f

?

^0

*D

P

p

*

a a o

Nun

^_

V J

JL

V

V

J

J

V.

v

J

J 1- ^

Semkath •

09 J»

SO

OX)

JS

XD

XD

j£

j£

A

£ o

<E

^_

A. ^

-^

\>

>fc

^

A

^

^

>>

i. v

Pe

-a

*a 3

.a

3

3

J9

3

3

3

£

5 *), a

Sadhe

_S

JT

3

3

S

£

r *

Qof

a

XI „o

JQ

tD

tD

D

D

%£3

JD

J3

a p

Resh

*

1

•

1

•

•

•

1

Shin

JC

at jk.

JK

^

^

Jfc

Jt

A

A

it

A

Taw

fc

b

L

^

tt

k

n

Note the following points applicable to all the three scripts:

a) Certain pairs of letters need to be carefully kept apart from each
other:* 4 )

4 For the purpose of illustration, we use the Estrangela script.

4 Writing and Phonology

^(BethX 5 ) : ^(Kaf)

.7 (Dalath) : 1 (Resh)

* (Heth) : ^ (double Yodh)

^ (Nun + Yodh)

-u (double Nun)
A (Lamadh) : ^ ( C E)
j (Nun) : ^ (Yodh)

b) Syriac is written from right to left, the general direction of
writing strokes is from top to bottom and from right to left.

c) Certain letters are never joined to the left: Alaf, Dalath, He,
Waw, Zai(n), §ade, Resh, and Taw.

d) When a letter is joined to the left or to the right, or both, very
minor adjustments need to be made.

e) In the Serto script the sequence of Lamadh followed by Alaf is
written JJ, whilst Alaf followed by Lamadh is written ^s>. Further-
more, where a word ends with Lamadh and the following word be-
gins with Alaf, the combination may be spelled ^. In the Nestorian
script a word-final sequence of Taw followed by Alaf may be written
A instead of Ik.

§3 Pronunciation. The following description can be only approxima-
tive, and it is more than likely that in the course of the history of the
language there occurred some changes. Moreover, there are, as stated
above, some differences between the Western and Eastern dialects. It
is widely believed that Eastern Syriac has preserved at many points a
more archaic form of Classical Syriac. Hence we shall mostly follow
here the Eastern tradition.

Consonants. The six plosives, namely ja, ^ .-t, j*, .a, &, are
pronounced, as in the Tiberian traidition of Hebrew, in two different
ways: /b g d k p t/ and, with spirantisation, /v g d k f t/: /g & J/ being
the equivalent of the Arabic Ghain, /d/ of th of the English that, fld of
ch of Scottish loch, and l\J of th of thing respectively^ 6 )

5 When a Syriac technical term is mentioned as such, we shall use, in this grammar,
a simplified spelling, and not its phonetically transliterated form. For instance,
"Beth," and not "Bft."

6 The use of double slashes, / /, is not meant to be phonemic notation, but a mere

Pronunciation; Vowels and their notation 5

Alaf (rt) is a glottal stop, heard in many varieties of English as in
better /b£?o/ for the standard /b£to/.

Heth (u) is an unvoiced fricative pharyngeal.

Jeth (^), Sadhe (j), and Qof (d) are said to be an "emphatic" equi-
valent of Taw (&), Semkath (»), and Kaf (*) respectively. However, in
practice, little distinction is made between the two series, the emphatic
series often being "deemphasised." Many pronounce §adhe as if it
were /ts/ as in Engl. cats.

<E (*.) is a voiced fricative pharyngeal, forming a pair with IJeth.

§ 4 Vowels and their notation. Syriac knows three sorts of vowel
notation. They differ from each other in conception.

a) Diacritical dot. The first is a simple dot placed above or below
a word where two or three sequences of identical consonants differ
phonetically, and consequently in meaning. Thus ^i /man/ 'What? 1 or
/man/ 'Who? 1 vs. ^* /men/ 'from'; A^ /qatel/ 'killing' (participle), or
/q^tfel/ 'he murdered' vs. \\n /qtal/ 'he killed'; r^A^i /malka/ 'king'
vs. r&Az* /melka/ 'counsel'; am /haw/ 'that' (demonstrative pronoun)
vs. ci<» /hu/ 'he'; ^uai /hannon/ 'those' vs. ^m /hennon/ 'they.'
Sometimes this diacritical dot came to indicate a grammatical distinction.
Thus serving initially to distinguish mi /bah/ 'in her' from ma /beh/ 'in
him,' it subsequently came to be used to mark a third person feminine
suffix irrespective of its phonetic shape in contrast to its masculine
counterpart: mAA^o /qtaltah/ 'I killed her' as against mAA^o /qjalteh/
'I killed him,' but also m*2a.to /qjjameh/ 'before her' (but ,mcea:io
/qgamaw/ 1)efore him').

This is manifestly a rather crude system of vowel notation, the dot
being no exact notation of particular vowel quality, but rather meaningful
only in cases of homographs and providing a convenient and quick
guidance for those who already know the language reasonably well.

At a later stage the system was further refined by allowing the use
of a second or even third dot to distinguish, for instance, between
kxpjL /<evdet/ 1 made' and ftaa*. or ES ^.1^. Aevda£/ 'she made.'O

expedience.

7 For a description of historical development of vowel notation in Syriac, see
Segal 1953.

6 Writing and Phonology

b) Vowel letters. From the above-mentioned use of Alaf as vowel
letter by default there developed its use as a genuine vowel letter for a:
e.g. r^rOa^o.T 86y|iaTa. This has spread also to indigenous Syriac
words: e.g. i^r^ for r<\\ /(alia/ 'dew. 1

Yodh and Waw are mostly used to indicate a historically long i and
u respectively.^) Thus ol^s /biS/ 'bad' and »o2*clqli /nqumun/ 'they
shall get up/ but occasionally also for a historically short i or m, e.g.
rf-u^/giSra/ 'bridge 1 ; i6ua\ /guSma/ 'body 1 ; i<»\ui^ />izgadda/
'emissary/

Yodh and Waw are also used to indicate HI and lol resulting from
the contraction of an original diphthong /ay/ and /aw/ respectively:
La Ibct/ 'the house of and pa. /yom/ 'the day of.' These are therefore
historical or etymological spellings.

Furthermore, almost every u or o is indicated by means of a Waw.
Common exceptions are A* /kol, kul/ 'every' and \\*n /me^ul, mt\\o\l
'on account of/ which are at times defectively spelled in early periods,
and regularly so in late manuscripts.

c) Vowel signs. Two distinct sets of vowel signs are in use: the
earlier developed Nestorian system and the later Jacobite system. The
former consists of single or double dots, whereas the latter makes use
of letters of the Greek alphabet. The two systems are set out below as
attached to the consonant j», and given the pronunciation of the syllable
along with the indigenous names of the vowel signs. Whereas the dots
of the Nestorian system have fixed positions, the Greek letters of the
Jacobite system may be positioned indiscriminately either above or
below the consonant letter concerned, or sometimes obliquely. The
vowel symbols of the latter system are turned through 180 degrees
when they are placed below: thus j» j»

8 There is no indication that Classical Syriac knew a quantitative distinction between
RJ and /u/ on one hand, and between HI and l'\l on the other. Hence, contrary to the
common practice, which is diachronically informed, we shall not transliterate
as /nslmun/, but as /nsimun/.

9 Defective spellings, namely without the use of vowel letters, esp. for historically
short vowels, are fairly frequendy attested in early inscriptions: see Texts nos. 1
and 3 in the chrestomathy. See Brock 2003: 97.

Vowel letters; vowel signs

Nestorian (ES = Eastern Syriac)

/sa/
/sa/
/si/
/su/
/se/
/se/
/so/

CUB

(zqafa)
(ptaha)
(hva§a)
( c $a$a c alli§a)
(rvaga karya)
(rva$a arrika)

Jacobite (WS = Western Syriac)
/so/ xd (zqofo)
/sa/ A (ptoho)( 10 )
/si/ oxd (hvo§o)
/su/ am ( c $o$o)

/se/

% lm (rvoso)

CU09

( c §a?a rwiha)

The two notation systems clearly represent two distinct phonological
systems of vowels resulting from dialectal developments.

Nestorian Jacobite

a

a

»
i

a

u

u

The above figure represents an inventory of the vowel phonemes in
the two dialects, and a line indicates etymological, diachronic correspon-
dences. The use of identical vowel letter does not necessarily imply
identical phonetic articulation. Thus the Jacobite o was most likely
pronounced differently from the Nestorian o( u ), for otherwise the corres-
pondences in question would be difficult to understand^ 12 )

10 For the notation "zeqafa," and not "zeqafa," and the like, see n. S above.

11 A vowel quality considered to be comparable to the American English pronuncia-
tion of soft.

12 On the complicated two-way correspondence between the Nestorian e and Jacobite
i/e, see Blau 1969.

8 Writing and Phonology

Many scholars believe that the ES represents at many points an
earlier phase of Classical Syriac vowel system, although details are
still debated — for instance, whether the distinction between /sa/ and
/sa/ was purely one of length — and actual manuscripts attest to a con-
siderable degree of fluctuation^ 13 ) Especially the WS HI and Iwl cor-
responding to the ES It/ and lol respectively are considered to be
secondary.( 14 )

There are manuscripts which show a mixture of the two systems.
Furthermore, some manuscripts and printed editions of the Bible make
simultaneous use of the diacritical point and vowel signs, where the
use of the former is redundant.

§ 5 Other graphic signs.

a) A dot is placed above ^ ^ .1 -* ^ Ai to indicate their "hard"
(plosive) pronunciation, /b g d k p t/ — called r^Lxoo /quSSaya/ 'harden-
ing* — and below those same letters to indicate their "soft" (fricative)
pronunciation — called r^i^oi /rukkaka/ 'softening.' For instance,

13 See Birkeland 1947: 19-39 and Morag 1962: 45-59.

14 There is some theoretical difficulty also about the interpretation of the vowel
lol. Unlike the vowels a and e there is only one vowel sign. Whereas a long a or
e is not liable to deletion, many 0's are liable to such a deletion — e.g. *a*n /qdoS/
'sanctity' vs. its emphatic state form r^it.iau /qu&Sa/; toaoj /neqbor/ 'he shall
bury' vs. ^taiM /neqbrun/ 'they shall bury' — but some are undeletable as in
*Aa\i /qatol/ 'murderer' vs. its emph. form rtXo^o /qafola/ and noun patterns
with a suffix /-on/ such as rdaJL\/gelyona/ 'revelation' and rdomXr^ /'alahona/
'small god.' Should one interpret the latter as morphophonemically long? More-
over, there are cases in which one cannot find a short or long counterpart in neat
paradigmatic opposition: e.g. pronouns such a ^o&Jr? 'you' (m.pl.) .0103, ^oji*
'they' (m.) .oidS 'those' (m.) or the o contracted from /aw/ as in yicu 'day,' which
does not occur in any other form of the noun (otherwise always /yawm-/).
Whereas the vowel 1 remains constant, u is sometimes deleted: e.g. <x.?oo /qudSa/
vs. its st. abs. form jcaao /q£oS/ 'sanctity.' All in all, it appears that deletability is a
consequence of the historical brevity of vowels, but cannot be made a criterion for
interpreting them to be short. The fact that native speakers of the language did not
find it necessary to devise separate symbols for putative long and short varieties
of i, u, and o ought to be made to carry due weight.

Other graphic signs 9

i<«\\«w /malka/ 'king 1

i^acij.! /dahva/ 'gold'( 15 )
In ES the letter Pe with a rukkaka is also pronounced hard, /p/.( 16 )
Moreover, East Syrians pronounce some Pe's following a vowel like
Waw, which fact is indicated by means of a semi-circle under such a
Pe: e.g. l&tMl />aw§ata/ 'raisins,' btgJ /nawSa/ 'soul, 1 ^k'-gj /newtah/
f he (or: we) shall open.'( 17 )

b) Another diacritical device of ancient origin, called seyame y is a
double dot indicating the plural form of a noun which was often im-
possible graphically to distinguish from its singular form: e.g. ndJb*
/malke/ 'kings 1 vs. r&kls* /malka/ 'king'; rdtukXs* /malkata/ 'queens' vs.
r^\2a /mallda/ 'queen.' The use of the seyame sign was subsequently
extended to cases where no ambiguity existed: e.g., ^*rt />ammin/
'cubits,' r£L± Aana/ 'small cattle' (collective noun), ^^ /Javan/ 'are
good' (fern. adj. pi. used predicatively, but not masc. v »n\, Aavin/),
»?Auk /ktav/ 'they (fern.) wrote,' ^s&Kj /ne&van/ 'they (fern, pi.) shall
write,' ^iik /tren/^&i& /tarten/ 'two.'

c) One sometimes finds a horizontal stroke — called linea occultans
'hiding line' or marhefana 'hastener' — over( 18 ) a non-word-final conso-
nant which is not immediately followed by a vowel as in cC^La /plag/
'they were half vs. o\\«* /palleg/ 'they divided; ^»IA /lahm/ 'my bread.'
More often the sign indicates that the consonant so marked is not
pronounced (syncope), e.g. r*&l»»9 /n^itta/ 'city,' rtaai /wa/ 'was,'
t<i*r /na/ 'I,' ^Jur* />atton/ 'you (masc. pi.)'; &ta /ba# 'daughter of as
against r<rAvt=> /barja/ 'daughter.'

The same horizontal stroke, when placed below a consonant, may
indicate that it is to be pronounced clearly with some sort of helping
vowel. Called mehaggeyana 'articulator' it occurs where more than

15 In Greek loanwords with tt, the dot is placed inside the letter (--a) — or a double
dot above (a) — to indicate its pronunciation without aspiration as in Dutch pen as
against Engl. pen.

16 A phenomenon attested as early as the 10th century: NGldeke 1966:313.

17 For a fuller list, see Mingana 1905:3.

18 In late manuscripts or some printed editions the sign may aso be found below the
letter in question.

10 Writing and Phonology

two consonants are clustered together as in rtb^a^u /hejcemta/ for
/hekmta/ 'wisdom. 1

d) Syrian scholars, like their Tiberian counterparts for Hebrew,
developed a set of cantillation symbols, accents, applied to biblical
texts, in order to ensure their solemn, liturgical recitation.( 19 )

e) The system of punctuation marks is rather poorly developed and
their use is not governed by rigid rules. Of the more common marks
are a dot similar to the English full period, a combination of four dots
(•>), and a sign similar to our colon.

§6 Some remarks on phonology

A) Vowel deletion rule. The vowels /a/, /e/, and /o/ which come
to stand in an unaccented open syllable, namely a syllable ending in a
vowel, are regularly deleted. This process can be clearly observed
where the addition of an inflectional ending or a suffix pronoun leads
to the originally closed final syllable becoming open and the accent
shifting forward: e.g., is /bar/ 'son 1 (or: 'the son of) — > f^ia /bra/ 'the
son' ( < */bara/); A*r£ />akel/ 'eating' (masc. sing.) — > K A^r* />aklin/
(masc. pi.) (< * ^akelin/); Ao*i< />ekol/ 'I shall eat' -» v? N->i*& /teklin/
'you (fern, sing.) shall eat' (< */tekolin/).

This rule can account for the morphological process whereby both
the basic form yA^ /§lem/ 'image' and its variation with the definite
article, r&A~ /salma/, can be derived from the underlying form /*salem/:
/*$alem/ — > /§lem/ and /*salema/ — > /salma/.O As can be seen from
the last example, where two short open syllables precede stress
(CvCvCv)( 21 ), it is the first short open-syllabic vowel before the stress
that is deleted: thus /*dahava/ > /dahva/r^acn.! 'gold' as against /*kateva/
> /katba/ r^&u* 'writing' (f.sg.); /*qanayya/ > /qnayya/ x<*jlZ 'reeds.'

B) Id — > /a/ before Ixl or a guttural. Examples are: ^mlx /§amaf/
'hearing' for /*5ame c /; j*ax /Sabbah/ 'he praised' for /*§abbeh/; ta.t
/davar/ 'leading' for /*daver/.

19 For details, see Segal 1953: 58-150.

20 Forms such as \*t< Aefcal/ 'he ate,' Ao^re* ^afcol/ 'Eat!,' and ^.> /yida5/ 'he knew'
show that the initial vowel developed after this rule had ceased to operate.

21 C= consonant; V = vowel; V= short vowel.

Some remarks on phonology 1 1

Q A word-initial glottal stop (Alaf) is always followed by a vowel
as in *»i* />esar/ 'he bound,' r^cniV^ /'alaha/ f god. f However, the other
gutturals are not subject to such a rule: thus tea* /fomar/ 'donkey'; ja«t^
Araq/ 'he ran away.^ 22 )

D) A word-initial /y/ which by analogy would have no vowel is
regularly provided with a congenial HI vowel, often spelled % rc. e.g.
**a*i</ive§/ 'was dry' (cp. .rn\ /lveS/ 'he was clothed'; ?***i* H$5J
'hand.'^)

E) There is no genuine diphthong, but a combination of a vowel
followed by /w/ or /y/, such as /aw/ in r^act* /yawma/ 'day' and /ay/ in
rdL^ /bayta/ 'house.X 24 )

F) A syllable may begin with a single or double consonant, and end
with a vowel {open syllable) or consonant or double consonant {closed
syllable). Thus la.i /davar/ = /da-var/; ta.-i /dvar/ (monosyllabic); Aao
/qabbel/ = /qab-bel/. A form such as ^A^rdk /teklin/ is best analysed
as /te^-lin/, though it is a variant on /tekoV = /te-kol/, but rather in
view of a form such as ^oiiiio. /nertun/ 'they shall inherit,' a variation
of Aiir^j /neratf . A doubly closed syllable occurs only at the end of a
word form: e.g. &»& /taht/ 'below'; &nax /Svaqt/ 'you forsook'; »»aA
/latim/ 'my bread.' A sequence of two identical consonants at the end
of a syllable is simplified: e.g. /^ant/ > /**att/ (with the assimilation of
the /n/) > />at/ Sur* 'you'; Ann /qabbel/ 'he received' > Aftnn /qablaj/
'she received.'

G) WS has abandoned the doubling of consonants, which is,
however, preserved in ES: thus Ann 'he received' = WS /qabel/, ES
/qabbel/. Where a short vowel is followed by another vowel, the conso-
nant in between may be considered to be doubled: e.g., xiAj /nappeq/
'he (or: we) shall bring out' vs. slzj /nafeq/ 'coming out'; Aiai /rebba^
'she was great' vs. ikai /ravaj/ 'she clamoured'; AA» /mellal/ 'the word
of.'

Even in ES the doubling seems to have been given up when the

22 On an apparent exception rt&ox^ /Jiadujji/, see NGldeke 1966 § 76B.

23 See Brock 2003: 97.

24 The diphthong /aw/ is represented in ES always as /aw/, so rCsaoi.

12 Writing and Phonology

doubled consonant with no vowel is followed by another consonant:
e.g. rdkX^a /melta/ 'word' rather than /mellta/ as against 4A» /mellat/
'the word of/

A doubled consonant is not normally spelled twice. Common
exceptions are r&S&vD /samme/ 'drugs 1 ; K^sboL^ Aamme/ 'peoples'; kAN^
/galle/ 'waves.'C 25 )

H) The spirantised pronunciation of the six plosives -a .\ .1 .* J* &
(§5: 1) occurs when these consonants are immediately preceded by a
vowel or they follow a vowelless consonant at the beginning of a
syllable. Thus .=Aa /katev/ 'writing'; .sAti /ktav/ 'he wrote,' but r<ip&^*
/maktvana/ 'author' (the syllabification of the word is: /mak-tva-na/).

This rule may also operate across the word boundary, thus t*Au
^•U-*7 rfrtoaAAAi ^9 /yattir men tlatma denarin/ 'more than three
hundred denarii.'

The /w/ and lyl of diphthongs are considered to be consonantal in
this regard: thus re&os* /mawta/ 'death' and r^La /bayta/ 'house';
^..-Lcn /hayden/ 'then.' cry r< 'like, as' is pronounced Aak/.

Classical Syriac, however, seems to represent a stage further advanced
than suggested by the above-described conditioning of spirantisation,
and there are signs of incipient phonematisation of spirantised, originally
allophonic consonants. This is seen in cases of minimal pair contrast
as in r£»t\/garba/ 'leper' vs. rd»t\/garva/ 'leprosy'; i^&xd /qeSta/
'bow' vs. r^LKo /qeSta/ 'stubble'; 3u.ijj /hdit/ 'you (masc. sg.) rejoiced'
vs. Auajj l\&\/ 'I rejoiced'; Slm±jx> /sakkit/ 'you (masc. sg.) expected' vs.
Auij* /sakkitf 'I expected.'

I) Four frequent one-letter particles, jb 'in,' .1 'that, which, of, 1 a
'and,' and A 'to, for,' are proclitics, forming a close phonetic unit with
the immediately following word, and are spelled as part of the latter:
e.g., t^&^as /bvayta/ 'in the house'; rttk+^a /wvayta/ 'and the house. 1 It
can be seen that the above-given rule of spirantisation applies here.

Where the first consonant of the word following one of these
particles lacks a vowel of its own, a helping vowel /a/ is added to the

25 These are considered to be historical spellings in which there was earlier a vowel
between the two identical consonants.

Some remarks on phonology 13

proclitic particle to facilitate the pronunciation: e.g., t***r\m /baSmayya/
'in the sky.'C 26 ) This rule applies also where two or more proclitic
particles follow one after another as in i<^o&a.iA /ladvaSmayya/ 'to
that which is in the sky.'

J) A word-initial /V, /h/ or Ihl is often deleted when such a word,
usually grammatical function word, forms a close phonetic unit with
the immediately preceding word. Such are (i) the N of the independent
personal pronouns in the first and second persons (nearer Aena/ f I,' KSrer
/>at/ 'you [m.sg.],' ,Jut* />at/ 'you [f.sg.],' JncVure: ^atton/ 'you [rn.pl.],'
^duf* fatten/), (ii) the /h/ of the third person singular pronoun cicd /hu/
'he, it' and, cd /hi/ 'she, it', and the Perfect tense of the verb c*ocd /hwa/
'he was, there was,' and (iii) the /h/ of the first person plural independent
pronoun ^u* /hnan/ 'we.'

The consonants thus elided may be left out in writing as well: e.g.
i<i\nn /qavelna/ 'I complain' for rdi r< Aao.

In the last example, not only the Alaf but also the accompanying
vowel have been elided. In the case of ocd or ,cd, the vowels are
preserved when the preceding word ends with a consonant, but they
become /w/ and lyl respectively when they are preceded by a vowel:
e.g. *S\«* ocd cVurer Aattu malka/ 'you are the king'; r*eW^*> »cB <&3t<
/>atti malkta/ 'you are the queen'; :uo.i ocd r<S\*q /malkaw dawid/
David is king.'

A similar aphaeresis of Alaf is observable also in out* /na§/ 'man,
people'; ^tiw^/hren/ 'other'; re^-Uii* /hraya/ 'last.'C 27 )

K) Elision of N in sequence <C?V>. If an Alaf preceded by a
vowelless consonant is elided, its vowel is then taken over by the pre-
ceding consonant: e.g., *r6»rei* /irfasse/ 'healing' > r<x>r<£a /masse/;

26 This explanation is neater than to postulate with Brockelmann (1962: § 74) /*waqtl/
> A^oo /waqtal/ 'and he killed': unless one further postulated an analogy of the
particles o and A, the preposition .a would remain problematic, since it is agreed to
go back to /*bi/, not /*ba/.

27 In the following cases the phonetic process is complete, leaving no graphic trace
of the original Alaf: .>» /liad/ 'one,' rdki» /haita/ 'end,' refc*» /hsfca/ 'sister,' ^.4
/den/ 'then' (cf. Biblical Aramaic: pa). Likewise the imperative of the verbs
rdkrfteta/ 'to come' (e.g. *fc /ta/) and Ati«/>ezal/ (e.g. A% /zel/).

14 Writing and Phonology

/n'aSlem/ Tie will deliver 1 > ?Axj /naSlem/; *9b*&r<j /n'etklev/
'it shall be written' > jsAtst&j /netktev/. This also applies to cases of
proclisis (#1 above): jd + r^*r< Aai^a/ 'land' > r£&/tr<9 /bar* a/ 'in the
land-'f)

L) Elision of A/ in sequence <V>C>. Examples are: Ad^rd* /nekol/
'he (or: we) shall eat' (< /ntfkol/); tsardi /temar/ 'you (m.sg.) (or: she)
shall say' (< /*te > mar/).( 29 )

M) Assimilation of consonants. In the case of two verbs of
physical movement, the l\l as their component is assimilated when the
preceding sibilant closes a syllable, i.e. has no vowel. Thus with the
verbAir^ezal/ 'to go' : e.g. *AAir*/ > ezlatf 'she went' > b&yr* />ezzat/;
♦^■AtiW'azlin/ 'going' > ^A\r* Aazzin/. Likewise sISjd /sleq/ 'to ascend,'
though, unlike \u<> the Lamadh is never written( 30 ): e.g. *o\jn»A
/lmeslaq/ 'to ascend' > xmrraX /lmessaq/; *&ola>r* /'asleqt/ 'you brought
up' > hixisDre Aasseqt/.

The /V as the first consonant of a verb root is sometimes assimilated
to the Taw of the preceding reflexive pattern prefix: so always in the
reflexive pattern Ettafal corresponding to the causative pattern, Afel
(see below, § 49) — jsto&Air? /*ettaqrav/ < *atordkr* /^et'aqrav/ 'was
fought'; Ethpeel .•uAAu*/ > ethed/ 'was shut' < **jjrdki*/>et>ehed/; Ethpaal
juLi&&fWettannah/ 'he groaned' < *AUrrfkr^/ > et > annah/.

The /n/ as the first consonant of a verb is regularly assimilated to the
following consonant with the exception of /h/ when such an /n/ closes
a syllable: e.g. <ooAj /neppoq/ 'he will go out' < *<0aAu (as against,
for instance, n°\\ /nfaq/ 'he went out' or n«n /nafeq/ 'going out'); si±r<
/>appeq/ 'he brought out' < *aajr* Aanpeq/; jii&dtr^ /'ettappaq/ 'he was
brought out' < *oikj&dir* /'ettanpaq/. Cf. 1cdjj /nenhar/ 'it will be

28 Occasionally reflected in spellings such as ,<\\*» /mallef/ for *^r<=* /m'allef/;
•«^i /btf/ 'evil' (cf. BA tinei). ^ /balar/ 'after' (prep.), <^ 'in' + ifc*r Aifcr/
'place,' also shows a lengthening of the vowel /a/: /ba7 > /ba/ (cf . BH trrftN 1 ? < *
D^rfw 1 ?). Some printed editions, apparently on account of the ES tradition, do not
adhere to this rule, though the ES tradition itself is not consistent in this regard.

29 Cf. BA "1Q^.; BH tfrfw 1 ?, totf. This is also a historical explanation for words
such as rrtr£a /bera/ 'fountain' (cf. Heb. "lna); r<?r?j /deva/ 'wolf (cf. Heb.

a«T).

30 This is because the phenomenon predates the development in Syriac.

Some remarks on phonology 15

bright* (from *ou /nhar/).( 31 ) On A&j /nettel/ f he shall give* from the no
longer used *^u /njan/, see below § 67.

A similar assimilation occurs with nouns and pronouns as well: e.g.
t*&l».V* /mditta/ 'city' as against An*:u* /mdinatf 'the city of; t*&l?i
/zbatta/ 'time (of frequency)' vs. ^tisn /zavnin/ 'times' (pi.); t<SiLjha>
/sfitta/ 'ship' vs. r*kl*±a> /sfinata/ 'ships'; rf&lx /Satta/ 'year' vs. All*
/Snatf 'the year of.' Such a Nun may be written only in part of the
inflection: e.g. r&a\ /lvetta/ 'brick' vs. its pi. n*7nV /levne/. See also
rf&AJrf ^atta/ 'woman'; &Ji* Aat/ 'you (m.sg.); ^SJr* />atton/ 'you
(m.pl.).'

The dental Ixl of the prefix of the reflexive pattern assimilates to a
following /t/ or /{/: *\1kt< AettaSSi/ < /*>efia§Si/; tifcK* (also spelled
ta&&f< ta&Air?) Aettabbar/ 'was smashed.' A 161 also, if followed by a
vowel, follows the same rule: uyt&.'t&j /neddakra&Z 'he shall remember
you.' Such a /d/ not followed by a vowel assimilates to the preceding
/t/: t*.i&i* Aejdkar/ > Aettkar/ > Aetkar/ 'he remembered.' A similar
assimilation may be assumed also when a proclitic particle (see above
# I) is followed by a vowelless /d/ or A/, which is in its turn also
followed by another dental: r^a.i.-t a /waddame/ 'and that which is similar'
< /*waddanie/; ^o.i&o /wattu§/ 'and you shall rejoice' < /*watjius/;
r<x\&ci /wattaSSe/ 'and you shall conceal' < /*watta§Se/.( 32 )

A dental /J/ or /d/ is assimilated to the following Ixl of an inflectional
suffix: e.g. r&\±^ Aabbitta/ derived from .^^ / c abbi{/ 'dense';
&^\ /lat/ 'you cursed' from \^ /lat/; rf&.i^ Aetta/ 'church' vs. ,Al^
Aedatf 'my church'; &xa^ A vat/ 'you did' from .tsla. Avad/; ^caa^
Aavhettan/ 'you shamed us' < /* > avhettan/. Note also *&&*» /hdatta/
'new' (f.sg.emph. of Au** /hdatf), rdk.-u* /hat®/ (m.sg.emph. < /*hadta/),
^.tjj /hat®/ (m.pl.emph. < /*ha<ite/).

N) Assimilation and metathesis. ( 33 ) In the reflexive verb patterns
the Ixl of their prefix seems to swap its position with the initial consonant

31 Nftldeke 1966: § 173A mentions an exception, *2uur* />anl)ef/ 'to go bare,' which
actually occurs at Dt 8.4.

32 There is no doubling of a spirantised plosive.

33 For another possible interpretation of the feature discussed here, see Jotion -
Muraokal993:§17fc.

16 Writing and Phonology

of a given verb root when the latter begins with a sibilant, one of the
set /s, z, s, 5/. Thus Ethpeel jitduvf* Aestreq/ 'to be combed 1 < /* > eisreq/
(root s**a>); Ethpaal jooduci* ^eStammaS/ f to be served' < /^etSammag/
(root at»ut). When the first consonant of a verb root is Izl or /§/, the /t/
of the prefix is further assimilated partially to the preceding Izl or /s/,
namely to /d/ (assimilated to the voiced Izl) and to /J/ (to the emphatic
/§/): e.g. Ethpeel ^?.i \r* /*ezdven/ 'to be bought 1 < /^etzven/ (root ^at)
and Ethpaal -* ~\,c *^ /'estabbaf/ f to be decorated* < /* 5 etsabba c / (root

O) Word stress. Here also differ ES and WS: ES always stresses
the penultimate vowel, whereas WS stresses the final syllable when it
is closed, but the penultimate when it is open, thus ja^k fkol6wl 'writing 1
(m.sg.), but r<aAiA /k6tbo/ (f.sg.). Both, each in its own way, seem to
represent a later, secondary development, whilst the general penultima
stress can be postulated for the early Classical period.( 34 ) In any event,
the stress does not appear to have phonemic status.

34 For a reconstruction of a historical development of the Syriac accent, see Brockel-
mann 1962: § 71-79.

PART TWO

MORPHOLOGY

§7 As a Semitic language, Syriac shares with its cognates certain
important features in its morphology.

a) A word consists of a root composed of mostly three, but sometimes
two, four or more consonants, and this root is furnished with vowels
and/or a prefix or suffix, which latter also consists of a consonant or
consonants and a vowel or vowels. A given root may have a number
of words derived from it, all sharing a certain meaning content borne
by the root. All actual words of a given root show the root consonants
or its radicals in identical sequence. For example, the root Vp-s-q
(omd) may be realised as the following words: /psaq/ 'he cut 1 ; /pesqa/
'part 1 ; /psaqa/ 'dissection 1 ; /pasoqa/ 'section 1 ; /pasiqta/ 'decision'; /pasiqay/
'short'; /psiqifta/ 'separation'; /pusqana/ 'decree'; ^etpseq/ 'it was cut';
/mejpasqanuta/ 'section'; /passeq/ 'he chopped'; /pussaqa/ 'chopping'
etc.

b) It is customary to classify roots into strong and weak roots. Weak
roots are those one radical, namely root consonant, of which is Waw
or Yod or the last two radicals are identical.

In addition to these weak root patterns, those with Nun as the first
radical or a guttural, especially Alaf as the first radical, cause some
deviations in inflection, and it is also customary to speak of First- Alaf,
First-Nun, First- Yodh, Second-Waw/Yodh, Third- Yodh, geminate roots
etc.O

c) Certain categories of words do not share the above-given features:
they are pronouns, prepositions, conjunctions and such like particles.

1 One also uses Latin terms such as 'primae Alaf,' 'mediae Waw/Yodh,' 'tertiae
Yodh,' 'geminatae,' meaning roots whose first radical (littera 'letter') is Alaf,
second radical is Waw/Yodh, third radical is Yodh, and second radical is identical
with the third respectively.

18 Morphology

§ 8 In the case of geminate roots, the first radical is geminated where
it would not otherwise be followed by a vowel: e.g., from the root
Vi %\ , /*eggoz/ f I shall clip 1 ; /negzun/ (= /neggzun/) 'they shall clip 1 ;
/maf c alle/ 'entrance 1 (VAN \ ). As can be seen from the last example, the
gemination of the identical second-third radical is restored the moment
it is followed by a suffix, whether a vowel or a consonant: cf . § 6 F.

Pronouns

§ 9 Independent personal pronouns. These are pronouns used
mostly as subjects or predicates. Most of them have a shortened, enclitic
form.

Separate Enclitic

sg. 1 i</i< /tena/ rUi* ,i<j' IvSJ

2m. &J*> hxl & III

m

f. ,JJr* tot/ ,& /t/

3m. ocd /hu/ cicd ,n /w/ or l\xl (§ 10)

f. ,cd /hi/ ,c5 /y/or/i/(§10)

pi. 1 ^u» /Jinan/ Qu*ii*)( 2 ) ^' /nan/

2m. •s^i^ Aitton/ [WS v Sfcd) ] — ^& /tton/ [WS v Sfc]

f. **£** flatten/ ^$ /tten/

3m. ^ojcd /hennon/ [WS ^ml-Jcurf Pennon/ [WS v oj)]

f. ^.co /hennen/ ^rg flfcnnen/

§ 10 The enclitic forms are used mostly as weakened subjects of
nominal clauses: e.g. rdi* **-?W /malkana/ 'I am king.' The third
person singular enclitics add varying degrees of prominence to the
immediately preceding clause constituent: e.g. ***?w ocn &Jr^ flattu
malka/ 'it is you who are the king'; coAu y> ocd ^*& /tammanu hzeteh/
'it is there that I saw him.' The third person plural enclitic pronouns are
also used as direct objects of a verb form other than a participle: e.g.
^.rf Atfix /Sadret 'ennen/ 1 sent them (f.).'

The enclitic forms in the first and second persons may be spelled
together with the immediately preceding word, resulting in further

This long variant form, />enahnan/, occurs only in old manuscripts.

Pronouns 19

phonetic simplification: rdi<r jak£ or relate /katevna/ 'I write';
&ji^ r4\/gale >at/ or &A\ /galet/ 'you(m.sg.) reveal'; &Jr* -sAl£
/kajev >at/ or &=J^ /kajvat/; &;M* /Sappirat/ or &J r* t^Ax /Sappir >at/
'you are beautiful'; y/:-^ or^u» ^a^kil (^ujji* ^a^), all pronounced
/ka£binnan/; ^&*^&i£ or ^KJc* ^^ /katbitton/ 'you (m.pl.) write.'
cm followed by an enclitic shows a dissimilation: cuocd /huyu/ 'it is
he that ...'

§ 11 Suffixed personal pronouns. Possessive pronouns and pro-
nouns which complement prepositions are attached directly to the latter.
The forms which follow vowels slightly differ from those which follow
consonants: ( 3 )

after consonants

sg. 1

. (sUentX 4 )

2m.
f.

*

/§*/

3m.

CD
••

/eh/

f.

••
CD

/ah/

pi. 1

•

/an/

2m.

f.

3m.

f.

tOCD
»*CD

after vowels

i

/y/fi

4/
4/

»CD

¥

CD

/h/

V

/n/

&on/ [WS v m]

&en/

/hon/[WS v ooi]

/hen/

§ 12 Personal pronouns attached to verbs. These differ from the
above-given forms only in respect of the 1 sg., 3m.sg., and 3pl.

The forms attached to masculine plural/dual nouns and some prepositions are
slightly different. They may be found in § 40.

4 With two of the prepositions and the noun \* /kul/ 'all' it is pronounced: >i /bi/ 'in
me 1 ;^ /li/ 'to me 1 (but not J* » /dil/ 'mine, my'); A* /kulli/ 'all of me.'

5 E.g., from the noun .**? />av/: ^r* />av/; ov*^ ?avuk/; **?*£ Aavufc/; *Daai4
^avuy/; coo?r£ />avuh/; ,^i* AavunA

20 Morphology

after consonants — after vowels —

sg. 1 »j/ /an/ >j /n/

2m. <a ' /ajfc/ y\ l)U

f. *. /ey * /y

3m. cd . /eh/ ,ciL , ,cdci /y/; ,c5cu /w/
f. en' /ah/ <d /h/

pi. 1 ^.- /an/ ^ /n/

2m. ^ /fe>n/ [WS V <L?]

f. ^ /ken/

3m., f . The enclitics ^oj t< (WS v ajf ) and ^ r«f are used: § 10.

The direct object of the lsg. with an infinitive may take the form,-
as well as »j-: e.g. Mt 8.2 ,dicL*£:baX &Jre* u^t^o /meSkah >at lam-
dakkayuj/ 'you can cleanse me.'

§ 12a Reflexive pronouns. The noun rdt^i 'soul' in conjunction with
an appropriate suffix pronoun is used like a reflexive pronoun: e.g. Mt
8.4 r^jciiiA %sJl$S rcrAii /hawwa nafSak lkahne/ 'Show yourself to the
priests.' Similar, though less frequent, is the use of i^qcllo /qnoma/.

§ 12b Reciprocal pronouns. The notion of "each other, one another"
is expressed by the repetition of the numeral **! 'one': Mt 24.10 ^oimjio
tliA .ta! ^cpiixj'o .ijA .ixi 'and they will hate one another, and betray
one another' (the Lamadh indicates the direct object); Lk 2.15 o\W
.iji -p+ ?ji re&&jrf 'the shepherds spoke with one another.' Hebraic is
the use of rd*4 'brother' as in Gn 37.19 ,cnajjr^; ia\ oi^V 'they
said to one another.'

§ 13 Demonstrative pronouns.^)

a) For that which is nearer: "this, these" —

sg.m. rrfen Aiana/ (rarely ^aS /han/)

f. re^cD /hade/
pl.c. ^Aco /hallen/

In conjunction with the enclitic ,c5, the demonstrative changes its
form: ,cd rtricD /hajiay/. The m. form with an enclitic becomes ciidS
/hanaw/.

6 On the syntax of the demonstrative pronouns, see below §§91: 2-4

Pronouns; interrogatives 21

n *1

b) For that which is more distant: "that, those" —

sg.m. cicd /haw/ pl.m. ^jto /hannon/ [WS v ojc»]

f. ,c» /hay/ f. ^.cd /hannen/

§ 14 Interrogatives

^i /man/ "Who?"; with an enclitic-*u» /manu/ "Who is it that ...7
r&> /ma/, ^* /man/, rdjs* /mana/, ^b* /mon/, all meaning "What?";
with an enclitic— <d» /manaw/ "What is it that ...?"

rd-.^ />ayna/ sg.m.; i^^Aayda/f.j^r^/'aylen/pl.c. "Which?"

i<£.r*/>ayka/ "Where?"; with an enclitic— ai- c<? />aykaw/ "Where
is it that ...?"

,A»Vf />emmat/ "When?"

rd^/lmana/"Why?"

rd£»r^/ > aykanna/ "How?" (less commonly ^r* />aykan/)

rCsa* /kma/ "How much?"

§ 15 Relative pronoun. Syriac uses a proclitic .i as an indeclinable
relative pronoun. As a matter of fact it is a linking word of vague
nature, and is also used, either on its own or in conjunction with
another particle, in various other ways. See below at § 77.

§ 16 Independent possessive pronouns. By adding an appropriate
suffix pronoun to JL.i one obtains an independent possessive pronoun:
e.g. ^u.i r&£W /malka ^ilan/ 'our own king' as against ^W /malkan/
'our king.' These pronouns can also be used substantially: oc5 ^L..i
rddS /dilanu hana/ 'this is ours.' See below at § 91: 6.

Declension of Nouns and Adjectives

§ 17 Nouns and adjectives are declined in respect of three grammatical
categories: number, gender, and state. The declension takes place mostly
by way of adding an appropriate ending to the stem. The number and
gender are each twofold: singular and plural, masculine and feminine.O
The state is three in number: absolute, construct, and emphatic (or:
determinate): the meaning of these terms will be explained below.

22

Morphology

The declensional endings are as follows:

sg.
st. abs.

m. —
f. /-a/

est. emph.
— /-a/
/-aj/ /-ta/
or /-Ja/

and as applied to the adjective jl*
st. abs. est. emph.

P i.

abs.
/-in/
/-an/

/bi§/ 'evil'-

est. emph.
/-ay/ l-el
/-at/ I-3&I

pi.

m.

i^Tin

abs. est. emph.

'8\ ••• • ^ •• •

f.

/bis/

f^SL*.9

/biS/ /biSa/

/bigin/ /biSay/ /biSe/

/MS/ /bigal/ /biSta/ /biSan/ /biSatf /bi§a@/

§ 18 The absolute state is an unmarked form, whereas the construct
state is the form of a noun logically dependent on the immediately
following noun. The emphatic state was originally roughly equivalent
to the form of a noun with the definite article. In Classical Syriac,
however, the abs. state is used only in certain syntactically defined
environments (§71), and the construct state is often replaced by means
of an analytic structure with the proclitic particle .i linking the two
nouns (§ 73). The emph. state has lost its original function and has
become the normal, unmarked form of a noun: cf. § 72. Apart from
adjectives, many nouns are not attested in their abs. or est. state form,
but only in the emph. state form.

§ 19 A small number of nouns have two variant stem forms in the
singular: one for the st.abs. and/or est., and the other for the st. emph.,
which is the case with nouns having a diphthong, /ay/ or /aw/: e.g.,

7 The dual number is virtually extinct, confined to ^.jfc /tr€n/, ^»&i& /tarten/
'two' and ^nc=»7maten/ 'two hundred.' Syriac has no neuter gender as a morphological

category. Cf. § 69.

8 The seyame points are not used when a m.pl. adjective is, in st. abs., used
predicatively: see § 5 b.

Declension of nouns and adjectives 23

stcst. Auj^ /be^, emph. rdfLa /bayfi/ Tiouse'O; abs. ,\\\ /laylay/, emph.
r^ii^A /lelya/ 'night 1 ; abs. pcL /yom/, emph. r^aoi /yawma/ 'day.' See
above (§ 6H) on the contraction of diphthongs.

A variation in the following cases of Third- Yodh roots is only
apparent: abs. r^J^i /Sate/, emph. r^i\i /Satya/ f fool f where the vowel
deletion rule (§ 6A) is at work; abs. rC*n /q3e/, emph. rdjtp /qaSya/
'hard* (ditto, the underlying stem being /*qa§ey/).

§ 20 Some nouns and adjectives insert an extra lyl before the feminine
ending. This applies to all nouns having such suffixes as /-an/, /-on/:
e.g. ^Lacb* /mqablan/ 'receptive; recipient 1 — f.abs. tfi iVnrfrw
/mqablanya/; est. fr/i\nnS», emph. f*ft»iYnnS» /mqablanija/, pl.abs.
^liafbo, est. ^ilXaflbd, emph. r^&iXXsub*. Likewise rdid^W
/malkona/ 'kinglet 1 — f.emph. i^dLja^W; r^Ljuxg* /meskena/ 'poor* —
f.abs. f<;i«> or* , pl.emph. t*&;'i ;>*>«*; icL^i /z5or/ 'small 1 (except sg.em-
ph. i*&1oa.O — f.abs. r£icL*.i /z c orya/, est. Auto^t, pl.abs. ^loilt
/tforyan/, emph. r^uto^t; sg.emph. r^o.i /dukta/ 'place' — pl.emph.
K&Lko.i /dukyata/; r*&sua.i /dunbta/ 'tail' — pl.emph. f^&Lajo.i /dun-
byata/ (also f*&aja.-t /dunbata/).

§ 21 A small number of nouns, mostly short, have /ayya/ as the
pl.m.emph. ending.( 10 ) E.g. t=i /bar/ 'son' — i<Lls /bnayya/; sg.emph.
f<£Le /Satta/ 'year' — rri/y /Snayya/; rd % /zna/ 'sort' — t<Ln /znayya/;
c<Sfc Ada/ 'breast' — f<i:tf* Znayya/; :ut* 'hand' — rd ruVAidayya/ (beside
t^V/Hde/^'iar^/'appay/ 'curtain' (used as sg.) — r£L&r^ ^appayya/.

This is further the rule with words of Third- Yodh roots, the m.sg.abs.
form of which is spelled in the m.sg.abs. and est. with Alaf instead of
Yodh: e.g. sg.m.abs. i<*o /q§e/ (< /*qa§ey/) 'hard' (emph. or f.sg.abs.
rdLto /qaSya/) — pl.m.emph. n^Lio /qSayya/; r^i /Sate/ 'fool' — r^^r
/Satayya/; ,<x» /mSarray/ 'paralytic' — r<i<jb* /mSarrayya/; sg. emph.
r^ji^/gadya/ 'goat' — rdj^/gdayya/; t<iix> /qanya/ 'reed' — **ijn
/qnayya/; f<La^* /mtfya/ 'intestines' — r<; V«S /m c ayya/. Likewise with
nouns always used in the plural (pluralia tantum): r<i» /mayya/ 'water';

A

The st.abs. »s /bay/, occurring already in Old Aramaic, is a secondary development.
10 A more archaic form.

24 Morphology

r£i»£ (also without seyame) /Smayya/ 'sky*; sg.emph. rd£ia\/gurya/
'whelp' — r^i^/grayya/; t<Ls*x /dmayya/ 'price'.

§ 22 Types of nouns dealt with in § 21 have /-in/ as their pl.m.abs.
ending: ^^ ^*\ ^^'i - , K »in. But adjectives end in /-en/: ^^d,

In the pl.st.cst. we find /-ay/ with nouns — &*x /dmay/, ,^»>, »»,
pax — but /-yay/ with adjectives and participles — ^xcf /qaSyay/, ^*
/ra c yay/ 'shepherds'; ^cum /mhawyay/ 'showing.'

§ 23 Some nouns show /-ane/ as the pl.m.emph. ending, often as an
alternative to the standard /-e/: e.g. kai* V'ebba/ 'fruit' — i^LaiW'ebbane/;
r^a» /samma/ 'drag' — r^pa?; i^una /besma/ 'perfume' — i^vna;
r<ui /reha/ 'smell' — r&utf; r£ux2* VmeSha/ 'ointment' — i/imt^; i<V^»\t
/Sallija/ 'ruler'— rr\\;y\y; n^W /rabba/ 'teacher' — n^W. '

§ 24 Feminine nouns and adjectives of Third- Yodh or -Waw roots
restore( n ) the consonantal value of the Yodh or Waw respectively:

sg.abs. >AJtAf /tatfi/ 'story 1 oiAs?' /malku/ 'kingdom'

est. Au^*fc /ta^il/ AioiA»J /malkut/

emph. rritu^jt^' /taS^ta/ r?$a^!ba /malkuta/

pl.abs. ^"-y /taSyan/ «&>^? /malkwan/

est. Aiii*& /taS'yatf fc&iX» /malkwai/

emph. r*&L^& /ta$ c yala/ *r$ail» /malkw*|a/

The st.abs. and est. of adjectives of Third- Yodh roots, however,
show /-ya/ instead: e.g. t<L*x /dakya/ 'pure,' Au^fi /dakya^, but otherwise
regularly — sg.emph. rd£^.-t /dkita/, pl.abs. ^a.i /dakyan/, emph. rttkiZx
/dakyata/.

Note the following common, but slightly irregular forms: r*$cua>r?
^asyuja/ 'cure' — pi. i*&di»r* /'aswata/ or f*$d*&f<r />asiwaja/; *<&c&ix
/dmuta/ 'image' — r*$&a : -! /demwata/; ^'os^ /$vuia/ 'matter' — r^di^
/$evwata/; r^'a**; /hayyuja/ 'animal' — sg.cst. &cuu /hay wal^, pi. rdtalu
/haywata/; t<tfo.^/haduta/ 'joy' — abs. r^6.iii/haj4wa/, est. &a\iji/ha$iwa^;
retfaY^ /§lota/ 'prayer' — sg.cst. ka\^ /slot/, pi. f*$&f^ /$lawata/; nf&cuis*
/mhota/ 'blow' — sg.abs. rtous* /mahwa/, pl.emph. f*$&«> /mahwata/;

11 "Restore" is a synchronic description. Cf. Lagarde 1889-91:146-50.

Declension of nouns and adjectives 25

/mnata/ 'portion 1 — pl.emph. rf&dji* /mnawata/; rdjte£os6 /maw-
mata/ f oath f — pl.emph. rfibacb* /mawmata/ (same as sg.)( 12 ); r*&i
/hata/ 'sister' — pl.emph. i<to&n£/>ahwate/.( 13 )

§ 25 A fair number of masculine nouns ending in r^ /ya/ form their
pi. by means of the ending *$£- /awata/( 14 )- ^K* /'arya/ 'lion'—
rtXtuirt /'aryawata/ (with the retention of /y/); n^.Tii /hadya/
'breast'— itrtoofci /hdawata/; rficuj /hewya/ 'snake'— r*fco<&/hwawata/;
r£ia>io* /kursya/ 'throne' — i*$&»*q& /kursawata/; rdA* /lelya/
•night'— i<¥d£3 /laylawata/; rd^i" /ra c ya/ 'shepherd'— *$&£*
/ra c awata/; r£j»r* />asya/ 'physician' — !*&'&» t£ Aasawata/; rdtsa
/marya/ 'master' — r<$4fea /marawata/.

The same pi. ending occurs also with nouns which do not end in
/-ya/: nfifyr* />atra/ 'place'— f*&6i^r<>; n^L^/hayla/ 'power'— i«K&Lji
/Ijaylawata/ (also r<Vui); r&\ /lebba/ 'heart' — rdtta) /lebba wata/ (also
rdi^ /lebbe/); r«mi /nahra/ 'river'— rf&ai'ciij. These are all masculine

nouns.

The ending /wata/ is attested with some feminine nouns: rdfcaoi*
^umta/ 'nation' — i*tf&»i* /'emwata/; i«4Mr />ata/ 'portent' — rttifar*
/>atwata/; i^icu /nura/ 'fire' — rdfcofcu /nurwata/ (also r<lcu); rdfoa?
/sefta/ 'lip'— ^ian? /sef wata/.( 15 )

§ 26 In addition to /w/, Syriac inserts also /h/ in order to expand the
plural stem of some nouns, especially monosyllabic nouns: i^arf 'fa-
ther' — r*&ii9r£ /'avahata/; r£»rW>emma/ 'mother' — i*<Kcn2»f£; c*&*r£

12 This identity is explicable under the assumption of the original root /w-m-V:
sg.emph. /*mawma?ta/ > /mawmata/, and pl.emph. /*mawma?ata/ > /mawmata/.
The lengthening of /aV to /a/ is also attested in i<i^ Aana/ 'sheep' < /*da? na/, and
lika /batar/ 'after' < /*ba > iar/. The other two sg. forms of the noun in question
allow of similar explanation: sg.abs. rCace* /mawma/ < /♦mawirfa/ < /*mawma ) a/,
and sg.cst. Jksacc* /mawmatf < /♦mawma't/.

13 On the loss of the initial Alaf in the sg., see above, § 6 J.

14 See another kind of ending, namely /-ayya/, typical of this group of nouns: § 21 .

15 The ending with /a/, /-awaja/, is not confined to masculine nouns: see rdkcft^
/slawata/, pi. of rdkoVg /$lota/ 'prayer,' and rdkalr* /mnawaja/, pi. of rdkx?s
/mna^a/ 'portion' (§ 24). Such a short vowel in unstressed, open syllables conflicts
with the vowel deletion rule (§ 6 A): it appears to be a secondary development.

26 Morphology

'maid-servant 1 — r<4$db*r£; resax 'name 1 — r^cnsax.

§ 27 Whereas adjectives always display complete match between
their gender and their morphology, there are many cases of mismatch
among nouns. Some examples are:

1) Masc. nouns with the typically fem.pl. ending —

K^cii 'day' — rf&Aai (also i^'ai); i«£r* 'father'— rtSctet*;
rCsnx 'name' — rtftoaiMJt

2) Fern, nouns with the typically masc.sg. ending —

Hilar* 'way'— Kr^iHof*; rtlit* 'land'— *r&i«ir*; r&sS
'soul'— t<£iLsu( 16 )

3) Fern, nouns with the typically masc.sg. and pi. ending —

f*A*c« 'hand'— i^ixff* ftjiayya/ or r<ju< rd&V />attana/
'she-ass'— *4"Xr*; r^re^ /kefa/ 'stone' — rdfr£^; rdi^ 'cloud';
urta^ /sepia/ 'bird'( 17 )

4) Fern, nouns with the typically fem.sg. but masc.pl. ending —
c*tf\» /melta/ 'word'— «\& /melle/; *&** 'cubit'— r&irt,
r^A^i 'hour'— t<£k; *r«GL* /Satta/ 'year'— t<L&\ ndfctai* /m c arta/
'cave'— *ri^s*; t*Xni>. Aenbta/ 'grape'— r^aCL^ Aenve/; *&>
(or: rf&rA) /tetta/ (< /*tenta/) 'fig'— r£f rty f*&*^ /gfetta/ (<
/*gfenfi/ 'grape'— f^ao^ ndK«\ /lvetta/ 'brick'— c<3=A.( 18 )

§ 28 A very small number of nouns, all of Third- Yodh roots, attest to
the archaic feminine morpheme /-ay/: »^&\ /gwagay/ 'spider'; ,cu.i
/dayway/, a kind of bird (kite?); ,ir^* /hefay/ 'gnat'; *L*.a\, /}u c yay/
'error'; m^o\ /{uSyay/ 'secrecy'; »a^a^ /kukvay/, some kind of bird;
% o\w /salway/ 'quail'; ,<u& /tanway/ (ES /tenway/) 'condition.'

§ 29 The grammatical gender and the natural sex largely overlap

16 In some cases there is a semantic opposition: t<*2+ 'eyes' vs. rd&Lal 'fountains'

(both from n*i»>; cf. Heb. crry 'eyes' vs. nirp 'springs [of water]), but no
opposition is discernible between rf&Joi and r&jot 'winds, spirits' or between
r*&£& and r&»& 'days' (from r^oi).

17 An extensive list of feminine nouns with no characteristic endings in the singular
may be found in NGldeke 1966: § 84.

18 The declension of the noun rtXax /Sab£a/ 'sabbath; week' — sg.abs. rfiax, pi. i<ax,

^^ut shows that the final /t/, which belongs to the root ( < Heb. n$Q), was
reinterpreted as a feminine morpheme.

Declension of nouns and adjectives 27

when a noun denotes an animate being. Thus rd*** 'father,' i*tl= 'son,'
rcLn^ 'brother,' r^b£» /hmara/ 'he-ass,' and f<£!ba' 'king,' for instance,
are masculine in gender, whereas r^arf 'mother,' rdft't? 'daughter,'
rd& 'sister,' rd&V^ 'she-ass,' and n^Jb? 'queen' are of feminine gender.

Also of feminine gender are nouns of the following categories:
animals — 1<\ n.i 'sheep'; r*i*. Aezza/ 'goat'; t<LL 'small cattle'; t<z*\d±
'scorpion'; r^is^ /§epra/ 'bird'; a^o 'cat'; parts of the body, esp. those
which go in pairs — r^S.irf 'ear'; f^'lcia 'knee'; r^i^ou 'handful'; rtis\
/lepra/ 'fingernail'; i<\ ? «*l»' 'right hand'; r*£a?[ 'liver'; r<^^ 'wing'; r<w\^
'belly'; r^&k^' /kajpa/ 'shoulder'; t<i*\ 'soul'; c<i > V 'eye'; **?n\ 'heel';
r^ia^ /je^a/ 'finger'; t<itp 'horn'; rd[\i /regla/ 'foot'; i<ix /Senna/
'tooth': nouns for vessels and tools — <<±\t< 'boat'; i<±»&d* 'linen gar-
ment'; rdjq\ 'table'; i<X\«? 'sickle'; *%h»* 'needle'; r6»i*: 'bed'; rdia
/paddana/ 'yoke'; r^wV /rahya/ 'mill.'

Unclassifiable, but feminine are: rcLiri 'earth'; the four points of the
compass— f<ii^ 'N,' r6*i.'u? 'E,' rdsfcufc 'S,' i<£t^» 'W; nSrfcit*
'way'; rtfo* 'field'; r<ii<* 'stone'; rd&z* 'salt'; ntfcu 'fire'; rdJ^ 'cloud';
rdla^ 'fog'; kIaci^ ndKs\/gfetta/ 'grape.'

The gender of some nouns fluctuates: -** : ^ - 'cattle'; rcri^cu*
'stick'; f<aLij 'palate'; f<a-ui 'sword'; ndiiA 'colleague'; rtiaup 'moon';
i<i»x 'sun.'( 19 )

In conclusion, the gender of many nouns is unpredictable. Thus,
not every noun denoting a body part, even those in pairs, for instance,
is feminine, r^i.-u; 'breast' and rtfa 'breast, pap' are both masculine.

Nouns and adjectives: their formation patterns

§ 30 Nouns and adjectives can be classified in accordance with the
ways in which vowels and/or affixes are added to their consonantal
roots. Thus one may speak of a noun of qafl or maqfal pattern or of an
adjective of qaffil pattern. The following is intended as an inventory of
major patterns only, and we shall focus mainly on those patterns which
require some attention in the declension of nouns and adjectives be-
longing to them.O

19 A fuller list may be found in N6ldekel966: § 87.

28 Morphology

§ 31 Pattern qvfl, namely nouns or adjectives which show a short
vowel after the first radical, but no vowel between the last two radicals
in their stem when a declensional ending or a possessive pronoun is
removed, e.g. rd&ssi /malka/ 'king,' ^A^f /malkan/ *our king.' Among
nouns and adjectives of this pattern the following sub-patterns may be
recognised:

a) Those which show the shape qtel or qfol in the sg.abs. or est.:
e.g., v>A» /mlek/ 'king' (emph. rKW /malka/);A^i /rgel/ Toot 1 (rdX^i
/regja/); jco.to /q$ioS/ 'sanctity* (f*£?ao /qudSa/).( 21 )

Nouns of this sub-pattern whose third radical is one of the six
plosives, .a ^ .1 .* .a &, regularly take a quSSaya with the radical in
question in all their forms other than those of the st.abs. or est.: e.g.
rT'vW /malka/, *<&?+ Aavda/ 'slave, 1 rdm /kespa/ 'silver, 1 r^'toa
/burka/ 'knee.'C 22 )

With nouns whose third radical is a guttural or Resh, the Id changes
to /a/ (§ 6 B): a-VAi /tra c / 'gate' (*i£ifc); ^ /pgar/ 'corpse' (rri^>).

With nouns whose first radical is Alaf, the latter takes a full vowel
(§ 6 C): t^rf />egar/ 'wage' (r«^?); ^Vrf />ara c / 'earth' (< /*>an*/)
(rdiir^); A»Vqi< /'urah/ 'way' (r<uior<). On the second vowel, /a/, see
the preceding paragraph.

With nouns whose first radical is Yodh, the rule § 6 D is at work:

20 For a fuller listing, though admittedly not exhaustive, one may consult NQldeke
1966: §§ 93-145, and Brockelmann 1962: §§ 117-51.

21 These can be traced back to the Proto-Aramaic or Proto-Semitic qafU qifl, and
qui pattern respectively.

22 Some exceptions occur in the plural: rdaao^ / c esba/ 'grass' but rdam* Aesve/;
r£sLiQ\/gunb5/ 'theft' but rCaio^/gunve/; rd&rt />alpa/ 'thousand' but f<$W
^alfS/. It is considered to go back to an earlier plural form with a vowel after the
second radical such as /*gunav£/: cf. Heb. cr;typ and >#&. On the other hand,
forms such as rd&* /kaipa/ (^^) 'shoulder' (Heb. *)TQ) and rt&** /kavda/
(Heb. 13-5), both of the original qafil pattern, indicate that when the HI or Id
vowel of this pattern had been elided, the spirantisation rule was still in force, and
the /a/ vowel in the same syllabic position of the pattern qvfal pattern had not yet
been deleted, which explains the spirantised hi in rdxoi /dahva/ 'gold' (< dahava/):
on this question, see Muraoka 1976:232f. Compare rzLx* /kar&a/ 'town' with r^'ta
/kerka/ 'volume, tome.'

Formation patterns of nouns and adjectives 29

^ /yirah/ 'month 1 (r^V)'; ^ /yilesd/ 'child' (*r*V).

b) There are feminine nouns corresponding to those described under
the above sub-pattern: rrfkaAs? /malkja/ 'queen' (est. Ai£\»>\ pl.abs.
^ba, emph. rfK£W); ndki^j /nesbta/ 'plant'; rftfW? /deblla/ 'fear';
,<^iaa /burkja/ 'blessing.' However, there are nouns which show a
vowel after the second radical in their sg. emph. form: t<&X\i /rgefca/
'rivulet' (but pi. i*KX\1 /reglata/); k#1^ Agelja/ 'calf (but est. k*V);
rf&a^/gfetta/ ( < /*gfenla/; pi. i^Laa^.

c) Nouns of the second qvfl sub-pattern show /a/ in their sg.abs./cst.
form, and if their third radical is one of the six plosives (a .\ .1 ^ -a
hi) it is provided with a rukkakha: .acp.i /dhav/ 'gold' (emph. r£?a> : i
/dahva/); ^r<f />elaf/ 'ship' (emph. r4Xc< Mfa/); ^'.i /dqan/ 'beard'
(idaa); <=ii /zvan/ 'time' (i<£ai); A»i\/gmal/ (*£»^; Aa* /Sfal/
'lowly' (*£**); Ai» /skal/ 'foolish' (i^La>).( 23 ) Although their sg. abs.
/est. form is not attested, the spirantised pronunciation of the third
radical of the following nouns may allow us to infer that they also
belong here: f<n\»; 'milk,' r<ii* 'wing,' p^Ia 'city,' r^J 'raven,'
r£a\,.1 'humidity,' !<£*»* 'bread.'

A phenomenon analogous to rdp^i mentioned above occurs here
also: f*$»jL> /nSanfta/ 'soul' (abs. r^saxj , pi. i*&«£j ) as against rdJ&x^
/Janpla/ 'unclean' (pi. f<$£l\; /Janfaja/) and i«£o.?.t /zejlqta/ 'alms' (pi.
i*XoH t /zedqata/).

d) In practical terms, in studying nouns belonging to the above
sub-patterns one needs to know two allomorphs of their stem: e.g.
/sfar/ of the sg.abs. and est. on the one hand, and /sefr-/ of the rest of
the declension as appears in, for instance, sg.emph. r^L&n? 'book,' pl.em-
ph. r^tao?, + lpl. y\*B> 'our book.' From these two allomorphs one may
postulate the archmorpheme of the stem as /*sefar/, from which the
application of the vowel deletion rule (§ 6 A) generates the actually
occurring two allomorphs.

23 In the case of nouns with Ixl as their third radical, only comparison with cognate
languages could assign them to this sub-pattern: 1^.1 /dfcar/ 'male' (rei**: cf. Heb.
"PI); tola /bsar/ 'meat* (r^: Heb. ~fy3). In some other cases also comparison
with cognates confirms this analysis: Heb. )j?j, *7epa; Arb. /safal/.

30 Morphology

§ 32 Nouns and adjectives of the pattern qafA such as -plL Aalam/
'eternity* with sg.emph. nG*l£, pl.abs. ^pail, emph. r&£J> are subject
to the vowel deletion rule (§ 6 A).^) The feminine sg. emph. of this
pattern retains the short vowel: Aai* /'akel/ 'eating/ f.sg.abs. rdki*
/>akla/, but i<tfW* Aakelta/.

§ 33 Qfal. Examples: r*ifv\/gzara/ 'decision/ Kfia^ Avada/ 'work,'
i<aio /qrava/ 'battle,' *r iii* />eSada/ 'outpouring' (§ 6 C), reriau r* /iqara/
'honour' (§ 6 D).

§ 34 Qtil, Qtel, Qtayl Examples: j** ^ /kjiv/ 'written^ 25 ), t*»r*
/>amir/ 'said' (§ 6 C), xA* /iliil/ 'born' (§ 6 D); *r*Lfci /iteta/ 'trembling';
r^A^ Alayma/ 'lad.'^ 26 )

§ 35 Q/wZ, Qfol. Examples: r&acurt /rhuma/ 'loved,' i<ias\ /lvuSa/
'clothings'; fern. rdftojka /b&ilta/ 'maiden,' i*&xoju* /knuSta/ 'syna-
gogue'; rdfo?\/gd[ola/ 'plaits of hair,' r^Xci^o /sgola/ 'bunch (of grapes).'

§ 36 Qyftvl (the second vowel may be short or long). The very pre-
sence of a short vowel in the first syllable implies, in the light of the
vowel deletion rule (§ 6 A), that the second radical is doubled, namely
the first syllable is a closed one. This is further reinforced by the hard
pronunciation of the second radical when it is one of the set <n ^ a .*
3 hi>. Thus tjSj /seppar/ 'bird,' emph. i<&£.., iVnf />eddar/ 'threshing
floor.f 7 )

Qaffdl is a common pattern for nouns denoting professional activities
or permanent qualities: e.g. **ni^ /gannava/ 'thief,' n%i» /hayyata/
'tailor,' i<?& /kaddava/ 'liar'; >£% /zakkay/ 'innocent, victorious,' -pin
/qayyam/ 'abiding.'

£>w#a/ is a pattern for action noun derived from verbs in the Pael

In this context, the short vowel marked as v, is either /a/ or /e/, but not l\l or
/u/.

25 This is a pattern for the passive participle of a triliteral root in its basic pattern,
Peal: §50.

26 This last represents a pattern for diminutives.

27 In view of BA ]ns« (< Akk. /immeru/) the Syr. equivalent \z?re 'lamb' also be-
longs here.

Patterns with multiradicals, prefixes or suffixes 31

pattern: e.g. rfnfcDo % /zuhhara/ 'warning, 1 f<%an.i /dubbara/ 'conduct, 1
rd'rfojc /Su^ala/ 'questioning. 1 Some colour terms also belong here:
Ti^ar* /hikkam/ 'black,' juacuu /summaq/ 'red,' aici* /yurraq/ 'green,'
tio^ /suhhar/ 'reddish,' r^toc* Aurraga/ 'multi-coloured.'

Qaffil is highly productive with adjectives including verbal adjectives
indicating states: oyirf /^arrik/ 'long,' 71 q» 'wise,' ^^> /saggi/ 'many,'
,0^ 'deep,' uwLV /rakkik/ 'soft,' \, ? V 'mighty,' \*±£ 'beautiful';
a*Ai' 'gone out,' X in£ Aazzil/ 'gone,' -m-ir^ Aabbid/ 'lost,' a»&»' /yattiv/
'seated.'

§ 37 Patterns with four or more radicals. Syriac knows quite a
few such nouns and adjectives (some verbs as well). The expansion
from the basic three-radical root is often achieved by repeating the last
radical or the last two radicals, or by the addition of an affix such as
/t-/, /s-/ or /5-/: e.g. nAAnaa /quvlla/ 'countenace' < V Ann 'to face,'
tASiVt 'complete' < -plx 'whole,' Annnr? /saqbel/ 'to go towards' < V
Aao, nfiA^cut /Su'bada/ 'subjugation' < V.ia^ 'to serve'; r^teaAoAi /tul-
ma<ja/ 'instruction' < V .i»\ 'to learn.'

§ 38 Patterns with prefixes and suffixes.

a) There are countless nouns prefixed with /m-/: ^V* /maSkan/
'tent,' jaffi» /massav/ 'taking' (< V.mwi ); i*$a£'tea /markavta/ 'vehicle,'
r£&x»> /maStya/ 'drink,' r£?&cc* /mawtva/ 'session' (< VjiAu), ,.1*2*
/mardi/ 'journey' (< V,.ii), rf£Vv*r£a /mekulta/ 'food.'

b) Also common is the prefix /t-/: r^LA\,& /tatlila/ 'roof,' (<xq^ (
/taktuSa/ 'fight,' rrfut»*ii /teSmeSta/ 'service,' i*AL^x& /taS c ita/ 'tale.'

c) Rare are />-/ and /y-/: r^aoar* Aabbuva/ 'flute' (< V-aaj); ^aii,*
/yahbura/ 'dense smoke.'

d) /-an/, or less frequently /-on/, is extremely common as a suffix:
rd&'cc* 'pest,' r£i$oa& /puqdana/ 'order,' rdlia /benyana/ 'building,'
rdojjnj /nesyona/ 'trying experience'; simultaneously with a pre-
fix — i<iain»* /masqana/ 'ascent' (< VxAa>); also common with adjec-
tives— ^L«»r^ Aa^an/ 'earthly,' ^LsL* /Smayyan/ 'celestial.'

This suffix is also added to the feminine morpheme /t/: v &**j
/hgmlan/ 'angry' (< rdfcau 'anger'), v ^inj /neqbjan/ 'feminine' (< *t&Aqj
'female').

32 Morphology

It is further exploited to generate actor nouns (§51) from all active
or reflexive participles with the prefix lm-1: tf\ir\?*n /mSabhana/ 'adorer 1
(< Pael ptc. uny**), rd V^t» /margzana/ 'one who angers' (< Afel ptc.

e) /-ay/ is a highly frequent suffix used to derive an adjective from a
nounO: r^coXri />alahaya/ 'divine,' r&dL? /baytaya/ 'homely, domes-
tic,' r^.^oou /ihudaya/ 'Jewish.' Some such adjectives are derived from
the plural stem, always irregular plural formation: r^Lij /neSSaya/ 'wom-
anly' (<*£j, pi. Of rtikfcrt), i^diar^avahaya/ 'fatherly' (< rtXmart,

pi. of r£?r*), rdcnsax /Smahaya/ 'nominal' (< i^&niajt, pi. of r^4jt),
rditoo /quryaya/ 'rural' (< r£?ai>, pi. of rdju*o).

f) Pedantic Syriac loves multiple suffixes: rdlx^J /nafSnaya/ i/wxucfe
'pertaining to the soul,' f<i±i»oi /ruhanaya/ TTveuiiaTiicfe 'spiritual,'
r<ii X.i^ Aettanaya/ 'ecclesiastical.'

g) Some feminine nouns are formed by adding /-i/ as suffix: e.g.
)L laa.f /debborita/ 'bee,' r^Ljcmu /snunita/ 'swallow.Y 29 )
h) Many masculine abstract nouns are formed by adding /-y/: e.g.

iLacO^u/htufya/ 'taking by violence,' t<L *cu»r*/*asurya/ 'incarceration,'
r^o-aoD /hfukya/ 'overturning.'

i) Another highly common suffix for abstract nouns, this time of
feminine gender, is /-ut/: rtKoAXs* /malkuta/ 'reign,' r^&'o&cLs* /may-
otuta/ 'mortality,' r<Xon»Y Aaybuta/ 'grace,' p^ol^.i /dakyuta/ 'in-
nocence.'

§ 39 Diminutives. A number of suffixes are used to generate nouns
denoting small objects: /-on/ — rdcuA^o /malkona/ 'kinglet,' rdoa&t
/ktavona/ 'booklet,' rrijLjaar^ /kefonita/ 'pebble' (< rd*r<* stone'X 30 );
/-os/ — r<cr>cucu /nunosa/ 'small fish' (< r^Scu), i^&bcu^ /gannosta/
'small garden' (< i^&i^.

§ 40 Attachment of the suffixed personal pronouns. In § 1 1 above
we have given a set of personal pronouns suffixed to nouns and some

28

The term nisbe, borrowed from the Arabic philology, is often used.

These nouns ought not to be confused with such as rdjL^xfc 'tale,' where the /i/ is
derived from the third radical, which is /y/.

30 On the infix l\l as fem. morpheme, see above, § 28.

Diminutives; attachment of suffix pronouns 33

prepositions. That set (Set A) is actually used with nouns in the singular,
both masculine and feminine, and feminine plural nouns. There is,
however, another slightly different set (Set B) to be used with masculine
plural nouns and some prepositions.

pi. ^/ /-ayn/

sg. 1

•

» .

/-ay/

2m.
f.

• •

/-ayk/
/-ayk/

3m.

iCDCl'

A5w/

f.

cru

/-gh/

/-aykon/

/-ayken/
ijcnu/ /-ayhon/
^.cru/ /-ayhen/

N.B. 1. Unlike in Set A, the Yodh of the lsg. is pronounced.

2. The Kaf of the 2nd person, both sg. and pi., is pronounced
hard in contrast to Set A.

3. Note the peculiar form of the 3m.sg. form.

4. "his" in Set A sounds the same as "her" in Set B, though there
is in the latter a Yodh before the final He: e.g. axVb* /melteh/ 'his
word 1 vs. cfi.Va /melleh/ f her words, 1 or miAs* /malkeh/ 'his king 1 vs.
moVp /malkeh/ 'her kings.'

5. When we speak of "masculine" or "feminine" here, we are
speaking of the characteristic masculine or feminine form. Thus, though
rf$\sa /melta/ is a feminine noun, its plural shows the characteristically
masculine endings: v? Vjj /mellin/, rdb* /melle/. Therefore, for the
purpose of the attachment of possessive suffix pronouns, its plural is
regarded as masculine, requiring Set B: thus»c«iic&3 /mellaw/ Tiis words.'
Conversely, since the plural of a masculine noun rdnx /Sma/ is .cn^x
/Smahan/, f^&d&u /Smahata/, the noun requires suffixed pronouns of
Set A: ^ocDcVcnLsu /Smahathon/ 'their names.'

§ 41 The two sets are given below, attached to the noun r<i. i /dina/
'judgement.'

Set A Set B

sg. ( f my judgement, 1 etc.) pi. ( f my judgements' etc.)

►I** /din/ »i*:i /dinay/ my

vy-..*i /dinak/ V W^" , » /dinayk/ your(m.sg.)

/diney ,^ v i f S /dinayk/ your(f.sg.)

cnLL».i

• •

•

/dineh/

• *

cnJL».i

•

/dinah/

<if*

/dinan/

•

/dinkon/

-*. i~*

/dinlgen/

X v •

/dinhon/

^»cn i >!i

/dinhen/

• ••

• • •• •

34 Morphology

»cdci1»H /dinaw/ his

cnulf.t /dineh/ her

X /dinayn/ our

/dinaykon/ your(m.pl.)

v iyuS /dinayken/ your (f. pi.)

^ocn.wH /dinayhon/ their (m.)

^crui.ri /dinayhen/ their (f.)

§ 42 In attaching these possessive suffix pronouns the following
points ought to be remembered:

a) The pronouns are attached to the stem of the noun which can be
obtained by removing the emphatic state morphemes, viz. /-a; -e; -ayya/.

b) Their addition to nouns in the plural, whether masculine or
feminine, is the simplest:

rtcnXr^ Aalahe/ 'gods' > >macnXrt />alahaw/ 'his gods'
f*$oiarl/>avahat^ 'fathers' > s $aiar^ Aavahalan/ 'our fathers.'

c) If the sg. stem ends in -CvvC( 31 ), -CvCC or -CvC=C( 32 ), in other
words, if the last consonant is preceded by a long vowel or another
consonant, whether identical or not, attach the suffix to it:

r*£* /reSa/ > oiii /reSah/ 'her head'
r£?cD : «i /dahva/ > </v?<b:i /dahvay 'your (m.sg.) gold'
rrfaJk£ /patura/ > cdIciAl^ /p&ureh/ 'his table'

f<a\ /lebba/ > pn\ /lebbe^ 'your (f.sg.) heart'
Here the feminine morpheme At/ counts as final consonant:

/maSriia/ > <d^u t*» /maSriieh/ 'his encampment 1
/yaletta/ > enfold /yalettah/ 'her mother'.

d) If the sg. stem ends in -CvvCC or -CCC, a vowel needs to be
inserted between the last two consonants when the suffix for lsg., 2pl.
or 3pl. is added.( 33 ) When the last consonant is the feminine ending
/-t/, the vowel to be inserted is /a/. Otherwise, it is unpredictable.

rdjt^Xs? /malkja/ > cn&As> /malktah/ 'her queen'

but ^cdAl^p /malkalhon/ 'their q.'

31 The symbol "vv" signifies any one of the vowels /a, e, i, u, o/, namely all
vowels other than short /a, e/, which latter are deletable (§ 6 A).

32 C=C means that the last two consonants are identical, or gemination of a consonant.

Attachment of suffix pronouns

35

rtfi&Cl.l

S -*

/bawbja/ >
but
/dukja/ >

but
/maSkna/ >

but

/rafrma/ >
but

^

•• /

xajtso

/fcawbHk/ 'your debt 1
/bawbal/ 'my d.' ( 34 )
/dukjah/ 'her place'( 35 )
/dukka&en/ 'your p.'
/maSkneh/ 'his tent'
/maSkankon/ 'your t'
/maSkan/ 'my t'
/riihmeh/ 'his friend'
/rabemhon/ 'their f.'

e) A small number of biconsonantal nouns whose stem is CC is also

subject to the same rule as given under (d):( 36 )

i^l* /Sma/ 'name' — cn»x 'his name,' but »»* /Sem/ 'my name'

and ^ca^u 'their name'

*&** /dma/ 'blood,' but «a^a : i 'your (m.pl.) blood'

z<isk /bra/ 'son' — m\n 'his son,' but »ia /ber/ 'my son'

rtfi \ /zna/ 'kind' — mi \ 'her kind,' but ^aaj » /zankpn/ 'your (pl.m.)

kind.'

pi.

.• • •

§43 Some common irregular nouns.

abs./cst. sg. + suf.

father rdiri ? »ai*, u\a?r^, ,CDO?n£ etC.( 37 ) r^cnar^ /

/'ava/ /'av. 'avufc, 'avuy/ /'avaha& 'avahe/

brother r<uc£ ? ,**£, uxomt^, »coaur^ etc. ^r^

/'aha/ /'ah, 'ahufc, 'ahuy/ /'ahg/

33 Historically speaking, this /a/ has been secondarily dropped as a result of the
vowel deletion rule: e.g. /malkgh/ 'her queen/ is derived from /*malkaiah/. This a
has been preserved in the st. est. form, /malkat/. As a matter of fact, there is some
fluctuation and uncertainty in this regard: »W^ /JavJ/ 'my good thing' vs. .gc»&a^
/fivaihon/ 'their good thing'; Jk\* /m5rt/ 'my mistress' vs. »^nJL A5qal/ 'my distress.'

The /w/ or /y/ of the diphthong /aw/ or /ay/ respectively is regarded here as
consonantal.

35 Though the ending is pronounced /ktf, morphophonemically it is /kkt/: see § 6 G.

Though biconsonantal, words such as rffe* /marS/ 'master 1 and rdo /qala/ Voice'
naturally do not belong here.

37 Cf. »sqm /h£m/ 'my husband's father.'

36

Morphology

sister nf&j

•

? ,&» etc.

• •

M&/

Ml/

other m. rdu. tuf<

•
•

*•>"*

/hrena/

•

/hren/

•

• •
•

• •

/hreta/

/hranyaj/

woman rtXSJri

• •

• • • • • • * •.• •

/'atta/

/'attat/ /'at, 'atta/

son p^ta

/bra/

la »ta, (/via. -Xicnta

\

/bar/ /ber, brafc, bertion/

daughter rtftf*?

Aitstf »&ta uvtftsietC.

/baita/

/bat/ /brat, bartffc/

/'ahwagi/
/hrane/

/hranyata/

/ne§e/
.• • • •

/bnayya/

/^ ••

/bnala/

house

hand

<a<*^9 etc.
. ... . - -^ .

/baytaV /betf /bayt, baytay

/(')ida/ /yad,(')id/ /(')i£ (')itffc/
night «i34( 39 ) ? o^O

/13ya/ /lelyeh/

•»»/ rtfisoC") rttsoC* 2 ) ,teo, wteS etc.

/marya, mare/ /mar, mareh/

r^i&uto CSt. Auto/Au1cifl |iuto, u\Auto etc.

/qrig/ /qeryat, quryatf

abs. r^io /qre/

lord

city

/batayya/

& • * • . •

/Otiayya, ('^6/

• •

/laylawata/
i<fc*( 43 )
/marayya/

^iM 44 )
/qurya/

/§nayya/

field
year

/Satta/ /§n^t/

38 /yad/ in prepositional phrases like .«jua /byad/; /(>)id/ 'hand of.'

39 Alternative spellings: *<\y r£i£, r^\\.

40 So at Jonah 4. 10.

41 /marya/ of the God of Israel or Christ.

42 The status abs. is not attested.

43 Alternatively: r<j2* /mare/, r^Aiso/marawaia/.

44 Apparently singular used collectively. Note further pi. st. est. m'icuj; + suf., vyioo

or ov^'Yoo, oi*icuj 'his cities,' cruiao 'her cities,' ^cnuHao or ^octuiou their
cities. There also exists a Grecised plural form: «uiao or ^cuiao.

Common irregular nouns; numerals 37

§44 Numerals

a) Cardinals

m. f. m. f.

1 .?» /had/ f*&» /hda/ 2 ^fk /tren/ ^fcifc /tarten/

3 rdttfc /data/ Aito Mat/ 4 r^i^/'arb ( a/ ^pV /'arbaV

S f<z2o» /hamSa/ jeaii AiameS/ 6 rdut/ rritutr</('e)§ta/ Aut /Set/

7 rdLax /Sav'a/ a jt /Sva7 8 k£j»Ai /tmanya/ rdjp&Ai /tmane/

9 t<i*Ai /te§ 4 a/ ^fc/t§a7 10 rtfo^/'esra/ ^ /'sar/

•• • •• •

Urn. im^jui /hda'sar/

f. rfu&^-iu, r<r , ixnA..'Ui /hjia'sre, hda'esre/

12 m. tm^jAi /tre'sar/

f. r<%tt^&*&, r^in^JJiAJ /tarta c sre, tarta c esie/

13 m. *m±$Xb /tla£a c sar/

f. n<r«im^kto, f<%m*$& /tlata'sie, tlaja'esre/

• • • •

14 m. taLa^ir*, teLLair^, toLJ^ir^ /'arbta'sar, 'arba'sar, 'arebfr'sar/

f. r^^m^str^, r^attjLalr^ (r^touAatr*) /'arba'sre, 'arba'esre/

15 m. im^jban tm^Autsttji/hamSa'sar, hame&a'sar/

• • • * • • ••• • * •

f. r^oL&tjba^ r^ixa^x^ui /hamSa'sre, hamSa'esre/

16 m. ES *£*&&*, toi*J&x /§etta'sar, Sta'sar/, WS *>i*.d&x /Sta'sar/
f. ES f*^oLa£&s, i^iitt^AiAut /Setta'sie, Setta'esre/, WS i^m^AL*

/Sfci'sre/

17 m. <tflb.^sLx, ini\X?T (im\nT> /Sva'ta'sar, Svatta'sar, Sva'sar/
f. r^^fli^rut, ^m> t jf (r^ia^AirLx) /Sva'sre, §va'esi€/

18 m. i^ALl^^ (iflL^^^)/tm^ta 4 sar, tmana'sar/

f. rfjmzJs&k, r^flLjuboAi /tmana'srg, tmana'esie/

19 m. tm^&x&, im^AL^A*, i*L^ /tSata'sar, tSa'ta'sar, tSa'sar/
f. r^ouji^, i<3m*j& /tSa'srg, tla'esre/

20 ^im^/'esrin/ 30 ^.fcXfc /tiajin/ 40 ^^i V /'arb'in/

SO ^»ii /hamSin/ 60 v £*, ^**i< /§tin, 'eStin/ 70 w - * -- /Sav'in/
80 ^jasofc (^riiw^J/tmanin/ 90 ^^*ij /teS'in/
100 rfrcsi /ma/ (") 200 ^fcw&ji /ma£n/ 300 ■««**»» /tlaJpiaV
1000 j*\* /«5lef/, pi. ,*$V, w^lrf /'alfin, 'alf5/ 2000 ^rf ^* or
-ifc regW/tren 'alfin, 'alfe trSn/

45 St. cmph. r&rcsi /mag/; pi. abs. .£*&• /mawan/, emph. rdtiifei /mawSja/.

38 Morphology

10.000 ail /rebbu/, pi. ndfai.1 /rebwag/

Forms designated as masculine are used with a masculine noun, and
those designated as feminine with a feminine noun: e.g., v: »~ rdff&
^ia AA'Atci /tlajja bnin wajlaja bnan/ 'three sons and three daughters.'

A composite number shows the descending order as in English:
7337 = rdiaxo *.&&ci r*r£*&&ci «»j&W rdLu/Sav'a 'alfin watlajma
wajlajin wSav'a/.

i^Stflk^ /tre'sarta/ 'the twelve (apostles)" and r?$taL&t /'sarta/ 'the
decade" are cases of substantivised numerals.

b) Ordinals

1st r^o.u /qa&naya/, also i69ip /qajfcna/, st.abs. pu /qdem/
2nd rdii VAi /trayana/, f . rdfu^i VA* /trayanita/,

also r^lLidi /tenyana/, f. r&iLidi /tenyaja/
3rd r£>SuA^ /tlijaya/ 4th i/.v.ni /rvi'aya/ 5th r^LS+saj* /hamSaya/
6th *SaL&x /Stilaya/ (WS *S*Uk* /Sftaya/) 7th ^(,nr /Svi'aya/
8th r£i*»Ai /tminaya/ 9th ril^rAi /tSi'aya/ 10th i^voi /'siraya/

An alternative and favourite mode is the use of the particle i fol-
lowed by a cardinal numeral, which latter must agree in gender with
the noun concerned: Gn 1.19 n£iiin<f : i r£*cu /yawma darb'a/ 'fourth
day,' Dt 26.12 fcXAu rftflxa /bSatta daflaj/ 'in the third year.'O

The first five days of the week are indicated by using the masc.
form of the cardinal numerals followed by i^xa /bSabba/ 'in the week,'
whether written separately or joined with the numerals: Sunday r£=u£a.iu
/lxi&&±bB/C J \ Mo. r^tta ^ jM teribS&baf, Tu. r&u U& /idti&kbei, Wfe.
r£a&a^ir£/'arba'b§abba/, Th. (<axnx»ii /hame§b§abba/, Fr. rdkacitat
/'ruvta/, Sa. *$» /Sab|a/.

The days of the month for the 2nd to the 19th are given by the
masc. emph. form of the cardinals: 'on the 2nd' r^V^ka /b^raya/, 'on
the 3rd' idQtyta /baJlatta/C 48 ), 'on the 4th' *r«L^*r<=; /barba'ta/ etc., 'on
the 1 1th' rrim^xua etc.

46 This must be distinguished from cases such as Jn 21.37 v: »r/ kXbjt /daflaizavnin/
'for a third time.'

47 See Weninger 2001. On r<£x /Sabba/ 'week,' see above § 27.

48 /bailatta/ < /batBtfi/.

Numerals, prepositions 39

c) Fractions, r^a /pelga/ 1/2, rtti\ak /tulja/ 1/3 (rdCkoA* /tulta/
'three-year old'), r^iaoi/ruv'a/ 1/4, i^£»cu»/hum§i/l/5, r£is*o & /tumna/
1/8, rfiwo^ /'usra/ 1/10.

§ 45 The cardinals from 2 to 9 can take a suffix pronoun: e.g. «£l*L»*&
/traykon/ 'you (m.) two, 1 ^co^fAC /tartayhen/ 'they (f.) two,' *&cnLȣX'&
/tlattayhon/ 'they (m.) three.'( 49 ) The rest, with the 3m.pl. suffix, are:
^cnu&Lsir^ /'arb'attayhon/, ^co.£j£a» /ham&tbyhon/ «acn*&£x
/Statayhon/, ^ocnu&Lu /Sav'attayhon/, ^ogu&Ll^ /tmanyattayhon/,
^occuiLLr^ /teS'attayhon/, ^o^xm^/'esrattayhon/.

§ 46 The prepositions take the pronouns they govern in the form of
suffix pronouns: thus rzS\zp\ /lmalka/ 'to the king' vs. cnA /leh/ 'to
him.' The following prepositions, however, take the suffix pronouns of
SetB:

\al /*al/: tCDo^Lx /Maw/ 'on him/it,' «acaA^ /iayhon/ 'upon them'

•tiw /hjiar/ 'around'; A*cuA /thot/ 'under'; >- /?ed/ 'with, towards';
^a*o /qdam/ 'ahead of; before, in the presence of; . «k\»» /hlaf/ 'instead
of; .ilia /bel c ajj/ 'without'; ^ /l c en/ 'in front of.'

With a suffix pronoun we find bXd^a /meftolat/ for A^o /metful,
meftol/: e.g. cd&Xcl^* /meftolajph/ 'on his account.'

The following are subject to the vowel deletion rule (§ 6 A):

t&ma /bestar/ 'behind' — ii&ma /bestar/, <A9&ma /bestrak/, but
ak acD+&ma /bestarhon/ etc.

i$a /bajar/ 'after'— >ifc» /bajar/, a>i&a /bajreh/, but .oatfca
/baiarfcon/ etc.

JLnooA /luqval/ 'opposite, against' — ^VnnaX /luqvlan/, but AaooX
/luqval/, «gcn\aoa\ /luqvalhon/.

The preposition </v»r^ Pak/ has an allomorph to be used with a suf-
fix pronoun: t<^\sp oy r^/'aK malka/ 'like a king,' but cD^d^/'akwateh/
'like him.'

The particle of existence Aut* /># and that of non-existence JLA"

49 The hard Ixl of the middle Taw is due to an assimilation: /*t!5tatayhon/ > tlat-
tayhon/, where the /-ay-/ is due to the analogy of /trayhon/ 'they two/ The /-Sttay/
thus produced seems to have influenced all the following numerals. So Brockelmann
1908:488.

40 Morphology

/layt/, when they take a suffix pronoun, take one of Set B:
rdtiutna ,cnci&ui* / c avda %aw baqrita/ 'the servant is in the field 1 ;
f<LL»qi9 cnu^A' /layteh bhaykla/ 'she is not in the temple.' Likewise
.1 cuAa /balhod/ 'alone': ,cdci.4ojA? /balhodaw/ 'he alone, on his own.'

§ 47 Adverbs, Aa'i^ is a productive ending for forming an adverb
from any adjective or noun: e.g. t. tat /Sarrir/ 'true' > Au rK. i* /Sanirifttf
'truly'; r<d&y 'god' > AurtfnW 'divinely.' A far less productive suffix
is /-atf: e.g. Au t^ / c arya|/ 'in naked condition'; Aistf /rabba^ 'greatly';
^ /hayyal/ 'in living form'; Auojt /Sawyatf 'simultaneously'; Au*"*
/brayaj/ 'lastly'; &u£*.i? /qadmaya^ 'firstly.' Here we may include also
Akd^ Awa^ 'without eating'C 50 ); &&x /Swatf 'simultaneously'; boxLidi
/tenyanutf 'for a second time'( 51 ); &o.&»A& /tlijayut/ 'for a third time.'
An undeclined m. sg. adjective may also function as adverbial: e.g.,
lKg 18.24 &t2?f< \mA£ /Sappir 'emart/ 'you have said well, you are
right.'

Verb

§ 48 The Syriac verb is conjugated in respect of "tense," pattern (or:
binyan, pi. binyanim), person (1st, 2nd, 3rd), number (sg. and pi.),
gender (m. and f.), and voice (active and passive). The conjugation
takes place through the addition of suffixes and/or prefixes, the mod-
ification of vowel patterns^ 2 ) and/or the doubling of the middle radical.
Syriac knows three "tenses," traditionally termed perfect, imperfect,
and participle, the last of which is often nominated. In addition there
are the imperative and the infinitive.

50 Note the same form in B A, Dn 6. 19.

51 Note the same form in B A, Dn 2.7.

52 Unlike in Hebrew and Arabic, for instance, the vowel pattern, except in Peal,
remains constant throughout the conjugation. For instance, the vowel sequence
/a-e/ characterises the entire conjugation of Pael: Perfect and Imperative A90
/qabbel/, Imperfect A^ni /nqabbel/, Participle \j*n*» /mqabbel/. The Infinitive
oNnnSaX /lamqabbalu/) deviates slightly: see below § 52. The only important
exception here is the Imperative of Ethpeel: SL±J&t$ Aejpa'l/ (spelled also Ala&r*
or \±*&t< with a marhetana), which thus contrasts with the Perfect A>.«Ar<.

Adverbs; Verb 41

§ 49 Syriac has six patterns, traditionally named after the root Ajl&:

Pal E£p c el

Pa cc el Etpa cc al

'Afel Ettafal( 53 )

The semantic or functional opposition between these six patterns is
still a matter of debate. The three Eth-prefixed patterns are partly
reflexive, passive or ingressive, the last of which indicates entry into a
new state or taking on of a property or characteristic. Each of the three
Ef/i-patterns corresponds to the one in the first column: e.g. j?&a /ktav/
'to writeX 54 ) vs. -sAiiAu* Aetktev/ 'to be written,' or Aio /qabbel/ 'to
receive 1 vs. Aap'&rf /*etqabbal/ 'to be received.' Afel is often causative:
xit*. Araq/ 'to take to flight' vs. jr*^ />a c req/ 'to put to flight.' Its
Eth-pattern, Ettafal, is relatively little used. Instead, not a few Afel
verbs show their Effc-pattern as Ethpe or Ethpa: e.g. iter* ^akrez/ 'to
preach' vs. t.-l^&n? PeJkrtzJ 'to be preached'; jAjcrf /'aSlem/ 'to deliver'
vs. *A&*i< /'eStlem/ 'to be delivered'; Acnr* />ahhel/ (V A\cd) 'to mock'
vs. A\'cd&i< /'eihallal/ 'to be mocked.'

There are a small number of causative verbs whose prefix is either
/§/ or /s/. These latter are, however, far less productive than />/: Al**
/Say el/ 'to perfect,' .inW /Sa'bed/ 'to subjugate,' Annm /saqbel/ 'to go
towards.' These patterns may be called Shafel and Safel respectively.
Their £M-patterns show metathesis (§ 6 N): Eshtafal A^&siW'eStaklal/
'to be perfected.'

There are a considerable number of verbs with four, sometimes five,
radicals, among which one may include the above-mentioned Shafel
and Safel. Their conjugation is analogous to that of Pael and Ethpaal:
,\n\n /balbel/ 'to confuse,' AnAf&fg 'Aejbalbal/ to be confused,' ^.cd
/haymen/ 'to believe,' ^suq&rf Aethayman/ 'to be entrusted,' -^*\**

53 Partly in accordance with the widespread practice and partly for simplicity's sake,
we shall hereafter refer to these patterns as Pe(al), Pa(el), Af(el), Ethpe(el),
Ethpa(al), and Ettaf(al).

54 As on the foregoing pages, we shall quote a verb as a lexeme in its simplest form,
namely Perfect, 3m.sg., but gloss it, for convenience' sake, as an infinitive: here
"to write," not "he wrote, he has written, he had written."

42 Morphology

/Sragreg/ *to display fanciful thoughts, 1 ^^V&xrfAeStragrag/ 'to indulge
in fantasies/

Not every verb is attested in all the six patterns, and many were
most likely never used in all those six patterns. Where the tradition of
vocalisation is not certain, one is not always able to determine with
certainty the pattern of a particular verb form.f)

§ 50 The passive voice is partly indicated by the irfi-patterns. In other
words, all the three non-ef/i-patterns are active. The participle of these
three active patterns has a passive pattern indicated by a vowel pattern
different from that of the active pattern, which we may call internal
passive as against irfi-prefixed external passive:

Active Passive

Peal j?i*A /katev/ ^A^ /ktiv/

Pael .a&^s* /n&attev/ js&^b /mkattav/

Afel jp&^6 /maktev/ j=>&^? /maktav/( 56 )

Where an internal passive participle is attested side by side with an
external, ^-prefixed one, the former stresses a result, the latter a
process: -=L>bs* /ktiv/ '(already) written* vs. js^jL^o /mejkjiv/ 'in the
process of being written'; t<$s* /bne/ 'built' vs. r&La&£* /metbne/ 'under
construction.'

§ 51 The participle is, in all the patterns except Peal (.?&£), chara-
cterised by a prefix /m-/^ 7 ), and is conjugated in the manner of nouns
and adjectives.

Pa: ja&££* /mkattev/; Af js&^a /maktev/; Ethpe .a^&e* /meflcjev/;

Ethpa.a&£&c* /metkattav/; Ettaf .a&A&* /mettaktav/.

Morphologically affiliated with the participle is nomen agentis, a
noun denoting a person who executes the action indicated by the verb.
Except in Peal, which shows a pattern jaahA /katov/, all the remaining,

55 Hence the occasional, neutral designation "Ethp." in Brockelmann 1928.

56 The vowel deletion rule (§ 6 A) neutralises the voice distinction when an inflectional
ending is added: e.g. riLa&^s* can be either a Pa. active or passive feminine
participle. With some weak roots, however, the distinction remains intact: Af.
act.m. 71*020 'lifting,' f. r£a*os», pass. m. 71099 'lifted,' f. taboos*.

57 We give the basic, i.e. m.sg., form: for details, see Paradigm I below.

Passive, participle, infinitive, conjugation classes, inflectional affixes 43

"derived," patterns build their nomen agentis by adding /-an/ to their
active participle: v Vnn«* /mqablan/ 'receiver' from Pa. .VnnSa /mqabbel/
(with vowel deletion); ^laso /mvar^an/ f one who blesses 1 from Pa.
<Ma»; v \Xm*w /masklan/ 'sinner 1 from Af. .Nam? /maskel/. For the
feminine of these nomina agentis, see above, § 20.

By extension, a nomen agentis may be used adjectivally: rrt'S
rdlaj^a /dara mhablana/ 'a corrupt flit, corrupting) generation'; r^'ci^r?
r£*o& /puma 'afcola/ 'a voracious (lit. eating) mouth'; r^&iliAjb*
v\X&f^ /slawajafc mdalyanyala/ 'your saving prayers.'

§ 52 The infinitive is always prefixed with an /lm-/ or /lam-/( 58 ), and,
in all the patterns except Peal, ends with ACSCu/: Pe j?^m\ /lmektav/;
Pa ct9&£*A' /lamkattavu/; Af cia£^*A /lmaktavu/; Ethpe aa&LAerA
/lmejkjavu/; Ethpa cia&&»A /lmetkattavu/; Ettaf cL=>A£^fc*A /lmet-
taktavu/.

§53 Conjugation classes.

The above-described general scheme of conjugation applies to the
regular, triconsonantal verb. There are, however, verbs which deviate
from this scheme to varying degrees. These irregular verbs consist of
those with Alaf, Yodh, Waw, Nun as one of their radical or those
whose second and third radicals are identical: thus Second-Alaf verbs,
Third-Alaf verbs, First-Nun verbs, First-Alaf verbs, First- Yodh verbs,
Third- Yodh verbs, Second Waw or Yodh verbs, and Geminate verbs.
Some of the deviations from the regular pattern can be explained in
terms of one or other of the phonetic rules, but not all.

§ 54 The following inflectional affixes are applicable irrespective of
pattern and conjugational class (§ 53) with the exception of Third- Yodh
verbs, on which see below, § 64.

58

The choice between the two is governed by the rule § 6 1.

44

Morphology

Perfect

sg. 3m.

-

pi.

CI

(silent) h^o ]( 59 )

f.

K i-*U

-

[•(silent);^.]

2m.

& 1-tJ

,£&

/-ton/ [WS: ^ok /tun/]

f.

.* l-xl

f$

/-ten/

Ic.

*.. leti

Imperfect^ )

V

1

/-n/, ^i /-nan/

sg. 3m.

-j

pi.

*a

...^ /n ... un/

f.

*")

v •

— i /n ... an/

2m.

-Ok

*S.

....ok /t ... un/

1. ^» ..Ok /l ...

in/

v •

.. ok /t... an/

Ic.

-f<

Imperative

-j /n- /

sg. m.

-

P i.

CI

(silent) [ ^ja ]

f.

> (silent)

K\.

[. (silent)]

Participle

sg. m.

-

P i.

<?

/ ... in/

f.

« "

/...a/

v '( 62 ) /...an/

59 Rare forms are enclosed within the square brackets.

60 The prefix consonants may be followed by a vowel: /a/, Id or fel, or no vowel at
all. The choice is determined by pattern (Pe, Pa etc.) and/or conjugation class
(regular, First- Alaf etc.).

61 In WS a silent Yodh is often added at the end to distinguish the form from that of
the 2m. sg. The Yodh common in the Pf. 3f.pl. in late WS texts serves to
distinguish the form from that of the 3m.sg. (except in Third- Yodh verbs). See
Brock 2003: 99f.

62 Where the short and long forms are given, the former are the older. The imperative
forms other than that for the m.sg. retain the middle vowel, as in BA, showing
that these are affiliated with the shorter, so-called jussive forms — extinct in
Syriac — , which are distinct from the normal imperfect forms from which the
middle vowel is deleted in accordance with the vowel deletion rule.

2.

a

3.

a

4.

e

5.

e

6.

e

7.

o

Triconsonantal regular verb 45

§ 55 Triconsonantal regular verb. (Paradigm I)

Whereas Paradigm I presents the complete conjugation of a regu-
lar verb jali* /klav/ 'to write, 1 the basic pattern, Peal, has the following
sub-patterns in respect of the stem vowel, a vowel following the second
radical:

Perfect Imperfect and Imperative

1. a of 3 )

e
a
a
e
o

of 4 )

Whereas the type to which a given verb belongs is not always
predictable — such information may be found in standard dictionaries
as well as in the Glossary at the end of this work — the following
observations may be made.

a) Type 1 (a-o) is by far the commonest: e.g. j?Al* /kjav/, jso&^j
/nektov/.

b) Type 2 (a-e) is attested by two regular verbs — ta^ / c vad/ f to
make, 1 .t»*j /ne c bed/; ^\ /zvan/ 'to buy, 1 ^>\j /nezben/ — as well as
by some First-Nun verbs like Aj£j /nfal/ f to fall,' AA> /neppel/; ^su
/nfas/ 'to shake,' ~$j /neppe§/.

c) Type 3 (a-a) is frequent with Third-Guttural verbs, but not
confined to them: e.g. ^*Lx /§ma c / 'to hear,' a «Wtj /neSmaV, but also
\^x Mat/ 'to rule,' \\r,\ /neSlat/; A»^ Amal/ 'to toil,' \^j /ne'mal/.C 65 )

d) Type 4 (e-a), intransitive par excellence, is rather common: </v=*i
/dmek/ 'to sleep,' vypxs /nedmak/; n\w /sleq/ 'to ascend,' jim.i /nessaq/
(with the assimilation of Lamadh: §§ 6M, 61); ;jcuj1 /rhem/ 'to love,'

63 This vowel, also of type 6 and 7, appears as IvJ in WS.

64 Two verbs attest to the vowel pattern /o-o/: .ioao 'to bristle' and Taa&r* 'to be
black.'

Unlike in Hebrew, Third-Guttural verbs may have an o in the Imperfect: e.g.
'he shall immerse.'

46 Morphology

5Qji%j /nerham/, jA* /51em/ 'to be at peace, 1 yi\ r\ /neSlam/.

e) Type 5 (e-e) is confined to .aAu /yitev/ 'to sit, 1 ^=Aj /nettev/ (see
below § 63).(")

f) Type 6 (£-0) is attested only by &jjj /nhetf 'to descend,' Aloau
/nefohotf (the Nun assimilated: § 61); .i>^» /sged/ 'to worship,' .io^&j
/nesgod/; •*?$* /qrev/ 'to draw near,* j?oinj /neqrov/; xj^l* /§teq/ 'to
keep silent,' .oo&xj /neStoq/.

§ 56 Both stem vowels of each of the seven sub-patterns described in
the preceding paragraph are subject to deletion (§ 6 A), except in the
Imperative, which retains the stem vowel even with the addition of an
ending, not only silent consonant (see n. 62 above): e.g. ^?ak* y >=o^,
ctaci^, »90^ (all pronounced /ktpv/), ^o^.

The distinction in the Perfect between a sub-pattern and e sub-pattern
is retained except in the lsg. and 3f.sg. —

3sg.m. tao /qvar/ 'he buried' .sio /qrev/ 'he drew near*

f. &tao /qevrat/ Aiato /qerbat/

2sg.m. &t±io /qvart/ &a*o /qrevt/

lsg. ^tao /qevret/ Aistg /qerbej/

3pl.m. otso /qvar/ a?.1o /qrev/

§57 Beghadhkephath (§ 6H)

a) A plosive, one of the six consonants, Beghadhkephath, is
pronounced soft when it occurs as the second member of a consonant
cluster — CCv — at the beginning of a word or a syllable: nnv /§vaq/
'he abandoned'; vvtfas* /mvarrek/ 'blessing'; tfao&tr* /*etqvar/ 'he was
buried.'

b) In Peal a Beghadhkephath as third radical becomes hard in Pf.
3f.sg. and lsg.: j?$a /qrev/ 'he drew near,' but 3f.sg.^io /qerba^ and
lsg. Aiato /qerbetf.

c) In the Peal participle, a Beghadhkephath as third radical is
pronounced hard if an ending is added: j^dj" /naqef/ 'consorting,' but f .
rdkoj /naqpa/.

d) In Ethpeel, a Beghadhkephath as third radical is pronounced hard

66 For a comparative Semitic description, see Aro 1964.

Beghadhkephath; e > a rule; Second-Alaf, Third-Alaf, verbs 47

when a helping vowel a is inserted^ 7 ) after the first radical, which
happens in Pf. 3f.sg. and lsg., Impf. 2f.sg., 2 and 3 pi., all forms of the
participle except the m.sg., and the Impv.: e.g. k&tV&t* Aejtradpaj/ 'she
was persecuted, 1 ^irffefe /tejradpin/ 'you (f.sg.) will be persecuted, 1
o^cp^rfAethafk/ 'Change! 1

e) In Afel, a Beghadhkephath as second radical is always pronounced
hard: e.g. likr* />akpar/ 'to compel to renounce faith 1 (with e to a
before r : § 6 B).

f) In Pael and Ethpaal, a plosive as second radical is always pro-
nounced hard: Aio /qabbel/ 'to receive, 1 Aap&t* />etqabbal/ 'to be re-
ceived, 1 Pa., inf. cdacbsA' /lamqabbalu/.

In these two patterns the third radical, if a plosive, is always pro-
nounced soft. Hence the distinction between Ethpe. Ptc. f.sg. rdLaL&£ca
/me| c avda/ 'being made' and Ethpa. Ptc. f.sg. rd*\6bcn /mejqarva/ 'ap-
proaching.'

g) In Pael Impf. lsg. the first radical is always doubled, hence
pronounced hard, if it is a plosive: uvtai* M>barrek/ 'I shall bless.'

§ 58 The <e to a> rule (§ 6B) is regularly applied to Peal Ptc, Pael,
Afel, and Ethpeel: e.g., Pe. Ptc. m.sg. tao /qavar/ 'burying' < /*qaver/;
Pa. Pf. ijti /Saddar/ 'he sent' < /*§adder/; Ethpe. Pf. laoAn* Aetqvar/
'he was buried' < /♦'etqver/. This has the effect of neutralising the
distinction between the active and passive participles in Pael and Afel:
thus *£?£* /mSaddar/ can mean either 'sending' (act.) or 'sent' (pass.).

§59 Second- Alaf verbs.

The phonological rule (§ 6K) governs the conjugation of a common
verb \t<x: Pe Pf. Ar^t /Sel/ < /*S'el/ 'he demanded'; Impf. Ai<£i /neSal/
< /*ne§>al/; Inf. Ar&b*A /lmeSal/ < /♦lme^al/; Ptc. pass. A f i<* /Sil/ <
/*§>il/; Ethpe Pf. A*rk*nf />e§tel/ < /*>eSt>el/ (with metathesis: § 6N).

§60 Third-Alaf verbs.

A very small number of verbs are conjugated as if their final Alaf were
still a genuine guttural, though it is actually a silent letter, and thus the

67 Perhaps more correct to say that this a is original: /* > ejpa c el/ > /^ejp c el/ (vowel
deletion).

48 Morphology

phonological rule § 6K applies. The most common of this group is
r^si 'to comfort': Pa. Pf. t^a /bayya/ (as if < /*bayyeV (§ 6B), but
lsg. Au^sf /bayyetf (§ 6K); Pa. Impf. r^Li /nvayya/; Pa. Ptc. act. and
pass, rdf^fc* /mvayya/. So also t<^ /{amma/ 'to defile.'C 68 )

§ 61 First-Nun verbs.

A vowelless Nun is assimilated in Peal Imperfect, Afel and Ettafal.
This Nun is absent in the Imperative of most verbs of this type.f 69 )
Otherwise the conjugation is regular: e.g. Pe. Ptc. m.sg. siaS /nafeq/
'exiting.'

la-ol la-al la-el

PealPf. xtaj Maq/ 'to exit' jnsm /nsav/ 'to take' Isij /nfal/ 'to fall'
Impf. uajki /neppoq/ nmi /nessav/ JlAj /neppel/

Impv. aoa /poq/ -am /sav/ Aa /pel/

Inf. ,o&*A /lmeppaq/ ,nm^ /lmessav/ A&*\ /lmeppal/

Afel: Pf. 3m.sg. jigr^ 'he took out', lsg. dtnar^, Impf. jiAj, ^aaAi;
Ptc. xiA»>; Impv. .oar*; Inf. on&aX.

Ettafal: Pf. ,oift& r< />ettappaq/ 'he was taken out,' 3f.sg. Auia&&r*.

Exceptions to the assimilation rule are verbs whose second radical
is /h/ (or /h/): e.g. *mjr^ 'to illuminate'; -sujur^ 'to be barefoot,' but
Avcuij 'he will descend' ( < Auaj) and Af. Aujr^ 'he made to descend' ( <

♦June*).

An important verb Impf. A&j /nettel/ with Inf. Afc*\ /lmettal/
belongs here. For the other parts of the conjugation, a different root,
-acnu, is used: § 63 c.

Another common le-al verb xAa> 'to ascend' may be assigned here:
Pf. xAxr> /sleq/, Impf. xuqqj /nessaq/, Impv. xup /saq/, Inf. iimqaA /lmessaq/,
Af.xugr^ ^asseq/etc.

§62 First- Alaf verbs.

a) In accordance with § 6C, the initial Alaf takes a full vowel: /e/ in

68 The majority of original Third- Alaf verbs have gone over to the Third- Yodh class
(§64).

69 Exceptions include io.tj 'Make a vow!,' &o*j 'Bite!,' verbs which retain the Nun
in the Impf. such as *«li 'Be bright!,' and verbs which are also of the Third- Yodh
class like»£j /n§i/ 'Quarrel!'

First-Nun, First-Alaf verbs 49

Pe Pf. and in the whole of Ethpe, and /a/ in Pe. Ptc. pass, and Pa. Impf .
lsg. — Aa?< tefcal/ 'he ate, A&rdknf Aetekel/ (§ 6L) f it was eaten, 1 A^r£
/>akil/ 'eaten,' xart tabbed/ 'I shall destroy/

b) In Ethpe. and Ethpa., § 6L applies: A&r*&i£ Ae Jekel/ < *A*r«tW
'was eaten'; ^X7*$i£ /'ejallas/ < *jXrlktg 'was oppressed.' The same
rule accounts for j&Xj /nallef/ Pa Impf. < *-flAr£j 'he shall teach,' Ptc.
-a\» /mallef/ < *^r&9. Note also -Ar* />alle$/, which is Pa. Pf. 'he
oppressed' as well as Pa. Impf. lsg. (< *yWnf).

c) The prefix vowel Id of the Pe. Impf. and Inf. coalesces with the
initial Alaf into Id: aardi /nevad/ 'he shall perish'; tofrO /nemar/ 'he
shall say'; Ao^rO /nekol/; ta>rto*A /lmemar/ 'to say.' This also applies
to verbs which are simultaneously Third- Yodh: rd*t< 'to come' — ^rq

/neje/, r^AirtotjA /lmeta/.

*

The prefix vowel in question is spelled with - in ES, but in WS with
- when the stem vowel of the Impf. is /a/ and with First- Alaf/Third- Yodh
verbs, but with - when the stem vowel is lol (or rather /u/ in WS):

ES WS

taiio till 1 'he shall say'

Aii<j ^V 'he shall go 1

rcsrti liji x 'he shall bake'

.?ojjf<i /nehod/ joLji* 'he shall seize'

When the Pe Impf. stem vowel is /o/, the Alaf of the Impv. takes /a/,
but Id if the former is /a/:

Impf. Impv.

AcL&rO Ao&r£

Irregular: A iVq Aj from Air* 'to go'( 70 )

d) In Afel and Ettafal the initial Alaf appears as Waw: A^or?

/>awkel/ 'he fed' < A*i* 'to eat'; .licitf/'awbed/ f he destroyed' < .isnf 'to

perish'; Ettaf AA'o^&k' 'he was fed.' The important exception is: .ȣLr^

Aayti/ 'he brought' (from rd*r< 'he came 1 ), Impf. t<^S /nayte/, Ptc.

» /mayte/, Inf. a.iL»7maytayu/. Cf. below, § 63.

The Infinitive is regular: \\r&A /lmezal/.

50 Morphology

e) In Ethpeel some verbs assimilate the initial Alaf to the preceding
/t/: ?*j&&ir£ (also spelled uAi^) /^etljejj/ 'was captured, shut* (< .iiJrf 'to
capture, shut'); J*&\spikr< 'you (m.pl.) were bound.' Also once in Ethpa
jjj'S&iW'ettanah/ 'he sighed' (<*ui<).

f) In Pael Impf. lsg., note the deletion of the prefix vowel /e/: *s\rt
Mlef/ < 7*>e>allef/ (cp. Aip* 'I shall receive') 'I shall teach.'( 71 ) In the
case of this particular and common verb, the Alaf is not written at all
under similar circumstances, not only in this particular form: Ptc. »w
/mallef/; Impf. j&Aj 'he shall teach'; Inf. a <\ W /mallafu/; nomen agentis
i<iA\»i /malfana/ 'teacher. 1

g) The following is a synopsis in tabular form:
Peal

Pf.A*i< U[*i< aXAKr/^efcal/

Impf.Aa&rds, Act^r^&i, ^^, lsg. Acukr< tearO, tea'r*&i, t*feartf&i,

Impv. AciAr^ ^a&r^, *»»*£ »to»i<

Inf.
Ptc.pass.

Pf. A*rtf&tr< 3fs. dtA^r<&tr< Impf. A^r^U, ^oX^r^Au; Impv. A^rf&r*

Inf. oA^r^isiA /lmetekalu/; Ptc. A^rf&c*, r&tr<&a /metaBa/

Pael

Pf.^W 'to compel'; Impf. ^rdi , lsg.^rf; Impv. ^ri

Ptc. act^rte', pass.^XVe*; Inf. o^Xr&*A

Ethpaal

Pf.^rtfa Impf.^nriu; Impv. ^ndii*; Ptc.^ndb*; Inf. o^WAb^

Afel Pf. AAoi* Ettafal Pf. AaoK**— See under First-Yodh verbs (§ 63).

§63 First-Yodh verbs.

a) The conjugation in Pael and Ethpaal is entirely regular.

b) In accordance with § 6D, the initial Yodh is provided with a
vowel HI where the regular verb would have no vowel, namely Pe Pf.

71 The form is accidentally identical with Pf. 3m.sg. 'he taught.' In Peal this verb is
First-Yodh: ^1. 'to learn.'

First- Yodh verbs 5 1

except in the lsg. and 3f.sg., and Ethpe: j?Au /yijev/ 'he sat 1 (but JkaAu
/yejbatf f she sat'; Ethpe Ptc. .*tl?A« 'being born. 1 Such an initial /yi-/ is
often spelled --*r*\ e.g. xLL-r^Aineq/ 'to suck. 1

c) In Pe. the commonest pattern is /e-a/: e.g. Pf. orn» /yiveS/ 'to be
dry'— Impf. **arO. /neva§/ (WS -«f?rd); rd* t« 'to give birth 1 — ^j. ;
j*\* 'to learn' — ^&Xr£i . Forms such as tcu 'to be heavy' — ioi<i are not
genuine exceptions, for the /a/ of la* is due to § 6B. Cf. verbs which
are also Third- Yodh: Pf. t<^Lt< f to swear' — Impf. r^qrO.

The vowel pattern le-el is attested with certainty by only one verb:
Pf . -aAu /yitev/ 'to sit' — Impf . js$j /nettev/ with the striking gemination
of A/. Likewise Pf. ^ /yidaV 'he knew*; Impf. *Ju /neddaV.

Note a common, but highly irregular verb ^kwl. : Pf . joaL /yav/ 'he
gave' (< /*yhav/?), 2m.sg. &aciL7yavt/ (but lsg. jkacnu /yehbetf; 3f.sg.
jkacnu /yehbat/), Impv. j=kd /hav/. In the Impf. and Inf. this verb is
represented by another root: A&j /nettel/, A&c* etc. (presumably from

V^M 72 )

The Impv. and Inf. are formed analogously to the Impf.: j°A*>
^Xt<*, *a!L (ImpvOC 3 ), ~s&rG»;j=>bu y .a&i, ^Ai, .afc*A /lmettav/. In
other words, in the le-el pattern, the initial Yodh is absent in the Impv.

d) In Afel and Ettafal, as in First-Alaf verbs, the initial Yodh
appears as Waw: J3$cir£/ ) awtev/ 'to settle'; j?&a&&t< Aettawtav/ 'to be
settled' ;.*»:t a i£ AawdaV 'to make known.' Only two verbs show a Yodh
instead: xLur^ayneq/ 'to suckle'; AjLr^'to bemoan.'

e) The following is a synopsis in tabular form:
Peal

Pf. ja.v* /yizeff 'to borrow,' Aiai* /yezpaj/, &a.v* /yizeft/ etc.
Impf.j&uO, «a£trO etc. Impv. j^i*, ^ai* etc.

j?&j, «09&j etc. jadi, »?& etc.

72 The alleged Impf. j^, attested twice (according to Brockelmann 1928:298), is
doubtful: one occurs in a 12th cent, manuscript, and the other alongside a ptc,
.ait, hence easily a scribal error for j#x£. The Inf. jpas^ occurs rarely, usually
replaced by Afc*\ /lmettalA Brockelmann (1962: § 175) holds that the striking
final Lamadh of A&i is due to the preposition Lamadh, which must often have
followed the verb.

73 E.g.Isl.l7;Mt9.13.

52 Morphology

*Ju, wS-^V. etc. Ajf, t±j etc.

Inf. »A ir^V J?&aV *-*»*
Ethpeel

Pf.-A.v^i*, ^u&r£, &a.v»&f* etc. bnpf. j>.i,fej, «s4i*Au etc.
Inf. a3i«Ai»A

Afel

Pf. -a^of* to lend,' Impf. ja.^oj, Impv. J>.\atZ, Ptc. J».icea, Inf. o£ta»A
Ettafal

Pf.^ici***, Impf. ^10^., Ptc. ^io«;A«, M W {oK&*\( 74 )

§ 64 Third- Yodh verbs (Paradigm n).^ 5 )

This class comprises a very considerable number of verbs, and
deviates from the regular verbs the most widely. Hence it calls for the
maximum attention.

a) As in the case of the regular, triliteral class which has two
subgroups in Peal differentiated by the stem vowel in the Pf. (§ 56)
— tao /qvar/ vs. ja*n /qrev/ — Syriac shows a similar division among
its Third- Yodh verbs in Peal: the more common type r^i /rma/ 'to
throw' as against^* /d&/ 'to be clean.' Other examples of the second
type are,** /b^/ 'to rejoice,' ,t» /sri/ 'to stink,' ^cd^ /§hi/ 'to be thirsty,'
•r4 M for /*Pi/ (§ 6K) 'to be weary.'( 76 ) Unlike with the regular veib,
this division applies only to the Pf. Elsewhere in the Pe. paradigm
there is a single type.

b) In the Pf. 2nd person, both sg. and pi., the suffix Taw is
pronounced hard, even when it is preceded by a full vowel: e.g., not
only in &*»'* /rmayt/ (diphthong), but also in &•*» /bdit/ 'you (m.sg.)

74 The expected Impv. of the type j*.t'ci&&r< hardly occurs.

75 In spite of the fact that the basic form traditionally quoted as representative of this
class of verbs, namely Pe. Pf. 3m. sg., is spelled with Alaf as the third radical, it is
best to call them "Third- Yodh" for a number of reasons, one such being that,
although the great majority of original and genuine Third- Yodh verbs behave in
Syriac exactly like original Third- Alaf verbs, there do still exist a small number of
genuine Lamadh-Alaf verbs (§ 60). The Ettafal is excluded from the paradigm on
account of its extreme rarity.

Here belongs also A** /'fcSti/ 'to drink,' despite the secondary, initial Alaf, which
occurs in the Pf. and Impv. only.

76

Third- Yodh, Second Waw- or Yodh verbs 53

rejoiced/ which contrasts with Auxu /hdi# 'I rejoiced/ This distinction
applies to all patterns, not just Peal. Cf . § 6H. In the first Peal subgroup
this lsg. ending is spelled Aum* in ES, but Aum* in WS.

c) The pattern of all derived conjugations in the Pf. is similar to that
of the *^.i type mentioned above: thus

Peal Pael Afel

'to be clean 1 'to cleanse* 'to multiply' (V »^*>)

3m.sg. »a.i /d]ff/ >i.i /dakki/ >^»r^ /^sgi/

f.sg. iuA.7 /defcyatf Au^.i* /dakyat/ Au^»r^ /'asgyatf

2m.sg. Juj*i /dkit/ «LA.i /dakkit/ «u^»rf /'asgit/

lc. Au*:t /dkit/ ***? /dakkit Au^r* Aasgjtf

3m.pl. cu^ui /dfciw/ a«A2i /dakkiw/ cu^or^ Aasgiw/

d) This is the only conjugation class in which the ending Waw for
3m.pl. w pronounced (ce*i /rmaw/; cu ?*> /fc$|iw/), not only in Pe, but
in every pattern: e.g. Pa cljaji /dakkiw/ 'they cleansed.' Also in this
class only are the Pf. 3m.pl. and 3f.pl. systematically distinguished:
e.g. 3m.pl. Pe 02*1 /rmaw/, Pa cux» /Ijaddiw/ 'they gladdened' as
against 3f.pl. Pe »»* /rmay/, Pa*;** /haddi/.

e) The Impf. 2/3 m.pl. ending /-on/ appears in WS as /-un/: ES
«g2*ij /nermon/, WS .gsnii.

f) The original Yodh as third radical is often evident: for instance, in
the Inf. in all derived conjugations Pa ajL&baA' /lamdakkayu/, Pe Inf.
with a pronoun suffix, a&a«t«\ /lmermyah/ 'to throw her', Pe Pf.
2m.sg. JLsai /rmayt/, Ptc. f.sg. Pe r<i»i /ramya/, Af rd^ai /masgya/
'multiplying,' f.pl. ^£t&* /masgyan/, Pe Impv. f.sg. poi /rmay/.

g) In the Ethpe Impv., WS has talk* /'ejjmay/, for which ES has
M^oif^rf Aejramy/, which is modelled on the regular verb.

h) As against the standard /-i/ ending of the Pe. Impv., a few verbs
show the archaic ending /-ay/: ,ȣ* /yimay/ 'to swear' alongside of p*u
/yimi/; ,&xt< AeStay/ 'to drink.'
§ d5 Second- Waw or -Yodh verbs (Paradigm HI).

The outstanding feature of this class of verbs is that in most forms
one sees only two radicals with or without an undeletable vowel l\xl or
/i/ in the middle. Verbs with such an l\xl are called Second- Waw, and

54 Morphology

those with an /i/ Second- Yodh.

a) The deviation from the regular type is observed in Peal, Afel, and
Ettafal, whereas in Pael and Ethpaal the conjugation is regular, lyl
serving as middle radical: e.g. Pa -p^d /qayyem/ 'to establish 1 ; Ethpa
y^brt ^etqayyam/ 'to be established.'

b) Au» /mit/ is the only Second- Yodh verb that shows a vowel
letter between the two radicals in the Pf., all other verbs showing no
such. The characteristic Waw or Yodh appears only in the Impf. and
Impv.

Second-Waw Second- Yodh

Impf. 3m. sg. paoj /nqum/ 'he shall rise 1 tujooj /nsim/ 'he shall put'

Impv. m.sg. 73aa/qum/ timsd /sim/

The above-mentioned Alls* is irregular: Impf. &cpoj /nmutf ; Impv.
bee* /mutf .

c) The Ethpeel has been replaced by Ettafal, and there is only one
paradigm, irrespective of whether a given verb is Second-Waw or
Seocnd-Yodh: -p+nli&irg />etqim/ 'it was constituted'; •p+a&birt />etsim/
'he was put.'( 77 )

§ 66 Geminate verbs (Paradigm IV)( 78 )

In the patterns other than Pael and Ethpaal, in which the conjugation
is regular, only one of the two last, identical radicals is visible in most
of the forms as they are spelled.

a) In prefixed forms, i.e. Pe. Impf. and Inf., the whole of Af. and
Ettaf., verbs of this class are conjugated like First-Nun verbs, this
putative Nun getting assimilated to the first radical. Thus Pe. Impf.
ioAi /nebboz/ 'he shall plunder' as if from /*nenboz/, though the real

root is V % vs. Likewise Pe. Inf. \a&A /lmebbaz/ as if from /*lmenbaz/;

• ••

Af. Pf. i±rt />a.«eV 'he introduced' < V Al*. 'to enter.'

b) Where two identical radicals have no vowel in between, a
shorthand spelling is used, though phonetically there is a doubling, as

77 In the Impf., when the personal prefix is Taw, only two Taw's are written: e.g.,
3fs. Tufl^, not 7i*j>&k&»Ai.

78 Cf. Boyd 1982.

Geminate verbs; common anomalous verbs 55

in Pe. Pf. 3f.sg. bis* /bezzaj^ 'she plundered/ Pe. Ptc. act. f.sg.
/bazza/ (= c*i in).

c) A Beghadhkephath as the identical last radical is pronounced
hard in the Pe. Ptc. f.sg., m./f. pi., and Pf. 3f.sg. and lsg.: e.g. from
uy& /pak/ 'to shatter' we have therefore Ptc. i<£Jk /pakka/, ^jjiA /pakkin/,
^&& /pakkan/, jk£a /pakkatf , and Aiia /pakkej/.

d) In Pe., if one looks at the consonants only, the conjugation of
many Second- Waw verbs and that of geminate verbs resemble each
other very much, but a careful comparison of the two paradigms (III
and IV) would reveal very many subtle differences in terms of the
vowel length (e.g. yin /qam/ vs. <a& /ta&/), the gemination or lack of it
(e.g. TQAoj /nqum/ vs. <ao&j /nettqk/) and a few more features.

e) In Pe. Pf. there is only one pattern, with /a/. In the Impf . the stem
vowel is /o/, /a/ or /e/, the last of which is represented by one verb
only, xki /nepped/ 'he shall stray.' An example of the /a/ pattern is
^ju /nerrag/ 'he shall desire.'

f) In Ethpe the second and third radicals are kept apart: t.va&tnf, not
♦isAinf, although the above-mentioned shorthand spelling is occa-
sionally found as in Ptc. f.sg. r*£p&£a 'chopped' for *i*lyp"A».

§ 67 Some common anomalous verbs

j*£jti< AeSkab/ Af. 'to find, to be able to.'

rriftW Pe. 'to come': Impv. sg.m. rtX, f . JK /tay/, pl.m. o& /taw/, f .
^X /tayen/. Af. ,&, rf />ay ti/ 'to bring.' Ettaf. >lk*b&t< />ettayti/ 'to be
brought.'

Air? Pe. 'to go.' On the assimilation of l\l as in Ptc. f.sg. r^ii*
^azza/, see above, § 6M. Impf. AiVej /nezal/; Impv. A.* /zel/ (with /e/!).
On the assimilation of the same consonant in another verb of physical
movement, xAn> /sleq/ 'to ascend,' see § 6M.

jbcbu Pe. 'to give.' Where the He would have been followed by the
vowel /a/, the former is elided: 2m.sg. &aciL' /yavt/, but 3f.sg. &L?cn*
/yehba|/ and lsg. ^?cnu /yehbei/. Impv. jam. The Impf. is A&j /nettel/;
likewise the Inf. Afc*\ /lmettal/ (very rarely jscnbil /lmehhav/).

i<iuPe. 'to live.' The Pf. is regular: reiu, AlL**, AL^jj/byayt/ etc., but
Impf. i<ijj /nehhe/, Inf. r&«A /lmehha/, Af. >ur* />ahhi/ 'to allow to

56 Morphology

stay in life,' all these as from a geminate root.

§ 68 Verbs with object suffix pronouns

Details need to be studied carefully from Paradigms V and VI. The
following is a summary of the more important points. The forms of the
object suffixes may be found in § 12.

a) The vowel deletion rule (§ 6A) is much in evidence: e.g. «j£\ao
/qabbeltan/ 'you (m.sg.) received me 1 but cn\nn /qablah/ Tie received
her/

b) The personal endings of the verb in the Perfect, to which object
pronouns are attached, often differ from those of their free-standing
equivalents.^)

2m.sg. ending /-ta/ as in »j£iiu /Saddartan/ f you sent me 1
2f.sg. ending /-ti/ as in^tix /Saddartin/ f you sent us'
3m.pl. ending /-u/ as in cdo1.u /Sadruh/ 'they sent her'
3f.pl. ending /-a/ as in ovf u /Sadrak/ 'they sent you (m.sg.)'
lsg. with hard III as against 3f.sg. with soft hj as in Af. a>&a£r^
Aappeqteh/ 'I took him out' vs. coJkoArf /'appeqteh/ 'she took him out'
the initial vowel /a/ of Pe. as in »jld ts> /parqan/ 'he saved me.'

c) The plural 'them' is expressed by means of a free-standing en-
clitic form: m. v ojr< Pennon/ and f. ^.rf /*ennen/. A participle requires,
however, v ocn^ and ^.oi^ respectively. E.g. v cur<f fc.1-i« /Sadret 'ennon/
'I sent them' vs. .cicnA rdt* i£x» /mSaddar na lhon/ 'I send them.'

d) When a verb form itself ends in /n/, this consonant is followed by
/a/ before the suffix with the exception of the 2f.sg. suffix & /-ek/.
This happens in Pf. lpl., 2pl.; Impf. 2f.sg., and 3pl.; longer Impv. pi.
with In/. E.g., cniiao /qabbelnah/ 'we received her'; ^ci&Xao /qab-
beltonan/ 'you (m.pl.) received us'; ,ri ? \nn^ /tqablinan/ 'you (f.sg.)
shall receive me'; miosa* ir* Aarimunah/ 'Raise (m.pl.) her!'

e) The 3m.sg. suffix is realised in a variety of ways. If a verb form
ends in a consonant, the suffix itself is cd /-eh/. If the former ends in a
vowel, the suffix is uniformly spelled with a cd, which, however, is
pronounced in various ways:

79

In general these deviating endings are more archaic.

Verbs with object suffix pronouns 57

after /-a/ — ,oL /-ay/ as in ,c^£lap /qabbeltay/ 'you (m.sg.) accepted
him 1

after /-i/ — ,cdcu /-iw/ as in ,cdcu&i.tje' /Saddartiw/ 'you (f.sg.) sent
him 1

after /-u/ — ,cdo /-uy/ as in »cnoi.ijt /§adruy/ 'they sent him'

after /-e/ — ,cd<l. /-ew/ as in tcno^' /nahhew/ 'we shall restore him
to life.'

f) The Impf. forms ending in a consonantal radical, namely 3m./f.sg.,
2m.sg., and lsg./pl., insert an /-i/ before the 3sg. suffixes: e.g. ,cnci*no>r^
/>asqiw/ 'I shall bring him up' (with the combination of the rule given
above, [d]); cnun^i /tapqih/ 'you (m.sg.) [or: she] will bring her out.'

g) The Impv. m.sg., if ending in a consonantal radical, shows three
allomorphs:

/-ay/ with a lsg./pl. suffix as in ,i»^f ? fp /simayn/ 'Place me!'
/-a/ with a 3m.sg. suffix as in >m » ^ , w /simay/ 'Place him!' (with the
rule [e] also at work)
/-e/ with a 3 f.sg. suffix as in m,«* ? nr> /simeh/ 'Place her!'

h) Third- Yodh verbs (Paradigm VI) retain in Peal the vowel /-a/ of
the 3m.sg., but without a merely graphic Alaf: e.g. rdia /b c a/ 'he
sought' vs. uyLs /b c ak/ 'he sought you (m.sg.).' Likewise with the
vowel endings of the root in the Impf. and Impv.: e.g. ndv** /nev'e/
vs. K *yy.\ /nev < en/ 'he will seek us';>^ l\f\l Impv. Pe m.sg. vs. 9 \m\n
/Mn/'Seek me!'; Pa ndL^/galla/ 'Reveal!' vs. ,c5uX^/gallay/ 'Reveal
him!' (with the rule [e] also at work).

i) The /-i/ of the Pf. 3m.sg. in Pa and Af and the /-a/ of the Pe Inf.
change to /-y/ except before the 2pl. suffixes, v a* and ^: e.g. ^X^
/galli/ 'he revealed,' but i 1 /^ /galyan/ 'he revealed me' and v o^A^
/gallikon/ 'he revealed you (m.pl.)'; f<\\^ /lmegla/ 'to reveal' but
oy\\^a\ /lmeglak/ 'to reveal you.'

j) Note the shift of the /-aw/ in Pf. 3m.pl. and the Impv. m.pl. to
/-aPu/, and the /-iw/ of Pa and Af Pf. 3.m.pl. and Impv. m.pl. to /-yu/,
and the /-ay/ of the Impv. f.sg. to /-a*i/. E.g. coor^a* /rma?uh/ 'they
threw her' or Throw her!'; ^ou.-ui /hadyun/ 'they gladdened me' or
'Gladden mer^r^i /rma'in/ Throw (f.sg.) us!'

58 Morphology

k) The Inf. in the derived patterns, i.e. pattern other than Peal, takes
an object suffix after having changed its ending /-u/ to /-utf : e.g.
/lamgallayu/, but cp^q.V^iX /lamgallayujeh/ 'to reveal him.'

PART THREE

MORPHOSYNTAX AND SYNTAX

§ 69 Noun: Gender The feminine form of an adjective or a pronoun
is sometimes used to refer to an abstract property, a manifestation of it,
or a general thought, not an entity whose natural sex is female: e.g.
r?$V»i* 'something else, 1 i<.7cd 'this matter, this circumstance,' rdu*
i^Lkjp&eg.i ,ci> 'what is necessary is one,' i^&sl^ 'the good.' However,
the masculine form may also be so used indiscriminately: 2Sm 19.35
,¥ g n\ n\) Au-=i rd r? *jjtf r<X 'I cannot tell the good from the bad' vs.
1 Kg 3.9 r^KxjjaA r*$n\) Al^=j al£&x£o\ 'to discern the good from the
bad'; rdco A^»> 'because of this.' In the plural, however, only the
feminine is used: ^oA^ ^cd 'all these things'; K »au$l& ^cd 'these
two matters.' A subject clause is considered feminine in Mt 19.23 rA\<
i<^ix Ajo^V^A AcL^j.i r*i*&-*A >cd 'it is hard for a rich man to enter
the kingdom of heaven' || ib. 24 rr^jrwa p^io-Uia A>«*A i<\^i^\ «<» AAi
'it is easier for a camel to enter the hole of a needle.'

§ 70 Noun: Number Some nouns are used only in the plural (plura-
lia tantum), even when there is nothing plural about their meaning: e.g.
rtizi 'water' (r^» r&a 'living [as against stagnant] water'); rtl^ix
'price'; f*iafe> 'freedom'; ^o^» 'betrothal'; !<£*£ 'sky'; rioi 'life';
r^ar^'face.'

There are nouns which refer to a plurality of individuals, though
singular in form: Mt 8.27 atep'ri&n? r^iii^'some people were amazed';
ib. 9.3 r^2d» ^> c<xjr< 'some of the scribes,' cf. ib. 12.47 m^ te>t<
oci i< 'someone said to him' and ,r\\^ 'everybody.'

§ 71 Noun: State The severely curtailed use of the absolute state (§
18) is confined to the following cases(*):
a) Distributive repetition: e.g. rdut? rdut .1* 'every year'; ^» pd.

1 These are not, however, absolute rules: exceptions, namely the use of the emphatic
state of the expected absolute, are not few.

60 Morphosyntax and Syntax

jicL 'from day to day'; ^j.i^ ^Ji* Aeddanin/ 'at times 1 ; «u\ ou^i
/dagnes .. / 'of all kinds'; Mt 20.9 *i..i \Li onmi 'they each got a
dinar'; ib. 25.15 mVfi vyr* atir* aLii* 'each according to his ability.'

b) After A* or cardinal numerals: e.g. a\^ A*a 'with all zeal';
■t&r^ A^a* ^iiti Aa 'all physicians in every place'; iuk> -** !*£*,
^j 'one soul and one mind'; ^\ < ^^ 'two worlds'; ^*cu ^-^V
v a2LA k? jlj31i^ 'forty days and forty nights.' Likewise ^Liat i<5** 'how
many times?'

c) With negatives: e.g. ^fto* ALA 'there is no gain'; ^a» rdf*
'innumerable'; j*n* rdf.i 'without money'; v? 'i-i r^X.i 'childless'; i<\
otit^ toii<j. 'Let nobody say'; Mt 20.7 j[>^f «ur* kA 'nobody has
hired us.'

d) In certain idiomatic expressions introduced by a preposition: e.g.
»lx ^s /men gel/ 'suddenly'; 71V <\ 'for ever'; A^ta 'on foot'; A^ 7
/bafgal/ 'in haste.'

e) Adjectives used as predicate of a nominal clause: </vL^ r£x*a
'your eye is evil'; ^Ju* **?? *\ r^» 'stolen water is sweet'; rfdco A*Ap
'he was fast.' The st. emph. is sometimes used for no apparent reason:

Mt 25.35-43 ... Aucicn cnut^ ... Aucicd iWYVIa! ... Aucicd rCLltn^rt
Auqcn r<aL\*ci ... &Jr^ jLjLt^.1 ... &Jr£ rdiim^rrt 'I was homeless ...

I was naked ... I was sick ... that you were homeless ... that you were
naked ... and I was sick.'

f) Some forms which look like those of the f.sg.cst. are in reality the
residue of the archaic st. abs. used adverbially: Atstf /rabbaj^ 'exceed-
ingly'; Auso.to 'firstly'; Au*ur< 'in the end' as in Mt 4.2 ^a* ^.j V*" 1 *
'in the end he became hungry'; Ez 23.29 Au '^ ^^ i:;? n ?M 'they
will abandon you bare and naked; 1 Ac 25.16 Atacncua 'for nothing.'

§ 72 The loss of the originally determining force of the emphatic state
of the noun is often compensated by the use of the demonstrative pronoun,
especially of the ocp series: Gn 37.15 ocp t^tai^(Heb.: &*n); Ex 4.9
AJr^ .ami rtiza ^ojcd ... rrtcni.i t<i*a % » jatD Take some water of
the river ... you shall take that water (Heb.: tr©n).' This is especially
common where the demonstrative so used is analogous in function to
the anaphoric definite article. On the other hand, the addition of a form

Gender, number, and state of noun; st. est. and periphrasis by -* 61

of the numeral "one" may have the effect of weakening the emphatic to
that of the primitive, absolute state: Lk 14.2 in! f<*a^ (S omits .u*: Gk
dvGpanrfe tisO-

§ 73 Status constructus and periphrasis by means of -a

a) Logical dependence between two nouns is sometimes synthetically
expressed by putting the dependent noun in the status constructus as in
vticaA ,a< /rabbay kahne/ 'chief priests* (lit. 'great ones among priests');
i<i..i ii\ 'verdict' (lit. 'decision of judgement'). The standard syntax,
however, favours periphrasis whereby two adjacent, logically dependent
nouns are joined by means of the proclitic particle -.i: thus it is more
common to say r<iiani r<iioi 'the spirit of holiness' (i.e. the Holy
Spirit) rather than ndi.ian jjoi; Aa?.i **\W 'the king of Babylon' vs.
\aa o>A»; Mt 11.12 r^u.i i^o^W vs. ib. 11.11 r^u &ciiA»
'the kingdom of heaven.'

b) The synthetic structure tends to be confined to standing phrases
verging on compound nouns as in the first two examples. Likewise
i*li<u ta /bar here/ 'a son of the free (people),' i.e. free-born, noble
man' (and many other combinations with ta or Atta); «*&=»* &*-=?
'synagogue' (and countless combinations with Al*-=i); even spelled as a
single word as in rtfoortbiix 'foundation (of a building)' = rfKxqf
'ground' + rri(u»t< 'wall.'

c) Note the use of the st. est. of adjectives and passive participles as
in: Ex 32.9 r<X&o r6p 'stiff-necked'; r^pi ^6 'much of price,' i.e.
'costly, expensive,' likewise r&Mi Atiun/ (used with a fern, noun);
rdocp n ? mi 'mind-taken,' i.e. 'mindless, senseless'; i^ui \ f \ 'cursed
of life,' i.e. 'leading an accursed life'; Mt 26.7 r^p.i /yg> rgsnma
'pricey perfume.* In most of these cases, though the adjective or participle
agrees in gender and number with its grammatical antecedent, its logical
antecedent is the noun immediately following. Thus in r&u t<^
r&hn 'a stiff-necked people,' what is stiff is not the nation, but their
neck.

d) Where both nouns in a relationship of dependence are logically
determined, the dependent noun often takes, by way of anticipation, a
pronoun — so-called proleptic — referring to the second noun: e.g. cota

62 Morphosyntax and Syntax

'the son of God 1 (lit. Tiis son, of God'). See below § 1 12.

e) The second term normally follows the first immediately; only
inconsequential words can intervene, e.g. ... i<m\a ^..j »ia 'the sons of
Bala, however, ...'; ... i<cu t^ caiW 'for the god of heaven ...';
r^cu.ii v cu rf »ia 'they are sons of the righteous'; r^Lu i<6cd tal^'he
was a warrior of might.'

t) The analytic structure makes for far more possibilities and lesser
ambiguity of expression than would be the case with the synthetic
structure: thus r&£\2* ta 'the son of the king' can be expanded, for
instance, to rf&a*' r^&LW i*.icd.i t^imj ocd rti* 'that wise son of
this great queen,' when synthetically one could use only one adjective
and possibly only one demonstrative pronoun such as rCai t<\\**> la
rdscD, which, besides, could mean either 'this great son of the king' or
'the son of this great king' (or possibly also 'this son of the great king').
See Mt 16.16 r£Lii rtn&XrAi cn^ta 'the son of the living God.'

§ 74 The non-enclitic forms of the independent personal pronouns
(§ 9) are used with a finite verb, i.e. a verb form which is conjugated in
respect of gender, number, and person, where the subject so marked is
in contrast to another subject or is given some prominence. E.g. Jer
17.18 rdf< ta&£f* r£\o .ojcd m a\aiiHu 'May they be crushed, and
may / not be crushed!'; Dt 5.27 ^xL± Ajbadi Aurta' ... &Jr^ j?o\o 'You
draw near ... and you shall speak to us' (i.e. we want you to represent
us, we do not wish to speak to God ourselves); Mt 14.19
t*i\<\ ccxu£> t<**2aA& ^cd 'they the disciples (not Jesus Himself) served
the crowd.'

A personal pronoun also occurs in introducing the main character to
mark a new turn in a narrative: Mt 14.27 cD&j>jKta ^cul» «*.i ocd
K aa&i+ Ajb* 'now Jesus spoke to them immediately.' This occurs often
with a'personal name as here.

§ 75 The third person forms of the personal pronouns can, in addition
to persons spoken about, also refer to things, even inanimate, the choice
of gender and number being determined by that of the noun of the
object being referred to: aia cteLxo f*£u *d ou» 'they saw a village
and lived in it.'

Personal pronouns, relative pronoun; interrogatives 63

§ 76 Most interrogative words, when followed by the proclitic -.1,

become generalising connectives:

& "who?" — -a <» 'whoever ...'

n** "what?" .1 kS Whatever, that which'O

rdLrt "where?" .1 r&Lfx* 'wherever, where 1

»&e*f< "when?" .1 tb&ort 'whenever, when 1

i<Li^ "which?" .1 t^Lf^ 'whichever, one who 1

r&a* "how much?" .1 r&** 'as much as'

To r<iiL»r^ 'how?,' however, corresponds a shorter form: -* uy r^ />ak

d-/ as in rdr< tsioD.i yyr^ 'as I think.'

§ 77 The ubiquitous, so-called proclitic relative pronoun .1 is in-
declinable, and indicates that what follows it says something about the
antecedent:

rdhn* App cms &uilxr£f rdfLs 'the house in which I found much

money'

^9^1 ^3 alit* >aiajc&LLx r^^a 'the house whose residents came

from there'

<a$& cd^i.u.1 c**;*ni 'the prophet whom I sent to you'

v $& rd*r*3 c<^=lj 'the prophet who came to us.'

Analogous to combinations mentioned under § 76 are the particle 1
preceded by .1 cicd 'one who, he who'; .1 ,cd 'she who; that which'; ^cd
.1, .1 ^.cn, .1 ^cd all meaning 'those who; those things which.' The
two structures may be further combined as in .1 ^*> cicd , .1 r£L» r^ cicd ,
and the addition of A* makes for greater generality: .1 ^A A* 'whosoever.'

A further variation is achieved when a noun is mentioned as antecedent:
.1 r&a^ct£ *A»re? 'those stars which'; .1 **Acd ... re&suAi^ 'those docu-

X .• • ' x/ ....

ments ... which.'

The inanimate "that which" may be also expressed thorugh .1 p.p*
and -* cicd . This can be also expanded to .1 73.12* cicd , and, p.i» being
indeclinable, it can be also combined with a plural demonstrative as in
^f&.i pip* ^Jlcd 'those things which are beautiful.'

Also 'when,' esp. referring to the future, even followed by a Perfect.

64 M orphosyntax and Syntax

§ 78 Many prepositions function as logically related conjunctions
when combined with the proclitic particle -.1.

pin 'before 1 (of time) a p.4o (^3) 'before'

i&b (<») 'after' (of time) — -.1 ifc* (<») 'after'

A\)«a 'because of .1 A\)«a 'because'

vy r* 'like' (of similarity) — .1 uy^ 'just as'( 3 )

Note also -.ia 'because'; -.1 A^. 'because'; -.1 ^» 'after.' The preposition
xx 'until' is also used as a conjunction, however, without -.1 and meaning
'whilst,' 'before' (sometimes with the negative pA) as well as 'until.' As
a preposition for "until" -A i^ii Adamma VI is much more common:
e.g. T<jL*>i\ n^j-x 'until evening.' As a conjunction for "until" one
also uses -1 ^.u.
Some prepositions show a complementary distribution of allomorphs:

with a noun with a suffix

f*i\j» A^» 'because of rain' cd^O^s* 'because of it'

r£aon Al*-=» 'among the thorns' v ocdAlL^9 or v om./.n
rd^ii ^i^? 'among the wheats' 'amongst them'
r6aV.1V Q»7 ^» 'from among the rightesous'

r££W oui^ 'like a king' cndi&str^ 'like him'

Moreover, with an adverb or a prepositional phrase we find -.1 </y.r*:
iW«riT-i!t uv-p^'as in heaven.'

§ 79 Impersonal passive. A passive participle or an Eth-pattern is
sometimes used impersonally where the use of the unmarked, third per-
son masculine singular gives prominence to the fact that something is
happening or happened, with no actor matching the 3m.sg. verb being
mentioned. Thus r<i\^ cnAo^a ,cdoAj*> r*6cn ^jnSuLrt 'he became the
talk of the whole town' (lit. 'there was heard about him ...'); Mt 7.2
^ A*£.&fc*> »o&j«r «JLj^9.-i rdiXi^n 'with the measure with which
you measure out it will be measured out to you.'

§ 80 Eth- conjugations with transitive force. Some verbs in an Eth-
conjugation take a direct object: Mt 23.15 rdta*'ci r£&* a .^Jur? *j^t£&e*
'you go round the sea and the land'; 26.75 ^ax* .1 rfACb* ... *t*\i&t< 'he

This last, when followed by an Impf. or Inf., indicates a purpose or result.

Prepositions, impersonal passive, transitive Eth-conjugations; Pf., Impf. 65

remembered the word of Jesus'; Gn 42.7 jAit< ^.jci&xi^ f he recognised
them. 1

§ 81 The Perfect indicates something that happened, has happened or
had happened, thus essentially a past tense. Some Perfects may have
the translation value of the Present, which is true especially of verbs
which indicate states, permanent qualities, etc.:^ Au'ta 'I am grieved';
>j£\i /regtan/ f I desire 1 ; ^ju f we have come to know, we know 1 (cf.
novimus, ot8a|iev). See also Mt 28.6 ^k rt6m rdf f he is not here 1 (ouk
Iotw (S8e ).

The Perfect is also used with .i ^ with reference to an event or
action which will have become reality at some point in future: Mt 2.8
,ciLJd&jj£jcr£! r&* 'when you have found him.'

The Pf. is common in hypothetical conditional clauses: Mt 23.30

rtS&'cix v ocnA ^ocd ^qco r& ^'ciiat*? .soaia ^cicd q\t< 'if we had

been in the days of our fathers, we would not have been their partners.'
In similar vein is the optative use of the tense as in Mc 16.3 ^.j ^y>
A^ 'who would roll (the stone away for us)?'; Dt 28.67 "Iii the
morning you would say r£xs*f i*6c© ^.j »&c*>r< ! we wish it were
evening' (lit. 'when would it be evening?')."

The Pf. is occasionally used to refer to an action which is performed
by uttering the verb, so-called performative Perfect: e.g., lKg 15.19
... uOf Art.!* rtfro 'Behold, I send you hereby ...'

§ 82 The Imperfect is very rarely used in independent clauses to in-
dicate a future action or state. In such cases it often carries a modal
nuance of can, must, might, should, may, etc.: e.g. Mt 22.13 r^qcnj ^£&
•*'\- 'there shall be weeping there'; Gn 42.37 &*»& ,i£ ^hX 'y° u
may kill my two sons.' Such an Impf. is also common in a negative
command with rA as in Aa^At rdf T)o not enter,' since the Imperative
itself does not take r<\.

The Imperfect is highly frequent in dependent clauses complementing
another verb as in Mk 12.1 AX^u.i >ix 'he began to speak'; Mt8.18
r^H>.\ v o\ 11O..1 \ds> 'he ordered them to go to the other side'( 4 ); in

4 Even when the subject of the main verb is identical with that of the subordinate
clause: ou^j' Ao^n.yi rcLa 'he wanted to kill himself.'

66 Morphosyntax and Syntax

purpose clauses introduced by .1 as in Jn 14.2 v aaA jsuJ^^ rdi* \\t*
i**^r* 1 go to prepare a place for you'; in temporal clauses introduced
by .1 p&o or i<\ \±i as in Mt 26.34 r£^<t& ^otoj.i yihn 'before a
cock crows'; ib. 1.18 v o£&o£xj rdf.i^ 'before they came together'; Is
65.24 *ojt<f r^uLrf rrtnj rdLxa! 'before they call, I shall answer them';
in conditional sentences as in ixauj ta>r<j. v rf 'if we speak, we shall be
lacking'; in result clauses introduced by .1 </yr^ or .1 f<iil*r^: Mt 13.32
"it grew taller than all the other plants, becoming a tree rdttr^* vyr*
ciLiama «o& rcLzixx rt)L>'i£ 'so that a bird of the sky came and made
a nest among its boughs'"; ib. 54 "he taught them in their synagogues
v o1cdAu.i r<iiL»r^ 'as a result of which they marvelled'"; in final (purpose)
clauses, introduced by .1, .1 oy r^, or .7 r£i£*r^ as in Jn 5.34 ^Jui**'
..SjjAi 'in order that you may be saved'; Mt 2.13 "Herod was about to
seek the child out in order to destroy him (,o>cl» .Taoi.-t uy»^)"; Mt
5.44f. "they will persecute you so that you may become the children of
your heavenly father (i^isaui ^aar<i ,cnaia «aacn&L..i rdJL>r{:
farcus 1 y£vr\o(k ...)."

§ 83 The Participle may indicate what is happening at the moment of
speaking (Actual Present) or what often or habitually happens (General
Present): i<ii* rf\A >»r& ... Hart t<±a r£is* 'what are you looking
for? .. I am looking for my brothers'; Jn 11.42 ^3i\>n.i ndi^^xi i<ji*
j± Ziurt ^xLx 'I know that you always hear me'; Mt 5.32 Aoi.i ^o
•tr^ re&DL+a* 'one who takes a divorcee commits adultery.' The Ptc.
also expresses the idea of futurity, intention (Prospective Present) or
immediacy and certainty of realisation like the Engl, syntagm be going
to + Inf.: e.g. Gn 2.19 v oonA r<to *<&* «*\*M* 'in order to see what he
is going to call them'; ib. 15.2>\ 2kti ocd 'he is going to inherit me'; ib.
18.17 f<ir? *sl1.i -pfco 'that which I am going to, intend to do.'

The Ptc. is further used to indicate what has been going on for a while
up to the moment of speaking: Lk 15.29 vOl rdit* u\4 (f\r r^4& i<cd
l>ehold, for some years I have been rendering you service.'^)

A special application of the use of the Ptc. for Actual Present is
found in circumstantial clauses which describe what goes on simul-

5 Fr. 'Voici tant d'ann6es que je te sers'; Germ. 'Siehe, so viel Jahre diene ich dir.'

Participle; passive participle 67

taneously with the main action: Gn 18.1 "the Lord appeared to him ...
as he sat at the entrance of his tent" (rciLxzni rcL-i&= j*&d> cicdci); Nu
16.27 "Dathan and Abiram had come out, standing d^-* .x*) at the
entrance of their tents." Also belong here participles after verbs of
perception: Mt 15.31 ^Al^.i !<***; ^ v** 'seeing the dumb talking 1 ;
Ex 14.10 ^.Atf? .ta r^^»i\ out 'they saw the Egyptians coming'; Gn
21.9 tfttg^* ... t^P \a\ rtiw ^uj 'Sarah saw the son of Hagar ...
mocking.' Likewise the nominal clause, when embedded in a .i-clause,
is indifferent to the time distinction: Gn 13.1 y t^s ^* P*»^ ^Awo
col^ &u r£t Aaci co^Xlj t<a ocd 'and Abram went up from Egypt, he and
his wife and all that he had' (instead of aA i<6cd Aur*.i).

Further, the Ptc. is also found often in conditional sentences, in
apodoses as well as in protases: vv^ ^L»q&jcs* tii ^ ^i* v i*q 'and
if it also pleases us, we shall agree with you.'

§ 84 The passive participle indicates a result of a past action: ^^
'it is written' (= Germ, ist geschrieben, and not wird geschrieben). One
often comes across what is passive in form only, but active in meaning:
e.g., Lk 14.2 t<isi t*daJ «i>i-> : i .i*i i*i&^'a man who has collected
water,' i.d. dropsiac; Mk 14.13 r<i^ii rdr&> A.nT.i i<H^ 'a man
carrying a water container' (i.e. having picked up ... and carrying).

Note especially the syntagm ?\ .au Ala, which has the same value as
the Engl. (Present) Perfect / have written, expressing a result, and what
follows the preposition represents the subject of the verb: ^.r* v rfr?Sfl>
Jf v i f ^j9E>.i v »\»r^ 'many are things that we have done.' Also with a
passive Ptc. in Pa. or Af.: i*6cd AnnS».i rdLaAo^ci r£i'£oaa vyr^
,.ir^i cojl^9 K aaA 'in accordance with the commandment and instruction
which they had received from Addai'; -p+ £ ;nns* : i rd^je.i roiio
imp v jls* 'the peace treaty which I have concluded with our lord the
Emperor.' The resultative force is apparent in intransitive verbs which,
by definition, are not capable of having genuine passive forms: Spic.
43.7 fW*Acu-=i ^ uOtcnbo 'I have walked in instruction.' In a case like
the following, however, we have the usual passive participle: Mt 9.2
oy m^Ai u>A v »n,nT 'your sins have been forgiven you.'

§ 85 Compound tense: i*4cd .?£&. This syntagm, <Pf. + enclitic

68 Morphosyntax and Syntax

i^6cd>, has exactly the same range of time reference as the simple
Perfect: oocd cta&* 'they wrote,' 'they have written,' 'they had written'
or 'they will have written.'

§ 86 Compound tense: rrtia> j&L. This highly frequent syntagm,
<Ptc. + enclitic r<A<5>, indicates an on-going, repeated or habitual action
in the past: Aug. en r^a 'I was weeping, kept weeping.'

This structure is also common in irreal or hypothetical conditional
sentences: Jn 11.21 »i»r? t*Aco Ah<5* rdf Aucicd ^A* aW 'if you had
been here, my brother would not have died'; ib. 14.28 ^t^au? oArf
v odLocD ^.jji jS v oSucicd 'if you loved me, you would be rejoicing';

Jdg 13.23 a» i^Acd ,\nn^ i<£ -Au^aJ.l rtcnXr^ r^Aco r^al ClAr*

r<$!L&. f if God had wanted to kill us, he would not have accepted from
us a burnt-offering.' Here also belongs a case such as Mt 18.6
... .i oA i*Acd 'it would be more beneficial to him...'

§ 87 Compound tense: .?&£ rt&m. This syntagm, in which the verb
rtacD is not enclitic, but fully pronounced, indicates a wish, advice or
obligation of general applicability, but not a command for immediate
execution, for which one uses the Imperative. An adjective may be
found instead of a participle. E.g. :d-Am dLocn 'Be healthy!'; nd^m

.tai &»cicn 'Act thus!'

. ... a

§ 88 Compound tense: i*4cd .?d&4j- This syntagm is used in a past
context, and in subordinate clauses, instead of the simple Impf.:
^*&\ ciAcd v c^1!<jli 'before they went there.' Also in conditional or
associated clauses: &uq<B tA^i* ^* 'what ought I to have done?'

§ 89 Compound tense: j&L rfqenj. This syntagm occasionally re-
places the simple Imperfect: rd-».i j&r? tal rfqcnj* cn^lxrtti lie
gave him the authority to execute judgement as well'; rdL te*>^' rdb
v aci>&ki»:& ^Lf^I^oc£Ls 'women should never enter their monasteries.'

§ 90 Noun expanded. A noun as the nucleus of a phrase may be
expanded in various ways. Such an expanding constituent mostly follows
the nucleus, but not infrequently precedes it.

§ 91 a) An attributive adjective mostly follows its nucleus noun: Mt

Compound tense; expansion of noun phrase 69

12.35 i*Xsl^ n±s* f*$4^ !«&***> ^* i<n^ f<%a^ 'a good man
produces good things from good treasures. 1 But it may precede: rtSLznxp
rt&Brtkx f the first foundation 1 ; often with honorific, laudatory or
condemnatory epithets as in ?i*t&r^ tiso r£iaa^, 'the blessed Mar
Ephrem'; ocuIAcl. rcL+xi 'the wicked Julian.' Likewise with common
quantifiers: r<X'Ae*> rd v** 'another parable'; Mt 4.21 rQrt r<i.%Mf*
^bi 'another two brothers'; 2Cor 11.4 ^cul, rdv<* 'a different kind
of Jesus'; Jn 14.16 r^VNnta rd-u*^ 'another comforter'; rtfKxai

7 v .• • • •• • • •

r<r^*r^j^p 'many souls' as against i<V\jm r*r£^£> 'many sinners' and
nf^r^N^xJ 1*1*5.. 'many birds.'

b) A demonstrative pronoun (§ 13) may either precede or follow:

rdco **\W Or r&Asa iOcd 'this king.'

c) Likewise cardinal numerals (§ 44 a). The preceding numeral for
"one," however, emphasises the notion of unity or oneness: ima .ijj
'one flesh' (of marital union); rcLx rfiu 'even one hour'; Mt 27.14 rdfci
rdl» rrtu? 'not even with one word.' Cf. .i* r^La^'a man,' where the
numeral is equivalent to the indefinite article. In the case of other
numerals, the preceding noun tends to be put in the st. emph., but with
no functional difference: ^^ rf&acL.' or ^icu ^^ 'two days,' cf.
Mt 14.19 ^joj ^l&ci ^y^mV r<i»ui v cucd 'those five loaves and two
fish,' the noun in the st. abs. even with a determiner, «gjco; Ex 29.1
^)& 1^.1 'two rams' vs. ib. 29.2^1*3 ^bX 'the two rams.'

Where a noun is expanded by both the numeral "one" and an ad-
jective, the numeral appears either immediately before or after the noun:
n*n . nu r<ia .tu 'the only beloved son' vs. r*£.-u» i*Aa* i<X\.>l£ 'a new
wagon.'

Note also the position of the numeral for "one" in relation to an
analytical noun phrase as in Mt 5.36 rti^spx t*H*> rf&J£* 'one hair.'

Likewise with numerals other than "one": ,cdo:LjmA& a tm^.1^ ^*>
'these twelve disciples of his'; rdX-t f*$%& ^slx ^co 'these seven
lambs.'

The same rule applies to a demonstrative pronoun as to the numeral
for "one": r^SV rddS i^ql^ 'this great nation' vs. r<$ao^s*A* ^dS
'these great wonders.'

70 Morphosyntax and Syntax

Where a noun qualified by a numeral is considered logically de-
termined, the latter may optionally take an anticipatory (pleonastic)

suffix as in ixai *iH .ciodu VAv 'the two sons of Zebedee.'

* • • • ^ •

d) The quantifiers j^» /saggi/ 'many, much' and A*Ap 'few, little'
may either precede or follow the nucleus noun. AAo, however, is inde-
clinable: e.g. JLAo rdbS ^cd 'these few words'; r^tfcno^ \Ao ^<d
'these few memories'; ^JLa.V v r£*^£> 'many times'; t<r6Qp nffeniU
'many days.'

Cf. also Mt 8.10 rtlicLi2a*ai c^.icd oyrf 'such a faith as this'; Gn
41.38 rtt»i^ rdco oyr^ 'such a man like this,' but Mt 9.8 rdJ^ox
rdco oyr^jf 'such an authority.'

p.V* also functions as a kind of quantifier: Mt 27.12 r&a^ka p:b*
>xa t<X ocd 'he, however, returned no word whatever'; «i<!kcL» p.i»
'some benefit.' It may also follow a noun: -pxz* f^&acn'ctt* 'some gift.'

The ubiquitous A* /kul/ (or AcL*) may form close union with a noun:
pcu Aa (also spelled po.\ < \) 'every day'; v? r»Yn A* 'all possessions.'
In such cases it usually takes a suffixal pronoun matching the noun in
gender and number, whether proleptically (by anticipation) or resump-
tively: rtlL\o cnX* 'the entire city'; cnXo* >*jbS 'my entire soul';
t*ap£u »aaiA* 'all the sins'; f^&tsj^. ^°A^ k-A™ ' aU these things.' The
syntagm < A* + NP in st. emph.> may also have the translation value
'every,' not 'the whole': Mt 3.10 rdJLf< A* 'every tree.'

The combination of a noun with a demonstrative pronoun and A*
appears in a variety of patterns: Ex 18.18 rdco <<zxl+ cnA* 'all this
people'; ib. 11.8 otJl* rdco r&kl; Gn 33.8 rdtu txs* mX* i<jcd 'all this
encampment.'

e) A noun may be expanded by another, immediately following
noun, in which case the preceding nucleus noun is in the status
constructus: e.g. n*¥W la 'son of a king, prince' (§ 73). This synthetic
structure is often replaced by an analytic one whereby two nouns or
noun phrases are joined by a proclitic -s as in yvtajt f*$cu£*ucp 'the
belief of your son.' The second, qualifying noun may be converted into
a conjunctive pronoun as in cd^cu^ucd 'his faith' or into an independent
"possessive" pronoun as in aA* .i rdfa

Expansion of noun phrase 7 1

At times the nucleus noun phrase to be qualified by the following
Dalath phrase is wanting: Mt 22.21 i*ciiXr£ici imnX -urio.i A^&cd ciaco
K'mir^: 'Give then that which is of Caesar to Ceaesar and that which is

Of God to God'; ib. 16.23 i<*Ki«i.i' rdfi* t«a\t<3 Kit* i<a.1&» rA

'you are not thinking of things of God but of things of men. 1

f) A noun phrase qualifying another noun phrase may be transformed
into a suffix pronoun: iWnifi r^L&q? 'the book of the prophet 1 — > ™%2jx>
'his book. 1 This synthetic structure can be transformed back into an
analytic one by means of a A* .1 form when the qualifying constituent
receives some emphasis: odJl..i r<i±tt> 'his book. 1 Two alternative
syntagms are: r<\±sx> crlL.i and ml** cn^&fl?, the latter with a proleptic
pronoun.

g) When an adjective qualifies the first of the two nouns in analytical
union mediated by the proclitic Dalath, it may either immediately follow
the first noun or the second: Aphr I 29.12 ^qj^cp.i r&?^ (<&?-*.
'the good works of faith' as against f^Lsoap r£j>£j 300.1 t^'t^pf 'the
First Epistle to the Corinthians.' Compare also Gn 44.2 A* .1 r£4no>f<
r^rOoo.t 'my silver cup' with ib. 23.9 aA*:i r*&su_^ r^&tiLsa 'his
double cave.'

h) A noun may be expanded by a .i-clause. Three patterns are to be
distinguished here:

1) Such a clause may explain what is meant by the preceding noun

— epexegetical: e.g. r^jlAorda r<Si? ^oafiajjsa i^Xn »JKo\ ? 11^171 «x^tr^

'he sensed my weakness, viz. I am not able to cope with the pressures.'

2) The noun phrase serves as an "antecedent" which is referred
back to by a pronominal element in the .1 -clause — relative clause: rdfLp
rdi< toil cna.i 'a house in which I live'; Gn 35.15 AW.i am t^ihiri
rtcnXr^ ^*& cn^I 'that place where God had spoken with him.'

Such a pronominal reference, however, is usually absent when the
antecedent is equivalent to the subject or direct object of the .1 -clause:
^•Adb t»'r£! r^!aj 'the prophet who said these things' or toor*.! ^Acd
rd^aj 'these things which the prophet said.' Thus Gn 9.3 »jj.i r<£itf A*
'every reptile that is alive,' but Nu 9.13 cicd 1^.7.1 rfC^'a man who is
pure'; Dt 13.6 ALul* r^X.i i<i lui* r*tiiXr^ 'other gods whom you do not

72 Morphosyntax and Syntax

know/

Where an embedded pronominal reference is lacking inside the re-
lative clause, a preposition which would have been attached to such a
pronominal element is occasionally found attached to the relative
pronoun, whether simplex or compound: Mt 26.48 rdr* .axi* cidA
cuocto 'the one whom I shall kiss is him 1 instead of mA A&i.i cicd; Nu

22.6 ocd ^*A &Jr* \r<Xl ^a±a ocd uula SJrt u\j^?.i ^s& 'he

whom you bless is blessed, and he whom you curse is accursed.'

3) A prepositional phrase expanding a noun phrase is often
introduced by the proclitic .i: Gn 3.2 r^.itjia.i t^L rt 'the trees in
the garden'; ib. 44.15 .&A*rftr r**a\' a man like me.' But cf. Gn 3.6
ox2*-x cn\\n\ 'to her husband (who was) with her.'

§ 92 Grammatical concord 1) In the majority of cases a satellite
displays formal congruence with its nucleus in respect of gender and
number: e.g., i*aA£ i<£ba f a good king 1 vs. ^f^X i*#£X» 'good
queens'; f*1ai^ citfi* 'the men came' vs. r?£ia ,&i* 'the daughters
came'; cicd rdfiL? 'that house' vs. ,cd t*&xojL& 'that synagogue'; v: v-
^Ai 'two sons' vs. ^iiJ ^lAf 'two daughters.'

2) Some nouns, though singular in form, may refer to an entity
consisting of more than one individual member— collective nouns — and
concord with a plural verb: Ex 14.31 r&4^ ciLji 'the people feared.'

3) As regards the state, however, a satellite adjective does not
concord with its nucleus noun when the latter is in the construct state:
e.g. rzQ n*?W la 'the good son of the king.'

4) The quantifier A ? \n 'few, little' often remains unchanged with a

plural noun: Mt 15.34 r£f£o:t rdicu A ? \n 'a few small fish'; Mk 6.S

• • • •

\An r^oL.^ 'a few sick people'; Rev 3.4 rtcnsu \ 9 \n 'a few names.'
By contrast, ,^» 'many, much' may concord: Mt 13.17 r^Laj i*r£^p>
'many prophets,' butA^J rO.cu 'many fish' and ^ViiJ^. A^» 'many
things.' Similarly ^1*** 'another, other': Mt 12.45 ^Ljluf* r^jo* aj=lx
'seven other spirits,' but ib. 21.41 *ffif? c^.tlui* 'other workers' and
i*fc* x*^*m< 'another master.'

5) The verb c^cicd , especially in the syntagm A c<cicd in the sense of
"to possess," tends to be unchangeable, the 3m.sg. form serving for all

Concord; negation 73

persons and both genders: Mt 22.25 rC±±±i m± rrtio> &-A 'he had no
sons' (instead of o6cd).

6) In the case of multiple constituents the first component may
determine the choice: Mt 22.40 rrfuScii* r£L\& ^.iocta ^^ vA *- 3
r^aio 'on these two commandments depend(s) the law and the prophets.'

§93 Negation

1) rA may be used as a prefix of a noun with a negative connota-
tion: e.g. v cun&GU£*L»cp r£ 'their disbelief; ne&oiXA^e* rdL 'incorrupti-
bility, immortality.'

2) A rhetorical question is often cast in negative form. i*Acd rdf
may be used, even without referring to the past: Mt 13.55 r*Ac5 rdf
i<i^":t cnta rdcD 'this is surely the son of the carpenter?,' which is

immediately followed by v^^? *<l+?k*» &&*.*< rdf 'his mother is
called Mary, isn't she?' A negating particle may not occupy the initial
slot: ib. 56 «1Li r* JidX rftn rdf ^aAsk cn&t&rrti 'and his sisters are all
with us, aren't they?'

3) The non-existence of an entity is indicated by JLA : Mt 12.43
rd&i v ocna JLA 'there is no water in them'; Ac 4.12 ^Ij"* Jtii^a AuA
rdiMaa 'there is no salvation in any other person.' This is followed by
its fuller form, Aui* r<X: ... rd^u*r r^wuc Aui* t*i^ rdf 'for there is no
other name ...' Non-existence in the past requires r<6co: Mt 13.6 JLA
r?%flL2L aA r^Aco 'it had no root.' AuA may be used absolutely, i.e. no
missing entity mentioned: Mt 13.13 <nA SuA.i ^w Tie who has nothing.'

4) The verb is negated by rd: Mt 13.13 ^Ai£«w> rdfci v o^it r£
'they do not listen and do not comprehend'; ib.14 v a\*k$j»^ r*3f 'you
will not comprehend'; ib.16.11 v o&A£&o>r£ r& ^rt 'how have you not
comprehended?'

5) The force of the negation of the syntagm i*6cd r*\ also affects
only the immediately following constituent: Mt 15.11 p.pw r*6c5 rdf
klkJIsA niffi^ r^aosA An<±Li 'it is not that which enters the mouth
that defiles a man (but that which comes out of the mouth, that is what
defiles a man)'; ib.16.11 *d*A ^V*f< r^aiA A*, c^cicd r^ 'it was not
about the bread that I have said (that) to you.'

6) Where two coordinate nouns are negated, the negative is prefixed

74 Morphosyntax and Syntax

to each of them: Mt 6.20 ^Aa^c* rdf rdL*r£ r&a i<m» rdL 'neither
moth nor rust damages'; Jer 49.31 aA rfbLoo> r^Xo r^Hii r<\ 'it has
neither doors nor bolts.'

7) In categorical negation affecting a noun the negative may stand
detached from the noun: Gn 19.8 ia\ ^t< ^L r&x ^LS *?$*& 'two
daughters with whom no man had sex.'

8) Categorical negation is common with a noun, often in st. abs.,
preceded by rdLi, e.g. Ps 118.1 r£uioi<9 Jut* po» rdf.i.i ^A*r^
'those who are without blame in the way'; Mk 4.34 r*\ tASte? rdf*
i^Acd AXm» 'without parables he would not teach'; Ro 4.6 rdft'an* V
r<xa-x rdf.i 'righteousness without works'; Phil 2.14 ^duo'co p;b*A^
^a& rd'io rd\.l rdf.i ^iai. 'you ought to do everything without
disputing and without grumbling.' Here belongs jtirf r^ 'nobody' as in
Mk 3.27 rtLjnu Au^ AcLlj.i *i£xsa Jtjr? rA 'nobody can enter the
house of a strong man.' This kind of our*, however, does not have
immediately to follow the negator: Mk 5.3 j*£x»> rd out* nriklixad
cntor^oA 'nobody could restrain him with a chain.'

9) To negate a clause constituent other than an adjective, a finite
verb or a participle, rtam rdf or oi" is often used( 6 ): Mt 22.32
r&uii r&rt r^u^9.t i^icn r^X 'and the God is not that of the dead but of

•* •• • • •

• • •

the living'; Mk 9.37 gfiil ^p\ rdfnf Lirbo >\ *rim *A AnnSa ^.l ^

'one who receives me does not receive me, but one who has sent me';
ICor 15.51 o^sij ^ oX 'not all of us shall sleep.' The constituent
negated by sucn a combination is usually focused. A mere r*\, however,
is also found: Mt 20.26 ^in r^oau r^Ltcn rdf f it should not be like
that among you.' This is true where "neither ... nor" is meant: Mt 6.20
»»Wr* rd^r^ rdo t<snsx> r& i<i. r^ 'where neither moth nor rust causes
damage,' cited above (6). In such a case the negator may be found also
with the verb: Mt 12.32 rAo rd<n i6tUa r4 <n* oa&xj rd
.vV^f* r^iiia 'he will not be forgiven, not in this world nor in the
world to come.' Likewise where "nor" is meant: Mt 25:13 ^^.ii rA
rdiuLxl r^o ocd r^ocuA ^oiu^ 'you do not know that day nor the hour.'

10) An adjective such as \, 9 \j may be negated by a plain r^: Mt

6 Cf. Joosten 1992a.

Negation; passive; apposition 75

20:15 X>*s> *=L±r< Kdr* r<9^t 7> : i».i £ \*\j rd 'Don't I have authority

to do with mine what I like? 1 See also Mt 19.10 r*£&jr* .aowi **** r&

• . • •• •

'it is no use marrying a woman. 1

11) The focusing function is indicated by a pronoun component of
aX [< ocd i<\] (see below, § 110): Jn 1.20 rdLxs* rd?* rdr* oX 7 am
not the messiah'; lPt 1.12: Jt ndfr< «&» v ,^ ^ - » a oX 'they were
not seeking themselves, but us.'

§94 Passive

The noun or pronoun indicating the agent in a passive construction
may be mediated by the preposition Lamadh: Mt 14.8 k&w k*$W
cn^r^ 'she had been instructed by her mother (imb rf\s \nyrpbs
aforn?),' but ^s is by far the commonest: Mt 2.16 r£za^* ^* *>y?kr<
'he was made a fool of by the magis'; Lk 2.18 ^* v ocn\ AX»&f*
rtXdi.9 'was told them by the shepherds.'

§95 Apposition

1) Some nouns in apposition to another noun are virtually adjectival
in function: Mt 14.13 r^aiou rrt&r* 'desertlike place.' This is especially
true of nouns of the pattern Qattal, which indicate professional or habitual
activities, and nomen agentis with the characteristic suffix /-an/: Mt
14.26 rdt^i r^A vj 'deceptive spectre'; ib.16.4 rdfctii^ f*8ut*a *&**£
'an evil and adulterous generation'; Aphr. I 156.5 ndd** re^aa 'a
voracious mouth'; ib. I 101.4 c<iVnn«* rtih 'a corrupt (lit. corruptor)
generation.'

2) Virtually otiose is rfia^in Mt 18.23 t<£\» ntt=*;'a king'O; Ge
13.8 J*> r£*t f^^LaVL'we are brothers.'

3) Where an appositional phrase is prefixed with a preposition, the
latter is not repeated: Gn 4.2 A»yp ^cmnd' 'to his brother Abel' (Heb.
tarnx rra-nK); 2Sm 20.21 x.o.4 i<£W 1*: 'on King David' (Heb.
T)"n *f?i33), but exceptions do occur: e.g., Gn 23.7 V» o?y

The appositional character of this syntagm is confirmed by a comparison of Mt
20.1 "the kingdom of heaven is like ... rrtst^s Ajb : i' rrfLa i<)s£ rftf^'a man, a
landlord who went out in the morning ...' with ib. 21.33 "Hear another parable.
,„ nc=»t* -p^9 t<<2RLa r^sn r*&m iur^ juJ i«<a^ 'there was a certain man, a land-
lord, and he planted a vineyard ...'

76 Morphosyntax and Syntax

'to the local people, the sons of Heth.'

§96 Adjective expanded

a) The high degree or intensity of a quality indicated by an adjec-
tive is expressed by >^p or jaJ£: Mt 15.8 a+»f £& Very far'; ib. 19.25
~\ o6cn ^tfcndC 'were very surprised'; Gn 15.1 A^» ja^ Very much.*
The position of .ai£ varies: Gn 1.31 \+£x ^\ Very good 1 (Heb: yto
tiro?) vs. Ex 9.3 j^ v? imfr t<i&ccn 'a plague that was very severe.'

b) Some adjectives may be put in the status constructus and further
qualified by the following noun: e.g. ISm 1.15 r£»oi frfi»i> 'distressed
of spirit'; Ex 32.9 r&hn t<*o r&L+ 'a people stiff of neck'; Mt 13.46
t<1^6x k4+nf 'costly.' Such an adjective may, however, be followed by
a preposition which more explicitly specifies the logical relation between
the adjective and the noun: Gn 12.1 1 rrti u*= ^.*aAx 'pretty in appearance';
V- *uj£j r€a< rclsotZ 'a great physician excelling in everything.' See
also § 73 c.

c) The comparative degree of an adjective (and an adverb) is ex-
pressed not by any inflectional modification of the adjective itself, but
by means of the preposition ^a : Jdg 14.18 or? r<x9.f ^* r^Wi ciisa
r^'^r^ «;* j&^o&.i od9 'what is it that is sweeter than honey or who is
it that is stronger than a lion?' Verbs which denote qualities may also
show analogous structure: Gn 26.16 n\) ^23 &->•*-»>. 'you are much
mightier than we'; ib. 48.19 chjl» -aifrO. rrtcL^t »cdcu^ 'his younger
brother will be greater than he'; Lk 14.8 ovi^g **?**? ***<< 'someone
who is more distinguished than you.'

d) The adjective is often substantivised and used without a noun
phrase which could serve as its head: Mt 5.45 n*n\" \x i<bu. j*j.i2*'.i ocd

Jl*!ci 'he who makes his sun rise on the good and the evil'; 7.22

«<ifear£i r^r£^g> 'many will say.'

§97 Verb expanded

Most verbs are expanded and complemented by pronouns, nouns,
noun phrases, verb forms — such as finite verb forms, infinitives,
participles — .1 -clauses, adverbs or their phrasal or clausal equivalents.
The last category of complement, namely adverbials, may be considered
non-essential: whilst in the sky in A bird is flying in the sky may be

Expansion of adjectives and verbs 77

considered essential, in the next room in Someone is snoring in the next
room can hardly be so considered.

Essential complements in the form of nouns or pronouns may be
classified into direct and indirect objects. An object is direct when in
the form of a noun it can be placed next to the verb without any formal
marking: r£uAx oiix 'they sent an/the apostle. 1 A verb which is capable
of such zero complementation may be called transitive. By contrast, an
object is indirect when in the form of a noun it is necessarily mediated
by some preposition or other: e.g. rrti.NvV otoj'rf rd^'cn 'so they said
to the apostle, 1 where the Lamad is not deletable. Likewise Is 41.6 ta\
^1.1^9 cn^suA 'they help each other/

a) A direct object, however, may optionally be marked by the
preposition Lamadh, leading to occasional syntactic ambiguity: citSx
r<uAx given above may be replaced by i<ii ? \t\ oi.ix. Thus at Josh 6.7
r*£uL*.vo\ tet^kr* 'Go round the city!' the preposition Lamadh could
be analysed as exponent of direct object only on the basis of an example
such as Dt 2.3 r£icn c*ia^7 ^oiur^ ^tA'^o 'you go round this
mountain.'

b) A pronominal direct object is as a rule synthetically attached to
the verb: >cdo1.tx 'they sent him' in contrast to cnA otoV rd^oo 'so
they said to him.' But cases such as Josh 15.19 iJ&aciL' /y avian/ 'you
gave (it) to me' do occur where the pronominal suffix marks an indirect
object.

c) A direct object "them" is always indicated analytically by «jbi*
m. ox^it< f., which regulary and directly follows the verb: ^cui^ A-ip
'he received them' or 'Receive them' (Impv.).

d) A pronominal direct object of a participle is always marked
analytically with the use of the preposition Lamadh, even in the case of
"them": mi" rdr* t&aba 'I am sending her'; ^om^ Aafb* cll» 'Who is
going to receive them?,' not ^oj r<.

e) The infinitive, by contrast, is apt to mark its pronominal object
"them" either as a suffix pronoun or through ju^/^r^: ^n^'^x
'to make them' or Gn 15.5 *cui* rd&&A 'to count them.' Compare also
t&cL^'uaX 'to cleanse me' alongside *j&cu^.-t2*X with the same meaning.

78 Morphosyntax and Syntax

f) In the following cases a pronominal direct object may be de-
tached from its veij) and suffixed to Lamadh:

i) Emphatic or contrastive fronting as in Gn 41.13 A^! </v£o>r^ ,\
*±n\ aaAci ,jk.u 'me he restored to my office, but him he nanged.'
Such an object often precedes the verb: Lk 14.9 i*xo cn^ci u>Xi ^6 cicd
'one who invited you and him. 1

ii)With another co-ordinate object as in Gn 41.10 Auj=j ^»ir*
r^a&uj A^9 ^ - t^1*-o>r^ 'he threw us into the prison ... me and the
chief baker.'

iii) With some particles as in Gn 38.10 cn^ **rt col^art 'he killed
him also';lSm 7.3 ,cdo*ojA9 aA ,cDcuAa& 'Serve him alone'; Gn 39.9
^ ^ rdLrf -pjpo ,jl^9 o>jqu rdL 'he did not withhold from me anything
but you.'

iv) Where both objects of a verb are pronominal: Acta Thomae 173.
7 f<2*ci&A r£aucii ^o cn^ cnu.au 'he showed to him him, i.e. Thomas,
from afar'; 2Sm 15.25 aA ,-L.oiu 'to show me it.'

g) The proleptic use of object pronouns (see § 112) is highly fre-
quent: r^TaA* cDjix 'he sent him (, i.e.) the son' or, rarely without the
preposition, rtis* cn^.-ut. In sum, Syriac is capable of marking a noun
phrase as direct object in a variety of ways with apparently no functional
opposition between them:

iWu\t o\nn 'they received an/the apostle'

r<n>\v »CDClL=10
fallal T 1 »CDCuLaU3

Moreover, the sequence of the two constituents can be reversed, resulting
in four additional patterns, though the suffix pronoun would then be
resumptive.

h) Some verbs may take two direct objects: Job 39.19 AJr^ jlsW
f<Lm\ <*>1«£ 'you clothe his neck with weapon'; Jer 35.2 ^oji^ f<£*^
r^&ui 'let them drink wine'; Ps 80.5 r^iL^.Ta r&ijA .^cui* &l^or?
'you fed them bread with tears.'

i) Only one of two direct objects may be marked by the preposition
Lamadh, and the object so marked is mostly the grammatical subject of

Expansion of verbs 79

the underlying active voice clause: e.g. Nu 20.26 ,ci>a&*j ^icord; jAxrtti
'and he stripped Aaron of his garments 1 ; Jer 25.15 rc^i ^otnNiN ai*Axn£
'Let all the peoples drink it 1 ; Dt 4.9 ^>in\ ^oji< ^.t'ok' 'Let your
children know them.'

§ 98 Verbs expanded other than by noun phrases or pronouns.

Verbs may be further complemented by —

a) Infinitive: A^ntoiA rdtl/ rf\A 'the boy wants to eat'; yi\j
o\&*b*\ 'he finished speaking'; yinmX u>tt< rA 'he could not stand';
Gn 8.21 t<Lir& cnVl\«a\ .and* ^a>cif^ r^X 'I shall not curse the earth

• v • • • • ••

any more'; Dt 4.10 »s>$o AjiraA «a£\r£j 'they shall learn to fear me.'

b) Imperfect: Lk 18.13 ;&* u ,cpci \ » > rA *±t* rfAcn r^ajl i<\
i<j?t\ 'he would not even raise his eyes to heaven'; Josh. Styl. 3.12 »\

vOf .aci&^r* &^_=i*Ai 'you demanded me to write to you'; Mt 7.4 ,ociax
rdL>^ ixir^ 'Allow me to take out the mote.' Although the lead word is

not strictly a verb, the following cases are analogous: Jer 9.12 a
i<:jcd A^'&nj 71 qui rrf?^ 'who is the man that is wise enough to
understand this?'; Hos 14.10 *»Acn A£&m Tn»«i»ii ai» 'who is the one
who is wise enough to understand these things?'

c) .i + Impf., which is far commoner than bare Impf.: Gn 19.22 r<X
p.V* .ta^.^ i<ii^ nyr** 'I cannot do anything'; Jdg 3.28 cuuLz rA
in\.i.i *xir<\ 'they did not allow anyone to cross over; Mt 26.9 nyr**
^n rdcn ^ u.i r^AcD 'tihs could have been sold for much'; Mt 16.5
r£ajA ^Qcn^Li ^aamj.i o<\, 'they forgot to take bread with them'; Mt

16.3 ^OJtt&Ai.l ^&Jr* ^-^.li rA rdcn r^iai.t r*&6dir? 'the signs of

this epoch you do not know how to interpret'; Mc 6.7 ^r? luiji .,**
^ik ^ik 'he began to send them out two by two.'

d) Participle: Mt 19.14 &6\ ^rf tS:X\ odcLu 'Let the children
come to me'; Ac 3.2 aA v? ^*rr>o ^^v^? often ^xl^n 'they were in the
habit of bringing and placing him'; Mk 5.17 Atr£i.i oupo ^±=> cu\x
a4 'they began to beg him to go away'; Jn 5.19 -pis* .ial rrfa u\V* i*\
'the son can do nothing.'

e) Verbs of sense or intellectual perception, or verbal communication
are complemented by —

i) the proclitic particle Dalath: .^cul. rt&rtx c^Lx 'he heard that

80 Morphosyntax and Syntax

Jesus had come. 1 The verb tsyirf often gives the contents of a com-
munication in the form of direct speech, and yet introduced by the
proclitic: Lk 14.9 rdmX rdfco* jacn.i uOl te*r£i 'he might say to you,
"Cede the place to this one"/ Likewise with verbs of related meaning:
Mt 2.4 rddujEs* xl»&£a r&£»i*:t ^cnA r^6co Af£jb* 'he kept asking
them, "Where is the messiah going to be born?" 1

ii) Verbs of perception often take as direct object a noun denoting a

person or a thing followed by a clause indicating what is observed or

perceived about him or it: with a .i-clause — Gn 1.4 rrtiaXr^ i*ui

VAx.i rtfcncuA ( God saw the light that (it was) good'; Mt 25.24 ^ju

rtLxn JJr* i^ta^.1 uOf &uocd 1 knew that you are a hard man'; with a

.JA-Clause— EX 2.11 r^' €a* f**n>ft t<uS3 .T* n^' S^* f<<n>y\ rfu»

'he saw an Egyptian striking a Hebrew'; Mt 26.40 .1* ..cut* *i£jtr£
^o*».;i 'he found them asleep'; with no conjunction and with a ptc.
instead of a finite verb — Gn 21.9 vyA^* ... i\oS \a\ i*%o> &U»
'Sarah saw Hagar's son ... sporting'( 8 ); Jdg 3.25 1*. rtoq* ^ocDiio ^y»
Au» riiir^ 'they saw their master lying on the ground dead.'

f) Object complement. A structure similar to the one illustrated by
Gn 21.9 and Jdg 3.25 cited in the immediately preceding paragraph is
one whereby a constituent associated with a direct object constitutes
with the latter a nominal clause: Gn 5.2 «oji< t<is» r^axuci **'.i 'he

V^^. .. . a. a

created them male and female' (= they were m. and f.); Gn 30.6 &io
»& ox^ax. 'she called his name Dan'; Is 3.4 ^cn^iaiai r^ill^ yi**rt
'I shall set the youth as their leaders/

g) Asyndetic complementation. Besides examples quoted above
where two verbs are simply juxtaposed without any formal marking of
subordination, there are cases of tighter cohesion between the two verbs,
so that hardly any other word intervenes between them: Gn 27.14 AiVjf
? mi 'he went (and) took'; Ex 4.19 A.* uvcLacn 'Go back'; Gn 25.34 yih
\it< 'he got up (and) went'; Mt 14.12 cn&x olax ,cnoJL»A& cta.toci

^.cijl^A cucu* o^r^o oinD 'and his disciples approached, took his
corpse, buried, and came, reported to Jesus 1 ; Mt 24.25 A..t»i* &£*.in 'I

8

Cp. Gn 26.8 t<oAi -p+ vv£^ .** Aum»i<\ >(nuu> 'he saw Isaac dallying with
Rebecca.'

Expansion of verbs 8 1

told beforehand'; Aphr. I 52.14 i*6cd vyA» «*Ac» p«» (Pa pass.
Ptc.) 'was promised beforehand'^; Gn 45.13 »ardL ci&Lur^ ctacD***
'Bring my father down quickly'( 10 ); Lk 14.5 ,0ms* rdk* 'it pulls up.' The
two verbs mostly share same subject, and many of them indicate physical
movement.

h) A verb may be complemented by a participle in particular which
concords with the subject, indicating a contemporaneous and accom-
panying circumstance: Mt 16.1 aJk v> mf*w ... rdy* <ta o?.to 'the Pharisees
came up ... testing him.'

i) Cognate objects. A verb may take an object noun derived from the
same root as that of the verb. In most cases such an object is further ex-
panded by an adjective or its equivalent, so that the real complement of
the verb is such an adjective: Nu 11.33 rdkcuc* ntoi^la r£i<te* r&eaci
r£aft ja^.i 'and the Lord dealt the people a very great blow'; ISm
20.17 cnMuif cuL&y.i rdkMuf 'he loved him with self-love'; Mt 2.10
r&a*' r<$9?» cu.iw 'they rejoiced greatly.' From an example such as
r£Lt9 nf&cu* Au^d 'he died a terrible death' or rcLi iurf outou ^i*

• • • • • • ••

'it perished for the last time' where the verbs are hardly transitive, it is
obvious that these are not direct objects in the usual sense, but rather
adverbial complements.

j) Lamadh-less infinitive. An infinitive without the prefomative
Lamadh is often added to a verb in order to reinforce the latter or
indicate the tone of insistence: Gn 15.13 *Jife *.&a Do know'; Aphr. I
465.11 r£jLa rdjasa.i 'so that he can build (and not destroy).' Such an
infinitive may follow the head verb (Dn 9.21 .otas* jjia 'it did fly
away') or be separated from the latter (Aphr. I 637.3 r£is*A t<\^rg
ALJ^u 'Why did you indeed sin?'). This kind of infinitive remains
verbal in nature, capable of taking all kinds of complements, but where
an adjective, numeral, relative clause and the like is to complement it, a
straight nominal form is used instead: t<i*n rdKce* Al*» 'he died a

9 On the repetition of the enclitic, note also Lk 13.7 rd* <<*£ rdi* rdkrfr, but it
need not be repeated as in ib. S iOi* rd^a *&* 'I come looking for ...'

Note the variety of syntagmas with the same verb: Gn 18.7-cocuaaLm* <aq>tfl> 'he

cooked it quickly'; ib. 41.32 w^^S redULt* -Tcgtoba 'God hastens to do it.'

82 Morphosyntax and Syntax

terrible death 1 (quoted above); rdro A\,nAu .icuAa *<X\q .iji 'this one
shall be killed once only.'

§ 99 Verbs expanded by adverbs or their equivalents. A verb may
be modified by an adverb or its phrasal or clausal equivalent, the latter
being an adverbial noun phrase, an infinitive, a prepositional phrase, a
subordinate clause introduced by the subordinating conjunction .1 or its
various combinations with interrogatives such as .1 ,Aejfrf 'when, 1 i<£»r^
.1 'where,' .1 oy^ 'as' (of manner, similarity) etc. (§ 76) or other
conjunctions such as ^j< 'if,' *i 'where' and x* 'when.' These adverbials
indicate a time, place, reason, manner, condition or such like. Some
examples are: Gn 42.7 &ur£^to „om^ AW 'he spoke with them
harshly'; Lk 2.49 rtamr&f >\ r<\6 »a^ Ama 'it is proper that I should be
in the house of my father'; Acts 5.21 r^L&x JL. oxl£i 'they went out at
daybreak'; Ex 23.17 -p&o u^Slao.i Aa rtyAu f*£lxa .<^J-=n Wft
*<l<ca 'three times per year every memory (!) of yours should appear

before the Lord'; Mt 2.2 aA .iSfo«*A *•#«*<! 'we have come to worship
him'; ib. 2.1 -n*A Au^as ^cul. .tLApcT ^.i .i* 'when Jesus was born in
Bethlehem'; ib. 2.8 »jar<au a J* >aLSatkxi±xr<x rc» 'when you have
found him, come (and) tell me'; Jdg 4.8 r^J? Ajrfc &i+ Ju t* rA 11* ^
'should you go with me, I shall go.' Cp. further Mt 28.7 Ay^n ^4\ 'Go
quickly' with ib. 28.8 Av^ Atrta 'and they went quickly.'

§ 100 Prepositions modified by a prepositional phrase or adverb.

When a preposition is complemented by a prepositional phrase or adverb
instead of by a substantive, the proclitic Dalath is prefixed to the latter:
e.g. Mt 10.37^.1 ^o vV r£s*i< 01* r£?r* ^uji.i ^j> 'he who loves
(his) father or mother more than me'; Mt 26.55 rOni^ Aa!.i vy r^
^o^nAj 'you have come out as if against a bandit'; ib. 20.14 rdcnA
crOf.i us^rt \lkrt rdiut* 'I shall give to this last one as to you'; ib.
21.46 mi oAcd ^.iur? t<iaiA.i oy n£ 'they regarded him as a prophet.'
Cf. alsoMt 6.10 t<iiirnn rd^i^ 'as in heaven'; Gn 4.13 ,c5 rt£4
sisu&Ax ^o t^oA^js) 'my sin is greater than to be forgiven.'

§ 101 Clause structure. Two types of clause may be recognised:
verbal and nominal. A verbal clause contains as one of its core constituents
a finite verb (Pf., Impf., Impv.) which may include within itself its

Prep, modified by a prep, phrase or adverb; clause structure 83

grammatical subject as in r£a&± btabi* I wrote a book 1 or the subject
may be positioned outside of the clause nucleus either before or after
the verb as in r&r&a jA* i<uAx f the apostle sent an envoy' or r£a&&
r^iAjt oa&k 'the apostles wrote a book.' The position of the participle
in this scheme of classification is ambiguous. All other well-formed
clauses may be regarded nominal.

§ 102 The Syriac nominal clause displays a rich variety of patterns
and structures capable of expressing rather subtle nuances of predica-
tion^ 11 ) Leaving aside clauses with Aur* to be dealt with later, the
Syriac nominal clause may be formally classified according to the number
of its core constituents, mostly three but occasionally two or four. In
addition, one can identify three structural meanings which may be
assigned to each of those patterns: descriptive, identificatory, and
contrastive.

§ 103 Examples of bipartite nominal clauses are: Lk 22.26S «£i&jr^
rd^'cD r£ 'you are not like that'; Gn 9.12 r&iio : i r*$r? i<?cd 'this is
the sign of the covenant' (cf. ib. 17 r&xlnx rdfcV? ,co i^Acd); Mt 5.12
i<tSp¥ 7 j^g> ^t>^ 'your reward is plentiful in heaven'; 9.37 ?<$£*»
^icuL\ rf\\4a ^» 'the harvest is abundant and labourers are few'; Gn
27.22 am\i rdi.i**? AlxXo jacin % ,\t r^Lo 'the voice is that of Jacob
and the feel of the hands is that of Esau'; 33.13 v »\\, rf*X\ 'the
children are young'; Ru 1.16 ,mXr^ *^cnXr^ &*+ »^*l&: 'your people is
my people, your god is my god.'

§ 104 The standard tripartite nominal clause contains an enclitic
personal pronoun (§ 10), which brings the immediately preceding clause
constituent into focus. The enclitic is normally that of the third person
concording with the subject: e.g. Jn 8.39 oco pcoiar^ ^l*.i .jiarf 'our
father is Abraham'; Mt 16.16 r&ujcs* ocd &Jr^ 'you are the Christ.' The
enclitic, however, may be assimilated in form to the preceding constituent
when it is a personal pronoun: Mt 24.5 t<xx*j&> ndr^ rdc< 'I am the
Christ.'
The sequence of ocd followed by its enclitic form is spelled as one

11 For details, see Muraoka 1987 (1996) §§ 102-108 and the literature cited there.

84 Morphosyntax and Syntax

word in the form of cuocd: e.g. Mt 16.20 r£u*je* cuocd 'he is the
Christ. 1 By contrast the combination of the feminine ,cd is ,cd ,to y pro-
nounced /hiyi/.

Where the constituent immediately preceding the enclitic consists of
more than one word, there occurs a discontinuous constituent, with the
second and subsequent words following the enclitic: Gn 18.27 i<Sf*fi
rtoi^o rdi^ t<is+ 'and I am dust and ashes'; Jn 8.53 SJrt r&£\
^* kJri Jm4 'why are you greater than our father?'; Jonah 1.8

«ljI &Jr* rd-.r^ ^o 'Which people do you belong to?'; Gn 4.9
»ui*.4 1^ i<ii* cD^ci^i 'Am I then the keeper of my brother?'; Dt
31.2 rd^ooi y; Y^ ^^m^o rdi< r^rtoo «ta 'today I am hundred and
twenty years old. 1

§ 105 Schematically presented and leaving prosodic aspects out of
consideration, 'David is my master' may be rendered in Syriac by four
tripartite structures:

a):uo* aw ,teb( 12 ) P-E-S( 13 )

b)»te* ocd x*ax P-E-S

c) ocd itoa ruo.i S - P - E

d) cicd ruci.i »tea P-S-E

The last pattern is not very widely attested to: e.g. \*\f ^.<^a A^I
ocd Oari 'you are master of our bodies'; ocd &Jr^ iiu 'you are holy';
cic5 i^Lx» rM&XrA' myire 'Christ is a mystery of God'( 14 ); Mt 12.8S
f^iiftf.i ocd cD*ta r?&ax.i cd^ 'the son of man is lord of the sabbath';
Odes of Solomon 5.2 ocd HJri ,tai» 'you are my hope'; Jn 9.9S oico
ocd 'this is him.'

•

§ 106 A pronominal subject of bipartite nominal clauses may be
deleted in a relative clause, a clause complementing verbs of knowledge
or perception etc., or a circumstantial clause. Such deletion is extremely

12 Pronounce: (a) /mini d£wid/, (b) AQwidu m5r/, /dawid mSm/ and /nfir cfiwidu/
respectively.

13 S = subject; P = predicate; E = enclitic pronoun.

14 References: Euphemia, p. 13; Bedjan, 7. Sarugensis, I, pp. 222; Ephrem, L'tvangile
concordant, p. 2.

Nominal clause 85

rare with the first and second persons. Examples are:
Acta Thomae 194.15 chjl» v? n ? »fa '(things) which are far from if; Lk

21.21 f^i'tans* .. -£Jr< cnteLpl «A*r^ •• •£"*!? ******* t»V^

'those who are in Judaea ... and those who are in it ... and those who are
in villages'; Mt 15.31 K? vi\t'i\so.i n^V^o K >\\yo.i r£a£%" ^\i.. '...
saw the dumb speaking and the maimed recovering'; Acta Thomae 200.4
,» a* TEunr^ cnA 'to raise him up alive.'

The enclitic is normally retained in causal clauses: Ex 5.8 A^s*
^aif< r£\^a.i 'because they are idle.'

Where there are two or more coordinate predicatives, the identical
enclitic subject need not be repeated: Ac 1.11 ^Jui* K? «*un i<is*
t<i»Lxa ^.lujQ 'why are you standing and looking at the sky?' but ib.
2.33 .gu&jf* v > <**Aa ^Aui* ^y» 'you see and hear' (tyiets Kal

0X£tT€T€ Kal dKOfeTC).

§ 107 Structural meaning Where "David is my master" is, or can be
construed as, a reply to the question "What is David?", the nominal
clause may be said to be descriptive in meaning. If it is, or can be
construed as, a reply to the question "Who (or: Which) among you (or:
them) is David?", its structural meaning is that of identification. Finally,
"David is my master" may be in contrast, whether explicitly or implicitly,
with, say, "John is my servant."

Of the four patterns mentioned above (§ 105), a and d are usually
descriptive, b identificatory, and c contrastive. For example —

a) Descriptive: rdco ocd <Afe* 'Is this your master?'; Aphr. 1 116.9f
•coo&oai. «<Lir< ^r^^ip 'its makers are many.' For examples of (d),
see above, § 105 end.

Where the subject is a personal pronoun, the bipartite construction
<X + pron.> is the norm: Mt 8.26 ^a&Jt* ^£Acu».-t r<i2*A 'why are
you fearful?'

b) Identificatory: Mt 27.11 t<*haaLx f^' pro iur<? 'are you the
king of the Jews?'; Lk 7.19 i*A*i<ri ocd SCirt 'are you the one who is to
come?'; Jn 4.29 rCuaJK^a cuocd (= * ocd ocd) 'he is the messiah.'

The enclitic ocd may. be replaced by one matching the preceding

86 Morphosyntax and Syntax

personal pronoun: Mt 24.5 r6**j£a rdi* r<ic* 7 am the messiah.' With
the second person, aw Hurt, for instance, seems to be preferred to Aur*
&ji< perhaps for the sake of euphony: note Mt 14.28 ocd Jur^ ^ as
against ib. 27 rdt< rdi* 'it's me/

This structure is highly frequent with interrogatives as predicates:
oi» 'who is it that ... ?'; cJLrt Aaykaw/ 'where is it that ... ?'

c) Contrastive: Mt 20.15 ndi* j=^ rdr<ci t<i+a ud^ 'your eye
is evil, but I am good'; Jn 8.23 ^a rdrfo •g&Ir^ &wA^!» &> *a^«^
rdr? A4A.1' 'you are one of those who are below, but I am one of those
who are above.' The same structural meaning can be expressed in a
bipartite form with the subject preceding: Jn 15.5S rdj&a^ rdr<
r*&xax ^oiui<o 'I am the vine and you are the branches.'

§ 108 There are found on occasion quadripartite nominal clauses as
an extension of the pattern P — E — S used apparently in order to avoid
clumsiness or misunderstanding: Dt 7.9 rtfcnAV^ a* ocd uvdiXr^ ^■to*
'the Lord your God is the God'; Mt 13.39S rdt+a cuocd ^oca^ciri
'their sower is the evil one.'

§ 109 Existence, location and Ju^,( 15 ) That some object exists
("existential" clause) or is to be found at a specific location ("locative")
is normally expressed with the mediation of the particle Aur*, though
the latter may be absent as in Mt 1.23S ^jl^ rrtnXr^ 'God is with us';
Gn 41.12 rd/ia^ i<»Ai &L± *2*&a 'and there was there with us a
Hebrew lad.' Compare Lk 1.66S cn^ i<ta£.i cd.** t* 'the hand of the
Lord (was) with him' with ib. Pors^x &6cd Aui* i<.t».i cn:ui*.

With very few exceptions the unsuffixed Au rt has a logically inde-
terminate object whose existence or non-existence (the latter with AuA*
/layt/) is indicated. Conversely, when the subject is determinate, the
particle is, if used, suffixed with the matching pronoun, and then the
utterance is not about the existence or non-existence of an entity, but its
location, its whereabouts: e.g., Jn 4.37 rtiixx nf&Xs* cnuAur? r^.icaa
'herein is the word of truth.'

Both sequences, NP - Aui* and Aur* - NP, are attested with little

15 See Muraoka 1977.

4ur<; focusing an; antecedentless relative clause; prolepsis 87

difference between them.( 16 )

In addition to the "existential" and "locative" uses, Aure* is also used
as a substitute for a pronominal enclitic of tripartite nominal clauses:
e.g. Mt 12.8 t<i$t<x cnia ,cncidurf f^&ajc.i cd%^ f the son of man is the
lord of sabbath 1 ; Lk 19.46 ,cDo<Vure* r^CoY^ jk^a ,&*s 'my house is the
house of prayer*; Mt 13.38 r^oXi ouiu^ i*e)u ido 'and the Held is the
world.' This development appears to have been reinforced under the
influence of Greek, as seen in the considerably higher frequency of the
syntagm in the Peshitta Old Testament and the Hexapla compared with
the Peshitta New Testament.

When some object is said to have existed in the past, the enclitic
r?6cD follows Aui*: thus r£icu o6cd )ui< rtirnla 'there were fishes in

• • • • m

9 W

the river'; r<$\ J uAx rtSILvn &6cd Auc* ^o& 'there was there a beautiful
city.'

Applied to the past, rrticn Aurer is occasionally treated as indeclinable:
Lk 2.7 rt&Lax ^aA r<6cn IkA 'they had no place,' instead of JkAci>.

§ 110 Focusing function of the enclitic ocd. In many of the exam-
ples cited above the enclitic ocd, sometimes made to match formally the
preceding component, serves to mark focus or prominence on the
immediately preceding clause constituent. Similar function may be
identified where the preceding constituent is other than a pronoun or
noun phrase: Mart. 1:227 paen ^ ±^r> t<cnXr^ ocd .i*A 'it is the only
one God that we worship'; Spic. 1.15 &-=jl ocd ^Xrtbi ^ 'if it is
learning that you desire'; Jdg 7.2 iJ$^U ocd ,x. r* (r^ut* is fern.) 'it is
my hand that won me victory'; Aphr. I 140.27 cVi6cd n*?n\ ocd p^i'oj
^ocdA 'it was fire that was licking them'; Mt 12.33 »cDoir<3 ^o r£i!L rer
4^L <Ve* t-^ ocd 'for it is by its fruits that the tree can be assessed.'
See also above, §93.11.

§ 111 Antecedentless relative clauses. A relative clause may lack
an explicit antecedent, amounting to 'that which; one who, he who' and
the like: e.g. ocd .tjJ A^a t^ \,»\t.t 'he who controls all is one'; Mt
5.44 Ij^x.i o.tsl^ 'Do what is good'; 8.10oi»^ *»cW& tearero 'and he
said to those who were coming with him.'

16 See Joosten 1996: 100.

88 Morphosyntax and Syntax

This type of relative clause of anonymous reference, however, com-
monly takes a dummy antecedent such as a demonstrative pronoun, an
interrogative pronoun or p-v*: e.g. Is 56.4 rdi* f<a^.i pi» ^a\
'they choose what I desire 1 ; Josh 10.11 r^r^a ci&Lp*.! o6cd ^»i< ? ^nr>
P^txia \+iaut< pisi ctaiuW -cucd j» rrtta.i 'more were those who
died with hailstones than those who the Israelites slew with the sword 1 ;

Mt 5.6 f*$cM<<?A x?*?-59 y? * .°Q '* ^A* 1 ^ •£L a3UJ ?<Aj 'Blessed are those
who hunger and thirst for righteousness 1 ; Mt 10.40 ^*\ Ann** ^.i ^*>
AnnS» , i 1 A t.i 'he who receives me receives him who has sent me'; Mt

13.13 cnxs* Ajd^Lxu cnA b^rtx ocdci 'that which he has will also be

... .. .. ...

* .

taken away from him.' These deictics may be multiplied: .i ^i ocd, ocd
.i td.i» ^Acd. Similar are combinations such as a ^* A*, .i t<±»r^ A*,

.1 ^A*n£ A^.

§ 112 Prolepsis. When a person or a thing is considered contextually
definite, Syriac is fond of referring to such an entity in advance with the
concording pronoun first, and later specifying it by using the noun
phrase itself. This taking-in-advance, prolepsis (irpdXiyla?), may occur
in various syntactic relations.

a) Simple prepositional adverbial adjuncts

r*$T\ » ^fwn ma rrficn jsA^o 'he was teaching in the boat'
**»A\n ens 'on that same night'

b) Indirect objects

r^A^wA mA Atfear* 'she said to the king'

c) Direct objects

rdkA^aA cnlao or rfAA^* oiYnn 'he accepted the word'
kAmA ^jf< Aap or rA» ^r* Aao 'he accepted the words'
r<\»iA ^cnA rdi^ Ann** 'I accept the words'

d) .i -mediated analytical substitute for construct phrases
rt: tea* ,cnc&* 'the words of the Lord'

e) .i -mediated prepositional adjuncts

cD^iisi.i ^ax&i*. 'together with his daughters'

f) With A* 'all', every'

Prolepsis; compound sentence 89

.noil* 'all the nations'
g) With numerals

rf&L-ts* t»cn*&*& 'the two cities'
h) With possessive pronouns A* .1

rtfcn^oi rCuA'r txrL^i^.i ^oaA*.i 'the names of the twelve

• • * • ^^"

apostles' (Mt 10.2); r^&ba.i mX* .1 r^V*»x»'the ministers of

the word 1 (Lk 1.2)

i) Third person independent pronouns

r£L*nirt cicd «tofr^' Jeremiah said'
• •• • . ••

iMrreii i<^cd jCD 'tO do this 1

^.ial i<}cd ^cd r<my* ^r£ r^cn rdf 'Surely the tax-collectors
also do that?' (Mt 5.46)
j) Without*

r^ota uyrf cboijj ^•.7 r^6co »cDci&*r^ 'now his appearance was
like a lightning' (Mt 28.3)

A proleptic pronoun may be separated by an intervening word or words
from the noun phrase to which it refers: Mt 13.56S aA r<i»u^ *s*
^cni^ ^Jlcd 'whence did this one get all this?'; Ac 8.10 clScd
rsj i<a5< cn!Lai 'this is the great power of God.'

§113 Compound sentence. A topicalised clause constituent is
placed at the beginning of a clause and is subsequently referred back by
means of a concording pronoun: Ps 125.2 mi" v? .ytA r*Ha\ -p\*iar<
'Jerusalem is surrounded by mountains'; Aphr I 33.9 i\*? m \*\ At*p
cajuaiioo Aaojkrf cd^oamucd 'for in the case of Abel his offering was
accepted because of his faith'; Mt 17.27 jA& n }.<*"* r&So.u rdoi
'the first fish that comes up — open its mouth!'

EXERCISES

(1) Transliterate the following piece into the Latin alphabet, ignoring
silent letters. [§§ 2-3, 6]

cnodk bam t<Lirtd .r£i.tr^ duo i^u Aii rtfcnAr^ rtfia du-xts

A^l r€&ut» r^cnAr^.1 ciujoIo r&haco&i *JiW A-i! i^ioiuQ CDCLaO
• • • • •• • • • • • •• •

.r^tCDCU r^OCDO :r£ s tCDOJ r^ciau irtcnXrt t»r<CI .rCLzri *\£t4

• . • «••• •••• • • •

• • .• •••••• • • •

r£^lA i*\o r^fLajLuXo r6isLf^ r^icncuA rtfcnXr^ rrtoo .r<^<ixjjA

r^ocnj rtfcniW l»r<o . .Tjj r^sacu r^taJ r^ClCDCl r<i»V r^ocnd

.••• • ••• •• • • *r • • •

XsL±d .t<izri\ rCLzri Auja oeti r^ocnjo Kl^sa Ai.\-.,^in c<\ »n1

• «^ • • • • .• •» •• •• • * • _J% ** "

• • •,• • x^ # * *• • ••.•••• • •

rCL^ijL nS »nt\ rtfcnXr^ r^too .r^L^'cD rfcicDO r<%»n1 *» A^A.l

rrtfcnA'r^ t»r*o .^1^*1 r£sacu r<fiaJ nfcicDO r<£»V r^cicno

• • • • • x^ ,# •• • • ^ >^ • • ••

3Lb

•• • •

rCL&X r^Yl^No rdilr^ r^iT»-i»\ rtfcnir^ r^ioo .rdJL^cn rtfcicDO
• •••• • •• • • + •

• • • • .• •

(2) Rewrite the following in the Estrangela script. Silent letters have
been added within the brackets.

wep)mar ^alahaO: tappeq ) ar c a( ) ) ted( >)&(>) ^sba^) dmezdra c zar c a( ) )
lgenseh w( ) )ilana( ) ) dfe( > )re( > ) d c aved pe( ) )re( > ) lgenseh: dnesbteh beh
<al > ar c a( > ): wahwa(>) hakannaO. wa(>)pqat > ar c a( > ) tedOaO c esba(>)
dmezdra c zar'aO lgenseh: wi( ) )lana( > ) d c aved pe( > )re( > ) dnesbteh beh
lgenseh: wahzaO ^alahaO dSappir. wahwa( ) ) ramSaO wahwa(>)
safraO yawma( ) ) datlata( ) ). weOmar 'alahaC'): nehwon nahhireO
baiqi'aO da§mayya: lmefraS bet ) imama( :> ) llelyaC^: wnehwon

92 Exercises

laOtwataO: walzavneO walyawmata(>) wla&iayyaO. manhrin
barqi c aO daSmayya lmanharu c al ^ar c a( :> ): wahwaO hakanna^). wa ( vad
^alahaO tren nahhiieO rawrvep): nahhiraO rabbaO lSultanaO
di( ) )mama( ) ): wnahhirap) z c ora( > ) lSultanaO dlelyaO: wkawkve( :> ).
wya(h)v >ennon ^alahap) barqi c a( > ) daSmayyaO lmanharu c al > ar c a( > ).

(3) By using all the independent personal pronouns, write out short
sentences in Syriac: "I [both m. and f.] am beautiful [\*£x and *rf : +~]"
"You are beautiful," etc. Make sure that you use the enclitic forms of
the pronouns. [§§ 9, 10, 17].

(4) Decline fully the adjective «jc-»xo "sacred; saint" and the noun
i*K\» "word" (ol.

(5) Attach all the suffixed personal pronouns to t» "master" (sg.),
i*#\» "word" (sg.), rtaSt* "gods" (pi.) and rfKiiJ "daughters" (pi.),
and the preposition JL: "on." [§§ 40, 41, 42, 46]

(6) Conjugate the following verbs fully in the pattern indicated:

ts* "to deny" (Pe: §§ 54, 57; § 55, Type 1); *Aa "to open" (Pe: § 55,
Type 3); v^.i "to sleep" (Pe: § 55, Type 2; 56); .ax* "to tell a lie"
(Pa: § 57); it* "to proclaim" (Af); uvt* "to go round" (Ethpe); *iax
"to be praised" (Ethpa); .amj "to take" (Pe: § 61; § 55, Type 3); jAj»
"to bring/take up" (Af: § 61); .isrf "to perish" (Pe: § 62; § 55, Type
2); l*i* "to feed" (Af: § 62); ^Au "to sit" (Pe: § 63; § 55, Type 6);
-a\* "to learn" (Pe: § 63); ^:u "to make known" (Af: § 63); i^l* "to
build" (Pe: § 64); ,**• "to be glad" (Pe: § 64); ,x* "to depart" (Pa: §
64); >*1 "to let go of f (Af: § 64); ^o.i "to judge" (Pe: § 65); ^cii "to
move" (Af : § 65); ,ucu "to have rest" (Ettaf : § 65); i is "to rob" (Pe: §
66); A2l^ "to introduce" (Af : § 66).

(7) Analyse and translate the following verb forms with suffixed personal
pronouns. [§ 68]

Exercises 93

:--;*- (5) ;c»$uAx (4) ;,ct.\.At (3) ;cd^jAx (2) ;<a<uAx (1)
(10)";»ii,*:bft'(9) ;^o1xi»X (8) ;pV.-U' (7) ;^J«uA*j (6)
(14) ;^a^ (13) ;,OT«uVi£j (12) ;,tocu&*x* (11) ;coo1.-Lt

;«>fi*rf (18) ;^i^ 0?) ;»«^fc«^ (16) ;<ai.T=^ (15) ;<nu.*^

(23) ;^ia^ (22) ;>J^iarf (21) ;»jcuia^ (20) ;<»£-a^t<f (19)
(27) ;^Jk>i»LoaiX (26) ;^oi» (25) ;,ciLj**orf (24) ;a»Knar*
(32) w'u» (31) ;<k$j.4 (30) ;oujoj (29) ;cnu\aa (28) i mi^fii
(36) ;^J>o.S^»'?^ (35) ;.a*Au^i* (34) ;cn^v* (33) ;.£*fcu»
(40) ;<do<u» (39) y^m/ (38) ;<£p*? (37) „m<ul&ot*

— .• •••
.»G0Lft-» VJJ

KEY TO EXERCISES (pp. 91-93)

(1 ) hreSit bra >alaha yat Smayy a wy at ) ar c a. war c a hwat toh wvoh wheSSoka
<al >appay thoma. wruheh dalaha mrahfa c al >appay mayy a. wemar ^alaha:
nehwe nuhra: wahwa nuhra. wahza >alaha lnuhra d§appir wafraS ^laha
bet nuhra lhe§Soka. waqra ^aha lnuhra >imama walhe§§o&a qra lelya
wahwa ramSa wahwa safra yawma had. wemar >alaha nehwe iqi c a bmes < at
mayya wnehwe pareSC 1 ) bet mayya lmayya. wa c vad ^laha rqi c a wafraS
bet mayya daljaht men iqi c a wvet mayya dal c el men rqi c a wahwa hakanna.
waqra ^laha larqi'a Smayya wahwa ramSa wahwa safra yawma dajren.
wemar >alaha: netkanSun mayya daltaht men Smayya latra had wjethze
yabbiSta wahwa hakanna. waqra >alaha lyabbiSta ) ar c a walkenSa dmayya
qia yamme wahza ^laha dSappir.

(2)

rCLiy *.l'.i 129.1 f<nm >. f*rrt& t<Alrt Xi3^' irtcoXrt telrffl
ens CD^i^J.f ;c nmi.\\ ^t^ .TslI.1 f^lr^.i rdJLrfo ;c nnrn\\

.r£±sLcn r^cicDO ;rdi.1r£ JLl
;cnmiy\ r^ili *-*.i v».l KlauocLx r*r*.4Ai rCLlrt buiArtci
rtcnXrt r<(jjO ;cnnmy\ ools cndia-»J.l r^lrda Xa-iL.1 rdiA^r^o

.1»^T.1

.i<&XAt.1 r^acu rrfj&J r^OCDO t<£»V r^ocno

• • • • ^ • • •

Aujb jcYA^aA ;i<i»LK.i f<L^ola r^Lcnj ^ciocnj ;r^mir^ t»f^Q
r^cicDO ;c<ilr^ A^l o1aij->aA r^rajc.i i<\»ntsi ^IoiJlSb ^oocnjo

iWV'NojA r<aiV r^ucnj* ;r<ai'ai r^Ucnj **?& rtfcnir^ .tiia

v • • • • v •• * • x^ •• . • •• •

.r^iLlr^ A^l o1cqjlm\ r^lMJCJ f<^»ntai r^coXr^ ^OJr^ .aoauCl

1 In a case like this one may also pronounce /FareS/ under the influence of the last
vowel of the immediately preceding verb, with which it forms a semantic and
phonetic unit.

96

(3) "I" (m.)

"you" (m.s.)

"you" (f.s.)
"he"
"she"
"we" (m.)
"we" (f.)
"you" (m.pl.)
"you" (f.pl.)
"they" (m.)
"they" (f.)

sg-
st. abs.

est.

(4)

• • •

Key to Exercises

• • ' • •

• ••* • •••

* • • '• • •

ci1»^t ;ocd 1i^Y

• • • * • • •

• • •

... . »^ ^r • .

^*L • • • 7 ^ " »^. • x^ • •

^k. •• x* • •

/Sappiru/
/Sappiiay/
/Sappirinnan/
/Sappiranan/

emph.

pi.

abs. est.

emph.

•• • •

.ID

#• • • •
.ID

• • • •
.TO

rCOULft.TD »JL*.TO OULft.TO rCOUL».TO

• • v • • • • • • • •

r<X» &X»

(5)

» — ..»»

our

ii

my

"your" (m.s.) wyfc*

"your" (f.s.) ^v*

"his" en is*
"her"

"your" (m.pl.) „<ia
"your" (f.pl.)
"their" (m.pl.)^ooj
"their" (f.pl.) ^m

• • •

w » * • . .

•

cd&Xs*

* • ..
•

. . .

> • . ..

sAlXs*

. ..

• •• »i

• •• •

• a

^«an

• •• •

.• •

ocioucnir^

. .

•_»cix*ciurc

»**

uyep^rc u^c

CD
CD

. .

^OCD
r-»CDu

»CD(

CD

flm\ \

• v

cn>\\

Key to Exercises

97

(6) [Where more than one alternative form exists in the Pf. and Impv.,
only the shorter variant has been given.]

Pf. 3ms
f

2ms
f
1

3mpl
f

2mpl
f
1
Impf. 3ms
f

2ms
f
1

3mpl ,
f

2mpl .
f
1
Impv. ms
f

mpl
f
Ptc. act. ms
f

mpl
f
pass, ms
f

mpl
f
Inf.

>&ta&

• ••

CI

• • •

• • •

x?

^_» • • •
..• • ••

• • •

1CL&AJ

*

JJ0L&

• 9 • • •

w «p

• •• • • •

JJOLB

• • ••

• • ••

JjOt&OI

• • ••

^r« • ••

• • ••

OJJ&JSD

CUj&A

JduOLd

• •

f<£uOLd

• •

^U*OLd

U^3

^

»«*-?-<«?

• • •

..^

.CI

^«

• ••

jjaj

.lAi

.it<

• • •

• y% • ••

O^^D.l

SP?

.1

.1

%•

V\»"

• *• •
• •• •

• • •• •

• • *7^

• •

^ ••" s ^

ia&

• ••

• •«« ••

• • «p

• •••

**

• •

•• • •

•:«^

• «•

• •

• ••

•• •

• ••

* • •

*

Ctlt&J

*-• • •

.• •• •

cnt^&

».• • •

\

CO
CO

4)

X

W

a a a : a a a 2 a a a a a .a : -5 : -$ : -e : v a^a^-^.a^a-'a-'a-'a-'-a-a-a -a

i Mf 44444 -H 111 1 1 11 .1 1 » i 1 : t4| i «

£

i

•l

'1

t

4

<

._

/ I

•••1

- V

\!

a -a a* «a -a a**c -a -a *a -a «a - ^* -?• tj* *• a* "a* *S"2 - -a* §• s* t § a. - a a
a g. a a- a- a £• t- a- a- a- a-*a- a- a *a- 9 § a : a 1* n- n- n- :n- §• £ £

h *: V s \? V * : V s V s V s V s V a : -« : -« : -S : V s a : : a : -« : ^ : g : \? V s V V s R : K : R : R :

1 J. ^.^.£^.^44ii^44i44^4^ AU.A

•c/ v ' I

oo

On

£

I

£

i6

1

3:

Key to Exercises 99

ou .^\» .^..i* r<Jj=i i.tjj

*1

• ••• •

• • ••

■ \ »n

* •

Inf. .s&m\ ^Xn&A

f ±&

m • ••

PtC. act. HIS .aAu J&ii ^..il rCxst nfHu

•

^adk* ^al* ^iJU ^^JLa ^..TLjj

pass, ms «??V

• • •

mpl v ? ^ . \ »

I Vc " *

CLLa

•

•

.M • *

•
•

x*

•
•

•

•

•

•
•

•
•
•

*r

•

Pf. 3ms .aAu -3lL

• •• • • • • • •

f OL90U OL&JL* OL^.I* OLJL9 OU

m q • •• • . •• • g • •• • • « *v

2ms &9&u £^\» &jl.t* &■ in &*:uj

f t&aou iOLSul* idLxXft >ol*-Ls »0l».Tjj

1 OlaOU OlAXji OL^Xft OLkJJ9 ou.Tjj

• •• • •• ■ •• •• • •• • •• • • • • •

3 mpl OaAu CLfiA* CLUU CLLa CU.Tu

f% % • ••• ••

.sou .^ i» .^..l* >La j.Ojj

2mpl _ci&a&u .XI&&1* .ci&jL.i* -aZLSa _o&*:tjj

I **OL30l» **OL£lXft .-ftOLXXft *»0L»JJ9 ^aOIa.Tjj

x .• x •• • •• • x •• * • x •• • x •• • •

1 *aOU >^\a % -l k . < ljft »■ 1*1 **.lJJ

x? •••• ^» •• • x *■ • X • x

Impf. 3ms .a&J JSkA'fxO ^.U r£LaU r£U4

i • •••• • a • • •• • • •• • ••

• • " • •

2ms .»&& -*A'n<fA\ •i-.iAi rOuadt r£ujdi

1 .a&r^ ^A'r^ jL-.lr^ rdLai* ixfruir*

• • • • •

3mpl _, Cla&J CL&ArO ^ CL2L.TJ _€LLaJ .O.ijjJ

• • • •* • • •* •

K-^W x* 1

2mpl ^ ct9^ ^ a^Xr^k ^cl^i^ ^cu-aAi ^.iiA

f *?&$ ^SirWi ^-^9 >V\ , ?oi ^.ijjdi

1 J9&U -^\rO jk-ii r<lnl r^ijLtJ

• ••••

Impv. ms jbAi

f ^

W • • •

mpl OaAi CL^U O-X.1 CLLa O.Tjj

• •

f

100 Key to Exercises

tvv ^u

•

• - •

.1

|31 ^1 «*-CI I

• •• •• ••••

• • •

• • • •

• • , ••• • •• « a

CL^£lr£ OJ.4 CUL*\rt

x .•• • x ••• x .• x .• •

r£lxJ r£&tJ ^ O.TJ ^-» U

i<U& r£&1& ^Cl.lAi <a^t&

^juLX^i V^^ ^H^*^ x ? N • %Al

.• • ^ " w» • •• •

^jjlxj ^tj ^io.tj ^u

^-LJtdl t*^ 4 *^ ^9?^ ^-f"^

f^ULi r£atj ^ O.TJ «^» u

• • • •

• • • • •

x .• • v7 • • ^^

^4*» *4*»" *-^* ^

v -,

Key to Exercises 101

jjCU

Pf. 3ms j^j^r^

mpl
f
Inf. cuij&Als*^

<?

Alx

• •• •• •••• •••

2ms &AuL!&&r^ iiua &2L*.r^

• •• • •• •

• • •• * ^ • •* •

1 Aui*J&&r^ Alia Ai\^.r^

• •• ■ •• • •• •• • •• .

3mpl cuuj^rf o

• •• • "• •

2mpl ^oiuuuJ^rf ^diup ^O^lX^r^

x .* • x •• • x .•_ •• •

1 ^u*-loiotn^

Impf. 3ms jjl*j&Au idaj

2ms jjl*j&& toai) AjlAi

1 juuJ&dir^ tdar<? ^-?^

3mpl ., cui*j&du . ovaj «. oIaj

2mpl „ CUi^J&At . Olail ^Ql^A'

1 jjl^J&Au tdaJ Ll^

Impv. ms jukJtj&Atr? ids

mpl CUi*J&Alr< OlOa

Ptc. act. ms jj*j&Ai» ir<3 Ajl»

• • •

mpl ^jLti+iikben ^

pass, ms v* \a ^-?^?

^?

•

102 Key to Exercises

(7) [1] 'they (m.) sent you (m.s.) f ; [2] 'I sent him 1 ; [3] 'we sent him';
[4] 'she sent him'; [5] 'Send her! 1 (Impv. m.s.); [6] 'they (m.) shall send
you (m.pl.) 1 ; [7] 'he sent me'; [8] 'to send us'; [9] 'you (m.s.) shall send
me'; [10] 'they (m.) sent her'; [11] 'you (f.s.) sent him'; [12] 'we (or: he)
will send him'; [13] 'he made us'; [14] Make her!' (Impv. m.s.); [15] 'we
made her'; [16] 'you (m.s.) (or: she) will make him'; [17] 'they made us';
[18] 'he found you (m.s.)' or 'I shall find you'; [19] 'I (or: you [m.s.])
found her'; [20] 'Bring me out!' (Impv. m.pl.); [21] 'Bring me out' (Impv.
m.s.); [22] 'he brought me out'; [23] 'she brought her out'; [24] I shall
raise him'; [25] 'she (or: you [m.s.]) shall raise him'; [26] 'to raise us';
[27] 'they (f) shall raise him'; [28] 'Rob her!' (Impv. m.s.); [29] 'Judge
her!' (Impv. f.s.); [30] 'you (f.pl) judged us'; [31] 'he saw me'; [32] 'she
saw you (m.pl.)'; [33] 'I saw him'; [34] 'I multiplied you (m.pl.)'; [35] 'to
multiply us'; [36] 'I shall multiply him'; [37] 'Multiply us!' (Impv. m.s.);
[38] 'he will multiply us'; [39] 'they (m.) saw her'; [40] 'they (f.) saw
him.'

PARADIGMS

[Typical forms only are given. For uncommon forms, refer to the
appropriate paragraphs in the Morphology section. A degree of
artificiality is unavoidable. Thus the verb root chosen for Paradigm I,
namely V jsAia, is not attested in Pael, Ethpaal, and Ettafal. The quSSaya
and rukkakha dot has been omitted from Beghadhkephath letters when
the latter appear as the first letter of a verb form. The seyame has also
been omitted from some fern. pi. forms for the sake of clearer
presentation.]

104

Verb paradigms

I. Regular Triliteral Verbs (§§ 55-57)

Peal

Ethpeel

Pf.

sg. 3m

• ••

Atav

• ••« • ••

^effctev

f

• # • ••

ketyat

• • • • • ••

'etkatbat

2m

• ••

ktavt

&90l2fcOtr^

• ••• • ••

'etktevt

f

t&aoi*

ktavt

w • ••• • ••

'etktevt

1

••••••

ketyet

• •• • # * ••

'etkatbet

pi. 3m

• ••

ktav

• ••• • ••

*etktev

f

• ••

ktav

• ••• • ••

>etktev

2m

^aZka&i

ktavton

■^^^ • ••• • ••

>etktevton

f

x .• • • •

ktavten

^^ • • ••• ••

>etktevten

1

*:?£*

ktavn

^* ••• • ••

>etktevn

Impf.

sg. 3m

• • ••

nektov

• ••• • ••

netktev

f

• • ••

tektov

• ••• • • •

tetktev

2m

• • ••

tektov

• ••• • ••

tetktev

f

^l • • • ••

tektvin

^L» • 9 • ••

tetkatbin

1

• • ••

*ektov

• ••• • ••

'etktev

pi. 3m

nektvun

^^i m

netkatbun

f

^l • • ••

nektvan

x • • • ••

netkatban

2m

■^^^9 • ••

tektvun

tetkatbun

f

^L • • ••

tektvan

x • • • ••

tetkatban

1

• • ••

nektov

• ••■ • ••

netktev

Impv.

sg.m

• •

ktov

• « • ••

>etkatb

f

t=»oJK^

ktov

w • # • ••

>etkatb

pi. m

• •

ktov

• • •

>etkatb

f

• % ••

ktov

W • Q • ••

'etkatb

^oA£

ktoven

^ • • • • ••

'etkatben

Ptc.

act.m

• •••

katev

• ••• • ••

metktev

f

•

katba

• t • ••

metkatba

pass.m

• • •

ktiv

f

• • •

ktivd

Inf.

.9&^20^

Imektav

aa&t^coA

Imetktavu

• •

Regular triliteral verbs

105

I. Regular Triliteral Verbs (§§ 55-57) (cont.)

Pael

Ethpaal

Pf.

sg. 3m

*• •
• •• •

kattev

• • • • ••

>etkattav

f

• •• •

katvat

• •• • • ••

y etkatvat

2m

%• V *
• •• •

kattevt

... • ••

>etkattavt

f

™ • .. .

kattevt

» ......

y etkattavt

1

• ••• i

katvet

. ... . . ••

>etkatvet

pi. 3m

• •• •

kattev

... ...

>etkattav

f

• •• •

kattev

... ...

'etkattav

2m

* »» • •• •

kattevton

^ ■>. ... ...

*etkattavton

f

x .

kattevten

x^ .• * • • • ••

>etkattavten

1

x • •• •

kattevn

x • • • • ••

>etkattavn

Impf.

sg. 3m

• •• a •

nkattev

......

netkattav

f

tkattev

• • • • ••

tetkattav

2m

• •• 9 •

tkattev

. . . ...

tetkattav

f

**M»

tkatvin

X s • • • ••

tetkatvin

1

• •• # ••

>ekkattev

... ...

>etkattav

pi. 3m

nkatvun

^» — >« • • •

netkatvun

f

nkatvan

X* • • ••

netkatvan

2m

^ ■>.» • ••

tkatvun

tetkatvun

f

X*

tkatvan

x • • • ••

tetkatvan

1

• •• •

nkattev

......

netkattav

Impv

sg.m

• •• •

kattev

If. ••% _
... ...

'etkattav

f

*• •• •

kattev

•~ • .....

>etkattav

pi. m

• •• •

kattev

... ...

>etkattav

f

kattev

■-. .....

>etkattav

K^$+

katteven

x v • • • ••

>etkattaven

Ptc.

act.m

• •• •

mkattev

... • ••

metkattav

f

• ••

mkatva

• ^ • ••

metkatva

pass.m

• • •

mkattav

f

r<nXtS9

• •

mkatva

Inf.

oa&lsaX

lamkattavu

cusJ&A^a^

Imetkattavu

106

Verb paradigms

I. Regular Triliteral Verbs (§§ 55-57) (cont.)

Afel

Ettafal

Pf.sg. 3m

• •• • e

>aktev

• « • • ••

'ettaktav

f

• •• • •

*aktvat

*ettaktvat

2m

• •• •

>aktevt

• • • • ••

*ettaktavt

f

w • •• • »

>aktevt

• • • • • ••

>ettaktavt

1

• ••• • •

*aktvet

• ••• • . ••

'ettaktvet

pi. 3m

• • • •

'aktev

it? v*\ _^
• • • • ••

'ettaktav

f

• •• • #

>aktev

...» ••

>ettaktav

2m
f
1
Impf. sg. 3m

^aiksiikskri

x # •• • •

• •• •

'aktevton
*aktevten
>aktevn
naktev

^ » • • • •

x^ .••••• ••

x* • • • ••

• • • • ••

y ettaktavton
>ettaktavten
>ettaktavn
nettaktav

f

jaikjibi

• •• • ^

taktev

• • • • ••

tettaktav

2m

• •• • f

taktev

• • • • ••

tettaktav

f

*ta&&&

taktvin

^L^ • • • ••

tettaktvin

1

* •• • «

>aktev

• • ••

>ettaktav

pi. 3m

f

2m

^ ^»» • • •

^ »^» • • •

naktvun
naktvan
taktvun

^^^e •

x* • • ••

V^^^ •

nettaktvun
nettaktvan
tettaktvun

f

1

• •• • #

taktvan
naktev

x* • • ••
• • • • ••

tettaktvan
nettaktav

Impv. sg.m
f

• •• • ^

w • •• • *

*aktev
*afoev

• • • • ••

>ettaktav
'ettaktav

pi. m

• •• • ^

>aktev

...» ••

>ettaktav

f

•■ • •• •

>aktev

"T - • • • ••

>ettaktav

^^^^^^ * •• •

>akteven

x %• • • • ••

>ettaktaven

Ptc. act. m

• •• •

maktev

• • • • ••

mettaktav

f

• • •

maktva

• • • ••

mettdktva

pass, m
f

• • • •

• • •

maktav
maktva

Inf.

09&a£aX

Imaktavu

ciaJK^JKAcaX

Imettaktavu

Regular triliteral verbs ; Third- Yodh verbs

107

II. Third- Yodh Verbs (§ 64)

Peal

Pf. sg. 3m
f

bka
bkat

2m X.ys bkayt

bkayt
btet
bkaw
bkay
bkayton
bkqyten
bkayn

jnou^.i

**?**•

i^i

tevke
*L±s>bi tevken

.O^nJ

.. nevkon

^<r*i nevkyan

J^ki tevkon

^jLp& tevkyan

• • ••

bid
bkay
bkaw
^.pn bkayen
**J> bake

^^a bdken
^LKa bakyan
f<±= bke
t<on bakya
bken
bakyan
Imevka

^A9

l%1

did

dekyat

dkit

dkit

dkit

dldw

did

dkiton

dkiten

dkin

1
pi. 3m
f
2m

f x
1
Impf. sg. 3m
f
2m
f
1
pi. 3m
f
2m
f
1
Impv. sg.m
f
pi. m
f
Ptc. act.sg.rn.
f
pl.m
f
pass.sg.m
f
pl.m
f
Inf.

[Hardly any Third-Yodh verb occurs in Ettafal.

• •

^ia

• • •

90U

• ••

jei^aoiot

»*\«i

J»-^9

-j^a

Ethpeel

k^*?^ y €tbakyat

&jj*j9Atr< *etb1dt

>iL_aj3^p^ *etbkit

ou^aotK* 'etbkit

ci^aotf* 'etbkiw

.Q&it&a&r? 'etbtitOTl

■"■•ss*^ • • • •• «.» aM

e&soadtr* *etbkiten
e^otr* >etbkin

netbke

tetbke

tetbke

tetbken

'etbte

netbkpn

netbakyan

tetbkon

tetbakyan

netbke

>etbkay

*etbkay

>etbkaw

*etbkayen
metbke
metbakya
metbken
metbakyan

&&

30101

.•utJLssotr^

SOC9

cu4±ioc*A Imetbkayu

'wept';^* 'was clean.']

108

Verb paradigms

II. Third- Yodh verbs (§ 64) (cont.)

Pf. sg. 3m

f
2m

f
1
pi. 3m

f
2m

f
1

Pael

ia bakki
i> t iXn bakyat
jkm\n bakkit
»&*^a bakkit

• • • —

isi bakkiw

£** bakki

todL*La' bakkiton

^^jLa bakkit en

x .••

**ia bakkin

Ethpaal

>etbakki
AuiaAu* 'etbakyat

Afel
^.■X?rf *avkyat

>etbakkit
'etbakkit
iujia^r^ 'etbakkit

• • ft • •• MM «•

a^9^f< *etbakkiw
>etbakki
'etbakkitonjiik

*a

• ••

•• •

• • •

tvakke
tvakke
t**La& tvakken
>ebbakke
nvakkon

cLL^Ai tvakkon
^\ni> tvakyan
*S-ii nvakke
£a &a£Aa
£? bakkay
£a bakkaw

• ».1

la<

.• • •

• •• <

.• •

• •• i

• •• i

Impf. sg. 3m *S n i nvakke
f
2m
f
1
pi. 3m
f
2m t

f
1
Impv. sg. m
f
pi. m

f y»\o7 bakkayen
Ptc.act.sg.rn r&Laz* mvakke
f i<i\^ mvakya
pl.m ^yw mvakken
f v;^,?^ mvakyan
pass.sg.m iffy* mvakkay
f rd^a^ mvakya
pl.m ^%?*w mvakken
f x i\-r* mvakyan
Inf. cu£=is*&lamvakkayu a » «? nhaaX Imetbakkayu

^iL^a^i* 'etbakkiten

x . -

tijia&tr* >etbakkin

x* • ... _

netbakke
tetbakke
tetbakke
>»«vnM> tetbakken
*etbakke
netbakkon
^LaLsJkj netbakyan
„dii&Ai tetbakkon
^iisi^di tetbakyan
netbakke

>etbakka

.... _

£^&r< 'etbakkay
£^<W >etbakkaw

*avkit
y avkit

• • • —

LaK* *avkiw
*avki
*avkiton
e w^ni% *avkiten

x» •

.• ■ •
..^-lfr tavken

x .• • •

.* • •

«aSrn navkon
v ^ni navkyan
jbsjahi tavkon

x i->?ft tavkyan

r^Lai raivA£
.•• •

A?r^ >avkay

>avkaw
^: : Z2k*> 'etbakkayen ^..^ >avkdyen
r&ia&tsa metbakke

r^a'A^* metbakya

. • •• — •

-• • •

r/iX'i? mavkya

^jLa'Aoo metbakken
c ^ r^^ri metbakyan

ejia^i mavken

x .• • •

^a^s mavkyan

O??" mavkay

^Xn? mavkya

**<\-i*n mavken

x .• • •

x i^a») mavkyan
Imavkayu

Third- Yodh verbs ; Second-Waw/Yodh verbs

109

III. Second-Waw/Yodh Verbs

Peal

(§65)

Ft. sg. jm

■po

qam

f

• •

qamat

2m

a&io

qamt

f

»&2ttO

qamt

1

• ••

qamet

pi. 3m

CI2AO

qam

f

••

qam

2m

• v /

qamton

f

qamten

1

••

qamn

Impf. sg.3m

pcuu

nqum

f

pCLO^

tqum

2m

poo&

tqum

f

^2aao&

tqumin

1

pOfir^

'aqurn

pi. 3m

^CpOClflLS

nqumun

f

•• ••

nquman

2m

tqumun

f

^^^

tquman

1

^aru

nqum

Impv. sg. m

pao

qum

f

P9CLO

qum

pi. m

acacia

•

qum

f

^900

qumen

Ptc. act.sg.rn

7><<o

qcPem

f

rGxuM

qayma

pi. m

qaymin

f

qayman

pass.sg. m

f

pi. m

f

Inf.

nio**>V

lamqam

• •

mtf

• •• •

mitat

•

mit

w m

mit

• • ••••

mitet

• •

mit

• •

mit

mitton

mitten

mitn

yi+snj

nsim

}QjJQDO\

tsim

^DLaJDOI

tsim

^■b^KLaJQDOl

tsimin

TLAJQDr^

>asim

nsimun

^ritffll

nsiman

XtSQLjdQDOl

tsimun

^S^l* lf>0\

tsiman

W^

nsim

^l^t,

sim

»2flLfJ»

sim

•

sim

• •

simen

x .••

Jlt<tt>

s&em

I^AJ0

sdyma

••

saymin

sayman

:n ^ t ,

sim

•

sima

^»*yi»fif>

simin

•• ••

siman

TttttoaX

lamsam

1 10 Verb paradigms

III. Second- Waw/Yodh Verbs (§ 65)

Afel Ethpeel (=Ettafal)

Pf. sg. 3m *+±t* >afi$ <*+*&&*< y e0S

f Aul^ >afi$at ^x^Aif< 'etfiSat

2m fcx^rf 'qfiSt &*-**** 'etfiSt

1 ****«> ^fer Au*A*fctf Vi/Ber

pi. 3m ajL+±rt >afi$ ax^KAirf ^(/if

2m .£&x*±ri 'afiSton ****+*&&* >etfi$ton

f ^&x+At* 'afiSten ^iuL^afcAu* >etfi&ten

1 0:*f* *fl/Bh ^t^iii* *e*/l$n

Impf. sg.3m jt^Li n/itf or^a&Au ne(/*£

f <***& tfiS «**-a&At tetfiS

f ^v*^ J/i$ih ^^js^A* tetfiSin

pi. 3m *ciJL^fiLj nfiSun cLr^a&kj netfiSun

f ^ : y n/itfan ^k^&Al) netfiSdn

2m jtOxjj&At f/ifftm »axjj&&di tetfiSun

1 .t ? v n/zf jc^_a^Au ne(/i£

Impv. sg. m «**£v^ *q/i£ oL^^rf *£(/*£

pi. m ox4^ *afi$ -xjj&&&tr< *£(/*£

Ptc. act.sg.m ,¥»^^9 m/i# aL*£&Aca metfiS

f r£aL4^a ra/i,&i r£x*^&A« metfiSa

pi. m ; w : «k^ mfiSin ^^j^^Aca metfiSin

f ^s^&a mfiSan K i » ffi^sa metfiSan

pass.sg. m arffc* mj?i?

pi. m ^» t ^ mfiSin

f ^frS mfiSdn

Inf. a t <«*X lamfaSu cutdlkb&A ImetfaSu
[V jEoa : Pe 'to remain,' Af 'to desist from; to miss, lose']

Second-Waw/Yodh verbs; Geminate verbs

111

IV. Geminate Verbs (§ 66)

Peal

Afel

Pf. sg. 3m
f

• • ••

tak
tekkat

2m

• •

taJa

f

takt

1

• •• ••

tekket

pi. 3m

• •

tak

f
2m

tak
tafoon

f

^W

takten

1

^

takn

Impf. sg. 3m

uyn&j

nettok

f

2m

f

tettok
tettok
tetkin

1
pi. 3m

>ettok
netkun

f

netkan

2m

tetkun

f

^£&&

tetkan

1
Impv. sg. m

caoAi

nettok
tok

f

tok

pi. m

•

tok

f

token

Pte. act.sg.rn
f

t&ek
takka

pi. m

^tf

takkin

f

takan

pass.sg.m
f

• • •

tjgk
tktica

pl.m

m* • • •

tfgkin

f

xM^^

tfdkdn

Inf.

v\fc?A

hnettak

u\}krt

• •• •

*attek
>atkat

• •• •

>attete

* • •• •

y attekt

• •••

>aiket

• •• •

'attek

%j\ikr£

^ »- •• •

>attek
>attekton

x

>attekten

^2kr£

x* •• •

>attekn

u\Siii

• y» •

nattdc
tattek
tattek
taildn

u\1krt

• y« •

*attek
natkun

<£&j

natkan

•S^^^

tatkun

^4^^

tatkan

nattdc
>attek
>attek

• •• •

>attek

VV" •

*atteken

• •

mattek
matkd

matkin

/ v

matkan

if* •
• •

mattak
matkd

matkin

<**»

matkan

a&&*\

Imattaku

[V </>aA* : Pe. 'to oppress/ Af. 'to do harm/]

112

Verb

paradigms
V. Regular *

Verbs with

Pf. Peal

sg. 1

sg. 2m

sg.2f

sg. 3m

>4V

v>JVp

>4V

qatlan

qatlak

qatlek

f

►jA^o

<*$P\o

qtaltan

qtaltak

qtaltek

2m

1

pi. 3m

2m

1

qtaltan
qtaltin

qatlun

qatlan

qtaltonan

qtaltenan

qtaltak

vyAV
qatluk

qatlak

qtalnak

qtaltek
qatluk
qattek

qtalriek

npf. Pe. sg. 3m

•■*yvu

<*^\n.\

t>)\n.\

neqtlan

neqtlak

neqtlek

2m

teqtlan
teqtolayn

f

teqtlindn

3m

»juq\\,n.i

uyq\\,n.i

neqtlundn

neqtlumk

neqtlumk

f

,iiV\,fi.i.

vy^Vu

oiV\,Ki

neqtldnan

neqtldndk

neqtlanek

Regular verbs with object suffixes

113

Object Suffixes (§ 68) (cont.)

sg. 3m

qatteh

qtalteh

qtaltay

qtaltiw

qtalteh

|CDO

qatluy

sg. 3f

oiX\p

qatldh

qtaltah

cpJR\\Jn

qtaltah

• %•

CTL.

qtaltih
qtaltah

CD

qatluh

qatlay qatldh

qtaltondy qtaltonah

qtaltenay

|CT1 all \|fi

qtalndy qtalndh

qtaltenah

• .'% \ •

<n\\n\ 1 ,n5cui\aj

cn ? \\,n.i

neqtleh / neqtliw

neqtlih

9 m€kA\obi 1 cn\\^odt

<ixA\obi

teqtliw 1 teqtleh

teqtlih

*LXdV»fe

cnuAd^ocV

teqfolay

teqtoleh

cni.\\,nfr 1 % m.\*\\t\bi

ch\»\\jnbi

teqtlirieh / teqtlindy

teqtlindh

roJo\\,ni / i<nuJa\\jQLS

cnJoX^nj

neqtluneh 1 neqtlumy

neqtlundh

«ajLl\oj / t cn.i\\,n.i

mtV^fti

neqtlaneh / neqtldnay

neqtldnah

^\9

qatlun

•• • V \ \ •

qtaltonan

* \ % •

qtaltenan

neqtlan

teqtlan

teqtolayn

teqtlindn

pi. 1

pi. 2m

AV

*a^V°

qatlan

qtalkpn

^V>

<h gfrA>\\ ; n

qtaltan

qetlatkon

.*w

qtaltan

^«^V

qfaltin

^QAJi\\)n

qtaltkpn

qatlukpn

qatlan qtalkpn

qtqlndkpn

neqtolkon

neqtlunan neqtlundkon

neqtldndn neqtldndkon
N.B. Note the contrast: qtalteh 'she killed him' and qtalteh 1 killed him.'

114

Verb paradigms

V. Regular Verbs with

sg. 1

sg. 2m

sg.2f

Impv. Pe sg.m

qtolayn

f

qtolin

pi. m

qutlun

f

qutlunan

V * \ **

qtolan
qtotenan

Inf. Pe

% \X\n**\

Vy\\,n«a\

oN^n^

Imeqtlan

bneqtlak

Imeqtlek

Pa

■ • • • v» •

Sf \ \ •• • V

*±b*\\,ri**&

lamqattalutan

lamqaftalutak

lamqattalutek

VI. Third- Yodh Verbs with

sg. 1

sg. 2m

sg.2f

Pf. sg. 3m Pe

A

v>X\

**\

glan

g/afc

gldk

Pa

»A±

^

*^

galyan

galyak

galyek

3f Pe

»$\

<*&\

***\

glatan

glatak

glatek

Pa

^*A^

v\*A^

^"^ v*^""^^

galyatan

galyatak

galyatek

2m Pe

glaytan

Pa

gallitan

Regular verbs and Third- Yodh verbs with object suffixes 115

Object Suffixes (§ 68) (cont.)

sg. 3m

sg. 3f

pi. 1

pi. 2m

tcn.Xo^n

qtolay

qtoleh

qtolayn

% a>CiAo\p

ctuAcl^o

*AaV>

qfoliw

qtolih

qtolin

»cno\2Lao

(T>o\^CLO

^g\\qj*

qutluy

qutluh

qutlun

icnu-jaX^OD

cruoX^OD

^saX\aD

qutlunay

qutlunah

qutlunan

toLAo^o

cnXo^o

w

^to/lay

qtoldh

qtolan

.ci^LAoV

ctlLAo^o

kM^V

^r/ofenay

qtotenah

qtotendn

ciXVi»A

O^'V^

Imeqtleh

Imeqtlah

Imeqtlan

Imeqtalkon

SAJkoN^nSaX

lamqattaluteh

lamqattalutah

lamqattalutan lamqattalutkon

Object Suffixes (§ 68) (cont.)

sg. 3m

sg3f

pi. 1

pi. 2m

»ciLJt\

ciS\

x*\

-aO\

glay

glah

g/an

gldkpn

.• **

• » •. .

•» ^ .

galyeh

CD'

4

glateh

CD<

4

galyateh

»cn»<

glaytay

gallitay

galyah

glatah

CDOUJLX

galyatah

ODi

glaytah
gallitah

galyan

glatan

^— • • *%
gallikpn

glatkpn

. .% ^ .

. r"

galyatan

galyatkon

glaytan
gallitan

116

Verb paradigms

VI. Third- Yodh Verbs with

Pf. 2f Pe

Pa

1 Pe

Pa

pi. 3mPe

Pa

3f Pe

Pa

2mPe

Pa

1 Pe

Pa

Impf. sg. 3m Pe

sg. 1
glaytin

sg. 2m

sg.2f

gallitin

v\#4\

**4\

gletak

gletek

*$*K

**»>\

gallitak

gallitek

^ar4\

•v ^^

^Of^\

gla'un

glcfuk

gla*uk

tiaA^

V^*K

***^K

galyun

galyuk

galyuk

^K

vyK

glayan

glayak

glayek

«*P*

*^

galyan

galyak

galyek

glaytomn

*xjo&*A^

gallitonan

v^4\

'W»>\

glaynak

glaynek

v^K

*4*^

gallinak

gallinek

1 } *v*

VY^?.

• . # . «^.

negten

negtek

negtek

Third-Yodh verbs with object suffixes

117

Object Suffixes (§ 68) (cont.)

sg. 3m

sg3f

»cdcl»3uJl^

glaytiw

glaytih

•CDCU&jA^

gallitiw

gallitih

<»^4\

CD$u\^

gleteh

gletdh

v • «^

CD^uA^

galliteh

gallitdh

iCDOr^L^

aipr^L^

gla*uy

gla^uh

»cdclA^

CDOjA^

galyuy

galyuh

glaydy

galydy

glaytondy

gallitondy

glaynay

gallindy

|CD<

neglew

■ i ^j ■

• •• %••.••

glaydh

galydh

cnjcn

glaytondh
• .• • '

OUCH

gallitondh
glayndh

gallindh

negteh

pi. 1

glaytin

gallitin

gla*un

galyun

-• «>_ •.

glaydn

galydn

I ci

glaytondn
gallitondn

neglen

pi. 2m

gletkon

galliikpn

gld'ukon

galyukpn

A 1 1 > V

?\

glaynakpn

gallinakpn
negtekon

118

Verb paradigms

Impv. sg.m. Pe

Pa

Pe

pi. m Pe

Pe

Inf.

Pe

Pa

sg. 1

glin

gallon

glaHn

glcfun

glayendn

Imeglyan

• • • r^^ •

lamgallayutan

VI. Third- Yodh Verbs with

sg. 2m sg. 2f

Imeglyak

lamgallayutak

Imeglyek

• • • • •

lamgallayutek

• m*

Third- Yodh verbs with object suffixes

119

Object Suffixes (§ 68) (cont.)

sg. 3m

»CDCUA^

gliw

gallay

glayenay

sg3f

glih

• v «. •

gallah

CIDL»

glaHh

CDOl

glcfuh

glayendh

Imeglyeh Imeglyah

lamgallayuteh lamgalldyutah

pi. 1

glin

gallon

glaHn

glcPun

glayenan

• %•

pi. 2m

Imeglyan Imeglakpn

• »•

lamgallayutan lamgallayutkon

N.B. ' 1. Some forms are extremely rare or not attested at all. Hence their absence from the
above paradigm.

2. For a discussion of details, see NOldeke, § 194-98. A fuller paradigm is given by
Mingana 1905.

SUBJECT INDEXO)

Absolute state —

of nouns and adjectives, 17,

18

its uses, 71
accents, Sd

word-accent, 60
adjective —

declension of, 17

expanded, 96

position of attributive, 91 (7)

predicative, 72 e

substantivised, 96 (d)
adverbs, 47

ending /-a'itf 47; /-atf 47, 71 f
Alaph —

word-initial, 6c

word-medial, 6k, l
alphabet, 2
antecedentless relative clause,

111
aphaeresis, 6J
apposition, 95
assimilation —

of consonants (*, /, n, d 9 1, /),

6M

metathesis and, 6N
asyndesis, 98g

Beghadhkephath, 5 a, 57

Cantillation symbols, 5d
causative, 49

rare causative prefixes s I $,

49

circumstantial clause, 83
clause —

circumstantial, 83

1 1 References are to paragraphs.

conditional, 81, 83,86

dependent, 82

independent, 82

division into nominal and

verbal, 101

purpose, 82

relative, 91 (h, 2)

result, 82

temporal, 82
comparative, 96 (c)
compound sentence, 113
compound tenses, 85-89

/ktav wa/ 85

/k&ev wa/ 86

/hwa kajev/ 87

/nektov wa/ 88

/nehwe katev/ 89
concord, 92

conditional clause, 81, 86
congruence: 1 concord
conjugation: 1 verbs
consonants, 3

doubling of: f gemination
construct, 17, 18

periphrasis through -.i, 73

of adjective, 73 (c), 96 (b)

Declension —
of nouns and adjectives, 17
feminine nouns lacking a
typical ending and mas-
culine nouns showing a
typically feminine ending,

27

irregular nouns, 43
peculiarities of Third-
Yodh/Waw nouns and ad-
jectives, 19, 21, 24, 28
demonstrative: ? pronouns

122

Subject Index

dialectal differences, 4c, 6E

(n. 20),6G, 60, 62c, 63c, 64b,

e,g
diminutives, 39

diphthong, 6E, H

Emphatic state, 18
m.pl. ending /-ayya/, 21,
/-an# 23
loss of its original function,

72

enclitic, 10

focusing ocd, 1 10
Estrangela script, 2
Eth-patterns, 6N, 49

with transitive force, 80

Feminine

archaic ending /-ay/, 28

insertion of /-y-/, 20
final: I clause, purpose

Geminate roots, 8

gemination, 6F, G, 8

gender
morphological category, 17
feminine nouns lacking a
typical ending and mascu-
line nouns showing a typi-
cally feminine ending, 27, 40
N.B.5

feminine with inanimate
referents, 69
gender vs. natural sex, 29

gutturals, 6J

Imperfect (tense), 82
impersonal, 79
infinitive, 52
Lamadh-less, 98j

pronominal object of, 97e
inflection: f declension and

verbs
ingressive, 49
interrogatives, 14, 76

Jacobite script, 2

Linea occultans, 5c

Marhefana, 5c
mehaggeyana, 5c
metathesis, 6N

Negation, 93
Nestorian script, 2
nisbe, 38e

nomen agentis, 51, 95 (1)
nominal clause

bipartite, 103

quadripartite, 108

tripartite, 104-5

pronominal subject deleted,

106

structural meaning, 107

existential and locative, 109
nouns (and adjectives)

attachment of suffix pro-
nouns, 40-42

collective, 92 (2)

diminutives, 39

formation patterns 30-39

qvfi (*qafl, qifl, qufl), 31

qdfvly 32

q0> 33

qfil, qfel, qtayU 34

qful, qfoly 35

qvffvl (qatfal, quftal,

qaftit), 36, 95 (1)

Subject Index

123

with four or more radicals,

37

with prefixes and suffixes,
38

/-ay/, 38e

pedantic multiple suffixes,
38f

Ay/ of abstract masculine
nouns, 38h

/-ut/ of abstract feminine
nouns, 38i
irregular nouns, 43
determinedness, 73d, 91 (c)
expanded by attributive
adjective, 91 (a); demon-
strative pronoun, 91 (b);
cardinal numerals, 91 (c);
quantifiers, 91 (d); "genitive"
noun, 91 (e, f); -* clause, 91
(h); prepositional phrase, 91
(h,3)
numerals —
cardinal, 44a
ordinal, 44b
fractions, 44
cardinals with a suffix
pronoun, 45
syntax, 91 (c)

Object (direct) —
cognate, 98i
double objects, 97h
marked by Lamadh, 97a
object complement, 98f
proleptic object pronouns,
97g

pronominal, 97b
pronominal obj. of infi-
nitive 97e
pronominal obj. of parti-

ciple, 97d, f
'them', 97c

Participle, 51, 83, 101

pronominal object of, 97d,

98d
passive, 84

impersonal, 79

indication of agent, 94

morphology, 50

syntagm I jsuAl*, 84
perfect (tense), 81
phonology, 6
plural —

of nouns and adjectives, 70

pluralia tantum 21, 70
plural ending —

of nouns and adjectives:

/-ayya/, 21, /-ane/ 23,

/-awata/ 25

insertion of /-h-/ 26
prepositions, 46, 78

with suffix pronouns, 46

modified by a prepositional

phrase or adverbial, 100
proclitic, 61
prolepsis, 97g, 1 12
pronouns —

demonstrative, 13, 77, 91 (b),

111

enclitic, 10

independent personal, 9, 74

independent possessive, 16

interrogative, 14

possessive = suffixed

personal, 1 1

reciprocal, 12b

relative, 15, 77

reflexive, 12a

suffixed personal, 11, 40-42

124

Subject Index

suffixed and attached to

verbs, 12, 68
pronunciation, 3
punctuation marks, 5e

Quantifier, 91(d), 92 (4)
quSSaya, 5 a

Radical (consonant), 7a
relative clause
antecedentless, ill

root, 7

classification and naming of

root patterns, 7b

strong and weak, 7b
rukkakha, 5 a

Semi-vowels fl also Yodh

and Waw)
Serta script, 2
seyame, 5b
spirantisation, 5, 6H
state —

of nouns and adjectives:

17,18

morphosyntax,7l
stress, 60
syllable, 6F
Syriac —

dialect of Aramaic, 1

its history, 1

two dialects, 1

Tense, 48, 81-89

Verbs —
Beghadhkephath and
conjugation, 57
conjugational categories, 48
conjugation classes, 53

e > a rule and conjugation,

57

expansion, 97: by nouns and
pronouns, 97; by infinitives,
98a; by imperfects, 98b; by a
+ imperfect, 98c; by parti-
ciple, 98d; verbs of percep-
tion or communication, 98e;
object complement, 98f ;
asyndetic, 98g; cognate
object 98i; Lamadh-less
infinitive, 98j; by adverbials,
99

inflexional affixes, 54
multiradical roots, 49
patterns (six in number), 49
triconsonantal regular verbs,

55

vowel correlation between
Pf. and Impf. in Peal, 55, 56
First- Alaf verbs, 62
Second- Alaf verbs, 59
Third- Alaf verbs, 60
First- Yodh verbs, 63
First-Nun verbs, 61
Third-Yodh verbs, 64
Second-Waw/Yodh verbs,
65

geminate verbs, 66
anomalous verbs, 67
verbs with object suffixes,
68

f also 'infinitive, 1 'participle, 1
'passive 1
vowels, 4
conditioned change: e > a
crude notation with diacriti-
cal points, 4a
vowel deletion rule, 6A
vowel letters (matres

Subject Index I 25

lectionis) 4b
vowel signs, 4c

Yodh
word-initial, 6D

Aut« 46, 109
.a (prep.), 61

a, 61, 15, 73, 76, 77, 78

A-.i 16, 91 (e,f)

am focusing, 1 10

ream in compound tenses,

85-89
o {conj.\ 61

A* 91 (4)

A marker of agent of a passive

verb, 94; marker of object,
97a, f; centripetal, Text 2, n. 8.
rA93(l)(4);n«>™ rtf93(2)

(5)
O 93 (3)

1 12a

12a

SELECT BIBLIOGRAPHY

by
S. P. Brock

1. Histories of Syriac Literature

2. Grammars

3. Dictionaries

4. Grammatical and Lexical Studies

5. Instrumenta Studiorum

(a) Bibliographies

(b) Concordances

6. Specific Topics

7. General Studies and Collected Volumes

8. Syriac Texts (Select)

(a) Bible

(b) Syriac Authors: Main Editions

(c) Collections of Texts

(d) Translations into Syriac
Abbreviations of titles of journals, series etc.

1. HISTORIES OF SYRIAC LITERATURE

A. Abouna: Adab al-lugha al-aramlya. Beirut, 1970.

M. Albert: Langue et literature syriaques. In A. Guillaumont and others, Christian-

ismes orientaux. Introduction k l'gtude des langues et des literatures (Paris,

1993), pp. 299-372.
J.S. Assemani: Bibliotheca Orientalis, I-III. Rome, 1719-28; repr. Hildesheim 1975.
I.E. Barsaum: Al-liPlu* al-mantQr fi ta^rikh al- c ul0m wal-adab al suryarilya. Aleppo,

2 1956; repr. Baghdad, 1976. Syriac translation by Philoxenos Y. Daulabani.

Qamishli, 1967. ET 2000.
A. Baumstark: Geschichte der syrischen Literatur. Bonn, 1922; repr. Berlin, 1968.
- : "Die syrische Literatur. 1 ' In his Die christlichen Literaturen des Orients I (Leipzig,

1911), pp. 39-106.
A. Baumstark, A. Rlicker: "Die syrische Literatur." In Semitistik (Handbuch der

Orientalistik III; Leiden, 1954), pp. 168-207.
P. Bettiolo: "Lineamenti di Patrologia Siriaca." In A.Quacquarelli (ed.), Complement

128 Bibliography

interdisciplinari di Patrologia (Rome, 1989), pp. 503-603.

- : "Letteratura siriaca" in A. di Berardini (ed.), Patrologia V (Genoa, 2000),

415-493.
M. Breydy: Geschichte der syro-arabischen Literatur der Maroniten vom VII. bis

XVI. Jahrhundert. Opladen, 1985.
S.P. Brock: A Brief Outline of Syriac Literature. Kottayam, 1997.
J.-B. Chabot: Literature syriaque. Paris, 1934.
R. Duval: La literature syriaque. Paris, 3 1907.
de Lacy CLeary: The Syriac Fathers. London, 1909.
R. Macuch: Geschichte der spat- und neusyrischen Literatur. Berlin, 1976.

1. Ortiz de Urbina: Patrologia Syriaca. Rome, 2 1965.

P. Sarmas: Tastflta d-seprayuta atorayfi, I-III. Tehran, 1963-70.
W. Wright: A Short History of Syriac Literature. London, 1894.

2. GRAMMARS (* denotes a grammar for pedagogical use)

T. Arayathinal: Aramaic Grammar, I-II. Mannanam, 1957-59.

C. Brockelmann: Syrische Grammatik mit Paradigmen, Literatur, Chrestomathie und

Glossar. Leipzig, 10 1965.
J.F. Coakley, Robinson's Paradigms and Exercises in Syriac Grammar*. Oxford,

2002.
L. Costaz: Grammaire syriaque. Beirut, 1964.
P.Y. Daulabani: Ktaba d-shet'esta c al qanone d-le<za sQrySya*. 1961; repr. Glane,

1982.
R. Duval: Traite de grammaire syriaque. Paris, 1881; repr. Amsterdam 1969.
A. Frey: Petite grammaire syriaque*. Fribourg/Gftttingen, 1984.
Gabriel of St Joseph: Syro-Chaldaic (Aramaic) Grammar. Mannanam, 1922; 7 1984.
J. Healey: First Studies in Syriac*. Birmingham, 1980.
G. Kiraz: The Syriac Primer: Reading, Writing, Vocabulary*. Sheffield, 1988.
A. Mingana: Clef de la langue aram6enne ou grammaire complete et pratique des

deux dialectes syriaques occidental et oriental. Mosul, 1905.
T. Muraoka: Classical Syriac for Hebraists*. Wiesbaden, 1987.
E. Nestle: Brevis Linguae Syriacae Grammatica. Leipzig, 1881. ET Berlin, 1889.
T. Nftldeke: Kurzgefasste syrische Grammatik. Repr. with Anhang, ed. A. Schall.

Darmstadt, 1966. (ET by J. A. Crichton, Compendious Syriac Grammar. London,

1904). Repr. with supplementary notes, ed. P.T. Daniels (Winona Lake, 2001).
A. Nouro: Suloko/Suloqo*, Book 1. Glane, 1989.
L. Palacios: Grammatica Syriaca*. Rome, 1954.
M. Pazzini: Grammatica siriaca*. Jerusalem, 1999.
M. Thackston: Introduction to Syriac: an Elementary Grammar with Readings from

Syriac Literature.* Bethesda, MD, 1999.

Bibliography 129

A. Tronina and M. Szmajdzinski, Wprowadzenie do jezyka syryjskiego* (Studia

Biblica6). Kielce,2003.
K.G. Tscreteli: Sirijskij Yazik. Moscow, 1979.
A. Ungnad: Syrische Grammatik*. Miinchen, 2 1932.

3. DICTIONARIES

S. Atto: Nederlands Suryoyo Woordenboek/LeksiqOn SuryCyo Holandoyo. Enschede,

1986.
- : Sfar melle: Suryoyo-Turkoyo/Suryanice-Ttirk§e Sttzliik. Enschede, 1989.
T. Audo: Dictionnaire de la langue chald6enne, I-II. Mosul, 1897; repr. (as one vol.)

Glane, 1985. [Syriac-Syriac].
Bar c Ali: Syrisch-arabische Glossen. Erster Band. Bar Alis Lexicon von Alaf bis

Mim, ed. G.Hoffmann. Kiel, 1884. The Syriac Arabic Glosses of IshcF bar c Ali,

Part II, ed. RJ.H. Gottheil. Rome, 1908-28.
Bar Bahlul: Lexicon Syriacum auctore Hassano Bar Bahlule, ed. R. Duval, I-HI.

Paris, 1901.
C. Brockelmann: Lexicon Syriacum. Halle, 2 1928; repr. Hildesheim, 1982.
A. Bulut: Woordenboek Nederlands-Suryoyo, Suryoyo-Nederlands. Enschede, c.1994.
G. Cardahi: Al-Lobab, seu Dictionarium Syro-Arabicum, I-II. Beirut, 1887-91.
L. Costaz: Dictionnaire syriaque-fransais/Syriac-English Dictionary/ QamQs suryarii

<arab. Beirut, 1963.
H. Dogan, Mhadyono/WGrterbuch. Syrisch-Deutsch, Deutsch-Syrisch. Aleppo, 1997.
T.C. Falla: A Key to the Peshitta Gospels, I CAlaph-Dalath), Leiden, 1991; II (He -

Y5), Leiden, 2000.
J. Ferrer I Costa and M.A. Nogueras, Breve Diccionario Siriaco. Barcelona, 1999.
M.H. Goshen-Gottstein: A Syriac-English Glossary with Etymological Notes. Wies-
baden, 1970. [Based on C. Brockelmann's Chrestomathie].
I. Hanna: Mini-W6rterbuch Deutsch Assyrisch/Kfibo d-haShoto Suryoyo-Germanoyo.

Augsburg, 1984.
K. Jacob and A. Elkhoury: Mhadyono: Leksiqon Suryoyo wa Swod5y6 /The Guide:

The First Literary Colloquial Syriac Dictionary. Stockholm, 1985.
W. Jennings (rev.U.Gantillon): Lexicon to the Syriac New Testament (Peshitta).

Oxford, 1926.
G. Kiraz: Lexical Tools to the Syriac New Testament. Sheffield 1994.
R. K6bert: Vocabularium Syriacum. Rome, 1956. [Addenda in Orientalia 39 (1970),

pp. 315-19].
I. L5w: Aramaische Pflanzennamen. Leipzig, 1881.
J. E. Manna: Vocabulaire chakteen-arabe. 2nd ed. (with Supplement by R. Bidawid)

Beirut, 1975.

130 Bibliography

J. P. Margoliouth: Supplement to the Thesaurus Syriacus of R. Payne Smith. Oxford,

1927.
M. G. Odisho: Hilqa deLeshana. Assyrian [Syriac] - Arabic Dictionary. Baghdad,

1997.
J. Payne Smith (Mrs Margoliouth): A Compendious Syriac Dictionary. Oxford, 1903.
R. Payne Smith: Thesaurus Syriacus, M. Oxford, 1879-1901.
H. §abo and A. Bulut: Wflrterbuch Deutsch-Aram&sch [Syriac], Aram&isch-Deutsch.

Heilbron, 2000.
Shleymon Isho' Hadbshaba, Leksiqon 'Arabaya-Suryaya: Zahrire. Dohuk, nd

[c.1998].
E. Thelly: Syriac-English- Malayalam Lexicon. Kottayam, 1999.

4. GRAMMATICAL AND LEXICAL STUDIES

M. Albert: La langue syriaque: remarques stylistiques. PdO 13 (1986) 225-48.
I. Avinery: Syntax de la Peshitta sur le pentateuque. Ph. D. diss. Jerusalem, 1973.
- : Pronominal objects in the Peshitta version [in Hebrew]. Leshonenu 38 (1973/4)

220-24, III.
- : The position of the demonstrative pronoun in Syriac. JNES 34 (1975) 123-27.

- : Notes on ordinals versus cardinals in Syriac. Israel Oriental Studies 5 (1975)

45-46.
- : Probl&mes de variation dans la traduction syriaque du Pentateuque. Semitica 25

(1975) 105-9.
- : The position of declined kl in Syriac. Afroasiatic Linguistics 3 (1976) 108-9.

- : La conception de 'plus determine en ancien syriaque. Le Mus6on 90 (1977)

421-26.
- : On the nominal clause in the Peshitta. JSS 22 (1977) 48-49.
- : The position of declined kl in Syriac. JAOS 104 (1984) 333.
C. Balzaretti: Ancient treatises on Syriac homonyms. OC 81 (1997) 73-81.
E. Beck: Die konditionale Periode in der Sprache EphrMms des Syrers. OC 64

(1980) 1-31.

- : Die Vergleichpartikel «y r< in der Sprache Ephrgms. In Studien aus Arabistik

und Semitistik. A. Spitaler tlberreicht zum siebzigsten Geburtstag (Wiesbaden
1980), pp. 15-41.

- : Grammatisch-syntaktische Studien zur Sprache Ephraems des Syrers. OC 68

(1984) 1-26; 69 (1985) 1-32.
S.F. Bennett: Objective pronominal suffixes in Aramaic. Ph.D. diss. Yale, 1984.
K. Beyer: Der reichsaramaische Einschlag in der altesten syrischen Literatur. ZDMG

116(1966)242-54.
H. Birkeland: The Syriac phonematic vowel systems. In Festskrift til Professor Olaf

Broch (Oslo 1947), pp. 13-39.

Bibliography 131

J. Blau: The origin of the open and closed e in Proto-Syriac. Bulletin of the School
of Oriental and African Studies 32 (1969) 1-9.

G. Bohas: Les «6tats du nom» en syriaque. In Ch.-B. Amphoux, A. Frey and U.
Schattner-Rieser (eds), Etudes s6mitiques et samaritaines offertes k Jean Margain
[Histoire du texte biblique 4] (Lausanne: Zfcbre, 1998), pp. 109-16.

- : Radical ou racine/schfeme? L'organisation de la conjugaison syriaque, avant

I* adoption de la racine. Le Mus6on 1 16 (2003), 343-376.
S. Bombeck: Das syrisches Partizip aktiv r<ci<o. BN 88 (1997) 59-74.

- : Das syrische Verbalsystem: hypothetische Satze und hw5 vor Adjektiv oder

Partizip. In N. Nebes (ed.), Tempus und Aspekt in den semitischen Sprachen etc.

(Wiesbaden, 1999), pp. 23-36.
J. L. Boyd HI: The development of the West Semitic Qal perfect of the double c ayin

verb with particular reference to its transmission in Syriac. Journal of Northwest

Semitic Languages 10(1982) 11-23.
M.M. Bravmann: Syriac dalma, "lest", "perhaps", and some related Arabic pronomina.

JSS 15 (1970) 189-204.

- : The infinitive in the function of the 'psychological predicate' in Syriac. Le

Mus6on 89 (1971) 219-23.
S.P. Brock: Greek words in the Syriac Gospels (vet and pe). Le Mus6on 80 (1967)

389-426.
- : Some observations on the use of Classical Syriac in the late twentieth century.

JSS 34 (1989) 363-75.
- : Diachronic aspects of Syriac word formation: an aid for dating anonymous texts.

V Symposium Syriacum (OCA 236: 1990), pp. 321-30.

- : Greek words in Syriac: some general features. Scripta Classica Israelica 15

(1996) 251-62. Repr. in From Ephrem to Romanos (Aldershot, 1999), ch. XV.

- : Some remarks on the use of the construct in Classical Syriac. In E. Wardini
(ed.), Built on Solid Rock: Studies in Honour of Professor Ebbe Egede Knudsen
on the Occasion of his 65th Birthday April 1 1th 1997 (Oslo), pp. 44-60.

- : Greek words in Ephrem and Narsai: a comparative sampling. Aram 1 1/12

(1999/2000), 439-449.

- : Syriac lexicography: reflections on resources and sources. Aramaic Studies 1:2

(2003), 165-178.

- : Some diachronic features of Classical Syriac. In M. Baasten and W.T. van
Peursen (eds), Hamlet on a Hill: Semitic and Greek Studies Presented to Professor
T. Muraoka on the Occasion of his Sixty-Fifth Birthday [OLA 118] (Leuven,
2003), pp. 95-111.

- : Secondary formations from Greek loanwords in Syriac. In H. Juusola, J. Laulainen,
H. Palva (eds), Verbum et Calamus. Semitic and Related Studies in Honour of
Prof. Tapani Harviainen (= Studia Orientalia 99; Helsinki, 2004), 31-39.

132 Bibliography

F.B. Chatonnet: De l'6criture 6dessenienne k 1'es.trangeUi et au serj6. Semitica 50

(2001)81-90.
M. Chyet: Syriac loanwords in Kurdish. In A. Afsaruddin and A.H. Mathias Zahniser

(eds), Humanism, Culture and Language in the Near East. Studies in Honor of

G. Krotkoff (Winona Lake, 1997), 283-300.
R. Contini: Greek linguistic thinking and the Syriac linguistic tradition. Sprawozdania

Z Posiedzeii Komisji Naukowych 40 (1996) 45-49.
- : Le scienze del linguaggio. In Storia della Scienza IV (Istituto della Enciclopedia

Italiana; 2001), 26-36.

- : La lingua del Bet Qatraye. In J. Lentin and A. Lonnet (eds), Melanges David

Cohen (Paris, 2003), 173-181.

P.T. Daniels: Classical Syriac phonology. In A.S. Kaye (ed.), Phonologies of Asia
and Africa (including the Caucasus) (Winona Lake, 1997), 127-140.

W. Diem: Syrische Kleinigkeiten. In M. Macuch et al. (eds), Studia semitica necnon
Iranica Rudolpho Macuch septuagenario ab amicis et discipulis dedicata (Wies-
baden), pp. 65-78.

L. Edzard: Problems with post-vocalic spirantization in Syriac: cyclic rule ordering
vs. 'early phonemization with paradigmatic levelling.' JSS 46 (2001) 77-96.

S.E. Fassberg: Is Pael an intensive/plural form of Peal in Syriac? JA 287 (1999)
395-431.

- : The alternation of Ethpeel and Ethpaal in Syriac. Leshonenu 63 (2000-01)

247-78.
W. Fischer: Zur Chronologie morphophonematischer Gesetzm&ssigkeiten im Aramai-

schen, in id. (ed.), Festgabe fiir Hans Wehr zum 60. Geburtstag am 5. Juli 1969

ttberreicht von seinen SchUlern (Wiesbaden, 1969), pp. 175-91.
J.N. Ford: Two Syriac terms relating to ophthalmology and their cognates, JSS 47

(2002), 23-38.

F. Forkel: Die heutige traditionelle Aussprache des klassischen Westsyrisch bei den

syrisch-orthodoxen Christen in Tur 'Abdin und in Syria. Bad Homberg, 1995.
J. Fox: Semitic Noun Patterns [Harvard Semitic Studies 52]. Winona Lake, 2003.
A. Gai: The twofold nature of the deverbal nouns in Ancient Semitic languages.

ZDMG 146 (1996) 278-316.
O. Gensler: Why Semitic adverbializers (Akkadian -iS, Syriac a'lt) should not be

derived from existential *'!*). JSS 45 (2000) 233-66.

G. Goldenberg: Tautological infinitive. Israel Oriental Stuides 1 (1971) 36-85, esp.
47-59.

- : On Syriac sentence structure. In M. Sokoloff (ed.), Arameans, Aramaic and the

Aramaic Literary Tradition (Ramat Gan, 1983), pp. 97-140.

- : On some niceties of Syriac syntax. V Symposium Syriacum (OCA 236: 1990),

pp. 335-44.

Bibliography 133

- : On predicative adjectives and Syriac syntax. BO 48 (1991) 716-26.

- : Bible translation and Syriac idiom. In P.B. Dirksen and A. van der Kooij (eds),

The Peshitta as a Translation (Leiden, 1995), pp. 25-39.
- : Comments on Wido van Peursen's paper Three Three approaches to the tripartite

nominal clause in Syriac 1 {forthcoming).
J. Greppin: Syriac loanwords in Classical Armenian. In A. Afsaruddin and A.H.

Mathias Zahniser (eds), Humanism, Culture and Language in the Near East.

Studies in Honor of G. Krotkoff (Winona Lake, 1997), pp. 247-251.

A. Guillaumont: La phrase dite "nominale" en syriaque. Comptes rendus du groupe
linguistique d'6tudes chamito-s6mitiques 5 (1948/51) 31-33.

- : Determination et ind6termination du nom en syriaque. Ibid. 91-94.

E. Hartwig: Untersuchungen zur Syntax des Afraates. I. Die Relativ-partikel und der

Relativsatz. Leipzig, 1893.
T. Harviainen: On the loss of the Greek Ihl and the so-called aspirated Rho. Studia

Orientalia45 (1976) 1-88.
J.F. Healey: The early history of the Syriac script: a reassessment. JSS 45 (2000)

55-67.
R.D Hoberman: Initial consonant clusters in Hebrew and Aramaic. JNES 48 (1989)

25-29.
- : The modern Chaldean pronunciation of Classical Syriac. In A. Afsaruddin and

AJH. Mathias Zahniser (eds), Humanism, Culture and Language in the Near East.

Studies in Honor of G. Krotkoff (Winona Lake, 1997), pp. 253-265.

B. Holmberg: Some remarks on the word r&ocLLo in Syriac. In E. Wardini (ed.), Built

on Solid Rock: Studies in Honour of Professor Ebbe Egede Knudsen on the
Occasion of his 65th Birthday April 11th 1997 (Oslo), pp. 115-27.

B. J&ndl: Die syrischen Konjunktionen und Partikeln, ka& w-, den und g€r. In N.
Nebes (ed.), Neue Beitrage zur Semitistik. Erstes Arbeitstreffen der Arbeitsge-
meinschaft Semitistik in der Deutschen Morgenl&idischen Gesellschaft vom 11.
bis 13. September 2000 an der Friedrich-Schiller-Universitat Jena (Wiesbaden:
Harrassowitz, 2002), pp. 77-90.

K.D. Jenner: Nominal clauses in the Peshitta and Jacob of Edessa. In P.B. Dirksen
and A. van der Kooij (eds), The Peshitta as a Translation. Papers Read at the II
Peshitta Symposium Held at Leiden 19-21 August 1993 (Leiden: Brill, 1995),
pp. 47-61.

- : The use of the particle *u t< in the Syro-Hexaplaric Psalter and the Peshitta. In M.

Baasten and W.T. van Peursen (eds), Hamlet on a Hill: Semitic and Greek
Studies Presented to Professor T. Muraoka on the Occasion of his Sixty-Fifth
Birthday [Orientalia Lovaniensia Analecta 118] (Leuven: Peeters: 2003), pp.
287-308.
E. Jenni: Altsyrische Inschriften. Theologische Zeitschrift 21 (1965) 371-85.

134 Bibliography

J. Joosten: The use of some particles in the Old Testament Peshitta. Textus 14

(1988) 175-83.
- : The predicative adjective in the status emphaticus in Syriac. BO 46 (1989) 18-24.
- : The function of the so-called Dativus Ethicus in Classical Syriac. Orientalia 58

(1989)473-92.

- : West Aramaic elements in the Old Syriac and Peshitta Gospels. Journal of

Biblical Literature 1 10 (1991) 271-89.
- : The negation of the non-verbal clause in early Syriac. JAOS 1 12 (1992) 584-88.

- : Two West Aramaic elements in the Old Syriac and Peshitta Gospels. Biblische

Notizen 61 (1992) 17-21.
- : On the ante-position of the attributive adjective in Classical Syriac and Biblical
Hebrew. Zeitschrift fttr Althebraistik6(1993) 188-92.

- : West Aramaic elements in the Syriac Gospels: Methodological considerations.

VI Symposium Syriacum 1992. OCA 247 (Rome, 1994), pp. 101-109.

- : The Syriac Language of the Peshitta and Old Syriac Versions of Matthew

(Studies in Semitic Languages and Linguistics 22). Leiden, 1996.
- : La tradition syriaque des fivangiles et la question du 'substrat aram6en.' RHPR
77(1997)257-72.

- : «Le Pfere envoie le Fils». La provenance occidentale d'une locution syriaque.
RHR 214 (1997) 299-309.

- : Greek and Latin words in the Peshitta Pentateuch. First soundings, R. Lavenant

(ed.), Symposium Syriacum VII, 1996. OCA 256 (Rome, 1998), pp. 37-47.
- : Comments on Three approaches to the tripartite nominal clause in Syriac' by

W.Th. van Peursen (forthcoming).
H. Juusola: Who wrote the Syriac incantation bowls? SO 85 (1999) 75-92.
G. Khan: Object markers and agreement pronouns in Semitic languages. Bulletin of

the School of Oriental and African Studies 47 (1984) 468-500.
- : Studies in Semitic Syntax. Oxford, 1988.
G. A. Kiraz: Introduction to Syriac Spirantization. Glane, 1995.
E.E. Knudsen: Lexical innovations in Modern Literary Syriac. In R. Lavenant (ed.),

Symposium Syriacum VII (OCA 256, 1998), 545-551.
- : An important step in the revival of Literary Syriac: Abrohom Nuro's Tawlodotho.

OC 84 (2000), 59-65.
R. Kuty: The position of the particle den in New Testament Syriac. ANES 38

(2001) 186-99.
I. L5w: Aramaische Fischnamen. In C. Bezold (ed.), Orientalische Studien Th. N&ldeke

... gewidmet, I (Giessen, 1906), pp. 549-70.
- : Aramaische Lurchnamen. In Z. GUnzburg, I. Markon (eds), Zikkaron le-Avraham

Elijahu [Harkavy-Festschrift] (Berlin, 1908), pp. 37-62; Florilegium ... M. de

Vogu6 (Paris, 1909), pp. 391-406; and ZA 26 (1912) 126-47.

Bibliography 135

J. A. Lund: Reconsideration of unrecorded Syriac gemma 'bridle' or 'bit', Le Mus6on

115 (2002), 317-321.
J.P. Lyon: Syriac Gospel Translations. A Comparison of the Language and Translation

Method Used in the Old Syriac, the Diatessaron, and the Peshitto (CSCO 548,

Subs 88, 1994).
M. Maggi: New Persian glosses in East Syriac texts of the eighth to tenth centuries.

In L.Paul (ed.), Persian Origins - Early Judaeo-Persian and the Emergence of

New Persian (Iranica 6, Wiesbaden, 2003), 111-145.
J.P.P. Martin: Jacques d'Edesse et les voyelles syriennes. JAs VI.13 (1869) 447-82.

- : Tradition karkaphienne, ou la Massore chez les Syriens. JAs VI. 14 (1869)

245-379.
- : Syriens orientaux et occidentaux. Essai sur les deux principaux dialectes aram6ens.
JAs VI.19 (1872) 305-483.

- : Histoire de la ponctuation ou de la massore chez les Syriens. JAs VII.5 (1875)

81-208.
- : De la m6trique chez les Syriens. Leipzig, 1879.
M. Maroth: Der politische Wortschatz altgriechischer Herkunft im Syrischen. In

E.C. Welskopf (ed.), Das Fortleben altgriechischer sozialer Typenbegriffe in den

Sprachen der Welt, II (Berlin, 1982), pp. 485-507.
C. Meehan: Qal/Pe'al as the passive of Hif 'il/Af *el in Mishnaic Hebrew and Middle

Aramaic. In K. Jongeling, H.L. Murre van den Berg and L. Van Rompay (eds),

Studies in Hebrew and Aramaic Syntax presented to Prof. J. Hoftijzer (Leiden,

1991), 112-131.
- : A Palestinian-type lexeme in an early ancient Syriac manuscript (forthcoming).
A. Merx: Historia artis grammaticae apud Syros. Leipzig, 1889.
G.I. Moller: Towards a new typology of the Syriac manuscript alphabet. JNSL 14

(1988) 153-97.
Sh. Morag: The Vocalization Systems of Arabic, Hebrew, and Aramaic. 4 s-Graven-

hage, 1962, pp. 45-59.
C. Morrison: review of the first ed. of the present grammar. Or 70 (2001) 339-45.
T. Muraoka: Remarks on the syntax of some types of noun modifier in Syriac. JNES

31 (1972) 192-94.
- : On the nominal clause in the Old Syriac Gospels. JSS 20 (1975) 28-37.
- : On the Syriac particle Hi BO 34 (1977) 21-22.

- : Response to G. Goldenberg, "Bible translations and Syriac idiom." In P.B.

Dirksen and A. van der Kooij (eds), The Peshitta as a Translation (Leiden, 1995),
pp. 41-46.
- : On the Classical Syriac particles for «between». In Ch.-B. Amphoux, A. Frey
and U. Schattner-Rieser (eds), Etudes s6mitiques et samaritaines offertes k Jean
Margain [Histoire du texte biblique 4] (Lausanne: Zfebre, 1998), pp. 135-42.

136 Bibliography

- : In response to W.Th. van Peursen and a bit more. In P.S.F. van Keulen and

W.Th. van Peursen , Synchrony and Diachrony in the Study of the Syriac Language
System and Translation Technique: Proceedings of the CALAP Seminar 2003
[Studia Semitica Neerlandica] (forthcoming).
- : Further remarks on Aur^ clauses in Classical Syriac (forthcoming).

_ : On the verb complementation in Classical Syriac (forthcoming).
A. Nuro: Tawldotho, or Syriac Neologisms. Principles, Criteria and Examples.
Stockholm, 1997.

E. Renhart: Ein Lexicon syriacum. In M. Tamcke (ed.), Syriaca: Zu Geschichte,
Theologie und Gegenwartslage der syrischen Kirchen (Hamburg, 2002), 207-215.

M. Rogland: Performative utterances in Classical Syriac. JSS 46 (2001) 243-50.

F. Rundgren: Das altsyrische Verbalsystem. Sprakvetenskapliga S&llskapets i Uppsala

F6rhandligar 1958/60, pp. 51-75.
- : On Old Syriac riTSa and nessa, iu§a "signum" (Aramaica VI). Jerusalem Studies in

Arabic and Islam 15 (1992) 55-59.
A. Schall: Studien uber griechische Fremdw6rter im Syrischen. Darmstadt, 1960.

[Index by R. Voigt in Symposium Syriacum VII (1998), 539-543].
J. Schleiffer: Berichtigungen und Erganzungen zum Supplement des Thesaurus Syria-

cus. Orientalia 8 (1939) 25-58.
F. Schulthess: Homonyme Wurzeln im Syrischen. Berlin, 1900.
J.B. Segal: The Diacritical Point and the Accents in Syriac. London, 1953.
- : QuSSaya and Rukkaka: a historical introduction. JSS 34 (1989) 483-91.
U. Seidel: Methodische Probleme der syrischen (ostaram&ischen) Lexikologie. Hall-

esche BeitrSge zur Orientwissenschaft 7 (1985) 23-46.

- : Mftgliglichkeiten der syrischen (aramaischen) Lexikologie fUr die Sozial- und

Wirtschaftsgeschichtsschreibung des Vorderen Orients. Hallesche Beitr&ge zur
Orientwissenschaft 10 (1986) 53-77.

- : Studien zum Vokabular der Landwirtschaft im Syrischen, I-II. Altorientalische

Forschungen 15 (1988) 133-73; 16 (1989) 89-139.
N. Sims- Williams: Syro-Sogdica: Syriac elements in Sogdian. In A Green Leaf:

Papers in Honour of Prof. J.P. Asmussen (Leiden, 1988), pp. 145-56.
A. Spitaler: Das Femininum des Wahlworts ftir zwei im Hebr&ischen und fUr sechs

im Syrischen. In A.S. Kaye (ed.), Semitic Studies in honor of Wolf Leslau ..

(Wiesbaden, 1991), 1493-98.
D.G.K. Taylor: Bilingualism and Diglossia in Late Antique Syriac and Mesopotamia.

In J.N. Adams, M. Janse and S. Swain (eds), Bilingualism in Ancient Society:

Language Contact and the Written Word (Oxford, 2002), 298-331.
J. Teixidor: Autour de la conjunction syriaque. In C-B. Amphoux, A. Frey and U.

Schattner-Rieser (eds), Etudes s6mitiques et samaritaines offertes & Jean Margain

(Lausanne, 1998), pp. 143- 148.

Bibliography 137

W.Th. van Peursen: The alleged retroversions from Syriac in the Hebrew text of
Ben Sira revisited: linguistic perspectives. In R. Lehmann (eds), Kleine Untersu-
chungen zur Sprache des Alten Testaments und seiner Umwelt, 2 (2001), pp.
47-95.

- : Morphosyntactic and syntactic issues in the Syriac text of 1 Kings 1, in J. Cook
(ed.), Bible and Computer: The Stellenbosch AIBI-6 Conference, Proceedings of
the Association Internationale Bible et Informatique "From Alpha to Byte," Uni-
versity of Stellenbosch 17-21 July, 2000 (Leiden, 2002), pp. 99-1 1 1.

- : Three approaches to the tripartite nominal clause in Classical Syriac. In P.S.F.

van Keulen and W.Th. van Peursen , Synchrony and Diachrony in the Study of
the Syriac Language System and Translation Technique: Proceedings of the CAL-
AP Seminar 2003 [Studia Semitica Neerlandica] (forthcoming).

- : Response to the responses. In the volume mentioned above (forthcoming).

- : Nominal clauses in 1 Kings 2:1-9 (forthcoming).

L. Van Rompay: Some remarks on the language of Syriac incantation texts. In V
Symposium Syriacum (OCA 236: 1990), pp. 369-81.

- : Some reflections on the use of post-predicative hwa in Classical Syriac. In K.

Jongeling et al. (eds), Studies in Hebrew and Aramaic Syntax [Fschr. J. Hoftijzer]
(Leiden, 1991), pp. 210-19.

- : Some preliminary remarks on the origin of Classical Syriac as a standard language:
the Syriac version of Eusebius of Caesarea's Ecclesiastical History. In G. Golden-
berg and S. Raz (eds), Semitic and Cushitic Studies (Wiesbaden, 1994), pp.
70-89.

R. Voigt: Die Verba primae w undy im Syrischen. OS 43/44 (1994-95) 187-95.

- : Das Vokalsystem des Syrischen nach Barhebraeus. OC 81 (1997) 36-72.

- : Das emphatische p des Syrischen. In R. Lavenant (ed.), Symposium Syriacum VII
(OCA 256, 1998), 527-537.

- : review of the first ed. of the present grammar. OLZ 94 (1999) 145-62.

E. Wardini: Neologisms in Modern Literary Syriac, I-II, Melanges de FUniversit6
Saint Joseph 53 (1993/4), 401-566; 54 (1995/6), 167-324.

T. Weiss: Zur ostsyrischen Laut- und Akzentlehre. Stuttgart, 1933.

S. Weninger. Die Wochentagsbezeichnungen im Syrischen. In R. Bartelmus and N.
Nebes (eds), Sachverhalt und Zeitbezug: Semitistische und alttestamentliche Stu-
dien [Fschr A. Denz] (Wiesbaden, 2001), pp. 151-66.

- : Modern Literary Syriac: a case of linguistic divorce. In R. Lavenant (ed.),

Symposium Syriacum VII (OCA 256, 1998), 517-525.

A. Wertheimer: Selected problems in Syriac syntax: Fundamentals of sentence struc-
ture. Ph.D. diss. Tel Aviv, 1996.

- : The functions of the Syriac particle d-. Le Mus6on 1 14 (2001), 259-289.

- : Special types of cleft sentences in Syriac. JSS 46 (2001) 221-41.

138 Bibliography

- : Syriac nominal sentences. JSS 47 (2002) 1-21.

J.W. Wesselius: The spelling of the third person masculine singular suffixed pronoun

in Syriac. BO 39 (1982) 251-54.
PJ. Williams: Studies in the Syntax of the Peshitta of 1 Kings. Leiden, 2001.

5. INSTRUMENTA STUDIORUM

(a) BIBLIOGRAPHIES

Kh. Alwan: Bibliographie g6n6rale raisonn6e de Jacques de Saroug (+521). PdO 13

(1986)313-83.
S.P. Brock: Syriac Studies 1960-1970. A classified bibliography. PdO 4 (1973)

393-465.
- : Syriac Studies 1971-1980. A classified bibliography. PdO 10(1981/2) 291-412.
-: Syriac Studies 1981-1985. A classified bibliography. PdO 14 (1987) 289-360.
- : Syriac Studies 1986-1990. A classified bibliography. PdO 17 (1992) 211-301.
_ : Syriac Studies 1960-1990. A Classified Bibliography. Bibliothfcque de l'Universit6

Saint Esprit. Kaslik, 1996.
-: Syriac inscriptions: a preliminary check list of European publications. AION38

(1968) 255-71. Repr. in S.P. Brock, Studies in Syriac Christianity, ch. 1. Aldershot,

1992.
- : Syriac Studies: a classified bibliography (1991-1995). PdO 23 (1998), 241-350.
- : Syriac Studies 1996-2000. Forthcoming in PdO 29 (2004).
J.T. Clemons: Un supplement am£ricain au "Syriac Catalogue" de CMoss. L'Orient

Syrien 8 (1963) 469-84.
J.F. Coakley: The Archbishop of Canterbury's Assyrian Mission Press: a bibliography.

JSS 30 (1985) 35-73.
K. Den Biesen: Bibliography of Ephrem the Syrian. Giove in Umbria, 2002.
A. Desreumaux: Pour une bibliographie sur l'dpigraphie syriaque. AION 40 (1980)

704-8.
A. Desreumaux and F. Briquel-Chatonnet: R6pertoire des biblioth&ques et des cata-
logues de manuscrits syriaques. Paris, 1991.
P.B. Dirksen: An Annotated Bibliography of the Peshitta of the Old Testament.

Leiden, 1989.
J.-M. Fiey: Esquisse d'une bibliographie de Bar Hebraeus (+1286). PdO 13 (1986)

279-312.
C. Moss: Catalogue of Syriac Printed Books and Related Literature in the British

Museum. London, 1962.
E. Nestle: Litteratura Syriaca, in his Brevis Linguae Syriacae Grammatica [see Section

2], pp. 1-66 [of separate pagination].
P. Peeters: Bibliotheca Hagiographica Orientalis. Brussels, 1910.
Peshitta Institute: List of Old Testament Peshitta Manuscripts (Preliminary issue).

Bibliography 139

Leiden, 1961.
J. Raymond: Essai de Bibliographic Maronite. Kaslik, 1980.
M.P. Roncaglia: Essai de bibliographic sur S. Ephrem le Syrien. PdO 4 (1973)

343-70.
Kh. Samir: Complements de bibliographic ephr&nienne. PdO 4 (1973) 371-91.
J.-M. Sauget: Bibliographic des liturgies orientales (1900-1960). Rome, 1962.
P. Yousif: A Classified Bibliography on the East Syrian Liturgy. Rome, 1990.

(b) CONCORDANCES

[Anon.]: The Concordance to the Peshitta Version of the Aramaic New Testament.

New Knoxville, 1983. [Wordlist only].
D. Barth61emy and O. Rickenbacher: Konkordanz zum hebraischen Sirach mit syrisch-

hebraischem Index. Gottingen, 1973.
P.G. Borbonne and K.D. Jenner: The Old Testament in Syriac according to the

Peshitta Version. Part V: Concordance, vol. 1, The Pentateuch. Leiden, 1997.
G. Kiraz: A Computer-Generated Concordance to the Syriac New Testament, I- VI.

Leiden, 1993.
N. Sprenger: Konkordanz zum syrischen Psalter. GOFS 10 (1976).
W. Strothmann, K. Johannes, M. Zumpe: Konkordanz zur syrischen Bibel. Der

Pentateuch, I-IV. GOFS 26 (1986); Die Propheten, I-IV. GOFS 25 (1985).
W. Strothmann: Konkordanz des syrischen Koheletbuches nach der Peschitta und

der Syrohexapla. GOFS 4 (1973).
- : WOrterverzeichnis der apokryphen-deuterokanonischen Schriften des Alten Testa-
ments in der Peshitta. GOFS 27 (1988).
- : Die Mautbe, I- VI. GOFS 33, 1995.
M.M. Winter: A Concordance to the Peshitta Version of Ben Sira. Leiden, 1976.

6. SPECIFIC TOPICS

L. Bernhard: Die Chronologic der Syrer (Sb.Osterr.Ak.Wiss. 264; Wien, 1969).
-: Die Chronologic der syrischen Handschriften. Wiesbaden, 1971.
S.P. Brock: An introduction to Syriac studies. In J.H. Eaton (ed.), Horizons in
Semitic Studies (Birmingham/Sheffield, 1980), pp. 1- 33.

- : Syriac historical writing: a survey of the main sources. Journal of the Iraqi

Academy (Syriac Corporation) 5 (1979/80) 296-326; repr. in S.P. Brock, Studies
in Syriac Christianity. Aldershot, 1992.
- : The published verse homilies of Isaac of Antioch, Jacob of Serugh and Narsai.
Index of incipits. JSS 32 (1987) 279-313.

- : A brief guide to the main editions and translations of the works of St Ephrem.

The Harp: A Review of Syriac and Oriental Studies (Kottayam) 3 (1990), pp.

140 Bibliography

7-29.
- : Syriac dispute poems: the various types. In G.J. Reinink and H.J.L. Vanstiphout

(eds), Dispute Poems and Dialogues in the Ancient and Medieval Near East

(OLA 42: 1991), pp. 109-19.
- : The Syriac Commentary tradition. In C. Burnett (ed.), Glosses and Commentaries

on Aristotelian Logical Texts (Warburg Institute Surveys and Texts 23: 1993),

pp. 3-18.

- : The development of Syriac studies. In K.J. Cathcart (ed.), The Edward Hincks

Bicentenary Lectures (Dublin, 1994), pp. 94-113.
- : Syriac studies in the last three decades. In VI Symposium Syriacum (OCA 247:
1994), pp. 13-29.

- : Syriac translations of Greek popular philosophy, in P. Bruns (ed.), Von Athen

nach Bagdad. Zur Rezeption griechischer Philosophie von der Spatantike bis

zum Islam (Bonn, 2003), pp. 9-28.
R. Contini: Gli inizi della linguistica siriaca nellEuropa rinascimentale. Ri vista degli

Studi Orientali 68 (1994) 15-30.
R. Degen: Ein Corpus Medicorum Syriacorum. Medizinhistorisches Journal 7 (1972)

1 14-22.
- : Galen im Syrischen. In V. Nutton (ed.), Galen: Problems and Prospects (London,

1981), pp. 131-66.
HJ.W. Drijvers and J.F. Healey: The Old Syriac Inscriptions of Edessa & Osrhoene.

Leiden, 1999.
A.de Halleux: Philoxfcne de Mabbog: sa vie, ses 6crits, sa thtologie (Louvain, 1963).
J.-M. Fiey: Assyrie chr6tienne, MIL Beirut, 1965-68.
- : Chretiens syriaques sous les Mongols (CSCO Subsidia 44, 1975).
- : Nisibe, m6tropole syriaque orientale (CSCO Subsidia 54, 1977).
- : Communaut6s chr&iennes en Iran et Iraq des origines k 1552. London, 1979.
- : Chr6tiens syriaques sous les Abbasides (CSCO Subsidia 59, 1980).
- : Pour un Oriens Christianus Novus. R6pertoire des dioc&ses orientaux et occidentaux.

Beirut/Stuttgart, 1993.
W. Hage: Die syrisch-jakobitische Kirche in frtihislamischer Zeit. Wiesbaden, 1966.
W.H.P. Hatch: An Album of Dated Syriac Manuscripts. Boston, 1946. Reprinted

with new Foreword by L. Van Rompay (Piscataway NJ, 2002).
G. Hdlscher: Syrische Verskunst. Leipzig, 1932.
E. Honigmann: EvSques et 6v$ch6s monophysites d'Asie ant&ieure au Vie sifecle

(CSCO Subsidia 2, 1951).
- : Le couvent de Barsauma et le Patriarcat Jacobite d'Antioche et de Syrie (CSCO

Subsidia 7, 1954).
P. Kawerau: Die jakobitische Kirche im Zeitalter der syrischen Renaissance. Berlin,

1960.

Bibliography 141

J. Leroy: Les manuscrits syriaques a peintures, I-II. Paris, 1964.

E.G. Mathews: A bibliographical clavis to the corpus of works attributed to Isaac of

Antioch. Hugoye 5:1 (2002).
B.M. Metzger: Early Versions of the New Testament, ch.l. Oxford, 1972.
R. Murray: Symbols of Church and Kingdom. A Study in Early Syriac Tradition.

Cambridge, 1975.
P. Nagel: Grundziige syrischer Geschichtsschreibung. Berliner Byzantinische Arbei-

ten 55 (1990) 245-59.

E. Riad: Studies in the Syriac Preface (Studia Semitica Upsaliensia 11, 1988).

F. Rosenthal: Das Syrische. In his Die aramaistische Forschung seit Theodor Nftldeke's

Ver6ffentlichungen. Leiden, 1939 [repr. 1964]. pp. 179-211.
J.B. Segal: Edessa, "the Blessed City". Oxford, 1970.
W. Selb: Orientalisches Kirehenrecht. Band 1, Die Geschichte des Kirchenrechts der

Nestorianer: von den Anfangen bis zur Mongolenzeit (Sb.Osterr.Ak.Wiss., ph.-

hist.Kl. 388: 1981). Band 2, Die Geschichte des Kirchenrechts der Westsyrer:

von Anfangen bis zur Mongolenzeit (Sb.Osterr.Ak.Wiss., ph. hist.Kl. 543: 1989).
W. Strothmann: Die Anfange der syrischen Studien in Europa (GOFS 1, 1971).
A. V56bus: Studies in the History of the Gospel Text in Syriac, I-II (CSCO Subsidia

3,79; 1951,1987).
- : A History of Asceticism in the Syrian Orient, I-III (CSCO Subsidia 14, 17, 81;

1958, 1969, 1988).
- : History of the School of Nisibis (CSCO Subsidia 26, 1965).
- : Syrische Kanonessammlungen. IA-B, Westsyrische Originalurkunden (CSCO

Subsidia 35, 38; 1970).
- : Handschriftliche tJberlieferung der Memre-Dichtung des Jafqob von Serug, I-IV

(CSCO Subsidia 39-40, 60-61; 1973, 1980).
M. Weitzman: The Syriac Version of the Old Testament. An Introduction. Cambridge,

1999.
D. Welteke: Die "Beschreibung der Zeiten" von Mor Michael dem Grossen (1126-

1 199) (CSCO Subs. 1 10, 2003).
D. Wilmshurst: The Ecclesiastical Organisation of the Church of the East, 1318-1913

(CSCO 582, Subs. 104; 2000).
E.I. Yousif: La floraison des philosophes syriaques. Paris, 2003.
- : Les chroniqueurs syriaques (Paris, 2002).

7. GENERAL STUDIES AND COLLECTIVE VOLUMES

[I]- VII Symposium Syriacum. OCA 197 (1974); 205 (1978); 221 (1983); 229 (1987);

236 (1990); 247 (1994); 256 (1998).
S. Abouzayd (ed.): Festschrift for Dr Sebastian P. Brock (Aram Periodical 5; 1993

[1996]).

142 Bibliography

S.P. Brock: Syriac Perspectives on Late Antiquity. London, 1984.
- : Studies in Syriac Christianity. Aldershot, 1992.

- : From Ephrem to Romanos: Interactions between Syriac and Greek in Late Anti-
quity. Aldershot, 1999.
S.P. Brock, E.Balicka-Witakowski, D.G.K. Taylor, W. Witakowski, The Hidden

Pearl: the Syrian Orthodox Church and its Ancient Aramaic Heritage, I-III. Rome,

2001 . [For annotation, see Hugoye 5:1 (2001)].
R.G. Coquin, E. Lucchesi (eds): M61anges A. Guillaumont (Geneva, 1988).
A. Dietrich (ed.): Synkretismus im syrisch-persichen Kulturgebiet (Abh. Akad. Wiss.

Gdttingen 96, 1975).
P.B. Dirksen and M.J. Mulder (eds): The Peshitta: its Early Text and History.

Leiden, 1988.
P.B. Dirksen and A. van der Kooij (eds): The Peshitta as a Translation. Leiden,

1995.
H.J.W. Drijvers: East of Antioch. London, 1984.

- : History and Religion in Late Antique Syria. Aldershot, 1994.
R. Fischer (ed.): A Tribute to Arthur Voobus. Chicago, 1977.
N. Garsoian, T. Mathews, R.W. Thomson (eds): East of Byzantium: Syria and

Armenia in the Formative Period. Washington, 1982.
Gftttinger Arbeitkreis ftir syrische Kirchengeschichte (ed.): Paul de Lagarde und die

syrische Kirchengeschichte. Gftttingen, 1968.

F. Graffin (ed.): Memorial Mgr. G. Khouri-Sarkis. Louvain, 1969.

C. Laga, J. A. Munitiz, L. Van Rompay (eds): After Chalcedon. [Festschrift for A.

Van Roey] (OLA 18, 1985).
G.J. Reinink and A.C. Klugkist (eds): After Bardaisan. Studies on Continuity and

Change in Syriac Christianity in Honour of Prof. H.J.W. Drijvers (OLA 89;

1999).
J-M. Sauget (ed. L. Duval-Arnould and F. Rilliet): Literatures et manuscripts des

chr6tient6s syriaques et arabes. Receuil des articles (Studi e Testi 389; 1998).
M. Tamcke, W. Schwaigert, E. Schlarb (eds): Syrisches Christentum weltweit:

Festschrift W. Hage. Minister, 1995.

G. Wiessner (ed.): Erkenntnisse und Meinungen MI (GOFS 3, 17; 1973, 1978).

8. SYRIAC TEXTS (SELECT)
(a) BIBLE

Current standard editions (in chronological order).

OT and NT: Kfibe qaddishe. United Bible Societies, 1979 [reprint of S. Lee, 1832,
with Apocrypha added]; 1988 [Lee's New Testament now replaced by British
and Foreign Bible Society's edition]. The Urmia Bible (OT) in the East Syrian
script reprinted by the Trinitarian Bible Society, London (1958), and the Mosul

Bibliography 143

Bible (OT and NT), also in the East Syrian script (, 1887-91, 1951).

OTPeshitta

A.M. Ceriani: Translatio Syra Pescitto Veteris Testamenti ex codice Ambrosiano

sec. fere VI photolithographice edita. Milan, 1876-83.
Vetus Testamentum Syriace (Peshitta Institute, Leiden); LI Gen., Exod.(1977); 1.2

and Il.lb Lev., Num., Deut, Josh.(1991); Il.la Job (1982); II.2 Judg., Sam.(1978);

II.3 Pss.(1980); II.4 Kings (1976); II.5 Prov., Wis., Qoh., Cant.(1979); III.l

Isaiah (1987); III.3 Ezek. (1985); III.4 XII Proph., Dan. (1980); IV.2 Chron.

(1998), IV.3 ApocBar., IV Ezra (1973); IV.6 Odes, Apocr. Pss., Pss. of Solomon,

Tob., 1(3) Ezra (1972).

OT Syro-Hexapla

W. Baars: New Syro-Hexaplaric Texts. Leiden, 1968.

A.M. Ceriani: Codex Syro-Hexaplaris Ambrosianus photolithographice editus (Monu-

menta Sacra et Profana 7, 1874).
P. de Lagarde: Bibliotheca Syriaca ... quae ad philologiam sacram pertinent. GOttingen,

1892.

A. V56bus: The Pentateuch in the Version of the Syro-Hexapla (CSCO Subsidia 45,

1975).

Apocrypha

P. de Lagarde: Libri Veteris Testamenti Apocryphi Syriace. Leipzig, 1861.

N.Calduch-Benages, J. Ferrer, and J. Liesen, La Sabiduria del Escriba: Wisdom of
the Scribe. Diplomatic Edition of the Syriac Version of the Book of Ben Sira
according to Codex Ambrosianus with Translations in Spanish and English (Bib-
lioteca Madrasica 26; Estella, 2003).

NT Old Syriac

F.C. Burkitt: Evangelion da-Mepharreshe I-II. Cambridge, 1904.
A.S.Lewis: The Old Syriac Gospels. London, 1910.

NT Peshitta

P.E. Pusey and G.H. Gwilliam: Tetraevangelium Syriacum. Oxford, 1901.

The New Testament in Syriac [British and Foreign Bible Society edition]. London,

1920 and reprints.
The Aramaic New Testament. New Knoxville, 1983.

NTHarklean

B. Aland and A. Juckel: Das Neue Testament in syrischer Oberlieferung. I, Die
grossen katholischen Briefe; II.1-3, Die Paulinischen Briefe. Mttnster, 1986,
1991, 1995, 2002. [Peshitta and Harklean].

G. Kiraz: Comparative Edition of the Syriac Gospels, I-IV. Leiden, 1996. [Old

144 Bibliography

Syriac, Peshitta and Harklean].
A. VQObus: The Apocalypse in the Harklean Version (CSCO Subsidia 56, 1978).

J. White: Sacrorum Evangeliorum versio Syriaca Philoxeniana. Oxford, 1778.

- : Actuum Apostolorum et Epistularum ... versio Syriaca Philoxeniana. Oxford,

1799-1803.

(b) SYRIAC AUTHORS: MAIN EDITIONS

Before fourth century

ANON: Odes of Solomon, ed.+ ET J.H. Charlesworth (Oxford, 1973). Ed.+ GT M.

Lattke, (Fribourg/Gottingen, 1979-80; add 1999, 2001 [with commentary]).
- : Acts of Thomas, ed.+ ET W. Wright (London, 1871).
B ARDAIS AN: Book of the Laws of the Countries, ed.+ ET HJ.W. Drijvers (Assen,

1965).

Fourth century

ANON: Liber Graduum, ed.+ LT M. Kmosko (PS 1.3; 1927)

APHRAHAT: Demonstrations, ed. W. Wright (London, 1869). Ed.+ LT J. Parisot

(PS 1.1-2; 1894, 1907).
EPHREM (d. 373): Hymni (madrashe), ed.+ GT E. Beck (CSCO Syr. 73-74 (1955)

= H. de Fide; 76-77 (1957) = H. c. Haereses; 78-79 (1957) = H. de Paradiso, c.

Julianum; 82-83 (1959) = H. de Nativitate, Epiphania; 84-85 (1969) = H. de

Ecclesia; 92-93, 102-3 (1961, 1963) = Carmina Nisibena; 94-95 (1962) = H. de

Virginitate; 106-7 (1964) = H. de Ieiunio; 108-9 (1964) « H. de Azymis,

Crucifixione, Resurrectione; 140-41 (1972) = H. de Abraham Qidunaya, Juliano

Saba; 159-60 (1975) = Nachtrage).
- : Sermones (memre), ed.+ GT E. Beck (CSCO Syr.88-89 (1961) = de Fide; 130-31

(1969) = Sermones I; 134-35 (1970) = Serm. II; 138-39 (1972) + Serm. Ill;

148-49 (1973) = Serm. IV; 181-82 (1979) = S. in Hebdomadam Sanctam). On

Joseph, ed. P. Bedjan (Paris/Leipzig, 1891).
- : Sermo de Domino Nostro [in artistic prose], ed.+ GT E. Beck (CSCO Syr.116-17,

1966).

- : Letter to Publius [in artistic prose], ed.+ ET S.P. Brock, Le Musfon 89 (1976)

261-305.
- : Prose Refutations, HI, ed.+ ET C. Mitchell (London, 1912, 1921).
- : Commentary on Gen. Exod., ed.+ LT R.-M. Tonneau (CSCO Syr. 71-72, 1955).

- : Commentary on the Diatessaron, ed.+ LT L. Leloir (Dublin, 1963; Louvain,

1990).

Fifth century

ANON: Life of Abraham Qidunaya, ed.+ LT T. Lamy, Sancti Ephraem Hymni et
Sermones IV (Malines, 1902), cols 1-84.

Bibliography 145

- : Life of Alexis, ed.+ FT A. Amiaud (Paris, 1889).

- : Life of Rabbula, ed. J.J. Overbeck, S. Ephraemi Syri, Rabulae ... opera selecta
(Oxford, 1865), pp. 159-209.

- : Life of Simeon the Stylite, ed. S.E. Assemani, ASM II, pp. 227 412; and P.

Bedjan AMS 4, pp. 507-605.
- : Martyrdom of Simeon bar §abba c e, ed.+ LT M. Kmosko (PS 1.2; 1907).

- : Teaching of Addai, ed.+ ET G. Phillips (London, 1876). Ed.+ ET G. Howard

(Chico, 1981).
- : 'Julian Romance', ed. J.G.E. Hoffmann (Leiden, 1880).
BALAI: ed. J.J. Overbeck, S. Ephraemi Syri ... opera selecta (Oxford, 1865), pp.

251-336.
CYRILLONA: ed. G. Bickell, ZDMG27(1873) 566-98.
ISAAC of ANTIOCH: ed.+ LT G. Bickell [37 memre, madi3she] (I II, Giessen,

1873-77). Ed. P. Bedjan [66 memre] (Paris/Leipzig, 1903).
JOHN the SOLITARY (JOHN of APAMEA): Dialogue on the Soul, ed. S. Dedering

(Leipzig, 1936).
- : Three Letters, ed. L.G. Rignell (Lund, 1941).
- : Three Discourses, ed. L.G. Rignell (Lund, 1960).

- : Dialogues and Letters, ed. W. Strothmann (Patristische Texte und Studien 11,

1972).
- : Commentary on Qohelet, ed. W. Strothmann (GOFS 30, 1988).
NARSAI (E): Memre (verse homilies), ed. A. Mingana (I-II, Mosul, 1905). Ed.

Patriarchal Press (I-II, San Francisco, 1970).
- : Select memre: On Three Doctors, ed.+ FT F. Martin (JAs DC. 14- 15, 1899-1900);

On Joseph, ed. P. Bedjan (Paris, 1902), and in Liber Superiorum ... auctore

Thoma Margensi (Paris/Leipzig, 1901), 519-629; On Creation, ed.+ FT P. Gignoux

(PO 34, 1968); On the dominical Feasts, ed.+ ET F.G. McLeod (PO 40, 1979);

On Parables, ed.+ FT E.P. Siman (Paris, 1984); Six biblical memre, ed.+ ET J.

Frishman (Leiden, 1992).

Sixth century

AHUDEMMEH: On Composition of Man, ed.+ FT F. Nau (PO 3, 1905).

ANON (Ps. Zacharias; W): Ecclesiastical History, I, ed.+ LT E.W. Brooks (CSCO

Syr. 38, 41 [III 5]; 1919, 1924); II, ed. E.W. Brooks (CSCO 39, 42 [III 6]; 1921,

1924). [I includes Joseph and Aseneth, Acts of Silvester, Seven Sleepers of

Ephesus].
ANON: Homilies on Epiphany, ed.+ FT A. Desreumaux (PO 38, 1977); On High

Priest, On Sinful Woman, ed.+ FT F.Graffin (PO 41, 1984).
BARIJADBESHABBA <ARBAYA (E): Ecclesiastical History, ed.+ FT F. Nau

(Parti, P0 23, 1932; Part II, P0 9, 1913).
BARHADBESHABBA of IJALWAN (E): Cause of the Foundation of the Schools,

146 Bibliography

ed. + FT A. Scher (PO 4, 1907).
CYRUS of EDESSA (E): Cause of the Liturgical Feasts, ed.+ ET W. Macomber

(CSCO Syr. 155-56, 1974).
ELIJAH (W): Life of John of Telia, ed.+ LT E.W. Brooks (CSCO 7 8 [III 25],

1907).
JACOB of SERUGH (W; d. 521): Memre (verse homilies), ed. P. Bedjan (I-V,

Paris/Leipzig, 1905-10), and in S. Martyrii qui et Sahdona quae supersunt omnia

(Paris/Leipzig, 1902), 603-835.
- : Select memre: On Hosea, ed.+ GT W. Strothmann (GOFS 5, 1973); On Apostle

Thomas, ed.+ GT W. Strothmann (GOFS 12, 1976); Against the Jews, ed.+ FT

M. Albert (PO 38, 1976); On Creation, ed.+ FT Kh. Alwan (CSCO Syr. 214-15,

1989); On Ephrem, ed.+ ET J. Amar (PO 47, 1995).
- : Turgame (prose homilies), ed. + FT F. Rilliet (PO 43, 1986).
- : Letters, ed. G. Oiinder (CSCO Syr. 57 [II 45], 1937).
JOHN of EPHESUS (W): Ecclesiastical History, Part III, ed.+ LT E.W. Brooks

(CSCO Syr. 54-55 [III 3], 1935-6).
- : Lives of Eastern Saints, I-III, ed.+ ET E.W. Brooks (PO 17-19, 1923-24).
PETER of KALLINIKOS (W): Anti-Tritheist Dossier, ed.+ET R.Y. Ebied, A. van

Roey, L.R. Wickham (OLA 10, 1981).
- : Discourses against Damian, I, II, ed.+ ET R.Y. Ebied, A. van Roey, L.R. Wickham

(Turnhout, 1994, 1996).
PHILOXENUS (W; d. 523): Tractatus tres de Trinitate et Incarnatione, ed.+ LT A.

Vaschalde (CSCO Syr. 9-10 [II 27], 1907).
- : Dissertationes decern de uno e sancta Trinitate incorporate et passo, ed.+ LT/FT

M. Brifcre, F. Graffin (PO 15, 38-39, 41; 1920, 1977, 1979, 1982).
- : Ascetic Discourses, ed.+ ET E.A.W. Budge (2 vols, London, 1894).
- : Three Letters of Philoxenus, ed. + ET A. Vaschalde (Rome, 1902).
- : Letter to Patricius, ed.+ FT R. Lavenant (PO 30, 1963).
- : Letter to the Monks of Senun, ed.+ FT A. de Halleux (CSCO Syr .98-99, 1963).
- : Comm. on Prologue of John, ed.+ FT A. de Halleux (CSCO Syr. 165-66, 1977).
- : Comm. on Matthew and Luke (fragments), ed.+ ET. J.W. Watt (CSCO Syr.

171-72, 1978).
SIMEON of BETH ARSHAM (W): On the Himyarite Martyrs, ed.+ ET I. Shahid,

The Martyrs of Najran (Bruxelles, 1971).
STEPHEN bar SUDAILE (W): Book of the Holy Hierotheos, ed.+ ET F.S. Marsh

(London, 1927).

Seventh century

ABRAHAM (E): Life of Rabban Bar c Idta, ed.+ ET E.A.W. Budge (London, 1902).
c ANANISHO t (E; ed.): Paradise of the Fathers, ed.+ ET E.A.W. Budge (2 vols,
London, 1894). Ed. P. Bedjan, AMS7.

Bibliography 147

ANON: Memra on Alexander the Great, ed.+ GT G.J. Reinink (CSCO 195-96,

1983).
ANON (Ps. Methodius): Apocalypse, ed.+ GT G.J. Reinink (CSCO Syr. 220-21,

1993).
ANON (W): Life of Ahudemmeh, ed.+ FT F. Nau (PO 3, 1905).
BABAI the GREAT (E; d. 628): Liber de Unione, ed.+ LT A. Vaschalde (CSCO

Syr. 34-35 [II 61], 1915).
- : Comm. on Evagrius, Centuries, ed.+ GT W. Frankenberg (Abh.Kon. Ges.Wiss.

Gottingen, ph.-hist.Kl., NF 13, 2; 1912).
- : Martyrdom of George Mihrangushnasp, ed. P. Bedjan, in Histoire de Jabalaha ...

(Paris/Leipzig, 1895), 416-571.
DADISHO (E): On Stillness, ed.+ ET A. Mingana (in WS 7, 1934).
- : Comm. on Asceticon of Abba Isaiah, ed.+ FT R. Draguet (CSCO Syr. 144-45,

1972).
DENHA (W): Life of Marutha, ed.+ FT F. Nau (PO 3, 1905).
GABRIEL of QATAR: Comm. On the Liturgy, ed. + ET S.P. Brock, Hugoye 6:2

(2003).
GREGORY of CYPRUS (E): De theoria sancta, ed.+ LT I. Hausherr (Rome, 1937).
ISAAC of NINIVEH (E): Part I, ed. P. Bedjan (Paris/Leipzig, 1909); - : Part II, ch.

IV-XLI, ed.+ ET S.P. Brock (CSCO Syr. 224-25, 1995).
ISHCFYAHB ffl (E): Letters, ed.+ LT R. Duval (CSCO Syr. 1 1-12 [II 64], 1904-5).
- : Life of Ishcf sabran, ed. J.-B. Chabot (Paris, 1897).
JACOB of EDESSA (W; d. 708): Grammar (fragments), ed. A.Merx, Historia artis

grammaticae apud Syros (Leipzig, 1889), pp. 74*-84*.
- : Hexaemeron, ed.+ LT I.-B. Chabot, A. Vaschalde (CSCO 44, 48 [II 56]; 1928,

1932). Ed. J. gi$ek (Glane, 1985).
JOHN of the SEDRE (W): ed. J. Martikainen (GOFS 34, 1991).
SAHDONA (MARTYRIUS) (E): Book of Perfection, ed. P. Bedjan (Paris/Leipzig,

1902). Ed.+ FT A. de Halleux (CSCO Syr. 86-87, 90-91, 110-113; 1960, 1961,

1965).
SHEM : ON d-TAYBUTEH (E): ed. A. Mingana (in WS 7, 1934).

Eighth century

ANON.(Ps. Dionysius) (W): Zuqnin Chronicle, I, ed.+LT/FT I.-B. Chabot (CSCO
Syr.43, 66 [III 1]; 1927, 1949); II, ed. I.-B. Chabot (CSCO Syr. 53 [III 2],
1933). [I includes 'Chronicle of Joshua the Stylite', also ed. separately + ET W.
Wright (Cambridge 1882)].

ANON (E): Commentary on Gen.-Exod. 9:32, ed.+ FT L.Van Rompay (CSCO Syr.
205-6, 1986).

ELIJAH (W): Letter to Leo of Harran, ed.+ LT A. Van Roey (CSCO Syr. 201-2,
1985).

148 Bibliography

GEORGE, bishop of the ARABS (W; d. 724): Verse homily on Severus, ed.+ ET

K.E. McVey (CSCO Syr. 216-17, 1993).
- : Comm. on Liturgy, ed. R.H. Connolly and H.W. Codrington (London, 1913).
JOHN of DARA (W): Comm. on Liturgy, ed.+ FT J. Sader (CSCO 132-33, 1970).
JOHN SABA (JOHN of DALYATHA; E): Letters, ed.+ FT R. Beulay (PO 39,

1978).
JOSEPH HAZZAYA (the SEER; E): ed. A. Mingana (in WS 7, 1934).
- : Letter on the Three Stages, ed.+ FT P. Harb, F. Graffin (PO 45, 1992).
SERGIUS the STYLITE (W): Disputation against a Jew, ed.+ ET A.P. Hayman

(CSCO Syr. 152-53, 1973).
THEODORE bar KONI (E): Scholia on OT and NT, I, ed.+ FT A. Scher, R. Hespel,

R. Draguet (CSCO Syr. 19 [II 65],187; 1910, 1981); II, ed.+ FT A. Scher, R.

Hespel, R. Draguet (CSCO Syr. 26 [II 66], 188; 1912, 1982. I-II, ed.+ FT R.

Hespel (CSCO Syr. 193-94, 197-98; 1983-84).

Ninth century

ANON (Ps. George of Arbela; E): Comm. on Liturgy, I-II, ed.+ LT R.H. Connolly

(CSCO Syr. 25, 28 [II 91], 29, 32 [II 92]; 1911-15).
ANON (E): Comm. on Gen.1-18, ed.+ ET A. Levene (London, 1951).
ANTON of TAGRIT (W): Rhetoric, Book 5, ed.+ ET J.W. Watt (CSCO Syr.

203-4, 1986).
DAVID bar PAULOS (W): Letters, ed. P.Y. Daulabani (Mardin, 1953).
GABRIEL of BOSRA (E): Rechtssammlung, ed.+ GT H. Kaufhold (Berlin, 1976).
ISHCF bar NUN (E): Select Questions on Pentateuch, ed. + ET E.G. Clarke (Leiden,

1962).
ISHaDAD of MERV (E): Comm. on OT, ed.+ FT J.-M. Vost6, C.Van den Eynde

(CSCO Syr. 67, 75 [Gen.], 1950, 1955; 80, 81 [Ex.-Deut], 1958; 96-97 [Book

of Sessions], 1963,128-29 [Is., XII Proph.], 1969; 146-47 [Jer., Ez., Dan.], 1972;

185-86 [Pss.], 1981).
- : Comm. on NT, ed.+ ET M.D. Gibson (3 vols, Cambridge, 191 1- 16).
ISHaDNAH(E): Liber Castitatis, ed.+ FT J.-B. Chabot (Paris/Rome, 1891).
JOB of EDESSA (E): Book of Treasures, ed.+ ET A. Mingana (Cambridge, 1935).
MOSHE bar KEPHA (d. 903; W): Comm. on John, ed.+ GT L. Schlimme (4 vols,

GOFS 18, 1978, 1981).
- : Comm. on Romans, ed.+ GT J. Reller (GOFS 35, 1994).

- : Comm. on Liturgy, ed.+ ET R.H. Connolly and H.W. Codrington (London,

1913).

- : On Myron, ed.+ GT W. Strothmann (GOFS 7, 1973).

NONNUS of NISIBIS (W): Apology, ed.+ LT A. Van Roey (Louvain, 1948).
THOMAS of MARGA (E): Liber Superiorum, ed. P. Bedjan (Paris/Leipzig, 1901).
Ed.+ ET E.A.W. Budge (London, 1893).

Bibliography 149

TIMOTHY I (E): Letters, ed.+ LT O. Braun (CSCO Syr. 30-31 [II 67], 1914-15).

Tenth/Eleventh century

c ABDISHO c bar BAHRIZ (E): Legal texts, ed.+ GT W. Selb (Sb.Osterr. Ak.Wiss.

268, 1970).
ELIJAH bar SHIN AY A (E): Opus Chronologicum, ed.+ LT E.W. Brooks, I.-B.

Chabot (CSCO Syr. 21-24 [HI 7-8], 1909-10).
- : Grammar, ed.+ ET RJ.H. Gottheil (Berlin, 1887).
- : Book of the Interpreter, ed. P. de Lagarde, Praetermissorum Libri Duo (Gflttingen,

1879), pp. 1-89.
ELD AH of ANBAR, Ktaba d-durrasha (memre 1-3), ed. + GT AJuckel (CSCO Syr

226-7; 1996).
ELIJAH of TIRHAN (E): Grammar, ed.+ GT F. Baethgen (Leipzig, 1880).
ISHOYAHB IV (E): Questions on the Eucharist, ed. C. Van Unnik (Amsterdam,

1937; repr. 1970).

Twelfth century

DIONYSIUS bar §ALIBI (d. 1 171; W): Comm. on Qohelet, ed.+ GT W. Strothmann
(GOFS31, 1988).

- : Comm. on Gospels [Mt-Lk], I, ed.+ LT I. Sedlafek, I.-B. Chabot (CSCO Syr.

15-16, 33, 40 [II 98]; 1906, 1915, 1922); II, ed.+ LT A. Vaschalde CSCO Syr.
47, 49, 60-61 [II 99]; 1931, 1933, 1939, 1940); Comm. on John, ed. R .Lejoly
(Dison, 1975).

- : Comm. on Acts and Apocalypse, ed.+ LT I.Sedla&k (CSCO Syr. 18, 20 [II

101]; 1909-10).

Comm. on Liturgy, ed.+ LT H. Labourt (CSCO Syr. 13-14 [H 93], 1903).
Comm. on Evagrius, Centuries, ed. J. Qiqek (Glane, 1991).
Against the Armenians, ed.+ ET A. Mingana (WS 4, 1931).
Against the Melkites, ed.+ ET A. Mingana (WS 1, 1927).
Against the Jews, ed. J. de Zwaan (Leiden, 1906).
MICHAEL the GREAT (d. 1 199; W): Chronicle, ed.+ FT J.-B.Chabot (Paris, 1899-
1924; repr. Bruxelles 1963).

Thirteenth century

ANON (W): Chronicle to AD 1234, 1, ed.+ LT I.-B. Chabot (CSCO Syr. 36, 56 [III

14], 1920, 1937); II, ed.+ FT I-B. Chabot, A. Abouna, J.-M. Fiey (CSCO 37 [II

15], 154; 1916, 1974).
BARHEBRAEUS (GREGORY ABIPL FARAJ; d. 1286; W): Comm. on OT

[Awgar raze], Gen.-Sam., ed.+ ET M. Sprengling, W.O. Graham (Chicago,

1931).
- : Comm. on the Gospels [Awgar raze], ed.+ ET W.E.W. Carr (London, 1925).
- : Awsar raze (complete text), ed. J. Q!i9ek (Glane, 2003).

150 Bibliography

- : Candelabra of the Sanctuary [Mnarat qudshe]. MI, ed.+ FT J. BakoS (PO 22, 24;
1930, 1933); III, ed.+ FT F. Graffin (PO 27, 1957); IV, ed.+ FT J. Khoury (PO
31, 1964); V, ed.+ FT A. Torbey (PO 30, 1962); VI, ed.+ GT P.R. Kohlhaas
(MUnster, 1959); VII, ed.+ FT M. Albert (PO 30, 1962); Vffl, ed.+ FT J. BakoS
(Leiden, 1948); IX, ed.+ FT P-H. Poirier (PO 43, 1985); XI-XII, ed.+ FT N. Sed
(PO 41, 40; 1983, 1981); also (complete text) ed. J. Qqtk (Glane, 1997).

- : Ethikon [Itiqon], ed. P. Bedjan (Paris/Leipzig, 1898). Ed. J. Qiqtk (Glane,

1985). Memra I, ed.+ ET H.G.B. Teule (CSCO Syr. 218-19, 1993).

- : Book of the Dove, ed. P. Bedjan, in Ethicon, seu Moralia Gregorii Barhebraei

(Paris/Leipzig, 1898), pp. 521-99. Ed. J. Qqek (Glane, 1983).
- : Nomocanon [Hudaye], ed. P.Bedjan (Paris/Leipzig, 1898). Ed. J. Qiqek (Glane,

1986).
- : Swad Sofiya, ed.+ FT H.F. Janssens (Lifege/Paris, 1937).
- : Ecclesiastical History, I-III, ed.+ LT J.B. Abbeloos and T. Lamy (Paris/Louvain,

1872-77).

- : Secular History (Chronicle), ed. P. Bedjan (Paris/Leipzig, 1890). Ed.+ ET

E.A.W. Budge (2 vols, London, 1932). Ed. J. Qqck (Glane, 1987).

- : Poems, ed. A. Scebabi (Rome, 1887). Ed. P.Y. Daulabani (Jerusalem, 1929;

repr. Glane, 1981).
- : Poem on Wisdom, ed. P.N. Darauni (Rome, 1880).
- : Laughable Stories [tunnaye mgahhkane], ed.+ ET E.A.W. Budge (London ,1897).

Ed. J. Qi9ek (Glane, 1983).
- : Grammar [Ktaba d-$emhe], ed.+ GT A. Moberg (Leipzig/Lund, 1907-22).
- : Small Grammar (in verse), ed. J.P.P. Martin (Paris, 1872).
- : Ktaba d-sullaqa hawnanaya, ed.+ FT F. Nau (Paris, 1899-1900).
ELIJAH of QARTMIN: Verse Life of Philoxenus, ed.+ FT A. de Halleux (CSCO

Syr. 100-101, 1963).
JACOB bar SHAKKO (d. 1241; W): Book of Dialogues, I, ed. A. Merx, Historia

artis grammaticae apud Syros (Leipzig, 1889), pp. l*-48*.
JOHN bar MA C DANI (d. 1263; W): Poems, ed. P.Y. Daulabani (Jerusalem, 1929;

repr. Hengelo 1980).
JOHN of MOSUL (E): Verse comm. on Bar Sira, ed. W. Strothmann (GOFS 19,

1979).
SOLOMON of BOSRA (E): Book of the Bee, ed.+ ET E.A.W. Budge (Oxford,

1886).

Fourteenth century

c ABDISHO c (d. 1318; E): Catalogue of Authors, ed. J. Habbi (Baghdad, 1986).

[Also in J.S. Assemani, Bibliotheca Orientalis Ill.i, 1-362, with LT].
- : Paradise of Eden, ed. G. Cardahi (Beirut, 1889). Ed.J. de Qelayta (Mosul, 1928;

Bibliography 151

repr. Chicago, 1988). Selection, ed.+ LT H. Gismondi (Beirut, 1888).
- : Pearl, ed.+ LT A. Mai, in Scriptorum Veterum Nova Collectio 10, 2 (Rome,

1838), pp. 317-66.
ANON (E): Life of Yahballaha III and Rabban §auma, ed. P. Bedjan (Paris/Leipzig,

1895).
DIOSCORUS of GAZARTA (W): Verse Life of Barhebraeus, ed. J. Qiqek (Glane,

1985).
KHAMIS bar QARDAHE: poems, ed. Shleymon Isho v Hadbshaba (Nuhadra, Iraq,

2002).
TIMOTHY II (d. 1353; E): Comm. on Baptismal Liturgy, ed.+ ET P.B. Kadicheeni

(Bangalore, 1980).

Fifteenth century

MASUD of TUR C ABDIN (W): The Spiritual Ship, ed.+ LT B.L. Van Helmond

(Louvain, 1942).
SARGIS bar WAHLE (E): Verse Life of Rabban Hormizd, ed. E.A.W. Budge (Berlin,

1894).

Sixteenth to nineteenth centuries

[see Cardahi 1875, and Qi$ek 1981, 1987, in Section 8(c)].

SHEM'UN of TUR 4 ABDIN: On Lord's Prayer (ed. J. gi§ek, Glane 1998).

Twentieth century

GHATTAS MAQDASI ELYAS: Bugone (Aleppo, 1994).

PAULOS BIDARY (d-Bet Dara; d. 1974): Selected poems, ed. A. Abouna (Baghdad,
1977).

PAULOS GABRIEL (d.1971) and GHATTAS MAQDASI ELYAS: Myatrufi [trans-
lation of Bernardin de Saint Paul, Paul et Verginie] (Beirut, 1955).

PHILOXENOS Y.DAWLABANI (d. 1969): Tetodora [translation from Arabic of
play by Paulos Behnam, 1956] (Glane, 1977; 1983).

Anonymous works of uncertain date

- : Story of Ahiqar, ed.+ ET F.C. Conybeare, J.R. Harris, A.S. Lewis (Cambridge,

1913).
- : Cave of Treasures, ed.+ FT Su-Min Ri (CSCO Syr. 207-8, 1987).
- : Causa Causarum, ed.+ GT K. Kayser (2 vols, Leipzig, 1889; Strassburg, 1893).
- : Gannat Bussame 1, ed. + GT, G.J. Reinink (CSCO Syr 211-212, 1988).

(c) COLLECTIONS OF TEXTS

L. Abramowski, A.E. Goodman: A Nestorian Collection of Christological Texts,

MI. Cambridge, 1972.
S.E. Assemani: Acta Sanctorum Martyrum Orientalium et Occidentalium, I-II. Rome,

152 Bibliography

1748; repr. Farnborough, 1970.
A. Baumstark: Aristoteles bei den Syrern. Leipzig, 1900.
P. Bedjan: Acta Martyrum et Sanctorum, I- VII. Paris/Leipzig, 1890-97; repr.

Hildesheim, 1968. [Indice agiografico by I. Guidi, Rendiconti della Reale Academia

dei Lincei, CI. di Scienze morali, V, 28 (1919), pp. 207-29].

- : Histoire de Mar Jabalaha, de trois autres patriarches, d*un prStre et de deux

lai'ques, nestoriens. Paris/Leipzig, 1895.
S.P. Brock: Sughyata mgabbySta. Glane, 1982.
- : Malpanutad-abahala. suryaye d- c al §16ta. Glane, 1988.
- : Luqqata d-memre d- c al ktabay qudsha. Glane, 1993.
C.E.G. Bruns, C.E. Sachau: Syrisch-rflmisches Rechtsbuch aus dem flinften Jahrhun-

dert. Leipzig, 1880.
F.C. Burkitt: Euphemia and the Goth. London, 1913.
G. Cardahi: Liber Thesauri de Arte Poetica Syrorum. Rome, 1875.
J.-B. Chabot (ed.): Synodicon Orientale. Paris, 1902.

- : Documenta ad origines monophysitarum illustrandas (CSCO 17, 52 [III 37];

1908, 1933).
J.Y. Qqek: Memre d- c al sayfa [verse, 18th-20th cent.]. Glane, 1981.
- : MartyanQta d-abahata d- c idta. Glane, 1985.
- : Tenbata d-Tur c Abdin [verse, llth-19thcent.]. Glane, 1987.
W. Cureton: Spicilegium Syriacum. London, 1855.
- : Ancient Syriac Documents. London, 1864; repr. Amsterdam, 1967.
P. de Lagarde: Reliquiae Iuris Ecclesiasticae Antiquissimae Syriace. Leipzig, 1856.
- : Analecta Syriaca. Leipzig, 1858; repr. OsnabrUck, 1967.
H.J.W. Drijvers: Old Syriac (Edessean) Inscriptions. Edited with an Introduc-tion,

Indices and a Glossary. Leiden, 1972.
H.J.W. Drijvers and J.F. Healey. The Old Syriac Inscriptions of Edessa & Osrhoene:

Texts, Translations and Commentary. Leiden, 1999.
M.D. Gibson, A. SJLewis: Studia Sinaitica, I-XII. London, 1894-1907.
- : Horae Semiticae, I-XI. London, 1903-16.
I. Guidi, E.W. Brooks, J.-B. Chabot: Chronica Minora, I-III (CSCO Syr. 1-6 [III 4],

1903-7.
G. Hoffmann: Opuscula Nestoriana Syriace. Kiel, 1880.
H. Kaufhold: Syrische Texte zum islamischen Recht (Abh.Bayer. Ak. Wiss. ph.-hist.Kl.

NF 74, 1971).

D. Jenks: Ktabona d-Partute. Urmi, 1898.

J.P. Land: Anecdota Syriaca, I-IV. Leiden, 1862-75.

J.P.P. Martin: Patres Antenicaeni. In J.B. Pitra, Analecta Sacra 4 (Paris, 1983; repr.
Farnborough, 1966).

E. Manna: Morceaux choisis de literature arameenne, I-H. Mosul, 1901-2; repr.

Bibliography 153

Baghdad, 1977.
A. Mingana: Sources Syriaques, I. Mosul, 1908.
J.J. Overbeck: Sancti Ephraemi Syri, Rabulae Episcopi Edesseni, Balaei aliorumque

opera selecta. Oxford, 1865.
A. Raes and others: Anaphorae Syriacae, I, 1-3; II, 1-3; III, 1. Rome, 1939-81.
I.E. Rahmani: Studia Syriaca, I-V. Charfet, 1904-9.
E. Sachau: Inedita Syriaca. Halle, 1870; repr. Hildesheim, 1968.
- : Syrische RechtsbUcher, I-III. Berlin, 1907-14.

W. Selb and H. Kaufhold: Das syrisch-rGmische Rechtsbuch, I-III. Vienna, 2002.
A. Van Roey, P. Allen: Monophysite Texts of the Sixth Century (OLA 56, 1994).
A. V55bus: The Synodicon in the West Syrian Tradition, HI (CSCO Syr. 161-62,

1975).
P. Zingerle: Monumenta Syriaca ex Romanis Codicibus Collecta, MI. Oeniponti,

1869-78.

(d) TRANSLATIONS INTO SYRIAC

AESOP: Fables, ed.+ FT B. Lefevre (Paris, 1941).

AMMONIUS: Letters, ed.+ LT M. Kmosko (PO 10, 1914).

ANON: Didascalia, ed.+ ET A. Voobus (CSCO 175-76, 179-80, 1979).

ANON: Testamentum Domini, ed.+ LT I.E. Rahmani (Mainz, 1899).

ANON: Kalilah and Dimnah, ed.+ GT F. Schulthess (2 vols, Berlin, 1911) [from
Middle Persian]. Ed. W. Wright (Oxford, 1884) [from Arabic].

ANON (Ps. Callisthenes): History of Alexander the Great, ed. E.A.W. Budge (Cam-
bridge, 1889; repr. Amsterdam, 1976).

ARISTBDES: Apology, ed.+ ET J.R. Harris (Cambridge, 1891).

ARISTOTLE: see Section 6, under S.P. Brock (1993).

ATHANASIUS: Athanasiana Syriaca I-IV, ed.+ ET R.W. Thomson (CSCO Syr.
114-15, 118-19, 142-43, 167-68; 1965, 1967, 1972, 1977).

- : Festal Letters, ed.+ ET W. Cureton (2 vols, London, 1848, 1854).

- : Life of Anthony, ed. + FT R. Draguet (CSCO Syr. 183-84, 1980).

- : (Ps.Athanasius), On Virginity, ed. + ET D. Brakke (CSCO 232-233, 2002).

BASIL: Hexaemeron, ed.+ ET R.W. Thomson (CSCO Syr. 22-23, 1995). On the
Holy Spirit, ed. + ET, D.G.K. Taylor (CSCO Syr. 228-229, 1999).

CLEMENT of ROME: Letters, ed. R.L. Bensly (Cambridge, 1899).

CLEMENT (Ps.): Recognitions, ed. P. de Lagarde (Leipzig, 1861).

CYRIL of ALEXANDRIA: Comm. on Luke, ed. + ET R. Payne Smith (1858-9);
ed. + LT of first part, I-B. Chabot, R-M. Tonneau (CSCO Syr. 27 [IV 1], 70;
1912, 1953).

- : Letters, ed.+ ET R.Y. Ebied, L.R. Wickham (CSCO Syr. 157-58, 1975).

DIONYSIUS the AREOPAGITE (Ps): Ecclesiastical Hierarchy, On Myron, ed.+

154 Bibliography

GT W. Strothmann (2 vols, GOFS 15, 1977).
DIONYSIUS THRAX: Grammar, ed.+ GT A. Merx, Historia artis grammaticae

apud Syros (Leipzig, 1889), pp. 50*-72*.
EPIPHANIUS: Weights and Measures, ed.+ ET J.E. Dean (Chicago, 1935).
EUSEBIUS: Ecclesiastical History, ed. P. Bedjan (Paris/Leipzig, 1897). Ed. W.

Wright, N. McLean (Cambridge, 1898).
- : Martyrs of Palestine, ed.+ ET W. Cureton (London, 1861).
- : Theophania, ed.+ ET S. Lee (2 vols London, 1842, 1843).
EVAGRIUS: Antirrheticus, Gnosticus, Letters, ed.+ Greek retroversion W. Franken-

berg (Berlin, 1912).
- : Evagriana Syriaca, ed.+ FT J. Muyldermans (Lou vain, 1952).
- : Kephalaia Gnostica, ed.+ FT A. Guillaumont (PO 28, 1958).
GALEN: see Section 6, under R. Degen.
GREGORY of NAZIANZUS: Iambics, ed. P.J. Bollig, H. Gismondi (Beirut, 1895-96).

Discourse XL, ed. J.-C. Haelewyck (2001); Discourses XIII, XLI, ed. A.B.

Schmidt (2002).
HIPPOCRATES: Aphorisms, ed. H. Pognon (Leipzig, 1903).
IGNATIUS: Letters, ed.+ ET W. Cureton (London, 1849). Ed. W. Wright, in J.B.

Lightfoot, The Apostolic Fathers II, iii (London, 1899), pp. 73-124.
ISAIAH, Abba: Asceticon, ed.+ FT R. Draguet (CSCO Syr. 120-24, 1968).
JOHN PHILOPONUS: Diaitetes, ed.+ LT A. Sanda (Beirut, 1930).
- : Opuscula Monophysitica, ed.+ LT A. Sanda (Beirut, 1930).
JOHN RUFUS: Plerophoria, ed.+ FT F. Nau (PO 8, 191 1).
- : Life of Peter the Iberian, ed.+ GT R. Raabe (Leipzig, 1895).
JOSEPHUS: War, Book VI, ed.P. Bedjan, in Homiliae Selectae Mar Jacobi Sarugensis,

I (Paris/Leipzig, 1905), pp. 770-837.
MACARIUS: ed.+ GT W. Strothmann (2 vols, GOFS 21, 1981).
MARCIANUS: ed. + LT A. van Roey (Louvain, 1968).
NESTORIUS: Liber Heracleidis, ed. P. Bedjan (Paris/Leipzig, 1910).
NICHOLAS of DAMASCUS: On the Philosophy of Aristotle, ed.+ ET H.J. Drossaart

Lulofs (Leiden, 1969).
NBLUS: ed.+ IT P. Bettiolo (Louvain, 1983).

NONNUS, Ps.: Mythological Scholia, ed.+ ET S.P. Brock (Cambridge, 1971).
PALLADIUS: Lausiac History, ed.+ FT R. Draguet (CSCO Syr. 169- 70, 173-74;

1978).
PHYSIOLOGUS: ed.+ GT K. Ahrens (Kiel, 1892).

SECUNDUS the SILENT PHILOSOPHER: ed.+ ET B.P. Perry (New York, 1964).
SEVERUS: Liber contra impium Grammaticum, ed.+ LT I. Lebon (CSCO Syr.

45-46 [IV 5], 50-21 [IV 6], 58-59 [IV 4]; 1929, 1933, 1938).
- : Discourses ad Nephalium, Correspondence with Sergius, ed.+ LT I. Lebon

Bibliography 155

(CSCO Syr. 64-65 [IV 7], 1949).
- : Polemic against Julian of Halicarnassus, ed.+ FT R. Hespel (CSCO 104-5,

124-27, 136-37; 1964, 1968-69, 1971).

Select Letters, ed.+ ET E.W. Brooks (4 vols, London, 1902-4).

A Collection of Letters, I-II, ed.+ ET E.W. Brooks (PO 12, 14; 1916, 1920).

Hymns, I-II, ed.+ ET E.W. Brooks (PO 6-7, 1910-1 1).

Philalethes, ed.+ FT R. Hespel (CSCO 68-69, 1952).

125 Cathedral Homilies, ed.+ LT/FT M. Briere and others (PO 4, 8, 12, 16, 20,

22-23, 25-26, 29, 35-38; 1906-77).
THEODORE of MOPSUESTIA: Fragmenta Syriaca, ed.+ LT E. Sachau (Leipzig,

1869).
- : Comm. on Pss., ed.+ FT L. Van Rompay (CSCO Syr. 189-90, 1981).
- : Comm. on Qohelet, ed. W. Strothmann (GOFS 28, 1988).
- : Comm. on John, ed.+ LT I-M. Voste (CSCO Syr. 62-63 [IV 3], 1940).
- : Catechetical Homilies, ed.+ ET A. Mingana (WS 5-6, 1932-33). Ed.+ FT R.-M.

Tonneau (Studi e Testi 145, 1949).
TITUS of BOSTRA: Against the Manichaeans, ed. P. de Lagarde (Berlin, 1859;

repr. Osnabriick, 1967).
ZACHARIAS SCHOLASTICUS: Life of Severus, ed.+ FT M. Kugener (PO 2,
1904).

ABBREVIATIONS

AION: Annali del'Istituto Orientale, Napoli

AMS: P. Bedjan, Acta Martyrum et Sanctorum [see Section 8(c) ]

ANES: Ancient Near Eastern Studies.

ASM: S.E. Assemani, Acta Sanctorum et Martyrum [see Section 8(c)]

BO: Bibliotheca Orientalis

CSCO: Corpus Scriptorum Christianorum Orientalium

CSCO: Syr. CSCO Scriptores Syri

E: East Syrian

ET: English translation

FT: French translation

GOFS: Gottinger Orientforschungen, Reihe Syriaca

GT: German translation

IT: Italian translation

JAs: Journal Asiatique

JAOS: The Journal of the American Oriental Society

JNES: Journal of Near Eastern Studies

JSS: Journal of Semitic Studies

LT: Latin translation

156 Bibliography

OC: Oriens Christianus

OCA: Orientalia Christiana Analecta

OLA: Orientalia Lovaniensia Analecta

OLZ: Orientalische Literaturzeitung

Or: Orientalia

OS: Orientalia Suecana

PO: Patrologia Orientalis

PdO: Parole de l'Orient

PS: Patrologia Syriaca

RHPR: Revue d'Histoire et de Philosophie Religieuses

RHR: Revue de THistoire des Religions

SO: Studia Orientalia.

W: West Syrian

WS: Woodbrooke Studies

ZDMG: Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft

ZA: Zeitschrift fUr Assyriologie.

CHRESTOMATHY

1. An inscription of Serrin (73 C.E.) 1

4 385 All* ;d.id \txAi 2 jjt*a 1

rdjjJO.ltx.l cnta la CU-a^a ta »j*1.1 1.1a 3

90 ^^Lx la >J-=aAo »jlSLiA r*:tCD r£x^J 4

7 f*t»^ci yOciA^ t<cn\t< cnJCL^ta* mYi.1 ^* S

Aajuu r^UL^ rdiCDO 8 f<Au.i ^a cnA r^ocnu i<*jjO 6

rtacnu rA l0 rrtA*a [ ] 9 r£x\ ^iAcnci 7

] cnA .cua^Aul* 9

(1) See Drijvers 1972: 2f. Note that the Impf. prefix /y-/ had not yet changed

tO /n-/: ihti (S), audita* (5), rtcicnu (6,7), rtf&trd* (6), Aau* (6), ^OSot* (8),

.£**&&. (9). (2) In the actual inscription there is no diacritical point used to
distinguish Dalath from Resh. (3) The names of the months of the Syriac
calendar are: p.&o ,**& or 71**0 ^.txAj (Oct), .iji* [ V J***& (Nov)odj&o ,,<ul£
(7xm xn) (Dec), ,tj*i* .^clia (Jan), ^ax (Feb), t.4r? (March), ^uj (Apr), *ii<
(May), Juu» (June), tccaS (July), ja& (Aug), Aa\*r< (Sept). (4) Various
symbols are used for "units," "hundreds," and "twenties." (5) The use of the
independent personal pronoun is typical of boasting or self-assertive
inscriptions of this kind: § 74. (6) Apparently some sort of priestly dignitary.
(7) Note the defective spelling without a Waw for r^cu Aumia/. (8) Note
the phonetic spelling for the standard (and etymological-historical) ^r<* .
(?) For k^jV 'bones' for the standard pi. form rfiki^. (10) Most likely =
a 'tomb.'

4* Chrestomathy

2. The great flood of November 201 C.E.: from the archives of Edessa 1

CD&oiAnaa c»o1oxp.1 cd&g^\m±i r^ixxLiAA^tO r^r£»x»jj An y*i

3

,lunf ^»tx& 2 jj1» i<9 . r£^Aio Ol \^o la r£aA» t^pr£l

i^xq r^oCD r£li?a .i<^9.tjo CD.Tft-i. cryr^ xAjpo ^xjlo .r6i1
r<&O^A».l r^^LaCl rttL^Jttr^O r^tl.l OOCD 6 ,txO 5 .^ai^ AcuaA
ooA r^ocn n\nr> .r^aAsa 1^3 r^ ^tea r^u* .UO .i^ 7 m a\z*kM
Al..T f^2uir^ 9 .ciAa.1 fO.Xffcr^ ^2* AaA.1 nflCL^J rdir>^

8
10

f^LiAi* r<^i\ ^^cdA ,^0.1-1% 1 12 r<x».l :oocd ^slxjAm
.i<iA\a r<UTNQ i<9l r^t^S* r^OCDO «**^ .CIOCD 0^fl9odlAtr£l

.OOCD l8 ^»1tx».l n^fta.T r^A^OMsO oocd ^Sftuto.l 17 r£a1a1
(<9l f<M* 2I cdA r*OCD .r£»jaA r<\\ %»* ^^oaoA juL^Aucr< 19 r^.lO

rtacD pi^o .x^ r<«\\^o 1^i r^o 23 .r^LL^.l^oA r<f1 cut .7 r^u-^1'

rd^Dl^oo ttl^lAv oocd oloAucr^o .r^oCD .la&o ^.r^ioX r^tOJ.l
nail rdauii^ ^» r<Au-.xs*>.l 26 rd^al^» nftcuc.l r€»-i2B&
r^lOJcA r<*^6 oocd ^iCDO-^lAi 27 .r*& \rn cdjsO ^.i^Icdj
rOXdff^X GtO-iXI .r<&-L^.T» CO^ ClL^G .r^LL* .128.1 r^^st^M
jj^Autr^.l p.12* Aa oocd oNoyo .r<^\^9 Jtenx r<*r^O rdal
p.lM Aa .r^U^.T^.t t<»r£&0 rO^-^1 f<l » In ^OGOu^D.in r^oCD
OOCD CLutXTO 29 .Ql»»-lt^l 03L«»±2*Lft& ^ nflCELlA r^OCD .autoi

rOcma oocd oiu^ao .fO »\j<r>l2k.l rtbiX^X r<An*CDj9 jaak
^•.1 r^r^J^l) 30 .r^Yl » lia.1 ^*-&Af? ^.1& ^9 t*Au .nf.TaA
^» r^» o^kduA^. oAa. .r<»\\-i oocd 31 ^i«\«*i .ia ^ocnLt^o

I<Ad r^LJ-».1i*> &GCD KIaA^D .1A .OOCD O-DLLu^r^O r^Ajt

33 .r<OCD rfocrp.l rdicn rdurtOXB r^Aio t^ar^ r^iw .T^O .r^AAl'.l

M OOCD .CUQjjIJ r^^U-».T2Q.l l<I*50Of^ .OCdAo^.1 .f<OCD xo-a

35 cnA t<im r^X .r^lcDJ AioX JUr^O .i<1cdj AvoA ^» ^CDi

The flood of 201 c.e. at Edessa 5*

coduixclM Jla. oocd CL&XBClrto 38 .r^1ciu.l cnu^Ld rtacoj r&nm

^Hau± 41 r^i\^i.l rd^i.l .r^ocn lO-^t r^lou.l GDU&L& 40 ciO3
rtacD .xol&o *^-^\ «^ ^a* ^cdAjoti m r^ocn Aan» jlmjjO
Aaoci\ ^ajAso r^a^oor^a ^adk.l ^.^ucb ^OcnA^.l .(^A» t^ir<

(1) Hallier 1892: 145-47 (Syr. text), 84-88 (Germ, tr.); Guidi 1903: text, pp.
1-3, Lat. tr. pp. 3-4. (2) *>** < st. est. of rtta/'month. 1 @) On the native
names of the months, see Text 1, n. 3. (4) A compound preterite typical of
historical narrative: see § 85. (5) On the use of the st. abs. in conjunction
with A*, see § 71 b. (6) An error for pi. cuts. (7) On the complementation
of the verb ,1 jk 'to begin,' see § 98 c. (8) On the centripetal preposition
Lamadh, see Jouon - Muraoka, § 133 d. (9) On the proclitic of l^A.i, see §
91 h, 3. (10) On .i *<**« Aiyka d-/, see § 76. (11) Aavday c vadaf 'those who
do (Pe. ptc. m.pl. est.) the work. 1 On the proleptic ml. n, see § 112 h. (12)
The proclitic is similar to that which introduces direct speech: § 98 e, i. (13)
On the proleptic Lamadh, see § 112 a. (14) 'not on its (expected, usual) day
nor in its (expected, usual) month.' (15) Proleptic: § 112 c. (16) On the
proclitic Dalath with j^jtr< see § 98 e, ii. (17) /rawrve/, an irregular pi.
formation through reduplication from /rab/ 'great.' (18) /mSarrin waw/ 'were
secured,' Pa. pass. ptc. (19) The Dalath introduces a causal clause. (20)
Proleptic: § 112 b. (21) Centripetal Lamadh: see above, n. 8. (22) On the
syntax of verb complementation here, see § 98 d. (23) '(the tower) of the
Persians,' the name of a tower. (24) A variant spelling for i^ls^X. (25) The
Lamadh is a direct object marker. (26) According to Segal 1970: 24, an error
for r&£j.v* 'eastern.' (26a) On the position of the preposition ^ see § 91 h,
2. (27) 'at that moment': prolepsis (§ 112 a). (28) /tai^uy/, Pe. 3m.pl. + 3m.s.
(proleptically referring to the following r^oaA). (29) 'on its southern and
northern side': the fern, suffix refers to c*Au_..ts*. (30) /bnaynaSa/ 'persons,'
pi. of /barnaSa/. (31) /damkin/, pi. of /dmek/ 'asleep.' (32) /men Selyaf
'suddenly, unexpectedly.' (33) /hwa wa/: see § 85. (34) On this compound
tense, see § 88. (35) 'for himself,' dativus commodi. (36) Nomina agentis
Peal /maSohe wyadp c e/, 'measurers and knowers,' i.e. 'surveyors and experts.'
(37) Ethpe, Pf . 3 f.pl. (38) 'as far as the breadth of the river would extend'
(?). (39) Translate: 'yet, nonetheless.' (40) Proleptic pronoun: § 112 i. (41)
/ieglaHif, pi. of /rgelta/ 'rivulet, tributary.' On the position of the numeral, see
§ 91 c. (42) On the syntagm ^cuco »ociA*, see § 111.

6* Chrestomathy

^1 %n& 53 r^M r^cn .jiiu r^Xo 52 r£»m»ci r^io 51 ^ox.i ^^»

&C*CuA f^BXl. 55 .l<L^CD €113 f^CICD.l f<JJ3l fOCD .^» f^l.lOOA

f<Jxaf<\ oaA r^GCD Au±J r^naQ .nfoAuooi r<A-=Jt cnA^ 57 r^QCD
r^1r<u 58 «£Ucp -Ar^o .lactam ol»1 Ajl ciaX rtacn ^J-a^r^.l rtf&t.ljj
nxra r^ocb.l r^iCLaajLa .acnteoj^JSoA r<i ■ in _ocnA CUL9 .oi\*.l
?i»Ddu.l A^^ci 59 .t<*1usd [Au]a rrtoAea.i r^at f<bcixa i<aAdo

AAAj*&r<fO r*£iCLEJr<9 r<fAvJL»X»D &1^ll..1 r^^a.t^. .^» \ ¥

64 • ••

(43) /teSrin q^em/ 'former Tishri': see also n. 3 above. The preceding conjunction
Dalath is redundant, for the object clause of r*cia> .in* has already been
introduced bythe same proclitic in ... ^ooA^.i. (44) The conjunction Waw is
often idiomatically added in an expression for "from* until y." (45) On this
compound tense, see § 87. (46) The preceding 1^1* preferred to by the
suffix pronoun is the subject of this compound sentence: § 1 13. (47) Despite
the preterital tense, the reference is to a future event: § 81. (48) On the
syntax, see § 98 c. (49) Several words appear to be missing at this point.
(50) The dot above is diacritical, distinguishing the word /man/ from its
homograph /men/ with a diacritical dot below: see § 4 a. (51) The dot over
the Mem distinguishes the form, Pe ptc. /SamaV, from its homograph, jl^&x
/5ma7, Pf. (52) /mahme/, Af. ptc. (53) '(shouting,) Look, water (is) here!'
(54) 'they shall accuse him of negligence.' (55) 'in which this (disaster) fell.'
(56) 'at Beth Tvara,' a locality in Edessa. The preposition .a is missing by
haplography. (57) The dot above the letter C E indicates a ptc, hence the
compound tense mentioned in § 86. (58) /hennon/, 'they,' proleptic (§112 i),

A deed of sale on parchment from Dura Europos (243 c.e.) 7*

with a diacritic dot (§ 4 a). (59) /bet sahraye/, the name of a street in Edessa.
(60) On the syntax, see § 88. (61) On the position of the adjective qualifying
ro.T, see § 91 g. (62) On * ^1»< see § 111. (63) /qurye/, an irregular pi.
of rdLto /qrita/ 'village.' (64) The document concludes with the names of
two secretaries of the town hall of Edessa and two of its archivists.

3. A deed of sale on parchment from Dura Europos (243 c.e.) 1

f*AL*>lAt» (r^Alo)r^ (r^jot)» 3 ^ai 31.1 t*i<a

r^JLiata la Clt*&\ J9t »l«nv Alia
28 ^JLx &*a 700 (r^1j-ft.l)a ^■JvAisa r*Ai»f<

II
ooaoto too ScL^to^Or^.l Aut Aluls 1

6 QCL^a^ 7 Or<f 5 Q»cia&Clr^ Q»CLl*.lt^ OPCL^JCL^Jr^

9 Q»CLibJlr^ Qt>CL^Jr^.l 8 r<j^ ;r aaGL=j ^Cl^maxx) 2

Amt t*r* jjl^a Q9CL2k£ 10 »CIaJ CL=L» t^.ici

(1) As presented and studied by J.A. Goldstein (1966). Like Text no. 1 this
one makes no use of the diacritical mark, either, to distinguish Dalath from
Resh. (2) The first two lines, in a different hand from the main body of the
text (up to line 20 middle), summarise the contents of the deed in abbreviated
style: the names and the noun n?\±>x are abbreviated, what stands enclosed
within the brackets representing a spelling-out of what is understood. (3)
Possibly a defectively spelled verbal noun /zubban/ 'sale.' (4) A partly
defective spelling for <ta\\*tx\*r< (afrroKpdTwp) 'emperor.' (5) A Greek
equivalent (Eua^Peios) of Lat. Pius. (6) A Greek equivalent (EOtuxos) of
Lat. Felix. (7) A Greek equivalent (Zepacrrfc) of Lat. Augustus. (8) Note the
defective spelling for i^J^acicd. (9) An error for »cLuir* Arrianus ? (10)
'tribune, tribunius.'

8* Chrestomathy

r€*£a:io r<iii«na jk-alr^ci ^ T^nitn rO^uMjj 3

"coftlcilu.-r r£u»Cl ^»AdAt At-LxaO
l3 nd*Ja\i3 r*Auju~J 12 r^nt>.lr^ r£L*J CL^J r£t 4
15 ^Oteuis r£»1XlA*Ai* r£*AlOf* "oAoal^a

16 Q»ciacn qet^o ■ \, \ rt o»CLaAlcif< Q»aol».i S

cpaatea.l l8 i<&ia^^l^fl9r<aa CUtXa la 17 0frO»c»l
Cli \«g la ooo^oocDt opciacn t^3f< a>cuAlar< 6
2o? la la >majj la l^ar^tCI r<^* la
19 i<l» .1 ci» r^Qjt^ pcua ^t mi ^AtlAi.i 7
Aila rtfAuilAc* r£*AlClr^ r£*£l2*
QAOCiW rtf&ujxu.lr^ r<&tl».l t^ir^ la tlaJMx 8

^iiAa la la Cll*At oa\lClr<
Auato 21 i^r6toi r^ll^.l ctllso AAaD.l ^r^Jljj 9

A»* rtbcart 22 ^d»Aear^ cnA
rdrsoAvo ^Ixa. ^Jjt ilia r^CftcnAt r<um 10

cil»At ^Aut* r^ocnAt r^n\%\o r£l»CL» ^a.l 11

r^.lCD r^Aear<a .\j»\t 27 <syAtl»o rdlOai
caa .Ttla^jAo OiaU^Q rO-QSoA u^ ALLat.l 12

Orf ^Xl jcJi* «j*d r^a-A*.! Aa
,cdciAi1» Ji± Clr< r£lOat Ot«^ pjL ^i^^dAli 13
cnA dual* i^:icd rtbenrt ^nvtt Aj*.
»Alt»CI ^r^Al imuq r<AL*.lAl» rOi^ pODr^ 14

crs-acn^o^ ^Autr^ r^Xo r^JClat ol*^.l 32 cn.l^a IS

en

Alls to rCicn r^l^r »\»yi-i

o»OMJ [ ]»r*[ ] r<itcp r<Ai»r^ «/^ 16

3 \»»n\v r<Auc f<utaA r^a.ULCl r£a£*:i

36 ^K.l .OCdAlLi-3 35 ,CLlAt AlCICD l<12k<DO 17

A deed of sale on parchment from Dura Europos (243 c.e.) 9*

CLaAi^Atr^O rOCLst Ot*di:t cn.l^ ^a 38 AcaAci 18

(11) 'its (fern.) freedom 1 with a proleptic pronoun suffix: § 1 12. (12) The city
of Edessa. (13) For r^j a\an 'colony* (KoXwvta). (14) 'metropolis 1 0iTyrp6iToXL9).
(15) Defectively spelled for rdtatesa*. (16) 'Horseman, eques' (J.Trrrefc). (17)
Crude representation of Lat. Romanus. (18) 'Commander.' (19) *I declare':
/mawdyana/, Af Ptc. f.sg. + enclitic lsg. pronoun (§ 10). (20) 'Harranaean,'
hailing from Harran. (21) = i<i^uax, a spelling testifying to the weakening
of the guttural. (22) Correct form for ^toAe*, earlier at I, with an aphaeresis
of the initial Alaf (§ 6J). (23) The spelling with -* for the standard <* is
strikingly archaic (as in Heb. onto). See also f*iuA*& (21) and sea* (24 et
passim). (24) 'more or less; give or take.' (25) 'Prisoners': /Svayya/, Pe pass,
ptc. rn.pl. emph. from r<ax 'to take prisoner,' or /Sabbaye/ 'captors' (m.pl.emph.),
or /Sevya/ 'captives' (m.sg.emph. collectively used). (26) Juridic "emphasis"
on the parties involved. (27) 'your heirs' (/yartayk/, Pe. ptc. used as a noun).
The singular verb is in concord with the principal constituent of the multiple
subject. (28) 'he enters into a legal dispute, contends,' /nethagge/, Ethpa. (29)
Defectively spelled for ^succu* /huSban/: 'on account of.' (30) 'vendor,'
/mzabnSnijp/, Pa. nomen agentis, f.sg. (§ 20). (31) Defectively spelled for
jxife*f* 'I shall cleanse.' Further examples are j»ijl& (17), A^j (19), rOni
(22). (32) 'in his possession,' /bgaddeh/, with a proleptic pronoun (§ 112).
(33) 'I sold her,' /zabbentah/ with a proleptic pronoun suffix (§ 112). (34) If
the meaning is "until six months will have elapsed," one has here a mixture
of two constructions, viz. prep. A r<*z>\± and conj. a r6«.tx. (35) This type
of fern, nouns (§ 28) is always attested in the sg. abs. form. Cf. Mt 27.64
rdL<Mf< m!xo\, 'the recent error' (with a st. emph. adjective). (36) The particle
Dalath is comparable to that which introduces direct speech. (37) Centripetal
Lamadh: cf. Joiion-Muraoka, § 133 d. (38) 'and beyond,' thus 'from this day
onward.' (39) 'one, a copy of it,' in contrast to i^i*** 'the other' (20). (40)
For the standard spelling v i&ci.i, but cf. BA 7lfnD7 and Christian Palestinian
Aramaic v oi^.i alongside v oi^o.i. (41) 'archives' (Apxetov).

10* Chrestomathy

ott&.l 43 cd&ciA rtocnJ comuS 42 rditur*ci 20
,majj QcAlGn^ "rO.lOS* r£lOat
45 c»uA-^a ^9 rd^xru.lrtf jdct\*t*xlx. ta 21
r£*Atcir^ ~aAu AtaAi^.T r^t&JL&t&.l
r^\ r^t&tt.l r^uta ^^ r^L*.lAca 22

cnA».l rtficn r*Ai»f* ^llsji.I ^i^^jj

V«A ^» .a*Ai&.l uyr* 47 cn*».i ^inoo 23

^.icnx n£=A* la <rAlOf< o»oot» 24

.lcnx [ Ja ta <n\lar^ QpODts* 25

y;+\,^ 49 i*tAia»:t f^uta 26

Afipd^Xios) Mdvvos 6 £ul toO lepou icdi 27

^toO tto\£LTLKoO ^(a)p(Tupa>) 28

ta OJtXa Qt>CuAlOr^ c»cint2* 29
rOco r^t^jc AtaAi^ r^tSUB osn»n»*) 30

Seal 31

Verso

r^AuJLlai» Oiajt Aita rtf&L^lAc* r£*AtOr^ 1

r£jcn r<t^x A^. &»Au» jcniT^u ta >xn£jj ttAtcir^ 2
"APyapo? .iciix 51 rg^t^g> t^i* ttAlcir* 3

.tout r<»^nr>ta la l^ar^ 4

(42) 'the other, (also) a copy of it. 1 (43) On the proleptic pronoun with a
preposition followed by .t, see § 112 e. (44) Masc. sg., cf. above, line 7.
(45) 'tribe' (<f>u\fj). (46) 'she is not versed in the art of signing a document.'
Either re^ao* (Pe ptc.f.) or = ksLa* (adj.). (47) /dmayych/ 'her price,' plurale
tantum (§ 70). (48) Archaic spelling for .ic9» (probably Pe ptc). All the
witnesses have put their own signature. (49) 'inspector,' Pa ptc. (50) "I
Aurelius Mannus in charge of the sacred and civic archives bear witness."
(51) 'strategos' ((7TpaTr|Y6s , )•

Abraham's temptation 1 1 *

4. Abraham's temptation (Genesis 22:1-19)*

pcnlar^X »mj rtfnaAr^ .^Acd r^i^LA tAua ^» r^ClCDO (1)
la.l .ooA tsar^O (2) .r^Ji* r^co te>f*Cl .pen tar* .cnA t»r*Cl
r£a>1r<A 4 u>A A%Cl .Jin(Yi.t<\ &Ji* pjjl.l 3 cryT*juur^\ 2 u\tsA
bo^ r^fci^ ^9 .Tjj A^. r^&A^A ^»Ai 5 ,CTDujQir)r^O kj 1o»rf.l
ta.lCI .CDt^Lu Aa. >»1f*G .r^lA-a pcnlar^ p

.rf&A^A V&XlLq JlA~CI .CDts <0JiUXUr£\a .OlSftLl. |CD

3.1DO (3) *>«*^

.r£»&uA& 7 rte>cuAo (4) .f*ooAi* ceA ten*.! rrt&r^ 6 Ati* ^QDO

(5) .r^ajjcil ^a ocb r*1&r£\ 9 »cnuvuCi ,cncU-*-i> p entrant V****
rdJr^o .r^lMjj &cA r^ilcn 10 ^aaA CUtCLSk »cnci2*LAjkA tearto

(6) 1 ^^JkcA uvCL&cnJCi .io^qj r£^1cnA r£»X^. Atr£) r^iV^o
qjo .cots snxxurt Jul yux>o .rtf&Aj&A r<floLlo jacn\s»t< nmio

bpr^Q (7) .r£tjj uyr^ ^cnuSAi cAir^O r£ujL»Cl r^1cu cnx*t<a
r<*t< rtcn t»r*Cl U .rdar* .te>i<C* .»cna?r^ pcnlar^ xuiour^
(8) .rtf&AjvA r<t»r* l2 ci^t< .r£a£DCl r^tCU rtfro .ooA t»r^O .»ta
cAif<0 .»ta r^A^A r*t»r* cnA rtuil rtfnaAr* ODCDtar* teir^O
rdlaCI .rtaArt cnA tor** r^liir^X ClAtr^O (9) .r^Ui^r* ^pcnul^
.cd la jujour^X cnt^ao .r<aulo 1xa>o .i<u9.T2q pcntar^ ^a&
CDX»r^ l4 ^iOr^o (10) .r^ocuJD ^ A^A r6ia.1» A^. ensure

(I) 77i£ OW Testament in Syriac according to the Peshifta Version etc., Part
I, fasc. I (Leiden, 1977). Some diacritics added. (2) The Lamadh marks a
direct object: § 97a. (3) The Alaf is secondary: § 6D. (4) A centripetal
Lamadh: see Jotion-M uraoka § 133 d, but see also Joosten 1989. (5) 'Lift him
up 1 : Af Impv. + suf. < VjA». (6) Asyndetic: § 98 g. (7) "On the arrival of the
third day (of the journey)" as against ... r£*aia "in the course of the third
day." Cf. Mt 26.61 "I can demolish God's temple and rebuild it in three days
(^koi rfKHrt)., (8) "Lifted": Af 3m.sg. < V poi. (9) "and he saw it" with a
proleptic pronoun (§ 1 12 c). (10) On the centripetal Lamadh, see n. 4 above.

(II) The st. emph. form of kinship terms is used as vocative. (12) t<^r<
/fcyka/ 'where?' + enclitic ocd. (13) A variant, more common spelling of
rd» oyr* 'together' (vs. 6). (14) 'Stretched out': Af. Pf. 3m.sg. < V V** .

12* Chrestomathy

cnA r<toci (11) CDlaA 15 ouxlL»A *f i ■ «\ w jaflpJO pCDtar*
tai<Q .pCDtnr^ pcntar^ t»i*CI r£*2*JC ^w c^cnAr*:! 16 cnAr<\»
r*Ao .r^A^ Ajl wviif^ 2^jtClAi rdX to?t*CI (12) .tOt* r*<D
.rtfcnAr*.! &Ji* oAxi.l.l 17 Al^.ioi^ r£xcnx A^» .^i.TM ooA lii^
pcntar* 30**1*0 (13) .»J^* cr\ ri^u. t<A VVtaA AL^xxuj r<\.i
Atrta .cnAutna r^sk^cuna .T>jjr* .In f^L^.t i^cdci .r^vuO »cdo iV \

w • • • • *

(14) .cola ^Ajj r*&A-*A cnxuttrta .i*1a.tA aiaflUQ ^DCDtai*
teBr^kr^.l .r^unJ r£»ts* Cltb r^lkr^.l cutout pen tar? r^toci
ai^rdX» r^too (15) •> r^uu r£»t» r£lCD rftci^a rdrsacu
»9 .te>i*Cl (16) r£^*L* ^ ! \Vi?% ^fclfc* pcnlard r*cnAi*:i
di^jnu t<Aa .rOcro r£»^L& ^Xn-^l 19 ^Ajj .r£»te* teii^ Au^au
cu^n»a ^.cr^tar? ci^Ias* (17) .iAM y\ J-*-uu r<A <AtaA
cdAl^xx) Aa..1 r^lii v\*r£a .nd*^ut »aAa^ VV»^ -Vy^** rCj^»r<
^CL^laJkJO (18) .»cdcl=l=ii\ \n.l r?ALi.1r* </y*>1t ^ India rtou.l
(19) .Axis AL^ut.l -^Ajj .r^.1r^.l r£M2*L*. 2I ifc OdA-i uyilia
r^.TuL&r^ ciAtr^a ci^aaci i(DO»1Xi &aA pcntsr? </y&CDCi

(15) To slaughter him': Pe Inf. + proleptic 3m.sg. suf. < V"<aaj. (16) 'His
angel 1 with a proleptic pronoun (§ 112 d). (17) 'You have made known': Af.
Pf. < V ^x.. The Hebrew here says "I have come to know." (18) 'For a
second time': the noun rdKLa't /zvatta/, when used as a fern, noun as here,
means 'time' (of frequency), but m. t*L*i /zavna/, 'time' (as against 'space').
(19) .7 »*" 'because,' cf. Gk dv6' Jiv. (20) A Lamadh-less infinitive, reflecting
the underlying, emphatic Hebrew syntagm <Inf. absolute + finite verb>: §
98j. (21) 'All of them' with a proleptic pronoun (§ 98 j).

TRANSLITERATION—

(1) wahwa men batar petgame hallen 'alaha nassi lavraham wemar leh.
^avraham. wemar: ha > ena. (2) wemar leh. dvar lavrafc libi&fc draftem >at
lisbaq. wzel lak la^a damoraye wasseqay tamman la'laja c al ba$i men ture
demar lak. (3) wqaddem 'avraham b$afra. warmi c al ftmareh wadvar latren
<layma c ammeh wlishaq bieh. w^allah qayse ltflala. wqam >ezal la£ra demar
\Sti 'alaha. (4) walyawma tlitaya > arim 'avraham c ayna wahzay latra ha men
rubqa. (5) wemar laflayma. puS Ikon harka lwat hmaia wena wjalya nezal

Abraham's temptation 13*

lamina lharka nesgod wnehpok lwatkon. (6) wansav 'avraham qayse la c lata
wsam c al Hsfcaq breh. wansav bid* nura wsakkina wezal trayhon >ak bda. (7)
wemar Msfcaq lavraham >avuy wemar. 'ava. wemar ha ^ena ber. wemar leh. ha
nuia wqayse. ayka 5 emra la c lala. (8) wemar 'avraham. 'alaha nefcze leh 'emra
bfiagt, bgr. wezal trayhon 'akhda. (9) weta lafta demar leh 'alaha. wavna
tamman 'avraham madbfca wasdar qayse wfakreh lisbaq breh wsameh c al
madbha l c el men qayse. (10) wawSe^ideh ^vraham wansav sakkina lmekseh
lavrai. (11) waqra leh malafcph dalaha men Smayya wemar 'avraham 'avraham.
wemar. ha ^na. (12) wemar la tawSet 'idak c al talya. wla te c bed leh meddem.
metful dhaSa >awda c t ddafcleh >at dalaha dla bsa& lavrak lisbaq men. (13)
warim 'avraham c ayna wahza. wha defa-a had 'afcid bsakja bqarnateh. wezal
'avraham wnasbeh ldekia wasqeh la c lata hlaf bieh. (14) waqra 'avraham
SmBh dajia ha marya nehze deiemar yawmana btura hana marya nehze. (15)
waqia malakeh dalaha lavraham dtarten zavnin men gmayya. (16) wemar bi
yimit 3 5mar marya. blaf da c vat pdgama hana wla hsa& lavrak libidak men.
(17) mvanafcu 'ebbaifcak wmasgayu >asge zai'ak >ak kawkvay Smayya wak
bala (Fal sefteh dyamma wneral zai^ak Wat^ dav c eldvava. (18) wnejbarkun
bzafak kulhon c amme dai'a blaf daSma c t bqal. (19) wahfak 'avraham lwat
layma wqam wezal 'akhda lver§va c wfcev 'avraham bverSva c .

5. The raising of Lazarus (John Hil-57) 1

^Lft 1^9.1 cnCLun<f rf% \ \ &-*ja ^a tu*A 2 cix»t^.l r^ocno (1)
.^.CUt^.7 r^X^i Ai^Jtr^.l 3 <nuAun<f r£tco ^.1 p-»t» (2) .r^&ttea.lO
5 cnA ^.1 jAi (3) .I^OCD ciXftt^.i luaA 4 ocd r^.icn.l r^ocn CDOur<

(1) From Lewis: 1910: o»i - .as**. To facilitate smooth reading, some
punctuation marks including the seyame have been added. (2) A relative
clause without its antecedent: 'one who (was) sick': §111. (3) On the
function of a suffixed Aui* in a nominal clause, see § 109. (4) On a 3rd pers.
pronoun preceding a subject noun, esp. a personal name, see § 112 i. (5)
'they sent a message to him': the verb is 3f.pl. The pronoun of ccA is proleptic.

14* Chrestomathy

Ajn^ 7U1I.1 7 ocd ctduI^ rtfcD ^t» jl.OjliA colour* 6 ^cru&1&
r^dtOSftA 7 Wocd r<\ r^CDlOJi rOcD .t»r* A.CUL1 ^j»lx .ta (4)
^..1 ocd (5) .CD 1=1 O0L9 jjLn^utJ.l r^aaAr^.l CD^u»OaJcAi ,^\u r<\r£
r^ttesA 9 }x»toA i^ur^ ^cdu^A^i ^»AcdA 8 c<ocd nffl ^.Ojl»
^•lAi cdAl&o.i A^l iClo Iv^A cnut^.i ^^ut.i l0 ^2*o (6) .tu*AA
^>fe*r^ (8) ..tocnuA Atr£j n oAi ,cdo.t1»AAA tor^O (7) .^»CU
<sim^1l»A oocd ^ v — r^».ioci3u rtfcD .^t .,cdo.i112*A& aoA
rttaL*.&lAi r^ Jk.ax* ^cnA tear* (9) .^AA Aut* Alt* .aO&O
Aci^M 12 Ao&2* i<\ cr>Aai» r£M23u r£a.l ^0 .i<^CUJ9 Aur^ ^int
</>Acni* ^.t r^AAa.l ^a (10) .rdJCD r^saAj^.l cdIcdoj r^uo.l
t»i* ^Acd t»r* .ua (11) .aia AuA r^lcDOJ.l A^*> Aodc*
(12) 13 .,cdo1*jli*:i ndir* Atr* r<\r* .aajc ^ojj1 1uaA ^OcnA
Ajl ^ojl* ^.1 ocd (13) .r£uj ocd "uya.i ,j* llh t» .cnA ^»tear^
oocd ^ftta/D ^ojcdo *ocnA r<ocD t»i* tuiA 15 cnA ocd Au^a.i
•1.OJL* ^OcdA t»r* jboAi (14) .t»r* 16 ocd r^Auuc Ajl.1
19 < ^iA>\\ ; ^9 18 r£i.TjjO (15) .cdA Al^s* 1uaA ll .&ut<n**±

(16) .CD&toA A\f<J CL^AcD f<\r^ ^*& Al»OCD r^X.l flh £U^9L»CD&.l

AtrO ^Uiir^ -ap^ odi .r^X^AAk ,CDOl£i&A r^ar^ii .^octgA t»i*
jjL^Jtr^ r<*_i-i. Aun\ ^CUL. r^Ait* .TAO (17) .ca»L*. &OMJ
^».l Aiocdo (18) .^icb r^jslr^ »CD02a.TO ^ luiAA ,cdo1ao.1
^OCD.l txxL*Axsojj ^r^o.T^flor^ pAjctOr^ ^ f<cm*1 r^l^. Au^a
r<> I % &^aA on£J r^.TOai* ^* rtr&^a (19) .^lA* 21 r<\I»
rtfhtea Al^mje .tao (20) 0°L»tea:TO r^&itea.l caaAsi ^.^oXwj.i
(21) .r^&ini Aul3 73-»1s?do cnL^.10r<\ Alol^j r*&r^ ^CLx_».i
&r£sa r£\ duocD 23 rdsA oAr* .^.ojl^A r^&itea cnA r*t»r*o
AAndx.l p.tso.i ^iO-^X. r^jccD .At* r«At* (22) ^.^jji* i*ocd

(24) .»£tOjjr^ ponj .^ojl. cnA t»r^ (23) .u>A jacnu r^cnAr^X

»a ^gucD^d.l ^90 r^^i»ni ^r^ i<Ji< .^Ojl. doA toi^ (25)

Ar^too r^A 7i\\\ »a ^aucoMO »jj.1 ^»o (26) 27 .r£uJ ^nto) ^ar^

»t» ^.r* .r^Ait» cdA r^t»f^ (27) 29 .^-^cd ^All^uoi^d

.'uAl^.T r^CDAp^.l CDla i/m t*^ 30 OCD Aur^l r<Jr^ r^l»uCD^9

The raising of Lazarus 1 5 *

31 Aur<oAut2* AiAti* ^cn &t»r* X*a (28) .i^mIaA c*cVrtoi\
.•UkO (29) .»^A r^toa r^cVn* ^at .cnA r*t»r*a .p-»tmA Aito
a cd a (30) .cdcVoA <VAti< 33 Alt£^&jjci 32 cVlcut 5out» Aul»jc
r^ClCD 35 (nfl r^W r^uta^ 34 i*ocd A-i. r£xcnA r^M.T^ r<X
CO cd ^Jba.l ^cucd •ar^ (31) .r*cVt» cVocd CDcV-^lr^T r*<
^OCdA ciAtr^ 36 AuoLaj cVcdocV cVcl^cd.i OUj .U p^tea.f mi\n
37 ,cdo (32) .r^-raA t^Xtt* r*t3LnA:t CIOCD ^laa> .CDlcVa

iW cnA r^toor^o .,cnal^f A^. Ailaj ^ax** 38 cdcVoA b^s* .ta

CDVU .1A «^.CIX* OCDO (33) .»JJr< f<OCD cVr^a ru .»t» OUCICD ^101

(6) On the determining force of the pronoun with a numeral, see § 91 c end.

(7) Probably a demonstrative pron. /haw/, 'he who,' rather than the enclitic
subject of /krihA (7a) Cp. § 81 ink. and 93.9. (8) A compound tense, <ptc. +
enclitic *«»> (§ 86). The verb, /mafchev/, is an Af ptc.act. of V^asu*. (9) The
preposition marks a direct object, and not a substitute for .i. So are the
following two cases of it, though the way the multiple objects are arranged is
unusual. (10) /men d-/ 'when, after.' (11) /taw/, Impv. Pe pi. m. of rd&rtf 'to
come': § 67. (12) /metqel/ < /mettqel/ < /mettqel/, Ethpe Ptc. of V Ao&, with
the assimilation of Ixl: § 6M. (13) A mere orthographic variant of the standard
■c5cu^i< ? The verb is Af Impf. lsg. + "him" (V t^). (14) Prob. a verbal
adjective /dmefc/ 'asleep,' thus /dmefcu/. (15) A centripetal Lamadh. See Text
4, n. 4. (16) Enclitic for focusing: /Seniaw *emar/ 'it was about sleep that he
was speaking.' (17) 'plainly,' with an adverbial ending (§ 47). (18) ro.-ui =
rdrt i*:u* /haciena/ 'I am glad 1 (simplified spelling: § 10). (19) V\,«~ +
2m.pl. suf. (§ 46). (20) rfJko.iV*>* 'stadia' (crrdSia). (21) *d£s*: 'two miles'
(jiIXlov). (22) J&= n&M = 'to comfort.' (23) Usually 'hither,' but here
loosely 'here.' See vs. 32. (24) On the syntax of irreal conditional sentences,
see § 86. (25) = iOi* k^.> (§ 10). Likewise later in the verse: h&rtx = Argi
Jui* (26) On the repeated pronoun, see § 104; on the ligature, see § 10. (27)
Pe Impf. 3m.sg. of ^ 'to live' (§ 67). (28) = ,AJr* «<i*nci» (§ 10). (29) For
the standard ^co. Cf. ]^ :see Fassberg 1990:120f. (30) On the syntactic
function of the enclitic, see § 107 b. (31) 'silently,' with an adverbial morpheme:
§ 47. (32) 'she jumped up,' Pe from *o*: the Waw is a radical. (33) 'eagerly':
for the root, cf. Heb. fan 'to be desirous.' (34) A compound tense: § 85. 1^
'he entered' < V A3u. So ^<Sm cd^W later in the verse. (35) Prolepsis, the
suffix pointing forward to *&**r. § 1 12 a. (36) Asyndetic: § 98 g. (37) See
n. 4 above. (38) On the prolepsis with a preposition, see § 1 12 e.

16* Chrestomathy

"cnjL&JLa 39 jjAi1 y%i.l ax^i^i ^cucd n£..iac?DuA r^uid r^-^a.i
.cnA t^»t»r^ .»ci3LaJ cicWmo) i<iL(^ tearto (34) .cmxita 41 tui>cVr^a
civu x*a (36) .^ojl..i tCDCiilM.t iOcd ^cVr^o (35) .|Ui r*& ^»
Aur^ci (37) .cnA nfooD ^uj1 r&i* ovjj .CICICD ^tor^ Klft.iocnu

f<CICD f^OJP.I OCD.l )CDCU » % JjAl^l CUCD.7 42 CI€ICD ^ilMl^l ^(IlLSJ

r<\.l 45 rdicn .T=l^j.1 r^cicn i^y^ ".icli. r<\ 43 .cii»i*:i r<a>l^ ^9

Au^aA r^r* ^cnAo tcncullsi rtacn tv*.Ai2* .ia ^.i ^cul* (38)
r^cVtj*^* «yi^ .r^acD ^r^t^jaj r^tCLaLO Al^9 ocdci r^tCLao
.r^.TCD r<iar£^ oXamt ^ojl* tor* (39) .r<&r£aj9 cnj^tcV 4 \au2*>o
49 ito rtfno.i r£&r£^A mA v i\nr r£l£* ,t» .r^cVtr* cnA f*t»f*
^r^T »aA tVt»r^ .cnA t»r^ (40) .^2*cu cnA rd^alrf.l A^s* .cnA
*cucn r£x-lr< ^x»CD (41) .f^cnAr^.l oujaout ^» ujcV ^*_ls*ucdcV
t<>*^r\ »cncn » \ Axut ^».i ocd .r£&r£aA cdcuAjl Onto ^^3.1
rdJ-2L.li* f<Jr^o (42) .»J Algols* u>A r£j.ici2a r£ar^ .t»rta
r^xJr^.l r<jcn t<Tn A\;*g r<Ar< »A Aur* ^jsax tJstA^a.l
tar^ ^Acd ,iAO (43) .ijAit.-uc cVjr<i ^CLi^a^cnj.i ^Acd rdil»r^
^cnao (44) .IsA r*Ai .OCL& 1v*A .t»i^Q r^*t -Ar>-« rd^a

iCDClA^IO iCOOllV 5l ^3~±M .TA r^AuM OCD Jl&J r<ALAJL=J

^t» tor* ^XftCD 53 .r^1.7cuna ,cr>cLar< ^a-^jsoo 5 ^r*Auiiai&a
AioA oAir£l r^.icicnu 56 r^f^^5o (45) 55 .A\r* cioouci 54 ,cnocitx

Aut<CI (46) . A,Q Tal CLLM*CI3 f^AuLJC »€D ^0 .^Oftfe* AA-M 4b.CUL»

r£x*t£ AioA ^OoglA oA\r<f r^Xr^ ^oj^o»cd r^\.l ^acnj^s a a CD

.±-CL3La .TSL!..? 73.t>9 ^OCnA CU^Autr^O

57 rdLtt)lar^ o.TaJLO cue-i^cW r<iibQ rOcnat >n1 ^X.cd (47)
r<bir£^£D r^AiciAir< r<ta^ rOcD.l .Xsu^J r<l«tt .OOCD ^»fearta
r£itJr* ^ocdAcl^ r£ntcn cnA tJUUr* ^-w ^o (48) ..lai.
.Tjj (49) .*£o^.a ^j-..T^) v i\nT r£*£aocn? ^Atr^ci cna *^J£*L»cn2a

rtfouLJt »cd.t ^cnA*.! rOcn^ .al r^ciCD crxr^jt r<^^ ^.1 ^ou^o

(50) 0D.T» ^Aur^ ^^lx* r<\ ^oAur^ .r^A»jD ocd ^ocnA t»r^
r*&iA» ^..T i^.iod (51) ..TarO r<n^ oiAo2k r^o 59 .cdAqa

The raising of Lazarus 17*

r^ocn rOoi^ J91.1 \\*n r^Xf* cntor^ ^cn \ > % 1 &CLa~ ^ r<X
(52) .rtoa_^ |JSr^ JiL*. AimsoX r^OCD .T*Ala. ^.clx^.1 JL^a >nJ^r<
^l.laM.1 rtfciiXt<l nVl'-i ^r^* r^Xr* .ICUiXa r^SL*. »Sr* Ajl r^Xci

CICICD CUJLl&f 1 ^ r^DCU ^.1 CICD ^50 (S3) .r£UlX ^Vl'sAu

aA 6l r<*j»1tAa rtacn u^aoc* r<X ^».i ^ojl* (54) .cnX^n^A

rtto&».l r^ta-t^aX -a*t£>:i r^1&r<X cnX A%f< r^Xt* nd».iarcu

r^r^l^D an\ix>o r^lXl-i. v »i»tQ.l r^a% r^OCD r^GCDO (55)
cnX ciocn ^> Vno (56) ^ocnr^i ^clx.txu.i ^Ajtlor^X 62 1cia ^»
r<X ta^.T ^Aut* ^»tao>. i<\^i(nfl 63 .TjjX .Ijj ^.lior^O «*.ojl»A
cnX r^UJ.1 ^a.i o.To£ r^JL.'tao r£ioi& >a*o (57) .rtx±\±\ rtkrt

.ouo.ljjrdJ.l ^ocelX ji&aJ rfhrO

09) *Ai Pe Pf., 'he was deeply moved.' (40) Literally: 'in his soul,' inwardly,
emotionally, and not 'in himself.' (41) 'he was deeply touched, agitated,'
Ethpa from V* ux. (42) Lit. 'there are some of them who were saying,' i.e.
'some of them were saying.' (43) This is the one who opened the eyes of one
who had been blind ...,' an identificatory nominal clause (§ 107 b). (44)
'indeed' with a touch of irony or sarcasm. (45) Emphatically extraposed;
logically it belongs to the following clause. (46) 'in private.' Cf. Heb. ira
taatf V^. (47) 'a hewn-out cave.' (48) 'covered,' Pa pass. Ptc. (49) 'it
stinks.' (50) 'on that very moment, instantly': on the periphrasis, see § 112a.
(51) 'bandaged, bound up,' Pa Ptc. f.pl. (52) 'with bandages' < reftLnm^. (53)
'a head-cloth' (aouSdpiov). (54) For the standard spelling ,cDctr*tx. (55) A
ptc. complementing the verb h-it: § 98 d. (56) On the position of the
adjective, see § 91 a. (57) 'they had a discussion.' (58) 'one man' as against
many, i.e. the whole nation: see § 91:3, 4. (59) On the resumptive suffix, see
§ 91 d. (60) 'of his own accord,' synonymous with mr<\j iioa^ ^$. (61)
'openly' (uappTiatqi). (62) 'region, area' (xi&pa). (63) 'to one another': § 12 b.

18* Chrestomathy

6. A Discourse on Fate by Bardaisan 1

^W.l .^.l^or^.l rOljjr^ Aur^.l 2 .qoA ytMrta ,GDL»-lAr£x jO^
^avaO dur£«JLa> ^ata :r<Yli in ^ts.idea r^dAjj.1 ocd r^LOf&OA

rdli* ^..xi r<5a» tao 3 .c»CL£uJL^ Or< cOk* ^K* .*A t»r<
4 cnA.l rdJljjr^ yOJCDO :r£l\^ ^Inbexx ^»Acd r^xjr^ ,jii Aur^r
^9la r£Jr* jar^.1 f<in^r< lyjjsojjl r^tOJ^*Or£l ^.Tj^ r^tcnA
iCD 6 f<aia.l .r^^tur^ r^&t^o.la **^ 5 >\ \*2*>t< .aA Auocd ^qjj1
.y»_^X* f<\ r^Kl*J^i>.l p.TSa r^.T* r^OCD&.l r^xJta.l r<JL£kJ
A^o »»\«\mno:t A^ci 7 ..Ts&A2gA ^ft-^tdea r^xjr< *j»Acd _ojcdo
rtibiCLis ^ocdA ^r.VJ^.1 r^Aioln- ^ooA^o y.iaLi 1» nr.T
ir^t^^.l rOLuloxnaO rO^cuoO rOcDlo^jaO :r*&CU ajnmaO
^CcnA y»OCD r<» Niht y.tD^o.1 r£a£o^ t-iAcD.l Ocd r^taO.l y»

^ui nntu.1 ^il^r^.l r^J tur^ %r**i OL»r^ .^»cixs ^» la.ldi^ftG

Or* .r€».T\£. l T r^tX^t ,cd 12 r*&ai»Or< r^.lCD.l r£L2L»f* h .^Acd.1
yftCiA^O .r^N^n ocd r&UL r&x< .,CDodur* r<\ qoMCLLD r^olu
15 .r^AuDXD.ia 14 r*Aia?o1 13 ySOLaJX> f<uta.1 ocd ,CDO.Tl°r£9 r^AiOail

.ooA y*ocr>o 17 .^ijc.i^ ocd oct^a :r<t2^.i 16 i^<iaio r£Lu1oo>o

OCD cm n^ .rdrJl^i X=u^.l p.l^uL&.l .^t»r^ y*.l rO^jjr*

r^ujuao K'&oailo r^ujlojvo r^aosao .ail r^=L*cn-».i r<<&io1f<u9
y*.l ^ .r^cnAr^ y» ^ocdA AaxLM ocd 18 rdKits pj&» cpA *-k*1^.1

yAcD yftCD^^A^.l 19 Ir^^CL=l- |A r£» VuAlS* »&oA^JJ» UUI<

A^» .^.1 «>*Jt» 22 .ya.Ta« tj.t»L90 «>tJt» 21 ^d.t»L3 ^.auxsolcD
^.fcOJcp ^anf.lO ^W^^i r^stJrx* »J-=i *-» u>.1 OCD rd^^DO.l y».i
A^ys* .*^A^L2ao r^iCla^ ^Ocn>\ \ ,^-^L*. t<\*\*t< y* u> :r^T lain
r£s*A_iI di^ujar^.l 9 cb ir^CDAr^.l r^Aoxajj ^gctcllso t CD r^t^itA.1
r*diaa~ y»cn\^\ ^lacp^o ^rrOHja.lsa AunsJ^O r£xit< AttaO
y..l KLlr* l»i^ .y»CDJ^a r^.Tjj r^XiA rColM r^iO^Lx^a
r^rd^j'Ao rx'cDAr^X irO-^Acx cOcd ocp ^cdoAui^I
.^CUjjAo nVla ln\o ^r£flOAo\yi>r£\o r<J la.T^aAo .f^l^Ailo
!Ll9 c^ocd r& ^ocn»\ \ iitooK'.l 21 r&i^$i ^*Acd ^ocnAcL^a
p.T^ia r^r^ .ocd .Tjj Aj*jb IaJ^ ^^tNT.l .r^l^Noje .^ocnl

28

cnu

A discourse on fate by Bardaisan 19*

ocaa.l .bi*acn Ait»r^:i rO^^r^ .^\;i\t r<\ p.TMsCl ^i^iU

r^u^rf rda\jj A^^cd Aur< .r£»t5* ^cnA Aur^.l ^CL^Xi . v »\;»\t

i^QCicnLi.l ciccd ^-9^ f<^T 1*1 -i.i ah ccDt<^ia>.l .r^.lCD ^5* r<oicla-.

(1) Third century C.E. An extract from Drijvers 1965: 26-41. (2) In this text
frequent use is made of the diacritical point: § 4 a. (2a) /bazvan ... bazvan/
'now ... then. 1 (3) A disciple of Bardaisan. Likewise the following, Bar
Jamma. (4) With a proleptic suffix: § 1 12 a. (5) On the syntagm <Ptc. pass.
+ A>, see § 84. (6) 'it yearns for, 1 Pe Ptc. f. (7) 'they think to do 1 = 'they
think they can do it 1 ? (8) 'the seven planets/ (9) 'they (= ^ ^oA*)
happen to them.' (10) = rfKAa^ ^m.V^n 'in all those situations,' not by them,
i.e. the seven stars.' (11) 'as against these things, i.e. as against such a view.'
On the proleptic structure, see § 112 e. (12) 'an art such as this': on the
preceding qualifier, see § 91 b. (13) 'are placed,' Pe Ptc. pass. f.pl. (14) An ir-
regular pi. (f.pl.) of jai. (15) /daqdqata/ 'tiny.' (16) Synonymous with r<iiicu*>
'(physical) defect.' (17) 'they happen but by way of accident, i.e. not by
design.' On the syntax of the infinitive, see § 98 j, the enclitic pronoun is
extraposing. (18) 'punishment,' lit. that which is placed (/msam/, Af ptc.
pass.) on head.' The following pronoun is extraposing, not the subject of the
following ptc, 'he receives': the subject is understood (§ 106). (19) Lit. 'to
me, according to my weakness, the matter seems to me,' i.e. 'in my humble
opinion it appears to me that ...' (20) 'opinions.' On the suffix with the nume-
ral, see § 91 c end. (21) Lit. 'in something,' i.e. 'in some respects; partly.'
(22) /maSran/ 'speaking the truth (Af Ptc. act. f.pl. of V*tx) ... telling lies,' i.e.
'partly true and partly false.' (23) On the independent personal pronoun
preceding the subject, see § 112 i. (24) 'those who guide,' a Pa nomen
agentis: § 38 d. (25) On Aui« in a nominal clause, see § 109. (26) 'elements
(constituting the universe)' (aToixetov). (27) 'all these orders (Tdyjia),'
extraposed (casus pendens) and later resumed by «gcnA . (28) The preposition
is to be construed with rd^lox 'power (over)': see A&a \ f \j in the following
sentence. (29) 'one who has power': an antecedentless relative clause (§
1 1 1). (30) The Dalath introduces a subject clause, 'the fact that not everything

...,' the subject of i^iuAsa, which is reinforced by rdjiaa^, 'the matter.' (31)
/me$tam c an/, 'to obey, be subject to,' Ethpe Ptc. f.pl. of V-a^ax). (32) A
variant spelling of ^*, m.pl. of i<^i /«/ to be content, desirous.'

20* Chrestomathy

i<L^»r^ r^l*^L^. ^ft¥&_L ^3iaQ t^r r ^ :t f ^ jLA * r ^ ^L»Aut» r<X

J9Q28 0L» r^^a^Q^n

f^rfi^DQ

.r£9f<&\a r^t-^^-A ^OCDO .^..UXiO rdJlur^O .^.UQlM r^Aci
.^j9^ r^X.l rdi^r^ ^cnt^Aeoa .^=i~.1 r£l^»r^ ^4&L*. rdltur^O

^jL»r^ ^NVN.lQ 36 .^J3-.l ^A*r^ ^CKD&aA ^t^La^p.T &L»t< v*" 3 ^
^NVVlQ ^-9^ r^X.l ^JL*r^ ^cn&ClA jj^i^nri.T Aur^O *^»-3^ f^.l
M i<iTiSi.l 37 :rtfiia=i- f<u^Aix2a rdL^ODO *^- 9 ^ ^A*r* ^Ocn^aA
^Aluj&i.i 39 r£^1 r^^to :r<» inO r£jCDlCL^O ndl^AcuSa r^lcur^O
42 ^OCD.l ^Air^a r^Xt* 4l -^*-l r^l^ajt.t iCICD r^Xa :^iLa> r^alu
^>\jf^ otClAa .^ft.TuCl ^»axs ^Ijj ^^.t^isa .»i tn^.l rCm uy»r<
^ ^acD.i ^A*r^ ^qq .*»\,n ^» ^Ii^&uAcp ^caa yi'^r r*A-1
.^cna ^w \Ht<n ^Acd ^r^.l r^iiCla- r£* uidea .^i ■ % 1 t<X ,ta
vyi< ^0(i) ^ft-icn r^Xr^ .^X ^ocd ^oia yUn^i -^\^* #l r^ocn r<X

,1^ yMOXJ^laO ^UJ ^ft^tldtM 44 ^CIU^flL30 .y.OCD.1 r^sa

A^M .\j«\t p.T» Aa A^ rtocn f<\.i r<o\jj Ajl r^CUiJO :A*££*
rr^u.ltea.i ocd t<sxl^\j ;r<n\n r^to&ca.i rOcD oimcllo ocd.i
JL&. 46 cn » V \ ci .f<cnAf< ^5* r^oi^ciJ^j&r^Xci rdjJ^AiX Avjacn

r^l^^ AvaA.l ^a3L>A\n^>n

r*£utCU^ r^rtCD.l ^ii^rtA* Au^iCl t<n\u n<ft£>Ac*> 47 :r^i^AiC^
r^cnAr^l i<iinnl p.T» acn.i i<j1.icliA :r<*^xb&sa r&a\±&&*x

A discourse on fate by Bardaisan 21*

tn»*. 5l rCxjj rCxJZJ Jbrt x* 50 :rdi^jia ctfti^a A^cd ta.-t&s*

57 CI.t\o» r^OCD t<\ Aton^.7 !<■ \r. ^Acd p.TD ^» ^ : ^«^"
t<u±*t< 58a .o.T^02nX.l *» 58 tP x6 # Jtn» *3i* r£W • .ticca .tcuAa

(33) /hajjhdane/, 'a handful,' a pi. formation by reduplication of **;. (34) The
suffix pronoun resumes the preceding, extraposed constituent, .1 ^A* i<. (35)
Aarqan/, 'they run away from them, they elude them,' Pe Ptc. f.pl., the subject
being rdtcts^. (36) 'there are those who have much with them that they
desire': the first Dalath introduces an antecedentless relative clause, and .1
^Atrthas the preceding «j£-^£>, f.pl. 'many things' as its antecedent. On the
use of the f.pl. to refer to things, see § 69. Likewise the following ^12Li
/dallilan/, 'few things.' (37) 'so is the matter found, that is then how the
matter stands.' (38) /nejcse/, 'possessions, wealth,' a plurale tantum: § 70.
(39) 'every single desire': on the repetition of a noun in the st. abs. (< r^Jk^),
see § 71 a. (40) The lengthy multiple subject seems to have led to the
repetition of the uncalled-for conjunction, Dalath. (41) 'and they are not of
our authority,' i.e. they are not subject to us.' The Pf. of the stative verb i*o<d
is used with the force of the present tense: § 81. The verb is 3f.pl., referring
to things: § 69. (42) 'they (f.pl.) happen (^odS).' On the gender of the Ptc,
see the preceding note, and note the following ^ccia. (43) Lit. 'as that which,'
i.e. as we desire. (44) 'some of them': the preposition ^* is partitive, and the
initial prep. Beth goes with the verb ^y^*>. (45) /marditaA 'the set course.'
(46) With a proleptic suffix with a preposition: § 112 a. (47) /mbalfena/, Pa
nomen agentis, 'one that transforms.' (48) r**\* Jk*» /bet yaldS/, 'horoscope.'
(49) Error for *.t*.&f<? (50) The preposition Beth is instrumental, though
virtually a marker of an agent. (51) /fcaSSa/, 'it suffers,' Pe Ptc. f.sg. of Vjuu*.
(52) Apparently an error for ^aA^a. (53) 'for not a man ...': on the categorical
negation, see § 93:7. (54) /mgardySn/ Pa Ptc f.pl. (55) /gizin/, 'are deprived,'
Pe Ptc. pass, from Vio^ (56) /mawl^anuja/, 'act of begetting,' Af action
noun. (57) /mawla£u/, Af inf. of *!• 'to give birth.' On the syntax, see § 98 j.
(58) 'they do grow old': a Pe Inf. of V ^*o (/meqqaS/) plus a Ptc. f.pl.
(/qaSSan/). (58a) On the particle *, see § 100: 'too old to bear.'

22* Chrestomathy

jju*Jt2a f<Ao .^i.tAce* t<\ ^CUU.l f^» f<Y 1 ■ I n.T r^%^& Jar^.l
rd*-* ceA AuA rtft^^.l r£iau=i :?<■ in «>acnA ^AAir*^ r£oAjj
r^X.lCl r^i^r^o r^X.i r£aAjj oqo ji^t^ .aCt& r^X Jdr^Q .AAumA
Aui* .1* r^L&r^O .r^tCLuus r^xJta.l r*1\ft 61 t!^»A :r£»duc»
VV ^Acd .&ci£»u r^X.l aoA AAtsoA :r<»dut2Ba r^l^r^o cnA

.^Acd !«^ r^uA» i^gAjj r^&r< ^»x»cn ir^UM ,cncu tci ,aDCU-si
rdl^A aaA I.T^a ^avsCl 62 .r^.lJj ^» r<.ljj ^Lft%£.l r^Clii- .IzulCI
r£»ciCD rO-»-& ^»o .trdaj»a cnA *£^n» ^iuaO .r<^m*pci

r^&CLa&cut r£»cicn pdi-*J!k ^» .r^t^E^i rOjjIcu&Cl r£Jcn1CL&

63 .r^AicUjj-0 r^Avcaj-^ cnAcL&o .rtfbaJd&ciJt.i cn_LJt1CL&0 .rtfbr<La>
rdl^^ ^» ^OcnAv^ta r<£J-t-L9 ^>1-U» r*&<LaAiCLr.l r^A^js.l ,cd
^siaO :r^lA^ . A— *A«»i ^ava r£oAu ^QQ .f<i HO f<lA» r^Clcn

r£*OCD r^oAu ^oo .r<fi^a ^cdAclsA r<AuiCLX2aa r^OJLaiflD
oulS* .aci&t rO^cno .r^t^^.7 ^OcnJ-Aor^O rrtf&ttajJB.l r^an^ux)
r<ws .f<» \ nAts* r^X.l r<AtCL^CUBr^Cl r^ClaLiA r£*Clcn r£aAu ^n
.r^AskinA r^u^'uP :r^sn»\ V\ r<Y» yK r*£ll\7 ^oocnj.i .TAB
^».1 r£o\jj .rds-iCDlX r^^AjjO :r<\m*ii\ rO&Aluj rdt»1 ^CICIUCI
.r^o^^ii^ r^AsLflDO :r<Y> yoN rCx^i r^VAJ^ ^oocnj.i .la_i.
i<nji(nlQ .rdiA\\»u\ t<\ » n«* r£&1r£o.1 rdl.aia ^taliO
^» r<i.i^ .lo.l&^a.l ^aiA^a.l :cL2l.1 Au n£Q-*-x_aa .r^-^AjjA
r^xl.l Aci^a .CD.ioo.l r^oob r£aAjj.l ocd t<Z>\±. .^a .cpdtci~*1&
&u*a r^to^e** ocn :t<\ ^\u»* r^ocn ^octguAj^.i ^cucn rdila.t^^ci
^loie^ i<u*wu.i ^ocnjj^ci ..Tjj.i Xu jnji^ rdaci£U» .rfxV.

,Ae*r< .qoiiCilLftJ9LK Ajl v » ^nr>CLS^o 6S .rO^^A ^1.1-i^Dl ^cuoi

^lode^ t<\*yifr).i ^cuaio ".^cn y ^ 1 .1 r^&CLL&a r<A^\a»iii
^onb .r<»Qli rfAvolAir^ 68 ^..Xkur< ^cuod J^r^.i »Ae^f<o 67 **~ : ~

A discourse on fate by Bardaisan 23*

rf&LLz.l CD^-st.lr^Cl Ir^lrdfAo rdiAl'r^o r^iCLtJJA -3i* ^=m
&^u&.1 rO^Aa Aur^.l pxsnN^No .r^^b'.i c<L&>cU9l»Aci

% -

&Q \\ ^ 7 °r^.lCD A^S*CI ^CUD^CLl ts.1»

ta.l&» i*&CLUnJta» 70a r<X.i.i .otaxp.l r&KJ^iii Aut< .rdi^Ax
:r?AiCL^L&ci qdujbIcd i<icd t qo.i o^x» r^l.i A\ «*» .r£»A^
^» i<oiGlr<ua .acix»dir£l Cicn r^lao.7 ^0 :f<^09jujO r^tcu^tci
Or* I^OCiul^J ^AciJLa 7l r<.iaaL^ ^cp jar*.l .^ocd ranAi*

.C ^l iM r^oAjJ XUJ9L.1 ^» Uj.1 rOj^Lftf^ ^-af*^^ cir< tCL^U

rdL^»r^ .r/u l^ci r^i\*^ r<\»&dici r^i&u.lteo TiA&jcAi.i r^)lA

(59) .1 f<» 'when* followed by a Pf. with reference to future: § 81. (60)
/lmettal/, an irregular Pe Inf. of V ^j 'to give': § 67. (61) /lemettar/, *to keep,
maintain, 1 Pe Inf. of Vt^ with the Nun assimilated (§§ 6M; 61). (62) /pri-
San trfa men hdjaA 'different from one another': on the reciprocal expression,
see § 12 b. (63) 'all impurity and immorality,' which appears to be part of the
multiple subject together with the preceding rdtcLA&cts.i cautio^o r*&i<ij»,
and the following pronoun ,cd /hay/, is in apposition to what immediately
precedes it, 'that men practise on account of the matrimony in their passion.'
(64) /maytin/, 'they die,' a Pe Ptc m.pl. from V Jus*. (65) 'Amongst them,
those which assist the nature are called (those of) the right-hand...' (66)
/bamnawaja dnafShon/, 'sectors of their own.' (67) On the emph. state of the
predicative adjective, see § 71 e. (68) /^hidinA'they occupy, hold': on the
passive participle with active meaning, see § 84. (69) /mahrin/, 'they harm,'
Af Ptc m.pl. of Vucp. (70) If the text be right, i«*<d, f.sg., must be in
apposition to the following two pi. nouns. (70a) kta 'without': the first .i
introduces an object clause. (71) AavodjB/, 'doers, actors,' a Pe nomen agentis:
§ 51. (72) /bazennan/, 'as we see.' (73) Strictly it should be ^cnuAftii, but see
also ^oochj and «ocnl& later. (74) /de&zi/, 'it appeared proper': on this
meaning of the verb, cf. Dan 3.19 nm, Mishnaic Hebrew ,! «n, and Lk 1.3
where the Greek has £8o£e, which is rendered with the same Syr. form.

24* Chrestomathy

♦rdll^O r<*iur^ ^OoA^.l r^ui)0 :r^uta ^Onil^.l r^oXaxxi
rdSCD A\ «*o .r^AuJLDo *» Ico.iuaci r^&ttt^xA .ataAi» au^^aci

•!•.!<. tjjr^ r£2*cu^3 ^>.ldo9 6ur£ir£*i ^r^

^ r^-U^a^ ^O oglcAjj ^ r<l£r£t 79 .au^,Ati r^Oa^ o^ r*_*Af<
*i^ a-j»1» Autocue r^X.l uv^cucuj^A ^jcr^ flh r^ .^*A^JX£*
82 ca.Aui* ndi* :»<ti>h 81 ^ca\^ i<i\ | ,\¥.io i<q\^.i "ri^a

^2l*U r^Xo .ocujaoCLa.i rdi^i .t«*t1 83 r*\.i ^CLloa rtfeo1i<M ^

(75) This verb, when introducing direct speech as here and even in the past
context as here, often takes the form of a participle. (76) The proclitic
Dalath here introduces an object clause, a direct object of ^Tr*\, x tf On the
negator /la wa/, see § 93.9. (77) Ethpe Pf. lsg. of «u£r* 'to persuade, convince'
(<TT€taai, Aorist of irelOav 'to perusade'). The Tet instead of Taw is because
the Greek it came over to Syriac speakers as more "emphatic" than the
Semitic Pe, so that the Taw was assimilated to its emphatic counterpart: §
6M. (78) The demonstrative pronoun is a dummy for the following noun
clause, 'on the basis of the fact that ...' The verb&m^A^n? 'you have become
convinced' is followed by an object clause ... rA*. (79) 'therefore the matter
is compelled to you that you should become convinced that ...,' i.e. you
therefore have no choice but to accept that ...' (80) /gzar dina/, 'verdict,' here
synonymous with Kioxrx^o r<n\# in the preceding paragraph, referring to a
force beyond human control, and further specified by the following rOiX&t
n*i\^\fo<i. The plural i<t&; probably indicates concrete manifestations of
Fate. (81) The preposition Lamadh here is an exponent of direct object: §
97a. (82) The use of the suffix pronoun signifies that the subject is determinate:
'we have that freedom (, of which we have been speaking).' See § 109. (83)
The proclitic Dalath with an Impf. indicates a purpose: § 82.

Odes of Solomon 25 *

7. The Odes of Solomon 1
Ode 11

r£x->xn aujola »J 1 i^ t*^ K^flu too 2

rdU9lCLSk\ CD^IOV^jX AlCICDCI 3

(nyi\yn r£u1cir£=i Al^cdIo
.^»0La^o r^A.f r^tjj r^jL^^ ^m

(1) Harris and Mingana 1916-20: A - ^ , coa - oa; 265-71, 403-9. Most of the
diacritical marks (§ 4) and ES vowel signs (but not the WS signs, which
seem to be of secunda manus) appearing in the manuscript (H) have been
reproduced here. Cf. also Charlesworth 1977, Lattke 1980, and Pierre 1994.

(2) Though formally a noun indicating a profession (§ 36), /mallala/ 'speaker, 1
it is functioning here as an adjective. (3) The form is Peal, not Afel: see §
64, n. 76. It is of ,:u* type: § 64. So is the following verb.

26* Chrestomathy

.CD^iacDona &t^Uk.o

• ••

r£±1r£ Aa. 4 r^xz rtbiCL>\x\ AtnautCl 10

cmcinN-i iJ^.Tjj r£»troo 11
.cd1cdclu9 i i i no

A=u» r^X.l »Xu*-lf^ A^A ^no 12

.aDu¥r£&±i 6 r^io4o r^jjClJt.l r£±ir£ uyi< Auocnci

r£x2*jt oyr< i<»t»ci 13

.c<^.1r<:i OGU-Sir^ A^.

7 tciur* % \'*\ 14

r<\r<3^ Aap »£CI~t£a

i^enjej icama&r^a IS

• ••

oixxu.ftsA 9 »lAaClr^o 16

• •

cdAujOsjcAi A^» rd*t»\ Ai.T^bo 17
cry^1r£=i ^x»~j:i v »\»r^X r6t» 11 A acn^9CL^ 7 .i ^lai^o 18

,r^1cncuA r^CULu ^9 O ■ I t.'q
^.t^jc oyW^ ^ocnA^ 13 f<do 20

rc=L^ rc^a^. ^.Xa-^.1
v\A*.l r^&iCiyum-iN ^ai^a ^ ^»^°fcCPQ

^oau» rdiA*r^l l4 r^1t» Cl^Acnrta 21

uy.l
uyxu.lt^a r^tAic* t*^ OCD >^» 23
AaJ^si.l ^a .T» caa AuA'a

^r£i»i'cii» 17 uv.t=l!l.1 pA^A.l rOl^O.TO

Odes of Solomon 27*

o^

CD

(4) This is an object complement, not a passive participle functioning as
attributive adjective, which should be rtf&u.u (in agreement with the noun
head in the st. emph.): lit. 'I left the folly in an on-the-earth-cast state. 1 (5)
This is a homonymous root V*Ax. 'to strip off, undress.' (6) Both are regular
verbs, Pe Ptc. f.sg.abs., with a consonantal Waw: rricifa rtixuL 'flourishing
and resplendent.' (7) The form is ambiguous: Af Pf 3f.pl. 'my eyes lit up' or
3m.sg. 'He illumined my eyes.' (8) Non-standard spelling for r^\ /(alia/
'dew.' (9) /awblan/ 'he transported me,' Af of Aa. + suf. (10) 'where (there is)
the wealth of the Lord's suavity': on />ayka d-/, see § 77. (11) The proclitic
/d-/ introduces direct speech in the manner of the Gk 6tl recitativum, and on
/tuvayhon 1-/, cf. Ps 1.1 /fuvaw lgavrad-/ 'Blessed is the man who ...' and Mt
5.3 /(uvayhon lmeskene bruh/ 'Blessed are the poor in spirit.' The following
/marya/ is vocative. (12) This being parallel, or in apposition to the preceding
*A*rA', one would have expected Jum\o. (13) This presentative particle
introduces a long nominal clause which ends with the second uOL.t in line
21: 'Behold, beautiful are all your labourers who do good works .../^vix
duly in the st. abs. as predicate (§71 e). (14) 'they divested themselves of
bitterness': though here 'bitterness' is primarily meant in its ethical, moral
sense, it is obviously part of the agricultural or horticultural imagery of this
passage, for its plural form /miare/ means 'bitter herbs.' So is to be understood
/bassimuja/ 'benevolence, joy (Gk xP^^tt^),' which is apparently a play
on /besma/ 'perfume' produced, of course, from various fragrant herbs. (15)
Here the syntagm </ma d-/ + Pf.> must refer to a past event: cf. § 81. (16)
/Sarkana/ 'remainder.' Difficult. Error for rdla^ 'desire, wish' or i^ii^.i 'thought,
design'? Cf. Gk&Xniia. (17) The diacritical dot below the Beth, not a rukkakha
sign, distinguishes the noun Aavda/ 'servant' from its homograph Avada/ Vork,
deed.' As a matter of fact, the main manuscript of this text, H, makes no use
of a quSSaya/rukkakha dot. (18) For the thought expressed in the second
hemistich, cf. Mt 26.13 (with rtii**a).

28* Chrestomathy

Ode 42

2 r<\ / >T c fc r<au-o »&a^*JL&ci 2

4 »\ ^-aju.i ^ojcoI 3 cuixjj r^X.i Auocnci 3

(> \ ^-uiM.i ^cucd Atal rtacnrta 4

6 >Bo.i1 ^poAik 0^20 5

10

.^ociaA ^.a.Tl.l ^A.r^X lO^cuAxDnf 7

,r£j&j duja jul. Alio .1 rOCLL^Cfyr^o 9
^a v » i*aL»m».l ^A*r^ n A^. »aCU» r£l^cn

Ataduur* ^arf 12 AuAAux>r* i<\ 10
.»1^» qj1 ^ar^ ^.lai^ r^Xo
Au a .1 direct »J&U» Acu«x 11

.cnA Audcn rfiteaci r<\jj 12
l4 .r<a»CLi> ain r^ocn Aur^.1 rOi^ cneajL AiAuua

: >ali* r£L»1a r<X\1a 13
.^o^la cil-iawrwA cuiajtr^ r^X.i A2^a

Odes of Solomon 29*

.o^u^o.i ^cucd »&a\ amenta IS

.U\AvoA ,0CL*LI OQL9.1 r<i^lA\ ^ JjAl&C) 17

.uya^. ^Lu jar^ ,ot&Au 18

.^ooAd Al^lx ^».i r£ir* 19

(1) The enclitic agrees with the immediately preceding fern. noun. On the
sense of the first two couplets, see Ode 27. The reference is to the posture of
Jesus on the cross. (2) Double entente: 'streched' and 'simple, plain/ (3) The
alternative pointing is /tfiSfcu/. (4) From this verse to the end Christ is
speaking. (5) 'had not comprehended me' (intellectually?). The participle is
passive in form only: see § 84. (6) /radofa/ 'pursuer, persecutor,' Pe nomen
agentis. (7) 'those who thought (ota» Pe) of me that I was alive,' where one
probably has to do with a caique of the Greek 8tl, which is not only a causal
conjunction, but also introduces an object clause. \±*d Pa 'to hope' takes
either j* or A, but not Ajl. This does not necessarily imply that our document
is a translation from a Greek original. (8) A centripetal Lamadh: see Text 3,
n. 4. (9) 'like the arm (/dra c a/) of the bridegroom' with a proleptic suffix.
(10) 'in the bridal pair's home': the preposition Beth is often understood in
local expressions. (11) The preposition retains the same force as in 7b, 8a, b.
(12) 'I was despised' (Ethpe of Af »l»i<): on Ethpe as reflexive-passive of Af,
see § 49. (13) The Lamadh is a direct object marker. (14) 'as much as there
was depth in it,' i.e. 'to its far end': on * r&u, see § 76. (15) 'have pity on
us,' Impv Pe of V^u* plus a suffix. The diacritical point ought to be above the
letter: /fronnayin/. (16) Vocalise /wa c ved/, Impv., not Pf. /wa c vad/. (17) 'our
saviour,' /paroqan/, a Pe nomen agentis. The clause is an identifying nominal
clause: 'You are our saviour': see § 107b.

30* Chrestomathy

18 •

Aur^ \>ia m OJr^ r^fr^u >Jl9.1 A\j«tt

.r£»aAAcn

(18) 'and they are mine': an independent possessive pronoun (§ 16) and the
copulaic use of Aur* (§ 109).

8. The Acts of Judas Thomas 1

icrA^ f<m\V ToAxtar^a r£

:r£*JLLo ^O-i^a-xo »j^\jj ta jon %»o yff}^^ »Aisaci r^»o^o
r£L^»r^ ^ocdAu-e.3 ^ol^rf aacn ci^a ,aCinN» la r^rcicnuci
en tea* r^tAirdaO cd^l^m.1 r^Ait \ «fc-i itAJ «£lcnLL» .Xu *jj.1
3 r^9Q^ rtftooouA G.TJcn :^o\\^nCl rtf&uaoaa ik^QQ ♦cdI.Ix
ai^jl» r^X.l .r^OCD t»r^ .1^ :AtndJ.7 r^CICD r£a^ r<\ci .r£u»Ajt
,r6t£Li rdJr* r^ta^l .rdlr^ t»~a:T A\,«* .r^tCDS r^Luj iOr^
rd^lAea ^Ac?3 l^Q •> 4 -aAr£.l i^lrf i^t^ r^O.XJcfiX Kll^.r^
rtf\ .cnA teir^O r£*AA.l rtouia «>*» cnA lU^r^ .r£tcicix» r<cico

.»l*1xx ,^t» 6 Au*a^.l 5 r£a^r£\.l .toil* .1A .r^OCD ouJ&^Am

rtacn r£-i.lAi» ^»Acd X^O ♦rdjy Air* r<\ Cl.UcnA .ICuAa
... ^sa fO^guAi.l r<lAif<a r£*o[.UCD] Xu r^t^i « X - T n< .i^.lCiaou

.TA ^t» t ci3u\AiO .oaA AaCU 9 rdl2acir* r^t^l r^ta^l c^iaui^
toil* n .^alAi.l Aui* f<ia i*t^ .mA t»r*Cl i<u1cir<a 10 o>^cii»
.u>A ^atr^.l p^tV^ ^.-Lli ^ bur* «t» cnA t»r* .^.r* chA
rdfun^.l ^Ifia^ oi^gLi. ^oo .r^sacir^Ail r£aoCi1 ^a cnA cii»cujCI
^9.1 r^t^l ^xucu la ^.CULi ♦rdlACD r^t^Jt Cla^iO .»CDCl».l

*

.TAG •> * r£aA» taJ.lO^t r^t^i ^ii'A .»A*.l f^lai r^baortfk

The Acts of Judas Thomas 3 1 *

14 .»\ uyjst CLLaU* .r^t^i ^=uj cnA t»r* .ocd »t» ^»i* r^TCiaou

Air^o .</y > *iy 16 r<ocnJ Au-a-.l r£u±*r< ^to rtfro .caA teorta
.»cna».i <h cucD r<\r^ :cd«l^ 17 Aojc r^X px» x* .t^i^i ^— ** AvaA

^nii\ cnjLA^jtr^O r^tacm* Atrta ^t» **^ ca ^ *£Ur^ rtocn -aaau
•>•> aacaLi. HflpJ.i rtfacD >lio .r<La\f<\ ,CDCUr<» 18 mrCT .TA r^t^t

(1) Wright 1871: 1, pp. imi — toad. (2) 'for a while. 1 (3) We may have here
an appellative meaning "twin" rather than the name Thomas, SlS^io? at Jn
14.21. See Klijn 1962: 158f. (4) /'allef/ Pa Impf. lsg. of ^\«. On the form
and syntax, see § 62 f and 98 c respectively. (5) The proclitic Dalath introduces
direct speech. (6) Simplified spelling for AJr* i<?^ 'you want.' (7) /mSaddar/,
Pa Ptc. pass., happening to be identical in form with its active form due to
the e > a rule (§ 6B). The periphrastic construction indicates "he was on a
mission" rather than "he had been sent." See § 84. (8) On this apparently
redundant f<ia^ see Jotton-Muraoka, § 131 b. (9) Another appositional
combination: 'professional carpenter.' (10) On the syntax, see § 106. (11)
The diacritical point below the Beth distinguishes the form as Peal ('to buy')
from the one below with a point above the Beth as Pael ('to sell'). (12)
cnA oouciuPa 'and he showed him him' where the direct object suffix attached
to the verb refers to Habban, and the suffix of the preposition, which is
proleptic (§ 112), to the following r6*cir*&A, the preposition of which is
equally a marker of direct object. Cf. 2Sam 15.25 mX »i*qui 'he showed me
it.' (13) Either Pe. '(the documents) were complete' or Pa. 'they completed
(the documents).' The suffix of ,moi^ir< means 'pertaining to him.' (14) 'he
has certainly sold you to me': on the syntax of the infinitive, see § 98 j. (15)
A centripetal Lamadh: see § 133 rf, but see also Joosten 1989. Cf. Gk f)a6xaCev
'he remained silent.' (16) This is a fully fledged verb, no copula: 'may your
will come true! 1 (17) As against the diacritical dot below the word, which
makes it Pf., a Participle seems to be more suitable: 'carrying nothing with
him ...' (circumstantial clause, § 106), but cf. GkKO|iiod|ievos t , an aorist ptc.
(Bonnet 1903:103). (18) Both this /masseq/ and /nasseq/ on the following
line are Afel forms of VjAj» (§61) where the dot above the Mem of the first
indicates an a vowel whereas that below the Semkath of the second an e
vowel.

32* Chrestomathy

»cn r€l» .r^tocnuA r<l^i ^=uj cdX t»r^ .Oaduo OjqAxx) .T2kO
r^Cltt^ r^.tOG3u cdA t»r^ ..Isa^.I Aur^ J^JXajj.I rtf&tCLL2*Or^
«&..ti r£L2* .r^t^i ^sjj cuX te>r* .r^i^l.1 CDXauL r<&aX^.l1r<0
.r^.lOCDu cdA t»r^ .r<Ai\»ffl^-i r£L2*o r^auiLsa XslaA.1 &Jr<

*

.rtsvcua r^&ucJ2L) rd3r£^=iO 19 .i<£At*iA r^ll-^O fOa^JL&X
rdlr* J^f* .i*t^ ^sjj cnX teirf ^.r^aA^iX rtfht*jaO r<X^*CDO

'dtMO.I A^S* .l<lt»X OOCD CUtxO *AuOCD r^Lsi f<L2*Or^ OJCD

CL2^ixx>.l r^sax^L .OOCD ^*\i1 Al» r£X-»cmsO .r6iOl ciiA &ocd
oocd ^»Ar<Li.o :i<A.tr£X ^».i oAujJ .ia .r^ictu^ uvol.i-uxA
21 t<Xo1.icD.io r^dioJCL&~.i i^Xd oocd o-*^u .c^li^.i^A ^Air<o

,CD rdl^D.l .tor<o r^.ioanu r^OCD Ar£x2*>0 .n^nd*-^x> r^teato
r^cfiXr^ u^ J^r^ .cdA ^it»r^ .r^LL»:ua r^iaxs Aur^.1 r^&o.lij
r^ttsi t-*-^ r^iiAsa .r<^J-»X2* r^.iaxsi pjactaAil uvcuiur^
r^O.ljj.1 rOcn r<XjOO 23 .cdX .scnu r^1n^\o 22 .cnX Aur^ r£&u.T*jj»
^i^XmX cnX ^«> — w r^ioln ^r^o .f^diaduc^a.l cicd ^cnA^.l

r£l^JX£* J^r^O .r^dia^LaL^A r<Aii<J JtJr^ Acl^.1 ^Olt^J.I
A^O .r<Au-».1» iJjaO r£»t^OJO .r^*ft<u »JLsO r^.TrL^O r^t^^-^O
cnA tebr* *.aCUD ^r^AssA rdi^jct K&rdJ t^X r^oAut^iX.l ant*
^•i^^oAulj Aurdn^a r^X.i ^u* .At* Atr£l .r^toaouA r^t^i ^=uj
CUiAJ^r<o 29 f<o^CLdL9 otx .l^O .^Lu ^r^Ain^r^l dur^t»Auo
.uy*jka>r^ rtfbjL~Ma r£iocnu ^.1 ocp .a&£a&un»X aX)r^ A*Ao
r£^O.l ^9.1 30 :r^JjXL^r^a.l uyf^ oocd ^ttajj cdlsi ^cnA^tO
uwsojp r<Z*ctuT< r^&^O.Ts CD tea r^t^i ^9luO .r*An< r£*-ltjjr^
.r^OCD TL^A^ r^X uyx> p.i» r<locnu .cuAtxr^o om>\ x^o .c^ocd
qbliA»A r^X .1A .r^A Au&r^ r^l£* .cdAioX.1 ^OJCD cnX ^tear^
p.1^9 A^s* .r<.locDu ^ocdA t»i^ :Aur< ii'st^ r^AuL»X r^Xo
AJ^9 ^r^o .r^A AuAvrf r£»duc£* ^Q r^X^r^^ ^ lAu^D.l ocd
.oocd ^.Ijo r^iol^.l A^^90 .CDJ-*a~ ^Ajtr<r.10 r<^A».1 t<nLj
^».1 OttJ^A .1^0 .Ann I r^xjits ^Qxn^D r^irO r^Xo a ^yi.1 ^>.1
hurt .oXilxO ^oiX oA^r^ ^lmo r<ux» J&r^ .0-»Autr^ .1AO

^OCDjbjJD.1.1 ^Opi±2A dur^O 31 .OOCD ^a UT*^ ^CDU^f^l ^OCDJlM

The Acts of Judas Thomas 33*

.ja^lr^ \-\o ,cdo1»jul)jiQ .r^GCD pAuj goul* 1 Al^-^oo
r<fcDr£t r<!LA^a .i^ocd pjtl rnnWo .r^ocn Tuao. »cncu. a lr^90
•> 32 i*qcd .T*jjr< cnif^a !<■ in.1 r£&t^o .i^cicd ^dlud qiJL*ta
r^t^Ac* ^ociiA^ Ajl .r£^£oa> Cl^a Avocd Aur^.l r^&tteat ^»X»cd
r^teat ggllsb A-iAo Aiocd r<*yun .r^.iocnu itaA ou^sa ."UO .oicicn

AcAD l<J.U |S«> .TAG .AvCCD r^L»t=U^ r^Alt»t ^.1 »CT> .OtOCD

r£^1r<9 33 Aa r^t* :Aj>A ,cna£r^ 71* 1r* r^\ r^tocnu .0x12a Aj^A
Al*.CI CDX»r£ 30* tr^ 34 .i^AiCiXLx .^cucd ^2* .Ijj r^kr^O .r^CCD trfcu
uOi XiClajeJ icnAr^ .cnA t»r^o qaa tu ^>*1 r^lCiaou .»cixadusa ggl2l&
iOL3 CDdtt».l& r^cuii r£»A^. ^.1 rOaia ..Ta^lx.! f^n\%i r£lCD

(19) /qeqne wnire wmassase wliqe lfantone (Lat. pontones) w<??? lelfe/
'ploughs and yokes and goads and oars for ferry-boats, and ... for ships. 1 (20)
/wavfcjSfe nafSata wnawse (Gk vcufc) whaykle wvirip dmalke/ 'with stones,
tomb-stones and shrines and palaces and fortresses of kings.' (21) /qala
d{£pponwata (oujx<(>a)vta) wadhedrole (i&pauXis)/ 'the sound of pipes and
water-organs.' (22) A compound sentence: see § 1 13. (23) The context indicates
the first Lamadh as marker of indirect object and the second as that of direct
object. A pronominal direct object of a participle is always indicated by
means of Lamadh: § 97 d. (24) The suffix is proleptic, anticipating the
following r^!o&x». (25) On the syntagm A A»\,n of perfective force, see §
84. (26) The diacritical point distinguishes the word /malka/ from rdA*»
/melkiV 'advice, counsel.' (27) 'so that we may not get a bad report': the verb
is an impersonal passive, lit. 'will be heard': see § 79. (28) The proclitic
Dalath is weakly causal. (29) 'When they checked in at an inn.' The verb
primarily means 'to loosen': its specific meaning here maybe had to do with
the notion of a passenger loosening his donkey or horse at the end of a day's
journey. The meaning "to begin" in Pa is also perhaps derived from the
notion of releasing tension, letting go of. (30) On the syntax of the proclitic
Dalath, see § 100. (31) 'there (were) some of them who ...,' 'some of them
anointed ...' (32) A passive participle with active meaning: § 84. (33) ro.u
Aeddana/ is expected: 'all the while.' Or perhaps it means 'entirely,' i.e. 'solely.'
04) pAoox /Saqawaja/, pi. of r^ai 'cup-bearer,' Pe ptc., though Af in meaning.
Cf. n£lW 'physician' (pi. r^W), though the verb 'to heal* is Pa, >j»r* Aassi/.
Likewise 'to pour drink' is Af . »ax^.

34* Chrestomathy

r^CLftt .r^lcDGJ 'Alia ,Av.l_^ .r^.TCD r^t*-»M b9U.1 r^.TOODL.
A^a Aia^MG rtr<M .oioui ^\ 1a ^f^ «*A ^*»* t<aA».i

^GCKUjut ^lam-Id lit a^.l ^aJS*.! (<uaA\ CTU-XOaA — \ .ISLL.

G0LK«*ta rtf&LKOjO .AuAA ,CD0¥O2»9LlA ^\0 rCs\zx> f*ti CtiL£*ta

.ml rtrda jjL*Av_a oxsao^ .r<A».i2a cnuA^ta r^io.Tu .r£»*j»
^i niy o f*ta:t iCDCUiAx! txrLi>t& .r^t^ar* oxa 35 ^uait& Aa.1
.r£icn2k AkL^O 3DL*t»:t .r^aLlAi >Ar<? cnmA .^iail oxa ^»V&o
CD-..VI* .,CD^j.a r£^*.TD r<3L*.Tlr*.T ^.^^l.i ^\¥.1 cdA.id
r^Lt^ax.l r£^t& cndi^a^ VmjLO .jl^j nd*_u.i r^1&r<\ ^>cru&1&
r£5*t*-a 31 .r*\*xi rtlUDlca.! rdu*1o .1*cdj cdjgjJ^ Au_=i .,!&£
^» .^imaM Agj^A r^taxoo r*&0-LM-»CDG r^aCLu .^o&ls* cdg^j
ff)ii »itOj£ .^ftOLs^o r^ducGxia CD-ft-ltldl .r^ttjt uy*j^M Cl^A
r^Auc^.To cD&i»nTOJto '.Au^at ^cnA.i ^ocnA^ 39 .oiX 38 ^»t».ljj
^•IjljjO .r<L*jj cn.jkM.TD ^t t^t** .^AA^o» r6iaOx. cd-*2*.td
^OOOXJO ^gIcdllj ciujLadJLa fllh CUCDO .rtbirCM ^celjAlu^
f<uacixa ^oociuo .r^taJL r<X ^»«jA * ^oA^A.l cdmjl r^&tCLiX^aa
r^l.TuXu cnAff .r^oj&oaa ^oocnjci ^ ~ - » ^ r£ou»\t\ ^cnAji mA.i
^OCDl^D.l rOjaClxa ^CL^l^-^Auo r^tcDGJ iJCClaA ^OxaAjO .^Ardx
CDCUia GtcnJG .r£»r<^ cdIcdgj oAaxi.l .r£*jj r<ard flk CLuaJLSO

.cnA AuA podiM ^p9 42 r^j»CLai<i .ouaojIcLa ^ oAao.i ^ocdIm.i

Gun TO . ^OODuJAutA ^»CD~£*G ^OCdAm.I .r£aJj ^9 CU^utr^Cl
r£uGtA CLft.TOr^O ^.cn-LM.l r<*.Tui» r^taAo A^.l r^to r£ar£\
.^UCD ^OcigA^ .r<&t*^*t r^.TCD 45 r^GCD t2*l .TAG <*CD^SLXJJ

.cnA .°AnAucr^ cdjg^t oocd ^» vuG .ciocd ^»1iajj cna cp&oA.l
Gcp.l A^» .r^GCD tor^ r<i» oocd y *«*»- rt\ ^».i 47 a_»x»
^•.1 ^to'» .OOCD ^t^..T*' r<A «£UCDG .r^OCD tMr* ^Aur^ta-i.
r^t^jj ciiao Aocd r^utaj^.l A\j«* Agcd n£^»x. p.T^oA^
cma jaodi Aocd retell r^Jlur^Xo cd^ioA ^» dL^pt .T^o *>diocD
•Ai^ .CDlAkr^ la a r^1ni\\.7 oyr^ iiOCD CD^iajjr^o Aocd r^tjuj
X^O .^dAv oocd Aur^.l i^ojcd ^OCdAa ^» f^OCD Ia^JL cdo uia
AiOCD i<lvato r^\o 49 .cnAjaCLoA cdA dLadu '.Al^dAjc rtbi*!zi\
r^OCD 1r<u r^Xo >cdo i » V r^OCD p-.ti*> r<\ ^».i ocp .oli^d ox*_L»_kl

The Acts of Judas Thomas 35*

*a tJLAJO pom x*. .r^OCD 1r<u r£*.1r£a Aa r<\r< .jl:
.rC^so (^9J.l r£i*-*A rtacn AujJ cicd ^..1 t/tnT. •> r^a^aflt) Au*=i
•It^cicd cixam£ 50a ^D.iCD p.icno cnta&a r£»1r^ ^A\ ,1ooucr^o
Xu ^ft.t rda\^ .OOCD ^i\inT. »cna2*:tcn ^ Xu Xu r ^nV^s ^»X»cr>
.r<ocD ^»* r^.ioaGu A^. 50*11^.1 ten :i <j »«a u:t cnx»r< .r&nZkOrt
X^o .ooi^aAi ^ooaA^ cdoi^uj X^O ## caA-2Lr^ r^^^fp Al^»o

52 cdl9CI .r6j3x CiaiA l»r^.l p.T» Aur^tsL*. cp& \*^t. t*-^

(35) /teSbhan/, f.pl.abs. of rdKuoufe 'praise.' (36) Lit. 'her neck is steps steps,'
consists of several layers. On the distributive force of the repetition of a noun
in the st. abs., see § 71 a. (37) The form must be vocalised as either /mle/, an
adj., or /male/, a Pe ptc. The diacritics are striking. (38) On the force of the
passive participle, see § 84. (39) The diacritics are peculiar here, too: see n.
37 above. (40) r^w /foayye/ the living.' (41) The diacritical dot indicates a Pe
form, /nenhrun/ 'they will light up' (intr.) as against Af ^tauJ /nanhrun/
'they will illumine' (tr.). (42) = Gk dTrovcrla 'waste, excrement,' hence the
food is wholly consumed? (43) /Satyayhon/ 'its drinkers.' The possessive
suffix is plural, referring to r£w, a plurale tantum. (44) 'who is from Him': on
the syntax of the proclitic, see § 91 h. 3. (45) The diacritic point over the
Mem indicates a periphrastic progressive past tense, 'while he was singing,'
which also agrees with the tense of the main verb (oAro ^.tiu 'they were
staring at him'), hence not 'when he had sung' (= /zmar wa/). (46) The
preposition indicates an affected entity. (47) A structure similar to Heb.
wo© vb piDcp 'comprehend they did not': see § 98 j. (48) Adverbial: 'in Heb-
rew.' See § 47. (48a) On the .1, see § 100. (49) Aquvleh/ 'opposite him.' On
the alternation between /luqval-/ and /lquvl-/, see § 46. (50) See n. 33 above.
(50a) 'tore him up limb by limb': on the repeated st. abs., see § 71a. (51) 'the
hand was found to be of the cup-bearer,' lit. 'the hand was found that it was
of the cup-bearer.' The first Dalath of r^iai.™ introduces a substantival clause,
a clausal complement of &j^£xi*, and the concluding ,co is the subject of the
embedded nominal clause with r<*n*:i 'of the cup-bearer,' and not of Au^ii*!*.
(52) On the force of the proleptic pronoun, see § 112 a.

36* Chrestomathy

^OCTLL»o .r£aX^ oit^ n£l^r<f «^Au u* rfcDO .f<aA^ cdA t**\
.TA ^».i r^aAs* .oocd v » i^wucosp r<\ ^oaxLS^a .r^to'i\ ojaucd
•»la. ^r^Ai .rtf.iatDuA cnA teir^o rtfAir* ( ^i& i<jcd 53 t<»\j
rOr^ ^oAea r£i»o^o .»\ *cd r^Au.Tjuuu.l A^sa .,Atl3 A^. r<\la
r^OCD ,UjAtr^ A-^X-i* r<X.i A^sa .cn£a_*. AtrO.l r<a~ r<\o .aaA
Aun\ cnAaQr^ t^li^m ^..l r^A^b •jT^I&r* oaxa „,!» cnA
55 r£*Cl\ .,*» .r^iACD t»r£jo r<AJj:t i^ocd »1lxo ,f^JQl\
AuaO .can v » l^uox^)! ^A-*r<.l r<l ts.irao r^.lCDO .tCDO.laL&l
.r<\iu^.l r<oot&o :r£i^JX£a.l r<taJBO :rt^\r<l r<uijo r£too^
r£ootAO f<2aAi!:t rdJ-*-ui*> .r^AtCD^t^ r^Aiv Vl'.l r<L).ad»f<2ao

Aut* t^^Q 56 ^Al^.1 ^A»r^ Alii* ^..li.l cicd Alii* .r^Auta.l

r<X».l n*i»\\^3Q yi^ r^ir^l.l 57 r£k»Ojj» cod Aui* .^»cnA

^OaiA^ uyru'r^Q .r^n^ r£lA»r^T golsO~J OCD Aur^ .r^Att»Au9D

Acao uvb.xsLsL ^oaA^La 59 Aujn^.i cicd Aur* .oocd 58 "-" '

f<A*jj OCD Aur^ .r£*^a.TO r£r-l1_aA AulsAo i<ui t** Auocdo
CDU9 Aujxl&.i :,od Ojar^.i ouuu_io cdj.»j3~o oliimq :cdAl»^jjO
^•fAls ^Aur^ .TuO .uvAiO.lOn \ n cixa AuA^l i^uaCtia

61 .uy^»vu u^A-^. otzuaoo y\m^ uyr^ Au wuAir^o .^»cnca£
rduaOJL Al»OjjO (OllCU A.*, ii » 1 nr>.l Alii* r^utal

• • •

r^XfjaA >CDuAuSkua> .x*k ^OJLir^ 71^. uyjol 62 A*t^£ln uvAtOcnAr^t
v > ■ tt.i ^»A*f<\o cu-uo r^Au^aA uv\nn Autoo :cdAiowui» ^a
OCD Auf< .cr\Aio^A»j9 i<jAita* ^ocnA Ai^Asa .yyi ^fttaocao
OCD Aur^l A^2* .r<»\V r£sao1 ^» Art.lAucrta i^urf Auocp.l
Aur^ *«-—». .uyjoAz.l t<1^\y^O i<*jj t<hn^ .TsL^.At.1 i^t*w

oyxu "

jjl^jlt* i<\ ^lur^o :u\AtocDAr^ Au.oAi.1 ^ocnA^

rdl^rtf u>^9OJJ0 A_*. 730HJ.1 r^Xo .crvAioal.l c<ln^\ t^a^oA
AuiAlAO cdAiIjjA r^^.l^ Au^»o Ao>t\ cr^ AiAuuo 63 .uyAur*
K!^90tA r^ular^ ^OcdA Autl.lO .CD > T>nit Auix»f<0 cd^-i.YAi
r<2*uAil A^ u>-ii^ r^Jr^ r<jLa |l2^ ^»r^ .crvAiocnAr^.l oi^oinn
pxoo ^ocdA xa^.Ai ^ocnA 1.x^».l Aur^ ^..li.T p.T^o.l . ^"A 03

The Acts of Judas Thomas 37*

*^^^. *^^«^. *^^»^. ^^^^. ^^^^^

&UJ9 ^» ^on «k 1 .1 r^ocn ocu-£kro f<UiTCU^ ^.1 rdsA» .Ji&JCl

^Dr^D.l r^.icicnu.i cndicua.la .^toA r^OCD r^vuO .CD&ClA 6 ViuJ

^cta^J.l rdyu\ \\ _ocnA r^cicn atar^o .rOttt^s .*» col r^ocn
.r^aJi.! t<sx>cu ^oAur^ ^»cicr> .r<Air<f- rtf&iCL&dtax. rtficn ^a ^oiui^

(53) The diacritical point indicates Aebba/ 'report 1 as distinct from f<-%\ /Java/
•good. 1 (54) /taf 'Come!', of the irregular verb rA*r: § 67. (55) This is the first
of a series of agent nouns: /lawy^ 'companion' (Pe ptc), /hadya/ 'guide'
(ditto), /ngabbiana/ 'leader' (Pa nom. agentis), /paroqa/ 'deliverer' (Pe nom.
agentis), /masyana/ 'healer' (Pa nom. agentis from />assi/), /mahyaniV 'life-giver'
(Af nom. agentis from Aahhi/). See § 51. (56) 'things to come': on the use of
the f. pi. as neuter, see § 69. (57) Another series of agent nouns: /ml)Swyana/
'discloser' (Pa nom. agentis), /mgalyana/ 'revealer' (ditto), /na$ov3/ 'planter'
(Pe nom. agentis). (58) The diacritical dot over the first letter indicates Avade/
'the works,' and not Aavde/ 'the servants.' (59) /dajtset/ Tow are the one who
is hidden ...' &**** is a short-hand for &Jr* ran*. (60) /glet/ 'you are revealed':
on the form, see the preceding note. (61) /tfizyayik/ 'those who saw you'
from /frazya/, a substantivised participle. (62) For the standard &ci*a^
/naggiruj/ with an unusual vowel letter Alaf. If authentic, one possibly has to
do with an alternative, synonymous form. (63) 'as you are.' The particle Aur*
is here a mere copula: see § 109. (64) Ethpe Pf. of .-u** 'to shut': see § 62 e.
(65) /nayte/ 'he shall bring,' Af Impf. of r&r*: § 67. (66) A Pf. with the force
of the present tense: § 81. (67) The proclitic introduces an antecedentless
relative clause: 'what my brother spoke ...' (68) /haSSe ksayya waglayya/
'hidden and manifest sufferings.' The last two are the st. emph. pi. of /kse/
and /gle/ respectively: on the ending, see § 21.

38* Chrestomathy

r^AiflL*.

*acnA .Tut<r r^t^^ ta.l or< ,^ocni\\ Asa rr^A^.i or* 71 . ih oaaA
Qt^ .. ^ujIxp ^ooau y^>>\u ,j^a ^ocn>\ \ Aj&j r£^L9>.i at*

Oi< .r^AiOl % »n Or* r<AiCL*_l is Or^ .r^AiOnl^i Or* r*ta^s

,oAur* ^>niAuL»

.r*cnAr*\ iur^^.l ^T^i ^ot^AiO A ^onuA^ii^ ^ r*\r*
r*X r^JU^JO r*»OS*i ^2* .Tjj.1 ^CUOD .r£*jj r*» In ^CLaA

OOCIU

r*Au^A. rdlO r*<k3- r*Vl _oAuocno _ocnA .atn

74 tAr5i-aL jola. ^.^ojlw&Aio .i<hnT^ cdjs ^ocp&o .r<11jc.i
4b tM .Ua OOcd cuxu-S^&r* r<yu\V ^».l ^OJob •> •> r*JOl\\
Aa.O .r^AiO-Lu- ^5* OOcd oot£&r*0 l^cn t ^ 1 cnA 0£oAjcr*0
itOcnA t»r*o ^cn&oA ^» haj ^1»o .. 75 ocn^r* ^cnAu^o.i

Xm^ .1A ^..1 f<lala •> -h OAl». , l ctAo-i*^ -K CL*A\ClA r*OCp&
juk^Jtr^o .r*&iA^O r£)duj *pxn A-L.r*a .r^to^iA 76 r*\» r£aA» p.ub
r^AtA^.I cn.» ^r? 77 ^A^O . .Tjj A-inoA Xu . v »-i»Al» .ta ih CUr*
ci3L»r* cnA r*t»r* -^^ r*Ocn jjl»~j& rdJ^ui *3r^O .r*=iAuo
»cd oyir* r*\r* .,&A\cr>L=s r*\o Aioj^cd i^Laudu r*L2* .r^^tA^A
Jar*o .^A Li^ r*Ai»cL.l r£o&0-*.0 r*r£»^x> r£ua\ r*cn.l
^r^Aar^O :>£iAj*j3 AvclVi r*r£»^x> ^aCLu A^2* t»r* (DOar^
dur*t»tx. .cnA i<bif^o i*&Aa Au-*»o * 81 ,Au^jjAi» cu-£kjjta*
r^CUDr*.! r*Jr* r£*AJ£* ,t£*Ao r*r£»^» 82 r*Jr* r£aOAi9 »»r*
i*X r£iAuA r*tor*o .r*»\\ rOcna cnja 83 Aut^1t<r.l r*aOjj r£iciia

r*Jr* r*»oui&L30 85 r<\.10 .r*»AA r£icna A • VuA*r*.l ^r^lAruAw

Kl» oilier r^X.fO .cnA jujl&r^ ^i» r^di^cnri.l r^XajL.l A^M

Kli*^A.10 AlAL2k ^s r<JjX r<» 1 Vft.T f<r^l ^oA\.l Ao^» .r£lr<

87 rfAi10aJL i<.1CD r^dio.ljj.1 rtoao^a.l ^\zt> rdir^ r^.-tjjO rOr^

f<\suj.l rCicn r^iai 88 A ^aJC^r^lO .cna ^LK^utKT i<X

The Acts of Judas Thomas 39*

(69) 'those whose end is a bitter distress': the resumptive pronoun, /hannon/,
refers to all the troubles just mentioned, but not /bnayya/. An enclitic subject
often slips in as here (,«): see § 105. (70) Read t<*la with Gk: the proximity
of the word to ^cuco, mentioned in the preceding note, seems to have led to
this error. (71) A compound sentence with rt*la ... r<r^oA> 'many of the
children' as topic and the rest as comment ('a lot of pain befalls them').
i^rQsfio) < * rtri^ptt>: § 6 K. (72) The proclitic Dalath here is probably
somewhat akin to that which introduces direct speech: 'you would be hoping
(asking yourselves) when you could be witnessing ...' (73) The diacritical dot
indicates /tejmnon/ 'you will be numbered,' an Ethpe as distinct from an
Ethpa, /tejmannon/ 'you will be appointed.' (74) 'those who are admitted to
the wedding feast': a Pe ptc. m.pl.st.cst. of VAi^ 'to enter.' On the st. est.
followed by a prepositional phrase, see § 96 b. (75) Aaggah/ 'they spent the
night,' Af of Vcn^. (76) /qaddem ... mla/ 'he set (lit: filled) the table early':
on the asyndetic structure, see § 98 g. (77) /galyan/ 'uncovered, exposed,' a
Pe pass. ptc. f.pl.abs. of /gle/. (78) Very occasionally the preposition Lamadh
may replace a st. est. or a Dalath connection. (79) = ,&!r? r^a* &*'. Similarly
the following ,&£cna 'you are ashamed.' (80) j&r*ci = _&r*. (81) Shorthand for
•AJi* r£*AjAs*: see note 79 above. On the syntax of the infinitive, see § 98 j.
(82) On the intervening enclitic, see § 104 end. (83) fttrgStt/ 'I feel,' a Pf.
with the sense of the present tense, common with stative verbs: § 81. The
following ens is proleptic, anticipating i<*JA r£ima: § 112 a. (84) 'incorruptible
bridegroom,' an Ethpa nomen agentis (t<£L±»&2») used as a plain adjective: §
51. (85) 'That I am not veiled is because ...' (86) Error for ^ ? (87) 'this
transient joy': rdiidai. , a Pe nom. agentis functioning as an adjective. See n.
84 above. (88) The preposition Lamadh is unlikely to mark the agent of a
passive construction, but rather a kind of dative of interest: 'it has become
contemptible to me.' (89) /Sale/ 'troubles, hassles' ? (90) /'fezdawgetf, Ethpa
of^fki (Gr Cvy6f, C^Oyo?), with partial assimilation (§ 6M). (91) /halta/ <
/bad£/: § 6M.

40* Chrestomathy

^ ,0*1.1 ocd :yi\ \\ >a f^cicn 1&^£*.i rdcnlci* ^9 >xota:t
rtb&CLSiZ* ^» iJj^a.l ocd 92 .,Aur*.i ntoLa Auc^lrfa .ciu^j
^»AcnAo .VJ-o-La JLa-^.i ^*Acd ^sa.t ocd ., i\,tclx r*holAu2o\o
:A*.t ^OtO-^tA r<*a.x^ ^jcoAutnf.l ocd .*J-.CUtn^ *Jaj*> r&X
A* ocd .i^=ir^.i *as* ,cdo20jj1 Xxtrt r&x ocd 93 *+\j*™ * i^dalAl
.1A.T OCD .XbJ*r<r »J^9 A*! r^.lO .»J^OjJ iJEJ^J 1^13^ r*Ai*
jl*^1 r<\ rdir* .t&.l ooi .,1 \n ocp qoA Auocd a..«u i^X i^ii*
rtfXo .CJDL9 Auc^lKT r^xcD.l ocd .,&oA ^jcoAucr^ ocp .ma Auocd
t»t* p.T» j^l ocd .r£jr< A..ti f^X.l 3D.1» ^teaK*! r£li* rt-zn
t*^ 95 ocd cmaOuj A^» .-p\x*r? r^X »cdoA^. r^autea r£li<
.A yir. f<^\*A r^iAat ^90 rOAui ^» ^Acd .TAO .rOr* jjt»£*
r^&J-A.lMa A^\ CUDCLa .i^ocd t»r< »CDOa»%nAo .ja.TJap »CDO&ii
iX.nd=j rdlr^.1 rr^xtu ocd r^1n\\ ,A %ib^ o^t^&rto .ail^
.r^X^J.l cdA dttear^ 97 r^.l^ Aul*j3 i^ta Ajlo : ,&t^aA mb\±r<
"oAlrtfo .cnA 98 A&r^ Ar£xJ.i Aoa .>X ,cncu^u_ia ciuj&jli.i i<ta^
.cnA r^SocD «ou*.l A^» iCDOjLi^jtr^ r^\o .cdA ^La OOCD ^a^t^Ac*
.TA r<&teat |CdA CDOAi^Jcrto .ciia rtacD r^ti.l f<oAtOJ^ ClAtr^O
p.T» cdA CLm-±&xt< x*a .aimjL. CDla.l r^.l Aa. :n£*-^=iO i<aAu
&Xtr^ Atnoo .t<*1CD i<u1j i\ Aui^jtr^ .r*t»i*o AL.Tjj .i^ocd.1
.rtrd^D rCuax Aiocd r^'toLiL .^0X50^0 .f<s*LftA-^ ^OJCD &10A
r^o.TA .OOCD Ovi«\ r&r£t rtr^cisn jar< r^aAsol .Ar* O.l^flA&O
oAtn^O :i<)uj.1» O.TJCdjs 100 r<muAjA r£a^ r^OCD «a*£*&utr£l

.cd^l^. o^Audtr^o cd&oA

(92) 'I perceived what I am, in what state I am. 1 (93) To be corrected to
t<\fnrrt (94) te»r<, Pe. Impf. lsg., complementing the preceding r^s /ma$e/
'I can.' (95) A focusing enclitic: 'it is because of his love that I do venture.'
See § 110. (96) oiL* Aiytaw/ 'Bring,' Af Impv. m.pl. of k&*. (97) /bi&l
gadda/ 'ill-fortuned': on the st. est. of adjectives, see § 96 b. (98) ^ettel/ 'I
shall give': see § 67. (99) On the asyndesis, see § 98 g. (100) Most likely a
preterital transform of the perfective syntagmA A»\,n (§ 84): 'in the end the
apostle heard the news in India' rather than 'news was heard of the apostle
(being) in the realm of India' (Wright 1871: II 159). On hearing the news
Thomas sent for them.

Aphraates on monks 41*

9.Aphraates f s sixth demonstration: On monks 1

.CD&clAan2*A »cd r£*ax.ci .rO t»r^.l r^dA^a »cd r£*Aa CI
AtcA ^l^rt Ji± v >n\ AcuxxJO .r£uat r£iaia ^-Uc ^a t*JL&Ll.l
r^9.1 .r^Au-a.l CD to r^&rdl i<>\t, ^w r^aA.1 ,t<**r\T\ rtfcnAr^
Acl^J.1 ,r<tu-iT. rOcWl cd.X^O t^J .r<diCltj»J^9 ^t^ t 1 r^cVr^I
auttcif<\ jaaJEU.i .^i.i^'W f<tiT^ ii^i .cnjcn\\ m*n\
.r^-^A r^a t<u^ni r£u1cii<\ .^iar£\ r^tat .iAlslJ .r^cVaxua
.^oAlx».1 r^dui) jlsAj.1 .^or^- cdAj* ^l» r^.UUO iiNtio
r£L*2*ir< r^oau .r^t»T < s r^lii r^toAu.l ^\in.l rdftmata t^t&J
.r^XcL^ ^0 ^aX r^.TJ .r^Jjo AuaI f*tAir* Ins 1.1 .r^cVoA-ri
jnulJ.l ..auAL^.l </yr^ r£i»jj¥» r^Clcnu .CDta»f<9 r^*t\ rtunx
-*»- ~**\ rdurt r^toAu.l . ^1^-a rtoAx. r^ociu .r^cnAr^ ^a\ %
r^ociu .cd&cl&As* 1ocV-a ^a ,s nmi.i .r^cXcU-^A t<i ^«C r^cicnu
^9 ^.1% i<*.TJ .r£»CuA r^AAcL&£* r^OClU i^X.l .f<1lx.l n£iA»

f^.l .r£*.Ox. Aa. v li in yxjLtXLX 6 /i6aa Xu r^irda A&J.1 .rdaCL*
f<v-iAn.l .r^t£L.r<\ rdJt^o rtacnj .t<\\^p r<uCl ^a jl^ t&Au

•I^l^j.1 rtfk*J^t2* ^ ^auo <v i > 1 n cnA& ^aU .cm*sajuA ^t»X

Iojuxls onma&JC) jjAlSL) ^tr£t rdsa.i .i/i^ti ^»ujx) p-aJ&J

12 ^ - 11 10 . 9 -_ « . \

(1) Wright 1869 -v - .uo: n**u* aita uriucuA. Cf. also Parisot 1894:
239-2S4. r&oLo ta 'son of covenant,' i.e. covenanted person, monk who has
taken a vow to religious life. (2) The Waw is the sixth letter of the Syriac
alphabet. (3) Pa inf. with an object suf. 3f.sg. (4) The Dalath introduces a
direct speech (§ 98 e, i), following rdf fe*r£ 'I pronounce.' 'so that, when he
comes, he will find us vigilant': the initial Dalath introduces a purpose clause
with an Impf. (§ 82 end) and * i<s» with a Pf . a temporal clause, l^et us

wake up from our sleep,' which is a quotation from Rom 13.11, is also the
first of a very long series of exhortations, all Impfs. in the 1st person plural.
(5) 'the appointed time (of arrival)' with a proleptic suffix. The Waw is no

conjunction. (6) /bad bama/ 'a hundredfold.' Cf. BA nioti in 'sevenfold.' (7)
Cf. 2Tim 2.21. (8) On the syntax, see note 4 above. (9) Cf. Mt 25.36. (10)
'in order that he would call us.' (11) 'at his right-hand side.' (12) 'Let us hate
ourselves': on the reflexive force of -jaj, see § 12 a.

42* Chrestomathy

tn*J , X M^t< Ala. yAkjLrta .^»jj1 cicd.i oyr^ .t^u^x^A ^Lutio
i^lXjl ^0 r^ciau .^Cii.^ cells* A-ini.i .i<Ujuj09.i cmxitX
K^i^** r^ocru .cnLLsa r^pCD r<A r^uujtso.l oyi^ .r£*t^cu
.CDAucMJt&ta rdl^irtf r^ciciu .r^Jj.l r<^1r^ '^tCLl.! .r^ou^olo
Aojloi.1 .r^cXcu^Xs cdcVoA~ r<X~J .r^L».xo.l rOjixsoa ^xsoxj.l
jarf rO^iCD.l .OXXAA9 rd&cVajc r^oau .racist r^t» p.Tfl

^"^ to »

CL1MO .chub r<Ar^.l r<2*CU 1^ OCD Ajjj.1 .rf&r&t r^t\o1

.TaCiaJO .CTDV\Cl1 ^Lft^OjjCI COO ^f^ .OOlA tn^iZD} Ai2L909

Ann I .^ocit£.i cn&tsu&.i f<aL»a!^ .r<y»-i AnnoX r^l^jao jsunj
^l» in l l .r^alOL^O r^cVocuj otQ.U.l .ndl^Actx. flk t» ^»
^a ^n^i r<X r^LJja~ .r^un^ci r<&s*jj ciiA^ 30^. .r^t^il
r^aAu.l .r^^VN r^ociu r^X .r<taXf<X ens ^Lulr^ ^A~£*.l .^ocUSfc
*J^* ^^nAu.l .r^StT's r*\Vn r^ocnj .rOaoo^Ll.l cncV^ClA ^»
.r^t*Au r^t^f< r^Nni.i .r^^cu.l cntacu Aclqjlj .r<*-5o5iD 50^.
.a^J&J .cnsat^A 22 ^t\r< <k t» rtfcn.l .r^X^ya r<XiLa rtfoau i^X
r^Ciau .r^Hjt.i r£»tA cuacn.i .0120!^ 0^3 KfiAtt^ uyr<
r£iuu1 r^aau .r£»tA ^» cn±2* ln-^Au r^X.l .n^ckii^ r£i£ci^

^X r^lo-i kA »<3f^ ^te.f en i °k\cL» ^» r^r£»^mX iAulJCI

^ftj^OXft ^L.t .^X Jk_X» r^X aeJr^ .1A .^Lu ^..I^jjp^ ^D.IS* AcL2t .^
.^oolda ^^lauao ^n r^.TjjJ.l ^JL^A^a .^ama r^XuJ .^»i<*2^jb

AM

.r^l*. 1 ! oU^a ^»3f^ ^*-> t^X*t . liiilfl Aur^J-^ ^slAJ ^O.U

J3XXU.1 .durd^^jj r^ujl Ar<LxJ .cua Acl^JQ ^oxo jj^^u.I
Ann 1.1 .cd^clo-».7 to cd^cl&Aso i<inJ .^X r<L^a^L^9.l r^3L^

Aphraates on monks 43*

rtoalA.

•CDCUUJJ.I .p^Ixj </yi< v » «fc^ ?l» ti .rdL\^i».T r<u»yA r^UiJ.l

^\^\J i r^lrda .r&A»A rdlalOD .lAi^-l .,cdoAui*:i t* ***V^

OlA^ A^. ^LMUCDJ.l .OUCL9CD1 cu-^.Ta l^J .rtf&tciA~a r^DO-

CeA ^-«»— »- r*A .CIU CL9CD 1=1 A^lM.l 1-^\ r<i-» I* .CD i^ Au-3

.i^lxj -»**>i\\ cn^x^ Aa.^J.1 rOAuj.i cnAo A\o-j .rOtn ,\ni
r£xCLaA jlsAj .rtbiCWuz* <tiua>1cif<A jdclAJO cnAaAiA r6-COOl

n£xCL=A 3 2 -»— \ r^X.i ^9 3l ^^*^i r<£s^ix» rtaaua r£x*.TO
^9 Ar^&ULSa.l ^9 .r£»ts n^CUtxA aaA ^ol2£* r^tClAixm

33 i^1od pjjl.l ^9 .f^iuAXiA aaA 71%^ r<X r*&aAut»

(13) An Ethpe, which is in this case an Eth- form of Afel: § 49. The meaning
is possibly reflexive, 'he gave himself up/ rather than passive 'he was delivered
up, betrayed.' Cf. Eph 5.2, which is alluded to here: "just as Christ also
loved us (^aurO and gave himself up for our sake Q£r* A*: auL^' ^4*^)."

(14) / c al 'appayin/ 'for our sake.' (15) /nawrtan/ 'he would allow us to inherit':
Af Impf. of bi\*. (16) /tef c ol/, Pe of V Al^ . The subject is cd^cA^ 'his prayer,'
i.e. 'directed to him.' (17) re&> st. est. of r&& (historically of rd^A). (18)
'the day on which it [= the wrath] comes.' (19) Verb complementation by
means of a participle: § 98 d. (20) />aktanu wbammim/ 'vehement and intense.'
(21) /subyaja/, pi. of kAL**^ 'malediction.' (22) Aagran/ 'he hired us.' (23)
Proleptic, anticipating the following re**** ^» (§ 112 a). (24) 'so that our
fragrance would waft to those around us': prep. A + independent relative
pronoun * + prep. *&*. 'around': on the form, cf. § 46. (25) 'Let us call
(nobody) father for ourselves, i.e. our father, on earth.' Cf. Mt 23.9. (26)
'those who know us are many': ^u.i 'our' is emphatic and coterminous with
the suffix of ^oiii 'those who know us,' a Pe nomen actionis. (27) 'amongst,'

a preposition. (28) 'Let us think of that which is above.' (29) ti^i /nettar/, Pe

Impf. lpl. of V*V . (30) A^ 'to enter,' Pe Inf. of V Al^. (31) 'at the head of

the chosen (guests)': r^ai\ /gvayya/, Pe Ptc. pass. pi. of Vr6a\. (32) Here
begins a long series of generalising pronouncements introduced by .7 ^*, 'he
who ...' A compound sentence: § 113. (33) Irregular pi. of r^Lto 'village.'

44* Chrestomathy

.acnu r^X.l ^9 .r£x*:to:i r^du^.iM ^9 cnA lA^m rthlci^r<&a
AfiLK.l ^» ,i<n« 1 y&A r^.fAi&saci ^^^ .r£sat^ n\ — r^fn^A
r^a^.i ^ .cnu idioms cixaacnuA rOjSu .en tea ^» r£Am^
^» .aoa^9.i rrfAv^i^jDO r^dulD aaA ^»U .r^t^^t r^aau.i
r^sa^.l ^» .r£aCL2t ^a ciULlr^ r£^.iJ r^n^ rda.1i Aan»:t
rdalAea.i ^i .jla. A^a coAi.t*~£* r^.XJLJ .r^x.- rtocnu.i

t ^ViN^ .aflOJ.l n£=j-.7 ^9 .cnjLdJ tS^j r^aAa. ^9 .rtfba^aA&r<a
r^»x\ J »r<3 Aaj.l r£=j-.7 ^ .r4uu~J cryr^ f<JCI^f<9 ^CDtJ

A^J.l r^n-.f ^a .cd 1.7 ,\\-i AaoaX «f^L r^cicnu .ocAi^&J.i
^» ik XaA^j9 cnA ,ol£* r^oou *jc&^u.i r£i*t cnA jaau .r^alos
^* .Klftt^kCU rtacnu r£jLlf< >-L=i ^ .f<&i<\».i r*&Oi*>.l Anx.1
cnuLfU.i ^ .celled xujIj f<\Aeao i^saD9 .rdx^.Tjb.7 r^t^j jmji
r^^-3 tujI.i ^s* .ou^9 jujIj r£s*Aa. v > in .i^loj.1

r£&AQ»* ^» .cnA .Xsl^j r<A r^Lsr^M rdaCL&l .rdU-iln _&^u&u.i
r<s^1 ^» .pjjtJ r<\ r£L=>\x cnZxabuLZn .rOAun r^dtciAucsoA
^2*1.1 ^» .r<&cua1 ciUL2* xujIj .r^'t^j r<*duooa Timadu.i
oia Aaj.t ^9 .r^t^t ttfoouo ArtfAucJ r<\ .rtf&u£ajuA cul&j
•lx.1 ^* .rOli't 01a A-ltsqA r^Y>n\ .ociaJCJ r<\ 43 .r£a^ rda.1t
rdLa.l ^» .cpAm°kl ^cnA^A ^-lr^ jsCLxjjJ .rd\.T^* rdLa2*A
^0 .rdulcir^ ,la^A r&ujO^ r^ciau rdX.i .teo^gA cnA 45 r^Ao
^ Aaj f<\.i . ,CDCU&r<&x. ,n*n \ 1 .rda.aje. A-i. cdJuUls ^ordcai
cnA dur^ 1L1 cr\Aaau .rd^OJLu ^* J9l^2a\ rda~.l ^9 .

.iAl^j n'^n ^2* f^oduna .ool-aJ rd\.l Ajj.i.i ^9 .r^t*cnu
.CDAuLaj r^diajA cnA ii^i .,\%*n\ r^uao^D r£u*jA:i ^9 .crulSls
^ .cnnauN ocd •Ar^ jsctaju .r<innciae. cdIm ^» i<aj9.i ^i
r^^l.l ^ .cdIm cnA janx. ^Itl^ CLal .^»llj».l r^r^9 -^ -^ r^X.i

pjjl.l ^» .f<Tin r^XsL^ r^lodi^Q r£\ r^loiiA Aj^ CDI299 «^tt&
.Iin 1.1 r^n-.l ^ .r^Jj.l r<^1r<9 ^Ot* r^OCD r^AiCL^*-^^D
la-U cntso x^r * 1 - T * :1 ^ .r^cnAr^i r^JLa ^» r<cicn r^gAx.
r^A^A .r^N-M ^9 oxaA r^.1^9.1 ^9 .»^» ^ ^ — • r^X.l ««— ■•

dia^J .r<m y^9.i oujo1 Ann^.i ^ . >cdoju^. ^» icru CDlACUca

Aphraates on monks 45*

cdI^^ r^.TJ .rtaArtl oA^»cd ,lo^r^.l ^z> .r£*a^ cixzJr^ la

^9 wi *V * t^J .r<XJL+-XLZ*l «*\» AjDJt.7 ^5* .out ^outs* r<\

.r€x^s Aaoal r<taj» Aajc.l ^9 .oaA nutAu r^X.T au> % jjcAxj

r^X 51 .cnA rd^oii».l ^ .can rtxxx rtii<\ ^o ciul&j t^J

rtoil^.l rtf&LUfena .CDt».f n£a>as*U-=i rOLl ^ .cd!» ens f^

rdAii<\ .cntsa.l rtoayin r^^niiM.l ^s> ..to.lAu r<X rOco

(34) Pace Parisot 1894:248 the verb is better taken as Pa, not Af, cf. lKg
20.34 Peshitta. See also Text 11, n. 14a. (35) /neppel/, Pe Impf. 3ms. of
VAaj, here in the sense of 'to descend.' (36) On the meaning of the verb, see
the preceding note. (37) The habitual aspect of the syntagm <f*oc» + Pto (§
86) is reinforced by v £-aA&a /bkol c eddan/ 'at all times.' (38) The preposition
hints at the underlying passive structure: 'he will be treated by people as
alien.' Cf. Gkirdaxeiv inr6 'to suffer at the hands of as at Isocrates 3.61 &
TrdaxovTes' ix\>' trtpuv 6pylCea0€, Tatrra robs AXKovg \rf\ iTOieiTe 'that
which you get done by others and makes you angry, do not do that to others.'
(39) /masva wmatla/, lit. 'taking and giving,' i.e. commercial negotiation,
business transaction. Cf . Heb. ]mi red . (40) On the attributive prepositional
phrase introduced by a, see § 91 h, 3. (41) 'his temporal banquet': the suffix

is hardly proleptic. (42) /ma2tya ntira/ 'preserved, i.e. good-quality drink.' Cf.
Is 25.6. (43) Cf. Mt 13.8 where a certain group of audience of the divine
teaching is compared to good soil. (44) A proleptic object pronoun: § 112 c.
(45) /wale/ 'it is fitting for him, he ought to.' (46) Cf. Mt 24.20: "Pray that
your flight may not be in winter ..." (47) 'the table (of moneychanger, banker)':
cf. Mt 25.27. (48) Ptc. with the force of the future: see § 83. (49) 'will
become (one) of the children of God.' (50) The verb is probably impersonal
(§ 79), and the preposition is that of disadvantage: 'in order that it may not be
defeated to him,' i.e. 'he may not be defeated.' (51) cn^ &ls\61it£ 'he was

tired, disheartened,' Ethpa 3f.s. used impersonally. The relative clause
beginning with /man/ is in casus pendens, resumed by the suffix pronoun of
: see§ 113.

46* Chrestomathy

la Aa. AaAiAc*.! ^a .r^\ii Aa. 11x2^.1 .rGsax jaClAi f<lA»r<\
^».l%i^.l ^» .r<^»1r^.i od Al^oAA ^»cnA Ajan» .r^xJf^
tCPOinnri i<A .oa^Lx lour^.i ^» .cdjlSu .i&jlj .r<iAuA
^a .aur£»Ls r<ui» oaA nnm .r^AuuoA r£ajaa».l ^» .uyL.U.l
n£r*.l&J .nfA\oAaAL=i pjjl.i ^a .cnt^oA rCuai r€Al& ^V* 1
pjjl.l ^a .cnA .ooAlxjo jiAu .r^xl'.lD.l r^t^J Aojt.l ^9 .K!aAr<\

.r<Ajj.l r^taoA cntsoA r^mi i<Ax

(52) The preposition, which is proleptic, marks the direct object: see § 112 c.

(53) Cf. Jer 17.5 "Cursed are those who trust in mere mortals." (54) 'one who
has been proposed to become bridegroom 1 (?).

10. Ephrem's commentary on Genesis 22 1

uvtsA tn.1.1 .cnA tearto -pcnXarA rtaArt jO^ »oli [1]
r^lct^ ^p .Tjj Aa rfA\Ax % m*Jis&t<a .r£»1a2*r£t t^1&f<\ Aid
cnA i/\1cir* rcDcnoAir* acnoAca.i ^tsordi ^».i r^X.i .<sA tear**
^¥AA ta.io .f<aulo jjA~ci pCD*tar^ p.ioo •>^2*><U n^A&
JbrtX Acl^s* -*^\> "^•t ^»* r^teA .Atr^o <ouoi»f<\a ,cd02*LAa.

.cd.iAa.T rdJLaAa2*L9 cn-a&CLx.l rdlA^r^ .CD^uia.Ta «&&Cl&Jt&a
.JL^aJO .endues ilci^aA. iCdciAa ^octjA ojLsacLQLi jaoAv r^A.tci
•cnuJCl.XAJO .r<lAir* ilci^Li. ^oyi^Auo .cni^Y^ni rtf&tWl* ^cnA

t*^ «^ .C1XU9.1.1 r^2*CL» ^2* OOGU-IOCdAu Of^ .OUL& rf*\\j\

^» .Au.l.l A\,** r^1o2^X Aflor^ cn^LA la.l.l ^»¥dA r£\^r<
r^X cix^-LD A\j** ^l&A.I ocd .r^OCD Ajj.1 r&A^ r^r£*^i>

♦i<Ocd nA^l.T »a2^~r^
*ai^ »aJ&r^a .r6is.l A*. *nnour^ Ar<x. ^.1 ^Ajl&2* .ia [2]

^jco r^tAj*. Aa. cumjbci jmaur^A ^.1 cd12l& .U* .r^lCL^

cnA laxxu r<Ai .r£»t».i cn^n^lro ,cn»\^o .r<i ^ip ,cdoA*.

r^atCD.l .cnA teor^ m_L=i1acA cnuAjpr^ct t»-»a p.lMa.l ^Dcntai*

Ephrem on Genesis 22 47*

:Aa ^9 v>A niiiii ^\ rOoia .r^cnAr^. 1 ! Aun^ oAjj.1.1 8 ^..10r<

•>Aa r^t» Xft^.l cr^CLu «^x»^f<

•••r^ooo AujJ cn£*L^.a tujJ&im &n£».l tAia ^59.7 ^ucd.to .oglX^d
xuiaur<=3.7 .cnA toi^i ocd A^xs* r^X.i 1-*^ cnA AtacD r^t»tx

canjDr^O jaflpJO .nllA_.n£=i r^tA.l pCDtar^ ^1 r^.u* [3]
cnAr^ax. .r^l^.i ^»& ^».i i^cicd AuA.i .CD la ,^\tt r^AiAj^
r&ruj* .r£i\*r< ^paii r^GCD AuA.10 ..lour r^tMr^A.l xuiour£l

la .°Ai» r<us.lAci .r<OCD l3 f<AAi rdlA^n^a.l ! rft&.la.l .rtt^.lA
f<bUD A^L.l OCD .CDMCLft f^OCD t* ~&t&Ll r^OCD 13a i*OCD pCDtar^

•>r<OCD

1) Tonneau 1955: 83f. (Syr. text); 69f. (Lat. tr.). Cf. Brock 1981, and Janson
and Van Rompay 1993: 121-23. (2) The conjunction Dalath introduces direct
speech: § 98 e, i. (3) 'Offer him (as) an offering ...,' an object complement (§
98 f)- The Peshitta reads: rrij'X\V. (4) The purpose clause introduced by a
Dalath precedes the main clause with <mcu£ Aawrey. (5) 'he had greatly
alarmed him': the Af infinitive functions as an internal object (§ 98 j). (6) On
the compound tense, see § 88. (7) 'how much would he have dreaded?': on
the use of the compound tense in an apodosis of a conditional clause, see §
86. (8) On the implications of this remarkable translation, whether 1st or 2nd
person, of the Hebrew text Orurr 'I know, have learned'), see Brock 1981:5f.
(?) 'in two ways. 1 (10) 'that there was, however, no ram there': a noun clause
serving as direct object of .imi 'testifies.' Likewise the following i*©<d AuA.i
r£iJLr* ^ftfc. (11) 'Isaac's question concerning lamb': on the prepositional
phrase introduced by the conjunction Dalath, see § 91 h, 3. (12) The conjunction
Dalath introduces a purpose clause with i*cicd t^b^u as its verb: on the
compound tense, see § 88. The f*oa> before t^Au appears to be redundant,
unless one has to do with a compound tense, /hwa wa/. prot-ir* ... r&*ai\
rfocD is the second of two nominal clauses which constitute the relative
clause with r^i^.i of r^i^.ta as its antecedent: '... and served as a sacrifice
instead of ...' (13) n^fc, a Pe passive Ptc. (13a) A rftico 'to become (something).'
(14) One expects oco* /dhaw/, 'his day, i.e. of one who ...'

48* Chrestomathy

.r^cnAr^ ten* Au^a* ,3* .^t-Lat ^^t^.l cnA l2*r<o

•>rda.li<:t r^*£*Li. ^ooA^ .f<u*Jt»

(15) Lit. 'of two times, 1 i.e. 'for a second time,' though not that the angel
repeated the same message, but that it was his second address to the patriarch.

(16) On the syntax with the infinitive, see § 98 j.

11. Jacob of Serugh on the Apostle Thomas 1

:v<r&i^\ \\** rOr* -iYti«a r^ ^au l»r*

•>r^:ia-*. pXjtrta r<hso^ trS jdjd Alii* -ajjr^sa.l r^a^

IjCDO^dl^ pr^flD jj^jt» oeJr^ r<\ ocd ^cd ^

vr^AutCLD ,¥>n\.f r^:iaj*A ntou^ m\ &ui< 1*^ rA

:r^»l^ u>A jao> Ai*a~.l r£sa^O .aoAi^J r^l^Jt

•>u>A iiyiVt r£n^ r^aCD.l u^ .af&O r^ffli^l^ .Tsl^.

ir^xainA r<uo\ r^cico -sAl^.t ocd jsoAl&J.I jaiu

♦r^Hci^j AiXdAi.t i<1i«wu |€D r<t in Av^nNo

ir^iuta r^l» *^*\j la cnv^l ensue

«!t<»\n la ^»Ai jaAv^r^ ocd r£»l~J.fO

ir^cnAr^ Is ^a& i.TOr^ CD&OJl^^a

vp.TDoA .sAi^r^ .1*0.1 Ai^a ^ Anx.i rtoutAo

rr^cnAr^ la ^.CUj rdlr^f ^*Al -aAl^ i<\

•>&tl~j| ^a.ici ^JQDCU.1 CDlaO «2k.Ox— • r<Xr*

:r^l^ la ^Sj&CU.I cnlao ^.Ojl» rOr*

•>r£2aOr^Ai\ r^&m^a rdlr* ^un.1 t<lt< rAct» rtfcD

•>dur<a>02aj cnA rOr^ yiNr^O rOr* ^auao

:n«2^i **lo r*l^ laCl i*l^ Vdlt*

•>r^A» l&.TO^ r*&Ol^A rfXau*. 9 Aua|

:r<Jr^ .tciubm ^r^ i<lr< ^auao rOr^ J3^ r£ir<

•>Ocd r£aA l»cn_i rtf&iO-L2*Or£sO r6QOr^ OCD r^.Ta-x.l

l^sbo rOr^O ^a't ^ajjO f<li> la.lO^
♦^iU dujj |CDOJOa\A.l ffi^ f<l£Li

Jacob of Serugh on Judas Thomas 49 s

•>cn\ \suL r^\o r£s*uA r&QCiubi r&DC&il yisvl

:r<fx=i-^ ^i\x.r<o (^(^b^ AnT.O rdau-^t^ .acn*

♦ooA Aut^ ^a^O cnmat ^^ rteOr^ r^VuO

•>^a.l%r^ X* "A^ujI la uyr^ ,CDO-^*).7 »\iis.CI

:cn&CLLaA i^jar^CI f<laO i<mV\ti tu

v^ootja ^9 »cdci\^. flk OJ^aJ.l ^OcnJi^^ r^iaO

•I^tM^^ Anita ^— A r^ta^. rdlr< ^9%2* rtfcn.l

:^CL^X.- ^9 rdir* octi r*CD l2> i<1inVT uyr<

i3 *>axU3\ Isl^.1 12a r*Au^aA.l uyi* tJLicu^At r^

vo.TJCD.t r^sA^ftA r^ftClta r^titr£a rOjar^.l ClAl

♦r^actl ^9.1 h*yV\t. rf\\*\^ »cix*J<tvu rd\ci
ta.TJCD.l r^l^r^X rdlf* AujJ i<cd f<u\» uui^

:r6^a^ JL*. 1^9 tOAii .aid r^x.1 »Q \*r\r,

:A r^cAAu.l r<l-A ccu^r^ »»Aor^ ta Aurta

(1) Strothmann 1976:198-209. The poem is typically in couplets, each line
with twelve vowels. (2) This Pe ptc. is often used to introduce direct speech.
(3) For the standard spelling jauw», an Af act. pass., 'love, like,' < V^au. (4)
*i£s.i< 'can' complemented by a participle: § 98 d. (5) A stative passive Pe
ptc., 'clothed': § 84. (6) /?avet/ = AJi* rta^. On the conjunction Dalath, see §
76. (7) 'he named,' Pa Pf. (8) For the sake of metre, the pronoun is /na/.
Otherwise there would be 13 vowels. So two lines below. (?) The performative
Pf, "I hereby sell ...": § 81. (10) The metre indicates /gudfar/ rather than
/gudafar/. So three lines above. (11) 'Rachel's son,' i.e. Joseph. (12) /mzab-
ban/, a Pa pass. ptc. (12a) On the particle Dalath, see § 100. (13) /zavneh/
'his time.' (13a) On the spelling, see § 54, n. 61. (14) Aallanef, pi. of t<\\\
Aallana/ 'disciple,': cf. r<i2*baa> /sammane/ 'drugs, herbs,' pi. of

50* Chrestomathy

•>>a r<xizj&UL2na r£^a>1 r^ta.1 CDcVt=uac> r^OCDcXl

♦r<ftmA rtt»A nftr^k 14a r<U9LJ r£l I&CUjs.I

v^DOla :u- r^Xo-L &uA& CDcVa^n^ ClA.T

rr^itjLCifl) ^a r^atJta uyi^ cVAjj.1 ^r^

•Ist-aiAo ,toA rOt* <^~i. r^O rOi* AtKT rtfcn

:,cnAnf nc^a-.l o.tjcdA f<xsL± t<lr£ AtKT rtfcn

cdjb fc » U.TA.f r<r » n.l cot*J tacVf<i Cl^~

Vr^CLL^GUCD CDO^a r^^BcV ^CL^cVcil

:i^3C^ r^Jba.l rd^1n£=j r^satr*:? ^W r^lt

•>cd!» r^.tuJO r*&\\\ r^^&cV .^cVci^-ja

:r^ta<ka Aa. r^alr* Atnf.7 cVAao r£&tt2k

v^CL^1qo*-9l=3 r^l^A r^teoA r^cVrdJ r££LL.r£s

(14a) Pa. with f*^', a fern, noun as its object (pace Strothmann 1976:207.
(15) The vowel count indicates /detbar/ (Pe) rather than /dettabbar/ (Pa). (16)
/bg8wweh/ = /bgaw/ 'within, inside' plus a m.sg. suffix.

12. Some juridic decisions (7th c.?) 1

rtf&iaOjjO r^ubojccV A^sa : ,cd ctan^ »jj Aa^.Ul .ia r<ta (a)

♦.ucVcVu r<X .cnAi.l
r^ClXftOjj&eaa ~Ar^c}ea "0D.T2* r^cVcia^js taii.l xlr^ r<\ (^
Ocd r^» r^X r£^1cD ^a r^AvCLa-A cdA Itxsa.l ocn r<\r* .cnA.1
Aur^.l ^»AaD cl»cui»A rdxlAea.i ocd A -ClArdJ.l Klxli

•Mtxsaci teat^l ocd.1 ^»AcnA r^uAaooix)
iCU-^cV ,j^ .(DOar^l CD-»cV-»r< r^i^Ncut cWjujcVi >cd (uyi)

cryaA

CD-*

iCD rtkj^a .°k\it .r^cV-^jt.i uysAcVj CDCLaref :cDla^l nd^CDtsa

Some juridic decisions and Job of Edessa on sleep 5 1 *

uyr^ AoducAt r^iiu^ ^ p.TM r<^CL=s-.l r<*~£* i<\ (jua)

(1) Selb 1990:34, 40, 42. (2) 'some matter': on the use of *«*, see § 91 d. (3)
An auxiliary verb, "can," is complemented by the following^oArdi.t 'to compel.'
(4) /saquvlayata/, the f .pl.emph. of the adjective ,Xaona> used substantially,
'things which are the opposite of (5) /d§a c la/ 'at once.' (6) 'on account of,'
originally 'in return for,' possibly under the influence of Gk. dirrt. (7)
Impersonal 3f.sg., 'it has not been established yet.' Hence the grammatical
subject of this 3f.sg. verb is not the preceding i^Ijm, but rather the following
Dalath clause. (8) Error for **iora or **uy /nekhyana/ 'damage.' This
word, however, is not the grammatical subject of 4^&j, but rather 'he,' i.e.
her father. Cf. Selb 1990:66 rd^a&ta* ^ocnl».i r^ja 'she shall be made
liable to (repay) half of them.' (9) An obscure word.

13. Job of Edessa on sleep (early 9th cent.) 1

,\*r\\ t*iu rtftcn A^^.i ^aA^a&ucM r<ua»a ^Acdo 5 t<* tn\ \ ^o
.r^L^lur^ .r^toujj.l ^9 l»Au 6 rdxJtn.l rOtJts.l r£oCI£*

(1) Mingana 1935: juujd - u*n, pp. 70-71. (2) /meJragSanyaja/, an Ethpe
nomen agentis, f.pl., 'capable of feeling.' (3) Prob. /qne/ 'possesses,' i.e. a Pe
ptc. pass.: see § 84. (4) 'reasoning' (Gk auX\oyia|i6sO. (5) 'imagination' (Gk
<f>avTaata). (6) An erroneous dittography. So also the following *A*.

52* Chrestomathy

f<a^t2*Cl cnA r<n ? i^o r^LLx. ooA f<*OCD 8 lfc a^il .^a^lAu.ict
r^auta^ ^cnA^ yi±. r£ua» jjlljAiAim t/oa.TJ.l >cd Ias .cnA
cnA ^Ua^t» r^dujc. r^OCD r^X.f r£» 1*^ rtfro -^^«i ^r<
r^tcnjt.i r<Yin ^1 . T^ts* t-*^ r^uosaa .r^acD&.i r^a.i^. r^ua^aA
rtfkL*. A^^o .rtfr^amn.l uur^ r^Aujc.l r^Qr^Jcua J&rta
Aur* f<*cicD t*-^ t<Uif^ .r£xJta.i r<x.ir<a r^Auot Aiocd r^.icn
r^tCD icpo .rtohloiri r£it*1t.i |CD r^Ai > 1 > ^ r^AtCLsuJ^I r^utd^p
r£»1«x .tag Aiocn.i |CD r^AiCLx^a*A r£»txo r£uCt2»sA r£oAx&
r^ta^L t-*^ r^AicUAX^aM cnA r£*Jcn£* r<&icuuL5g£aA cnA r£»Au^90
cnA r^t.T^i* f<Y°>l ^.xIcdo rdxjj ^Oux»» r<\ci r<<hcir£*Jcn
n£*tza r^lAir^X ^aaaj.i r^z^f.t t<LaA r^A^.l »cna .r*&CL=rJ^tX
rOcnAci . -i\jlAiAi r^AiCULajsuC r£u*_) r^amj.l r^a.i^. ^Isl^jo
.r^Aujt cnA ^L»aacaxs* r^ud^asi n£x^1.i r<Atcir<!*Jcn:t c<&1jjCUc
rf^ueo^ cnA^A r*.ll^ .T*-a n^ar£*Jcn.l oil» rfu(D9 ^.l -soil
rtbicCLu jar^.l t»r£j -r^ln^.7 oour^ci yjbtJ ^\>*ii%.i r^Au?Jt «&r<ci
r^Amc oA r<Xr^ yj*«* M ^» uu&ea.l A^» ^12* .1 f<£u>) ¥jji<
r£n^A r^.icDO r^suo^ rfoai.l p.xs* r^u^J i<\i< .ax*dur^
r^boo-i. ^»acn iu^ r^cn r<\ i^M r^» Aur^t»du i^AicLjlA rdfc.t^
pcu .Tjj r^\a .t*^ r6uta ^Xf<u r*Aa r^TcnA ,JLaj» r^X.l ^2aCL»
t*J^ »cri .r£ur£j crL .l_iA-=i ^.1 r^->» r^Xa rtf&LUt r^X.l tsjUtt**
Cicbo pj.l acri r^xJla.l rdl v*f< |CD i<Allx AlCCft.l r^iCUua.l

(7) The proclitic Dalath, followed by an Impf., introduces a second complement
of A»jLtt>. (8) Error for .^o^ia 'that is why' (Gk yow). (9) A>y^i hay dne&nak/
'on account of that that he sleeps,' i.e. 'because he sleeeps.' (10) Error for
Acia. (11) 'as in general.' (12) = .cnadur*, and aa> .•uJ ocomeans 'the same.'

14. Ishtfdad of Merv on John ll 1

Al ifcsj&^o oc] ifc^t .^9 01990JL .ou*ote* fjAfetl? ^oj
4 v qAjd .. i iyi »opp ifcsoo^Dobw l^ci *~»v? 3bo lA J3lj L»90ov-»

Ishodad of Merv on John 1 1 53*

X9J0 loci )apBLr> 0U39 lava I&iJl? ^oj L^oo? ltsaJ?L±LU& Al

ja\ tt*itsi? .i^oov- A^9 ^ojA i?q ^i\ Lc&? ."^Isa? ^A_»i

-»koDlA Ijd^a? ^oiAo 5 .^A jiWy» )ai v CL^Oi ^9 .&*lo
.^oi^joboaA l^l? AlJOD 6 .L*^x?o ^orvSiiftlo v a^tscA loojl
•oitscto Ai X90I n>>>o 5^9 00A sla\ 1 i^»l «JL9l» l\ ^ q\
IA9 .Lio^o*? ov^oqlxA #dJl l*z\ lAl 7 .oiA tsooi L»A\, I90I
^801 ^»tsl? ^cj .itsoa^feA jsul l&ojjaaxjs? .&ats*J
lfcs£_*fcs-> „>ojOiYi >n<9 loaj ?Js*l>9 Al lo|o .Jlqx*»? -»oi8jl&?
1 iir il IJDQ-IB9 ife^fec** JL>?oojcA .l?** l\\ .ajd^lJ? fcsooi
lts*»ax* PlaSU? .^fcsofcs? .LlS? loiAlA oA auJ^ b^A 8 .^Ud?
,\.\»itsj lAo :o^o .ajjd^lj lajaiai L&?*!? ib^JD A19 lAnl?
oitsaaoutso ojtsa^o? Ai v^Y* Idiots .l\ ^ IA9 iNnv-i
.L»&axa ^d^stsl 1 A\Y> lii^ioTo laflul 1 i»l»i 9^9 • r-*-<^9
<A 9 Li3u*l .I^clX^o 01 ii^i^.^ **tSd»tstsl JAa*»o lAflJe Lj-»lA
^d 1jl«?^o n .lts i1^\y» lAl .^9 aitsAJo^ tsooj 10 Lx**? ;o\
^Ld ojdd .La&x?o Ajl ]Al .*i^t ^*i ;a\ &9JA 12 .l9Ci
•:*^oio^^>JlJ9 L2kfia> A Aw afeca? e-^?? Iba^SAi 13 oA *z*l*
.looj ^A^pD 14 jd^^D9 :ooi L**» it^jJD 0010 • asA its DjjA

(l)Gibson 1911:-n> - ^ud (Syr. text); Gibson: 1911:253-55 (Eng. tr.). (2)a
-*d introduces a lemma in a commentary. (3) its I 'a sign. 1 (4) Gk [idXXov
•rather/ (5) Jn 13.21. (6) Mt 17.17. i£&*?o /wa^arka/ 'et cetera/ (7) 'How
could this have escaped him?' On the hypothetical force of the compound
tense, see § 86. (8) 'the human nature that (he had taken) from us.' (9)
'(According to) other (scholars). 1 (10) 'that of suffering': the weeping of our
Lord was not that of suffering. (11) /malfani£i/, a Pa f.sg. nomen agentis
from V 3i\: see §§ 38d, 20. (12) 'As is evident, so they say (plL ), from this,
i.e. the following scripture [Jn 1 1 . 1 1].' (13) A compound clause: Who amongst
us, does it grieve him ...?' i.e. 'who amongst us grieves over a friend who is
asleep?' See § 1 13. ^**? is a resultative Pe passive ptc.: § 84. (14) /mhazzaq/,
a Pa pass, ptc, 'girded round.'

54* Chrestomathy

_2L»lO .O^AJD? OOl ^D 15 A-i-uJQ9 OOl Oa^ lOOl J^6 .lJLOf 9**g

09 Aji^ lAl .looi VY>9Y> »-Aoi 9^*i-*9 looi 9-AA9 ooj

I6a *Skoboc^90 .L^&^be^O 16 lki'i'YO^»l .^YlttlYl v ^o\ iijYA

• «*oia^t*J9 ibwl 92* l^ao .oV-»^9 \ YiY 9a ^9*» .199^9 l^nl

JLi*i? Alxo ibsLj 1A9A 17 otA 9l* 01A kjLx>9 jjLii

.ol^a 19 <ojoi 191^9 911S .I901 L9L* "oliuc? ^01 v^oUJobotifi)
^lil .ikl <vn\\,Yi\ v o<n^ Ioom 1^9 ^l .jx*ikk v oou$-»3La
ldnu looi I^d Li .I^clX?o IjlSLi ^jl91o ib^-Lto ^1? ooj
^1 ? ik.vAKV ^d1 ? 6<jio .ibAYi^ o\\\^\ ISlao .^ks^cA

• lSo!^ V a-Lxts .lAoou^? its 9^5 ~>l lKoXo-»ai <oa*3 looik
A\^ lAl *l^ox?o ^o tf lo^flo IflLa lS^JS^a oi\n^» 001 o

lbsQ_.o£> ^u^d L^D-lo .Icl^o o^ks^9 ia&l .^^A? tool op&**&9
9&M ^A^obocfcs? ^oy^Jots Yi\l9 ^obcJl **oiol£jeo .^ooi^dLa
IA9 .^fck ope£j Ainft 1^ .&L& 9^ I901 Alo <% p2^9-»l

.Aafcs^j v yqi A*. 1A0 .L^o^ ^iuj ^9 :l?u. 21 *>^iAL kAk
:iooi »>^ ^9 *a\£? Icuaj? .^A3k9 .loAl Ai 1A1
_ij&9 L*ial .I01A1A ^Aj3onfi> ^oiofc^-A? .X9<iJ9 ibAfcs?
ib^iA <A .a^A its £9^9 1*d lAoa LA119 ^01

.^9 Ijaots, .apDA la^Jfl o\a q\o .oii\9 ^to kooi
oA ^»9 v <Ajd .ib^i^l LJaJd9 lAu 0019 looi dl^ ifetlAd
ibJLfc Ll>a JSLSano .a^A o*oh ;eA lfec£&9 .ail ^9 lA*A
IlJcAjL joAox A19 Ll^l9 22 ^oiJ3 .^b>$u*boD LJio .^omulboD
^Jo ik . <W itSYi in Ai.o ^01 .5ax 7i\y6o19 oiJs&o^ ^d
i^^A 7 ^ Ucq J9lo its^u^ itsLx ;a\ l^tsl .o^jA? ^oj
.l^ii^o :lcnAl9 010^9 ovla ^n\YiYI lLl^9 _»ko&l .oU^t
.LgoruttLSl looi ^ots^ao o^aA 1-^. Io\oJ9 23 ^iYi\yy>

(15) /mbayyel/, a Pa ptc, 'empowers.' (16) /mu§|?a@/, pi. of I k^ojoo 'measure.'
(16a) Here an Impf. lpl. (17) oA 9a: probably to be omitted. (18) /Saqqel/,
a Pa Impv., possibly a variant of Pe cAclojc in the Peshitta. (19) 'they
themselves,' emphatic: § 74. See also the position of the following <6<

Some light-hearted stories 55*

'with their own hands.' (20) = Gk ipa, a particle introducing a rhetorical
question. (21) /'ellan/, pi. of tfcLi jl 'reason.' (22) ? ^c\^ = ^3 'because.'
(23) -vA^ an Af ptc. 'they transmit,' tradition has it that ...

15. Some light-hearted stories 1

3 &t*J°kx. r^OCD 2 r£lD r*Muf* K%ciAr> ^a rdltjjf* (468)
r<Ax^s CUUJ^or^a .cdA\jjjljl±=j r^OCD *pr£n r^A.l A^MCI .rfCIUi
Jtt£&r^ OCD r^la^ 1^1 .1A r^»CL» ^ ."UiaO .CICICD ^OCID
Atr^ci .ogli^xm ^a cnn&r^o en tens* cnA .acnuci our£a>a»J cnj£*
1XXO cnA ^t^lAir^o .r£aA» AioA cnUacuc.lO cnA*.l rda^,
t&a r^r^ r<^A»A rteix. r^.l .Ai*»r* ^».l |CD .cn^amJ.l cn&oA
.cnA *\* i^i^.TD cnta^ ocdci .r^Aia^tea JL2L r<aAu.l rUL&.f
AuiL&r^ KHilOr^s coco ^Ainf x&o .r^ocnj r£l^cn.l r^A» .tol&ci
Jala r<OCD cnA^-a.! ocnA Attearto rd^li* A^. Au**>1n^O r^ti-».l

i^i* .i^ood r^tcn oA.l .cnA t»i*<l .r^tx».t!i oixi^Jtr^ rda.1i< Aa.
r^iai.f lAia.l r*L*t» acn uyta.l . t cn cnA i*t»r^ .r^tJ-».l

•>dtacn r^ual cnAuiajtrtfl r£^As*> A-^o
i*ts^ r^L»Ai^» .(pA>tit\ AiAr^x. r£xJ ^» i*.Tjj (515)
r^iA^k .tsl^jo oboA uy^.iJO r<Aear* cnA ^au.l cnA .\j»\t.

^Acn ^ 73.129 .Tra-iAi cnA \jj\t. r^A ^^Jr^O r£sj~.l
£ala>a rlL..lo r^A^D.i A^sa .cnA &t»i* »cpo

(1) Budge 1897: 97 (Syr.) [= 120f. Eng.]; 110 (Syr.) [= 136 Eng.]; 143f.
(Syr.) [= 171f. Eng.]. (2) /qne/, a Pe pass. Ptc. with resultative meaning,
'having acquired,' i.e. 'in possession of: see § 84. (3) A st. est. of the adjective,
'beautiful of look, good-looking': see § 96 b. (4) 'her news,' i.e. 'the story
about her.' (5) 'Stretch out (^*ar*r, Af. Impv.) (your hand, and get) for me.'
(6) A Pe Ptc, though in the rest of the conjugation the verb in this sense, "to
bless," is used in Pael. (7) A compound sentence with i*ta\in casus pendens:
§ 1 13. Hence r*ta\ is not the grammatical subject of \,.Vw, which is impersonal.
Cf. the following sentence: ... .1 aA \,.\t. ... rfhAur?. (8) Aen bag la/
'openly.'

56* Chrestomathy

10

j*£G .i^ocd A^rta r^to^ia Al*. jbAu r£ut¥ ^* rOtwr* (669)
A*Ao v ^A>o /uff}^ r^Air^O .r^oOJLs taA »cdgAxG2.1 r£u*1
r^Xci ai-A-^ ja_^tr<f god a .cnA AAiAv.i cn&Aur^ ApaoG .r^Lsaa
r^t^^X jam! .1 ^no .r^lG^ta ^5* Jidg A^r^ .t^Q .A&At.l cnnnv.
rdlD.l r£nAn cr>A\AvJnf &&t»G .Au^dg rtf&iAax&.l cnjtl ^a A^JG
r<a»&JL r^xasAA -\\*^* iutzo .CDCiar^ Aun\ Aui&cdg .r^GCD
^» .Tjlisg r<OL*&-2k. >^b .tjj r€».ixn9 ^GcnA r^GCD oui^ci .cnA^si.l
i<L^J3a» GCD Alrrtl .cnA CD^lacnuG .Tjj t<nffl^ &U» rf&mCU

• • • •

CDCI^a xL^JtrfG .r£».TxnaA rtacn ,^>Tl.l ^ftu^r^ rtt2gLaA XL&a>G
r^t*J9ut. r£xGaA ceA .ln^.Q ^GJi< .nffllG .r^acn.l.l r^tl** r£sAr<
n^Aur^ cnA ^iiuJ.l ^nm\ tot<0 .i<%V9.1 r£oGJLs .a&UG
aaA &Gcn discnu.i |OaA cnduiajcr^G ^» cells* r^lu AAir^G .tCL^»J.l
r^AiA»tr^ r^.Uj Au'i^Tr^ r^CD.f cnA &t2arta Ai&r^G .r6.imn\
^59 A\Avt*.l crudur^G .r^cnAr^A AAjj.IG r^uA^O ^ats .rthtjJ&x.
cnA I.UtG ciin r^ln^ >a^~r^G .rdal r^r^aAso r£*£*.1D cn\ si
r£atx*G ai-alx. ^l»_iAig l cnG.lr<~ dtGcp X^G .axamJG rdiXx.

n^atr. god ijAig .cn\ si.i r^iaMG c<Ajc»gj3 ^a^.i i^nm^i

r£jj^m±*A .scel*.? r^cEAr<A Gnnv.G .r^.lHxA G^lG^cr^ r^.lins.l

<*r<Ax.ct9 A*Ao ceA crs-oojj.1 gcd.i CD&Aur^G cd&g^xog cd^ujs goo

(9) /saymay namose/, a Pe ptc. m.pl.est. of tub 'to put,' legislators. (10)
/snegruta/ 'office of advocate (awfiyoposO.' (11) Error for ^cas?

16. Bar Hebraeus's Syriac grammar 1

J-a-^CL ^{ .ptQJL^ l(^^u{o .(;0^ i-O^j-O .J-^^>j_D .^Aq v qj{ ^Ou

.j-aop o^. (Io!Qn^ I^jlq, v ;qa^. LaxL^ J-D^qo .(Mtl.ll) .J^lscl ^oj

(1) Moberg 1922: 40f., 45f. (Syriac text). Cf. Moberg 190713: 86f., 97f.
(German translation).

Bar Hebraeus's Syriac grammar 57*

J _30 jlQa^. yO^fJD ,_3 J -\ -mm J_L*.$Q3 .-.Uj .{A OtflT.. J^LdO, ICfet^O

S oj 4 .(Nu 22.25) {AuraJ^ )Q^^a; °^S^ <i^j-awO ^>\ 3 ^o p-X>,-0 .-L-j

Q) -«L0{ -41 Q0i,{0 °.(Dt 9.21) ).\...JL3 otUSu. q^o 4^>^ PM

Mt 26.51) cp?{ oJNnTO 8 .(Mt 14.10) cut* cuumd xou;o4q *,-* o7 (8.1

^ooo {oq ^ n .)o,u3{ ,uo 10 .(Mt 25.25) y ua* q&^ft^ A^-,{o 9 .(etC.

-Jn) )oo£oo ^o ju{{^ |l {oi^ r { ^5 Jj,U .{kXjo*J ^.^}i Jlo (Lm

v? qo^> 13 J . S n Lua p**a3 .{^Xii .^ }c£.|l |^ jl u| q "(1.18

Mb J-^o «-~° "(Mt 1.2) ^^m<JI Aoj X***^ r { .jAa*a*~ 1o£{

16 {ifc»{ ^<-^po -r\ {ioaojo {Iojj? -K^i? 15 -(cp- Ps 104.32) k*.,o

17 .(ICor 15.33) {A »•:?> jl^os. JjQXxna )_l^V ^i.yyio .{«|£~

v->.. w jiaaoio J.._=)op jiojoai. {o^.«y,\ ^;s)K) ioia; .u^ ^A.qa

|3<L30 .^^.Oj )/*"-> )_X>:-3 ^<{ .) . fpllO {JOa-J^ .(jSJOw) .{^ V\ot\

J-o'&aX o*A>.» Io»» i«>o

r { ( ^QiMi jjor^. ^ju^ Jjl*4o3 {oq 19 £o)l^.; pi,} £^{ 'V^pr

^Pq ^o.(Jn 6.27) Jq* )0^ .J^dj u^^ po^ Oa^A*!

wqotuj Jq^i Aujl )o!i. pD{; ^ _~ .Q^fJoAaa!!. £o{ Jidda) ^tA» t^.

a^aq P-tt>.-o pu^Jo .Jjq jqotuj p>{* .*ajt >o^. {q2ki ^5 p*U .pq

(2) 'second': § 44b. (3) = Gk \iev corresponding to 8£v (=^1, four lines
below, in ... ^ J-j^k). (4) 'And it (= the she-ass) pushed Bileam's leg to the
wall' (5) = <ioq 'that is to say, i.e.' (6) 'I threw his dust into the wadi.' (7) 'My
breasts suckled my lambs.' (8) 'And Herod sent (someone) and beheaded
him.' (9) 'And he removed his ear.' (10) 'And I went away and hid your
talent.' (11) 'Ephrem': ^fco lit. 'my lord' is a conventional title borne by a
Syrian ecclesiastic. (12) 'Nobody has ever seen God.' (13) 'phonetic,' an adj.
derived from a construct phrase pii Kui 'sound.' (14) 'Abraham begat Isaac'
(15) The Lord looked at the earth and it shook.' (16) PL of i£»oj 'nation.'
(17) 'Bad stories ruin pleasant thoughts.' (18) j^Lao,.. /$emha/ 'ray' or 'twig,'
hence the title of the treatise )--£*£? l4>^- (19) ? l^i'M f it sometimes happens
that ...' (20) The word pq probably refers to the same word in the quoted
text rather than meaning 'this sentence' (so Moberg: "dieser Satz").

Bar Hebraeus's Syriac grammar 58*

*p^o p*o* iamn^oo ^00 p£oJi.l prafloa
2 .(lSm 15.23) )itn v> Jla*. JjDjD r { .P^£-^ p-^ao oq y^^o p^a*
Heb.) JkX^J oq {*oj ^^ v q^o 3 .(Job 4.6) r^r*- "<* "9 ?^~?°

oq Pja,? \^Pu? <* 5 (Dn Bel v. 28) JjAjo o^ {oq p ? a,o 4 .(12.29

8 .(PS 119.105) ^^^i^so .q ^o 7 .(IS 42.11)V* joqi ^

P_fc v a^H {r^! 1*^° 9 .(Pr 20.27) )t'1» 10; -q IAoqju Pxjoj oi^jto

7 4s^ooo .J^ joqi .^ * (Jn4.24) {qS> u^oq p*4o 10 .(Sir 3.30)

juu v aa^.H P^oo P:_*>} -q J^* jriVin? {Aoojuo -^s^ ** K^*

oq p*o4 {q&o .JrA?
Auud jp^o pa^a? W M P-*>,
)y^vv jOj-oj oq .{qS* jkX*> oq 11 .£OQ > £>LO{£ .^^so^j P*£Jl P^o*
^Aaio l3 ^{ .i^.jj^o Jj'iuj jop»a* )ox 12 .)oa^|l ? oq .^>~Aod |l

\L\ qX^; pai^ io^ aoq; p>
r { .p*.,-* Jj^ U pl^oo? W M P*a* ^o P»£ £Qn,uAs p^Oj

.fi^i^ M^ q 16 p»»TY> As-i^ tu\ ^po « J-slSLij v dbo (^A.kX
l7 pjoo ? r { Lj{ l3_x> JaAjj {IttivA ,-d .K^-a^ {^ok^j {^ £cj{

|_xj £o{o .puod cboq )vi»\»> p{ ^ .)v> ? N»> p£lo *^3^ po 7
o,oq J4J, v os yit ,-d . v cloq* p3lo r '*\ s ^o .^t^L ^5 pa>{ .pi^;
q >-^>o»v> ptaa, .-»q )^:-0} a*.* .(Mk 13.29) v OxA^jop>o .pua3

^q )*v? o {&.L**.
19 ..a^Ou LU .pq ^ ^oq p*£ .^ ^o t^Aw ptodt ^xaA. P^°j

(1) Loan translation of Arabic mubtadc? and habar respectively. (2) 'Divination
is a grave sin.' (3) 'And your fear is your fault.' (4) 'And our God is a
consuming fire.' (5) 'And the Jew became king.' (6) So in Martin 1872:45
contra Moberg 1922:45 iLi. The form is a Pe Perf. 3fs. of V m* used with the
force of the present: see §81. (7) 'Kedar shall be a meadow.' (8) 'Thy word is
a lamp for my feet.' (?) 'The soul of men is the lamp of the Lord.' (10) Water
puts out a burning fire.' (11) 'theologian,' the reference being to Gregory of
Nazianzus. (12) 'He, the Word, God, one who is invisible before the worlds,
one who is incorporeal.' (13) 'thereafter, then' (Gk elTa). (14) A Pe Inf.; on

Bar Hebraeus's Syriac grammar 59*

the syntax, see § 98 j. (15) /gvayya/, a Pe Ptc pass m.pl.emph. of l^ (16)
'O Christ, you who were born from a virgin immersed the chosen of the
heroes in the depths of the non-suffering whilst cleansing the three portions
of the soul.' (17) 'as in water': on the conjunction Dalath, see § 100. (18)
/mettahme/ 'gets omitted,' an Ettaf Ptc of V poq. Contrast ..-*>g*>, an Af pass.
Ptc. later emphasising the state 'omitted': see § 50. (19) 'This is sweet (and)
sour.'

GLOSSARY

[Verbs are arranged by roots, but other words alphabetically. The vowels
of the Perfect and Imperfect in Peal are indicated like a/e\ e.g., ^at Pe
a/e> which means Pf. ^sn /zvan/ and Impf. ^j>\i /nezben/.

Some of those words which occur only very rarely in the chrestomathy
texts have simply been translated in footnotes, but not listed in the
Glossary.]

62*

Glossary

ir* m (§ 43) father
a/a Pe (Impf. .xardj)

perish; x^r* lost; Af Otacirir)

= caus Pe, exterminate
m flute
3i< m grieving, mourning
r£i ci^ r< m contest (dycov)
r6»1o^ m farm (dypfe)
alo Pe hire
i>^ m reward, wages
r*TL5yr< mroof; W t=J demon
rdi'.it* /ear

r^i.ir? m produce, fruit; species
cir^or

pio r^ black
r^ilAqr* m constraint
r<i^qr^ m artisan, craftsman
rtZkoLAzoar* /art, craftsmanship
i<i6r^ m dwelling-place
v cui^oW m gospel

(eforyy^XLov)
r£u*qr* /way, road
rditor* m encounter; -&.Vcu<\

to meet (a guest)
Air* Pe ala go, depart (§ 67)
r<ur£ m brother
.iui* Pe a/0 capture, arrest;

comprehend; retain; withhold;

shut; Ethpe be shut
rtf&icujr^ : see under rt&L
iXuf^ adj last; latter
^cutui^ /posteriority, post-

position (Nachstellung)

rrfjuTur^/end

^ \x>r< another, other
f<i ff ^/(§43)hand
rdb^ur* m envoy
xtjju r^ o^' only, sole
cry r^ like, as (of similarity);
.i uy r* conj just as
x<£*t< where?

JLrt ,i<iXit^ : how?;

^. • • •

.i r<LL> rt conj just as (of

similarity); in order that
r^£!Lr^ where?
rdJLi* m tree
r£2*£ftL» r< m daytime
^ pf yes, indeed
i*r^ which?; what!

'to. r* (V to* ) m honour,

fame; glory
Au r* there is; copula in a

nominal clause (§ 109)
^u r* />ayti/ Af (Vrffct*) bring
r^'Au p^ m substance, being
JKci^r^ in the manner of (§ 46)
.i rdi t^r£ just as
r<Li^p£ together
f^4^r^ con/ as, just as
.i ^ji^r^ in order that ...
rfi'\ffy\ri m foreigner (f £viosO

r&rt but
r*icni'r£ m god

rdkqmXri /divinity

aW if (of unreal condition)

-*Ar^ strait

Glossary

63*

Pa teach
»jf /ship

thousand (§ 44 a)
-Xr^Pe alo compel; oppress;
Ethpe -pass Pe
£r< /mother

constant, diligent
/constancy:
a constantly,

incessantly

bar* Pe a/a say; verbally
indicate; mention; Ethpe (=
pass Pe)

m lamb

r<&»r£ /maid-servant, female

slave
»jk»r< when?; .1 >Ae*>r*when,

whenever

*r*if

r£i r< prow I

.1 cicnj r* = * r* 'if

^uuf< we

jur? somebody; jur* r<X"not

a man, nobody; r*£j 1* people,

some people
rt&quLJrt /humanity;

population
»xji< human

Jur^, >iu r* you (sg)

rtf&'&Jry /woman; wife
r4Br? m myrtle
rt&'cL^cupr? / intemperance
(dawTta)

m chains
ix^sorg m stadium ((rrdSiov)
rrtL^flonf m portico (a-rod)
•tor* Pe alo tie, bind
r£k±rt double
-&r£ also

r*ary /face; »iW A^ for the
sake of, on behalf of
r*i' xar* /palace
l&ri m sg. curtain; also »£r£
L1AC curtain
nor

^.1* even if, though (< ^ -at*)
rdLcuamSkrg m bishop

(^TrtaKOTTOS 1 )

^Jilrf four

r^X^.ilr* m architect
•• •

r*&ciA^.ilr^ /architecture
r£>iri m lion
uvtor* Af prolong, delay
r*o£\»try /widow
rdiir* /land, country
r*i2£*r< (also r*T^x) m deed
(legal document)

»io&xr<: see under ,icut

• ••

*&i*(§ 67) Pe come; Af

(,&» r£) bring

rffct* /(p/ reftoAu*) sign
r*Ka&r? /letter (of alphabet)
rffco^XW /fortitude
rdJk'r^ /she-ass
r^l'Air^ (p/ rtf&*6Tbr^) m place;

i<t&t* tsi compatriot

64*

Glossary

3 prep in; with [of
instrument]
i^prep in, within: see under

«ct^ta /badgun/ therefore
,0:1a Pa inform, confirm
t.ia Pa disperse
Aur^Loia gently
Aicna Pe e/a feel shame
a /shame

m suavity, delight
m cooked food
Aia(V&cia) Pe pass the night
ta(Vtva) Pea/orob
r^i %a m linen-draper, cloth-
merchant

A»\,n meaningless, useless
A^a Pee/a be idle
A^a meaningless; transient,
ephemeral; lazy
tilta, &La prep amongst,
between
«jL*a bad, evil
iur^iL-a badly

r^ajL«a /badness; wickedness
La m (p/^^a) house
Pe cry, weep; Af = caws
Pe

a alone; only
^Aa Pe a/ a be struck,
wounded; Ethpe be carried
away

Pe build
rf \ 1 1 n m building, edifice
r^imn m pillow, cushion
yiimn fragrant, sweet
^'cpsuffia /benevolence; joy,

delight
r£&&a m contempt,

negligence
Timn Pe el a be merry, rejoice;

Pa delight; Ethpa be made

sweet; enjoy (js)
^i Pe seek; look for; ask for;

request (^g); beseech; Ethpe =

pass Pe; be required (by A);

r<^a&£* necessary
r^L^a m husband
r^aa.i\>.i m enemy
t»~a weak, inadequate

p outside; ^o ta\ outside of
Pe create; Ethpe = pass Pe
r*iLa m [pi rfijn § 43] son; (+

v? iy + card, num.) ... years old;

r£xif^ ta, rdiLi la a human

(pl.r^f^»ia\ t*tt*\n)

, s ia a J/ outside

rrfju la / (p/ rdju la) creature;
creation

crvta Pa bless; Ethpa = pass Pa
ta con/ but, however
La mman
r^&ta /daughter; ... years old
rtf&ta^o&ia /virginity
rtfSftciAia /virgin
lAia, prep after [of place]; ^a

Glossary

65*

lACa prep after [of time];
^t&a thereafter; .1 iAl=j ^a
conj after

%v •

Ttte^irtirC^) glorious, lofty
marrow
m side, bank (of river)
Pe choose

'isii^ m man, male; husband

4^ /gadda/ m control; fortune
«k.i\ Pe ela happen; happen to

be
ciS^ 0^3 prep within, in the

midst of (+ suf. cdq>^i); ci>^

into; o^ ^9 adv inside,

within

rdSjjo^ m laughingstock
>&\adj internal, inward
r£ 6\ m inhabitant, resident
r£ia3^m colour
r6&a^ r<a>a^ Aujs refuge
r^ioi^ m adultery
r^Lxo^ m body
r^ii^: r*v^ Al^=? treasury
rtfKto i^/circumcision
rdx* \\ m lictor
ti\ Pe alo circumcise; Ethpe =

passVe
t*^ conj for
rA\ Pe reveal, uncover; Ethpe

reveal itself, appear

m wave

iX^ir* Ethpe deprive oneself

(of ^»), lose

Au r^ ; i>^\ adv completely
to^ Pe alo accomplish,

complete; abolish, annul
Pe alo steal

rdi

r^xal^/gabbara/ m hero
t<l oli\ m bridal chamber (=

1), canopy for wedding
ceremony

Pe belch out
i* Af entrust, commit
mwing
r<&2\f(pl t*i±Q^ vine
ti^(Vn\) Peo/o drag
>i^ northern
>.Tt\ Pa cease (from ^3)

.1 the fact that (Jn 1 1.13); in
order that [+ Imp/.]; because;
joins two nouns (oj); introduces
direct speech (§ 96 e i); rdf.i
without

f<u? : l m, r^&jari/act of
offering a sacrifice

ta.i Pe a/a take, fetch; Pa
govern, guide; Ethpa -pass Pa
or refl conduct oneself, live

A\^i Pa lie, defraud (a)

ctriKX^i /daggalta/ /lie

ft mgold

66*

Glossary

,o:tAtr* Ethpa be devastated
r^ia'cii m guidance
.ici.iAtr^ Ethpa be troubled
rthaax m deviation
r^cua.i /misery,

wretchedness
r&x^ax mremebrance,

memory; record
i^&ko.i / (pi rtlkLLax) place;

V\o.tj3 at places, occasionally
A».-tr* Af (VAoi) move, stir

oneself

r^jQi m image
*£ (Vci) Pe bring suit; judge;

Ettaf be judged
ocii (Vjkci.i) Pe trample
r<u.i Pe force back

.1 ad/ fearful, frightful
Ajj.i Pee/a fear
A*.i +,M/ f my, his 1 etc. (§ 16).
^».i now, by the way; however
li.i m judge
.i m denarium

rtKtl.i /(female-)resident
^.t (r^i^.i) adj pure

Pa vindicate, clear the name

of; cleanse; clear, remove;

Ethpa be purified

h^rtL^i purely

rtKa^.i / purity

r^T^.T m ram; a male

r^ol^.i /masculine gender

A*A:j few

nA.i in order that ... not, in

case
rtoa.i Pe resemble (+A); =

Ethpa

f^&a».i /likeness, image
i^»H /dmayya/m p/ price
uya.i Pe e/a sleep
•ajs^.T Pe a/a shed tears; Pa shed

many tears

r*&2L» : i /(p/ rd^»s) tear
uyjt Pe el a go out (of light)
rdLoi m beard
r^i.i m contest; r^l.t Ajls

protagonist, opponent
rdJlii /hall

^Iji m step (of flight)
rdirt m arm
oct.i Pe alo (or Pa) trail (a path)

r^cD behold; here (I am)
r^D Ethpa enter into a legal

dispute (with p-jO; ponder

(about .a)

nrtcib this [§ 13]

■

tfcn /haddaya/ m guide
oA'cd m limb

cod that (dem. pron.)
rtacn Pe be, become; [+A]

have; come into being, emerge,

happen; end up as ( A)
r£j ocd m mind, reason
^».-Lcn adv thereupon, then
r&L*cp m temple, shrine
cd Pa believe; entrust, put

Glossary

67*

in charge (over AjO
f<$ajL2flL»cp /faith, belief
&&2kcn adv thus, so
A^cn adv therefore
^2k'cD, i<1^cd arfv thus
^•Acd these
cfvAcn Pa walk; walk along,

walk about
r^'oWcp Hallelujah
r^acn Af take no notice of
r^jco m..sg. this
•gjcn m.pZ. they
^cucd m.p/. those
rt&'or£»jcn /pleasantness
h*i\j«md consulship (inrcrreta)
u^acn Pe a/o return, turn round

(intr); go against, contravene

(a); Ethpa spend time together;

Af divert

1cpr* Af (VllcD)harm
i<£lcn orfvhere
oujbIcd /difference (capeaisO
rdxcD advnow

a and

r*\o fitting, proper
a m appointed time

idoa'i m buyer

•^ i /purchase
\ Pe a/e buy; Pa sell

Lit / r£i?.i m purchase

% " i /zubbana/ m sale
La V m time (opp. space)

(<ail£a always]; ^iui at

times; once, formerly;/time

(of frequency) [rriKIai /zvatta/]

mix righteous, just
aii Pa attribute, confer
jagr/i right, appropriate
tro.itf* Ethpe keep away from

(^3); beware, watch over (a)
^p.i \rt Ethpa be joined, have

(sexual) intercourse
rrtcit m food (for a journey)
nd^ciot m coitus
•lOLoO Pefeed
•sl.% (V*-cu) Pe shake (wfr);

Af move (fr); Ettaf be moved,

shaken

rlicu m movement
p^cL % m splendour
r^iut m tares
i m weapon
t Pe be declared innocent;

win a case; Pa defeat
r^&cuiLi /innocence
^t^t /song
^* i Pa invite; Ethpa = pass Pa
t»% Pea/a sing
r*x» i m singing
rfk'te* t /songster, (female)

singer
r£i\ m mode

68*

Glossary

\ /fornication
\ little, slight
r^olojLi /littleness
11* Af shout (at \^)
i Pa diminish (= Af)
r£&*m m cross
a-1 % Pe ala sow (seed)
t<JL\\ m offspring

oujj

1i<u free; r^1r<u \n a free

• * • • •

• • •

person (not slave)
rtfSici 1 r£u /freedom

V^aau Af (.ruir*) love

— -«"' a J/' dear

Asuj Pa destroy, corrupt; Ethpa

paw Pa
r^Xau w corruption, ceasing to

exist

r^Tajj m colleague, friend

olsjj Pe 0/0 tie up, bind

,tjj„ r^iu one

rtf.iijj each other, one another

.&» /joy, meny-making

(d.Wui some
•• • • •

,.tu Pe be glad, rejoice
rtKcLaJi .tjj / singular number,

singularity
I.tjj Pe a/o surround
tiu pr^p around
dt:u» Pa renew; Ethpa = pass Pa
&.iu (r<&ui) new
jsuj (V-sojj) Pe become liable

to; Pa condemn, pronounce

guilty; Ethpa = pa&s Pa
r£scuj m love
r^Laoij /debt; dues
»cuj Pa show, demonstrate

r^cuim (pZ. r<A6ajj ) snake
rdi^Acijj m health
rciisvcm m need
ti (Viojj) Pe w gaze at (a);

look forward to (\)
r^alojj m desolation,

devastation

m thinking
muse
r*u* Pe see, spy; see to; Ethpe

appear, seem; become visible,

make appearance
r<rci uj m vision; appearance,

look
-d uj Pe alo gird, gird up; depart,

set off; Pa gird round
r^cn^jj m sin

■ ^\,iAr* Ethpe be snatched
»jj adj alive, living
rd^jj Pe (Impf i<uj: § 67) live,

survive; become alive; Af

quicken, restore life

Lu m life
r^aiu m debtor

j&i* Ethpa be declared

LAJJ

guilty; be defeated
f^&o&uj /guilt
rtika^jj f{pl rt&olij ) animal;

life, vitality
A^jj Pa empower

Glossary

69*

jj m strength
tt^Ajj mighty, strong; capable
of

71 o»i wise; expert
rtf&aajj /wisdom
r^Xi m sand
rdjj m vinegar
r<\u, r^Ajj sweet
r^olu m feast
^Xjj^rf Ethpa join (71+)
7i>\u healthy
valiant
?i\jjfer^ Ethpe (or Ethpa)
become healthy
«&\jj Pe a/a change (intr)
^2lXjj pre/7 instead of; for the
sake of
r£o\jj m fate
sour
* fifth
*uj m donkey

sou ,r£bajj five

^x»jj fifty

J five hundred
J fifteen
S£»jj / fury (at A^)
/hnig/ doleful
^i Pe alo (V^uj) show pity
^'oii/shop
r£ii» m compassion, mercy
iiuj Ethpe to suffocate (mfr),
drown
tjjttjj adj less

• V*

• •

tram* Pe 0/0 spare, withhold
omjj m jealousy, suspicion
Pa cover, bury out of sight;
Ethpa cover oneself, put on a
veil

r^rljj m loins
^r<&»~jj shamelessly
r^X.iljj m mustard
r^fati. / liberty

jj m magician, sorcerer
K*i /end

i (Volxjj) Pe a/a suffer
kjj m pain, suffering
■sutjj Pe o/o calculate; Pa = Pe;
Ethpa deliberate

on account of
r^cuejj m darkness
rditdxu m [grammatical t.t.]

patient, passive
t^&cutcijtu / status of patient;

suffering
iitii Pe o/a be needed,

necessary; useful
f^ojjxij / usefulness
r^&uxjj /(p/ r<fAiiiijj) need,

necessity

r^u^niuj /meal

rdfo /(pi. i*tf&Sr*) sister

Au&jj correct
• • •

pduj Pe 0/0 sign; seal; Pa
confirm
r£i'Auj m bridegroom

70*

Glossary

Mi

«7^ good; adv exceedingly,
very

**~\ m news, report; [gram-
matical t.t.] predicate
-* -\ Pe alo immerse; Ethpa be
sunk

V\r^ Af let fly
r^aio^ m preparation
r^icO^ m mountain

Pa prepare; provide
r<Sani^ / goodness

m price (ri\vf\)
r£±+\ m mud, clay
«»^\ Pa set in order; appoint
fprfri^ m order, rule
t<A\) m child

?A\ P^ cilo wrong, oppress; Pa
negate, deny
r^'oAi^ /impurity
r£±\ Pe be missing; err; forget
y*\ Pe ela eat, taste
r£&t^ m leaf
i~\^** Ethpa hide oneself

of

£ comely, pretty
.ar£.&f<< Ethpa desiderate
Aacir? Af transport
r^Xau m stream

An* Ethpa become dry
y. x^a prep through, by
(instrumental, agency), because

Af confess, declare,
acknowledge; admit C=);
thank; praise; EStaf GAaJuti*)
confess; promise

A..T. Pe know; Ethpe become
known; Af (•aJtcir?) make
known; E§taf (^.ici&xrf)
perceive, recognise

rthL^i* /yida c ta/ / knowledge

jadL Pe (§ 67) give

r£aoca; m giver

rdLiAcu m doctrine, teaching

r£s*CU (pi f*&*CU, r^*cu)m

day

r£i»cu today; nowadays
r^TDcu m weight, burden
r^i'&lo* m inheritance
rdi iAvcl. m increment, interest
i.^Lut o4/ only, sole
.lAcir? (.ii*) Af procreate, beget;

Ethpe be born

r*£L° m child-bearing, birth
*«U, / (pi t^^V) howling,

wailing
»^1* Pe ela learn

• Pe swear, take an oath
m sea

Lm^J f the right-hand

Af add; Ettaf = pass Af .
.» Pe sprout, grow; Af
6-^or£) produce
rtZL-iJ* /crenel, battlement
rtlkcix^ f avarice

Glossary

71*

Pa honour

(oti m heir

ut*" m month

Ait* Pe e/a inherit; Af = Pe caus

\jiL* Af O^xor?) extend

jsiu Pe ele (/mp/ja&j) settle,

dwell; sit, take a seat

.&»&»' seated
• • •

t*2u excessive; superfluous;

more abundant; ^9 t*Au

more than

Aur^L&t' especially
* V m orphan

j9rd& Pe a (^ir£±}) hurt, be
painful

rfai^ mpain
&u r<j r<& justly
rd±r<* /stone, rock
tr^" Pa disfigure
ta* perhaps
.ta when
aia Pa tell lies
qxal enough
v x* Pe a/o tie, bind
m priest
90& m thorn
r^aiai mstar
rtf&uAa^/ kidney
r£icn1a^ m sickness

chair, seat

• • • •

rt&\l* /measure
rClil^ m nature, natural
character
rfxiA / talent
Aa every, all

r&* Pe stay someone's hand;
Ethpe be impeded; be
suspended, stopped
f<ni\ < mdog
f<\ ? \^ m garland, crown
A\«\ Ethpa be adorned

r£sa Aa all that ...
everything
JX* adj general, universal
Kl* / bride
i* how much?; how!;
.1 r^n as much as
^'cito^ /kumr-//priesthood

Aur£)r<& justly

r^jEOJL^ m plural number,

plurality

rfSutcLL^ /congregation
r^cLL^ / righteousness (also

spelled Is r<&)
^'oTii^ /plurality;

confluence
jt-L* Pe o/o assemble (both tr

and mfr); Ethpa come together

(for a meeting); be brought

together
T<ry\ m crowd, group of

people

(pi r^jftdlsk) m colleague

72*

Glossary

p. (r<im^ ) hidden
rOm coral (?)
r<£m^ m silver

*- "-£* hungry
la* Pe o/o deny (.9)
1^ con/ where
r^iot£ m herald
%tAi* Af proclaim (the gospel),
evangelize; Ethpe -pass Af
n£au\t^ mlf paper, document

,tA Pe ooA Au't^ he was sad

■

cel. t* adj sick (the He is
pronounced)
r^'culsk/ sorrow, grief
oIa m vineyard
»1a / belly; womb
"^V".^ Christian
uytAAir^ Ethpe go round
tfjt^' competent, able
t<\y^ m loggerheads
c^^K^ Ethpa supplicate
.aAi2. Pe o/o write; Ethpe = pa^5
Pe; be enrolled, registered; Af
record, write down
is* jk^ /writing, document
&2k / shoulder
litsk Pa remain
jL^bit< Ethpa contest

r^X not; i*Acd r<X negating a

word other than a verb

A m heart; mind
p£xcl=A m clothing, garment
cruaA Pe alo seize; Ethpe be

taken to court, sued

\=\ outside of
»•

otaA Pe el a wear; Af clothe
sxn\rt Af inflame thirst
oX not

»ci^Air< Ethpa accompany (\)
r&a\ f tablet
r^^L^o\ /curse
r<ia\ m companion
AnnoA prep against; facing
piooA /luqdam/ adv first
b\a\ prep beside, by; towards
.icuA adv alone, only
r<\jvV mcurser
^uA there is not
r^A hither
f<i\\ m night
r<L%nX m lamp, torch

(Xainrds)

r^'ciAiA /gluttony
^■^A prep in full view of
Al^A: upwards; ^* Al^A prep

over; AjkA ^o adv above; from

above

<w\\ Pe el a (or: 16) to eat
t*\r\ tongue

A prep to; for; marker of direct
object

o /hundred

Glossary

73*

• •

• •

r^X^r€>9 m food; eating
*<Sr&> m wares; vessel, utensil
rdii-cDrtoi m healer
rd^oa» m fountain, spring;
source

m tower
m altar
m wilderness
i^ia.i» m guide, leader
rttkcu-i^xz* /guidance, control
*•«* therefore
i<8lL».V* /region; city, town
p s T» something; (+ neg.)
nothing

*..<is*&r< Ethpa understand,
interpret

rcLhzo m mind; knowledge;
understanding, comprehension
i» faithful
teas* m dowry
rt&acpce* /gift
rtfii\ % o» / firmament
r&ce* m brain
i<fL£cp9 w humility
r^cpo m lock, bolt Qi6xXosO
r£i£Aa» m promise
m defect

» /growth, shoot
rtSiazn m death
r£u» Pe strike, hit

i<?ucb: -.1 r^uc* as soon as

• ••

r£i&.TA£* m renovator,
innovator

p^'tcuiso mport
A»ti«* weak

*

r<&ol*jj2* /weakness
i<i'in^ m life-giver
r^'ci_sLu»i m storm, tempest
rtf&us* (VAuu ) m descent
i<\)^9, >!^» Pe reach, arrive a

(A, fcciA); Pa attain (\)
^oxniA^w /arrangement,

syntax (xdfis)
A^m, Acl^o prep because o1

concerning, about; .1 A^m

conj because; in order that (+

Impf.)

» why?

r^x^» mrain(fall)
r<i» m water
Au» {Impfbsq&iA) Pe to die
&i*£* at# dead
1^» superior
rt&aitkj^o f better state
t<£» from here, henceforward
rdKAct^a /food (also spelled

uwbo humble
^o^i» / humility
r6n^2* m tax-collector
t*» Pe 0/0 marry; Ethpe get
engaged

rdL» (f^Aw) full

*\» Pe be full; fill (n£»
--=Aa to comfort); Ethpe be
filled

74*

Glossary

i<irdL» m messenger; angel

rf r?a\2*> m wealth

i*£A» / salt

rdA^i m seafarer, sailor

uOls* Pe a/o promise; Ettaf be

made king
r££l» m king
rtKcuklM /kingdom; reign,

rule

W» Pa speak
\3l» m speaker, speaking
^£A» educative, instructive
rtKl» (pi. r^V 5 ??) f word, term
f<XXM» m sentence; utterance
^6 who?; n ^* one who
^S prep from, out of; than (in

comparison); -.t ^5* when,

after

rd£» what?; why?
,±z*b(T< Ethpe be counted,

reckoned

rf\j\**> m counting; number
^x» Pa bring, lead
rtiklzn f (pi rtfkiiizi) portion,

sector

^msg poor, indigent
^jusaAtr^ Ethpa become poor
r£$a±LsxBo /poverty
7wca:r£L*ts 71012* penalty
rtfoffiM m ascent
nffo'cu .t -i \ «wi /working, action
>\^lso exalted, lofty
rdiX^M m entrance
i m residence

r*d*t^» / cave
western
ola» / fall
rtftfojuxu ia» / leadership

r^I» be able (to)
r^&'.T* «^a / net, trap

Ethpa intervene
^J» / middle

r^b* m (est r<t») master
rtf&Lj^te* / pearl
diapyaptTTis)

fc.*t» / course
r^cntoi m property,
possession

m height, high place
Af venture, act
audaciously

rt&auu* / boldness, audacity
itsn God (of Israel), Lord (w.
ref . to Jesus)
exalted
t*t» bitter
i^&a£te* / carriage
rdtiLj t» / thought
*ot2* Peo/o polish
r^ixs* m bitterness
iWiV-jtSb m praiser

r^ujOJOo/ (p/ f<$JJXCl»)

measure; eaa moderately
r<ux» moil

i<u»je» m messiah, Christ
fW«\T«tt' m tabernacle, tent;

dwelling place; pledge, pawn
t^Ajo \,\ rSp /power

Glossary

75*

perfect

rt£a&x» / banquet; wedding
feast

r£&x£* m drink; drinking
730^9: podiM ^o ever
i<ude* m act of extending

t^&'ajuau&e* f demonstration

• • • • • «/

r*2kt^r£i / length; &t^r£i

rdjol patience
»ajdir* Ethpa prophesy,

foretell

.1^ Pe ale draw
cn^ Pe(/mp/tn^. )&ca^.

the dawn broke; Af (cn^r^)

spend the night
r**^' /naggara/ m carpenter
r^o^' /nagga-// carpentry;

carpentership
tciu Pe a/a shine; Af light up

(fr), kindle
t* cni illumined, light;

informed, well versed; noun

light

r^x^cu ma long time
rrfcncu m light
uujr^^jjcu) Af give rest; put

away; Ettaf have rest
ti&cu foreign, alien
i<Sfcu / fire
r^Ljjj m nostril
ymikrt Ethpa be resurrected

• .•

r^i»jjj / resurrection
i\iii Pe elo (Impf &cuij)

descend
rt&xii m robe
l^j Pe a/a keep, maintain;

watch out for; guard
r^uij m satisfaction; resting

place; rest
v rir>ii Nisan = April
r^VJ m yoke
iWqj m injury, blemish

r^X^j m deceit

• ••

com Pe 0/0 slaughter
i<mM m wealth

j m law (v6|ios)
AurOpoMJ legally
^iflcu Pe a/a take (in hand)
>mj Pa test

Iaj Pe ale (ImpfX**) fall; fall
upon, harass
a&j Pe o/o (Impf actio) exit;

Af (afir^) bring/take out
rftfnsLj/nfaq-/ f(pl rfKaSj)

expenses

r^xiSLl' /(p/i^JfcrSj")S0Ul;

tomb; (with apron, suf.) -self,

-selves
jb^j Pe 0/0 plant; Ethpe = pass

Pe
jj-j^rtf Ethpa distinguish

oneself
■ -j ot# illustrious, glorious;

victorious

76*

Glossary

kojanj / feminine gender
Kaojf a female
lor^ Af (V ^anj ) add, join
Pe alo hit, knock (j*)
foixj/ breath
[au m eagle
^aAuAvrtf Ethpa become drawn,
attracted

A&j Pe Impf'he shall give' (§
67)

r<£Lao) /sebbel-/ / ladder,

flight of stairs
±j=bd Pe a/a be satiated
fog % nnr> / satiety

Pe a/a think; Ethpe = pass

Pe; Pa hope (in .a /Al*.);

evangelise, preach the gospel
i^iaflD mhope
rt&Xrisv /svarta/ / gospel
rt&ajB / old woman
K^x> Pe increase (mfr); Af

increase {tr)\ assist
.i^» Pe e/0 worship
.^p /saggi/ much, many,

abundant
.°fc\nr> Pa harm
jj.itt) Pe alo rip, tear up
Lixp Pe a/0 arrange
.tciiflD Pe el a testify; Af = Pe
2^afl> m multitude ;

majority

cud m meaning, sense
J£oa> pertaining to meaning
rt&^asp f branch
r£i iLcub m action; event
rdiilcui) m defect; wrongdoing;

damage

°mrr> Pe alo overthrow, expel

rt&CL=L±sp f old age

\sLjd Pa bear, endure

f^&tsLuB /food
• • • *f

-pa> (Vpjj») Pe place; Ethpe be
located; be issued
r^&ajjv / treasure
cry* at all; altogether
^x» Pa expect, look forward (to

A)

t/iQiT) / knife

A^oor^ Af do, act foolishly; err,

sin

Aaj», t<Ww» foolish
r^tioi / shield
*\a>r^ Af think nothing of,

despise; Ethpe = Af pass
jAtt> Pe ela (Impf. xuxu ) ascend;

Af (aa?rO = caus Pe load; take

up

r^ifl) (rtensp) adj blind
u^io) Pe o/<? reach; uy^uD

seated at a dinner-table; Ethpe

seat oneself at a table for a

meal; Af, Pa support
rcLzxisv m banquet; f j» Au-=j

banquet hall
**» f left-hand

Glossary

77*

Pe hate
iso adj (t<Lisp) hateful
rttkrCux) f dislike
rtSilciisB f helmet
Aur^liA) badly
xuajoo in need of (Aj^)
r^'axi^La) /* lack
tajoo Pe alo do, practise; visit
AAa) Pa empty out
m document
» m scribe

• •

r^Lsk» /(p/ f*tfc&») lip; edge,

rim

\mnw Pa present
f^Xaoiiflt) opposed
»Xaana> opposed, adverse
jjt» Pe o/<? do wrong, sin;

damage (+.a)
r4&'a» la) / stink
A* to empty, vain
r^ciAm) m winter
lAu» Pe a/0 hide

Pe a/e make, manufacture;
do; bring about (a situation)
disL± m servant, slave
rtii m product; work, deed;
incident

<hanL m actor, doer; [gram-
matical t.t.] active, agent
&axci=-L / status of agent;
performance

r^&'.Vja^. / work, deed
ta^ Pe a/a pass away; get past;
overstep; pass by
,to^ Hebrew
A-\^ Pa roll off (tr)
A^. / c gal/ fast, quickly

t_^ whilst

• •

,i^r^ Af wrest, snatch
Aq.t^ / c dakkel/ up to then; up

to now, still
r&$iL conj before
rGnxs* Ajlamma/ prep

\ r&*\±. as far as, up to;

.1 r&t>\j± conj until
r£j'£*. / c eddana/m time;

.^\^i at all times

r£L*jUL m festival
• .• • •

i.ta. Pa help; Ethpa = pass Pa
rf&.XA. / church
.ica^. Pe a/a remember
r<i i.icla. m help
r^i.icDOJL m memory;
mentioning
r^i'ia-i. m agitation
r^'cL^ m iniquity
r^a^cLi. m depth

m existence
m flower
si+-±rt Af (Vucu^) distress
r£c&cL*. m seniority, antiquity
r^i^ci^. m richness
rtf&'o uu / strength
Au t*\\ V with difficulty

78 s

Glossary

+\*^** Ethpe to put on,
clothe oneself

(=

\±)m

m. custom
rfi% < f eye; fountain
r^Aiiot^ / wakefulness,
vigilance

t^. Af CU-^r£) wake up (tr)\
Etta wake up (intr)
\£l± Pa hinder
A^l prep on; because of; conj

.1 A^ because
A^ (VAl^) Pe alo enter; Af
(A*r*) bring in
jaXjL Pe alo oppress
»\jk Pa lift; Ethpa = pass Pa;
ascend

X^ upper, elevated; supreme,
highest

i^iAi m youth; servant
hjT^lXIa. / crop, harvest
ali m world; era; y\\ \\,
L y\\\\ forever;
tiV^Vi eternal
r^&l^ / cause, reason
r<&X_L. / burnt-offering
al prep together with
L± m(pl r&p&2L) nation,
people

i m dweller, resident
Pe a/a labour; trouble
onself (about ^a)
I m labour
Pa deepen
Pe a/ a dwell, inhabit

existence

l mwool
Pe reply
pdii-^ / cloud
f\vn\ ,r<nfYi\ difficult
^ tflojL twenty
r^xdu^ m dust
r*-jk. Pe resist, fight against
l ? n\ ad] devastated, barren
ln^ Pe alo to destroy; Ethpa

be uprooted
r£?tfLL /scorpion
r^&al / distress
jl^Avr^ Ethpe be mixed
t<sd\± f bed, couch
-1a. Pe a/a happen, befall (Ajl)
ijt^ Pe alo run away
^jjK-a! powerful
^tA. Pe ela (intr) to intensify
.iAul Pa get ready
.tuA^ be due to (do); future
*o*£L*l old
t»&^ rich
iAl^ Pe a/ a be/become rich; Af

= caus Pe

i beautiful
m fruit
i*t^ /pagra/ m body
r^&'cu 5 i^5 / corporeality
i (Vjjoa) Pe w give out odour,

Glossary

79*

smell

m mouth
job m answer, reply
Q6uxx>cL& nature (cfrfxji?)
fWnnpoa m decision

r6rLt1CL& tower (Trupyos)

r<&j1cLa m food;
administration, care
m salvation
m break-up;
dislocation; distinction,
differentiation

(*x eta) Pe remain
r£b&oa m inn (TravSoicelov)
rCxms m copy
•Oy^a Pe a/a leave (a place)
.u»»fi fragrant
rOiiLa m supplication
m censer

oj^r^ Af persuade; Ethpe
(ocuA^Avrtf) become
convinced; consent
,v ~* m cheek
Pe alo tie, bind
rtfKr<la / simile, parable
.^a Pa divide; distribute, giv
away

apoplexy
rdft'o^Lit / division
jAa Pe alo do; work
r<i«k Pe return; Pa turn (to A)
(fr); reply; return; Af restore;
Ethpe turn (to A) (intr)

• * •

r^^-i_a / area, region

r£o dm& m section

rt&l»in& / cut stone

xuna Pe a/0 dissect, dismember

r^dLama / bandlet

r*&na / lot (cast)

A^j* Pe a/0 do; labour; nA\^

(Pepfc) labourer; doer

fjr a happy

Pa save, rescue; Ethpa =

pass Pa
:in£ Pe alo issue an order,

command; Ethpe = pass Pe
nnfi more advantageous
f<uflL£t flower
rt&x\£k f grain
f^ou.ila m paradise
r£oci a L& m saviour
r£cot£ m divider
r<A i la m iron(works)
r^'cia* ta / separation
tA different
i.ta m Pharisee
iu r<i. ta severally, in a

different way

r££o~ta m face (irp6aa>Trov)
jata Pe alo rescue, set free;

Ethpe =pass Pe; dissociate

oneself
jc*ta Pe alo separate (intr); Eth

be divorced

^ta Pe alo extend, stretch out
r^'cL^jLa / act of streching

out

80*

Glossary

Au rrtur^ clearly

$ m word; matter;
scriptural passage
rt'jabiA m (dining-)table
jj^-a Pe a/a open [fr]
n^'&a m width

t*r£l filthy

t*X*rt^ / filth

r<a- Pe desire (+ ja); Ethpe

consent; take a liking (to .a)
^ /(p/ «*#c^..) thing;

matter

r££i?~ m will, desire
r^ir^.. /(pZr*£iL^..) finger
Aia- Pa decorate
,<D-r* Af (or Pa ,cd-) make

thirsty

r6ioJ m fasting
ijl oSo^) Pe u depict; Ettaf

(t»-&AM*) -pass Pe
&jl (V&ci^Pe w heed (\)
r^A\a-ijj- / lewdness
.?•-., pr^p beside, next to
r^ruJ m hunter
r<r&aY- / (pi rtK&fll) prayer
xA- Pa split, chop (wood)
A- Pa pray

^J m image
m radiance

'tl^ m disgrace
£kJ m morning

rdfc^.. / worry
,1- Pa cleave, split

r£rirtr<q m distress, adversity
Ann Pa receive

ap m grave
r^ioao m burial; Id Ai*s

cemetery

>.to Pa have permanent posses-
sion of
r^&osa* .id' / placing before,

fronting

ou.ip sacred, holy
t^Xhn m neck
p.ixi Pa act early; Ethpa be said

or done first, precede
-pin /qdem/ adj earlier
P.td /qdam/ prep before, ahead

of;Io ^j) prior to
^.td o4f first, former; ancient
ae.To Pa purify
»od Pa remain
yin Oodcld) Pe w arise, stand

up; be standing; take up a

position; provide (for .a); Af

raise, establish
rdijailaD m offering
rf&xcLo / truth
v ?\;n narrow
kTi^o m force: tJ^o ^»,

r^v^as by force, against

one's will

Glossary

81*

• •

S\d Pe alo kill

*\* Pe a/a arise (of clamour)

r^oi^p m (river) lock, sluice

(KaTajbjixiKTTiS')

r£\^o m summer
m condition
lId / resurrection
r^aujD m wood
rdio m voice
r^aXp m miser
,LAp little (of quantity)
r^ijo Pe take possession of ;

acquire

r^9CLLo m -self(§ 12a); nature
r^±o m fear, suspicion
t<L±6 m reed
^cl^ld / possessions
tW»in m possession, property

cnp m emperor (of Rome)

Pe shout
)LLn f shout
-p (V^^o) Pe or a agree
rdinq m plough
i*to Pe call; cry out; address,

speak to (A); Ethpe be named,

called
jito Pe elo approach (A);

touch, affect (\) = Ethpa
rCnin m battle
jbtD adj near

rduto / (pZ r^'lon) village;
field (§ 43)
plo Pe o/o to cover over

r^i'lp /(p/f<Aulp)horn

;(Va*d) Pe a/a be (grow)
old (of age)

,T» T

o a*# elderly

• •

r^\r^i m mystery

_=* ad/ (p/ ^fjataH) great; noun

teacher; r^iaiiL -a V chief priest
<^i.1 /(p/rffc&ajf) myriad
r^'aa* / majesty, greatness
,.al Pa raise (child); Ethpa grow

up

nri^l . / desire, passion
t^t Pe ela get angry

attractive, desirable
*>^ perceptive, sensible

*VJ.. / foot
rrfft>^l / rivulet, tributary
p^l Pea/0 stone
^\1&i* Ethpa lust (after A)
jl^Ii* Af feel, sense (a);

notice

r^.i 1 Pe proceed, sail
r£&o.ii m pursuer
^.il Pe alo chase, persecute
r^i'dacoV m down payment

(dppapkiv < Heb itanj?)
^ocd1 Roman
\cni Pee/a run
.=l»cd1 timid
r^i^»1 m anger, wrath
r6iol / spirit; wind

82*

Glossary

r^ojjol m distance
>ot Pe be intoxicated
rf&cu 01/ intoxication
p* (Vpo1)Af(^1r^)lift;

Ettaf = pass Af
1^*0 1 m height
r^ii^oql m gift, marriage gifts
r^uol m sign; signature,

signing
xujjV ad/ far
5qu1 Pe e/a love, care for;

r<yajji friend; Pa show mercy

(to 1*0

r^jjV m (often p/) love, mercy
jujlr^ Af remove, keep away;

Ethpa= pass Af
^^Af(=Pa^1)

moisten; Ethpa become moist
f^foq -}t\j / moisture,

humidity

u. 1 m smell, odour
iLl ra head

1 / beginning
m vehicle

^Ir* Af lower, let drop

pi adj high

rto>l Pe cast; Af (+ 1*.)
saddle; = Pe

v»1 Pe o/o hint (at A^)

ocu^oi gentle

r<j iPe think (of .sa)

i_L/t&r* Ethpa take into conside-
ration; plan; think, ponder

,^t&r* (rd^.1 II) Ethpa have

satisfaction from £0
pcL^.i sad

r<i» sj m thought; mind
Pe e/a thunder, roar
Af let go of; leave
rCJkJkl m movement; jaAl
iWt \ instant
r<xl Pe accuse; Ethpe = po&s Pe

r^iLz.t m opprobrium

^-^kV wicked

yuii Pe do make a sign

m nobleman
£1 foremost, prominent

Ar^x Pe (Impf Ardxj) ask for;
Pa ask (a question); Ethpe
excuse oneself; Ethpa = paw
Pa

^'onnT /vicinity; neighbour-
hood

4*iit / (female) neighbour

jjL=ut Pa praise, laud; Ethpa =
pass Pa

juL»ju praiseworthy, glorious

v? \ny seventy

xlsuc Pe alo leave alone;
permit; forsake; forgive; Ethpe
be exempted

f^&a£ / sabbath

-r^utr* Ethpe be perturbed
.^jl troubled, in turmoil

Glossary

83*

Pe cast; Ethpe be ejected,
be born in miscarriage
r££t.u gift given by bridegroom
Luc Pa send, dispatch; Ethpa =
pass Pa

m insomnia

m question,
questioning

m boasting
m glory
rWnnog. m forgiveness
^ (^\cii) Af (^rr^) wash
r^riacix. m declaration
^..icdutr^ Ethpa perceive,
recognise (< V^-x. )
^x (V \clt) Pe w treat with
contempt; Ethpe C^-x&<W)
become contemptible
»cuer< Af deem worthy of (A);
Pe ptc i^clx worthy, deserving
Aur^'cut equally, in the same
way

rW\j\cyx w power
r^A'cuc m completion,
consummation

rtcn&oax* m attribute, epithet
r£A»cuc m perfection
m rock
m beauty
m street; market
r^iojc m wall, rampart
,.ioAurr<r Ethpa come up against
i'iqoL m [grammatical t.t.]
subject; beginning

r^i ? nrcii m groomsman
r^Jiiknxcii / bridesmaid
\jtcLit Pa lead; Ethpa

(^roAutr^) reach out
.&&cul Pa associate, allow to

take part (in .a); Ethpa

(-a&a&xr^) take part
*<A$\aA m one who shares (a)
rttka&tkcuL f (conjugal) union
■\hy, Pe alo flow, gush forth
tar* Ethpa change (intr)
Pe alo harass
rtlka » \r. f madness, folly
r*€£x (also f^T2^xf<) m deed

(legal document)
Acu-x / Sheol, Hades
r£i*jc m peace
-=l*je Pe e/a lie (down)
jjL^jcrtf Af find; be able to;

Ethpe be found
r£uoAx m sender
aAx I Pe a/0 (or: la) send a

message; Ethpe be sent
jjAx. II Pe alo (or: /a) strip, take

off (clothing), divest
^Xjc Pa lord it over (A^.);

Ethpa be allowed, authorised

(to do)
iW\t. m tranquility; jl ^o

suddenly, unexpectedly
r^ufAx. m apostle
.\,i\y at// entitled to (a);

permitted

84*

Glossary

iW\j>\t m ruler

Pe ela (a period of time)
elapse; be complete; consent;
Pa complete; accomplish;
Ethpa =pass Pa; Af commit;
hand, deliver; Ethpe deliver
oneself up

m peace

name

Pa name

Pe alo draw, pull out
r^u m sky, heaven
,i»«gax. heavenly
*!b*Aucr^ Ethpa be completed,
performed

<*jmjc Pe a/a hear; take heed of;
(+An-i) obey; Ethpe be subject
Pa serve, minister; make
m sun
Pa depart; remove (tr)
xu Autr^ Ethpe (or Ethpa) be
tormented

rf&Ii /(ctf Allx, p/ v? "it) year
r^LXj; / sleep

Ethpa recount, narrate
fcLaJt / (pZ rdvi) hour
r^XcL&x. m foot (of mountain)
■uAi beautiful; good, commen-
dable

^qvAx / beauty
A^t /§fel/, r^LaaL frail
r<\^r. m low state, ignominy
•a^aje Pe a/a to overflow

Any Pe alo move (away); lift;

take; carry; Ethpe = pass Pe
\£ (V*tx) Pe a/a be valid, true;

1Yx Pa confirm; plant firmly;

assert; secure, fasten; Ethpa be

confirmed
r^tx Pe check in (at an inn);

rest, nestle; lodge; free; Pa

begin

r&aitjc m story
rf&itx: / tribe
rC^Tsc. m lamp
t*txi true; firm
burfLlx truly
r^'tz m remainder; lx.io et

cetera
Kfvtx m truth

due, rtfSuc six

• • • *

p^&aor^Auc /* (p/ f<&rtf&ue.)

foundation
,&*i* />eSti/ Pe drink
jjiut Pe e/o be silent; Pa silence

CI&

r*&la^r*& / business,

commerce
•^jaAi Pe a/a ask for, demand;

accuse (^* pers) of; Ethpe be

made liable
*r&^& /tva c ta/ / tax
tail Pe o/o (or: la) tear; break
t^Aif< Ethpa conduct

business

Glossary

85*

f*TLiJ£i7taggara/ m merchant

rtfSttaM.iAi / wonder, miracle

»cdAi Pa delay, withhold

i*f cd& m wonder

>o^r^ Ethpe repent

a krt Af 04ia&) return (tr)

jaqhi again

coabi Pe get alarmed,

dismayed; Af = caus Pe
rdii^oAv m trust, confidence
r^SLAo)oii/increment
rtlkabi repentance
rt&asajj& / helplessness,

impotence

r^cuA m border, limit
jkjLiA pr^p under
rt)k±Ai& f veil
AuA: &jA\ /ltaht/ prep below
,AuA^r< Ethpa be brought low
& m south
Ji" souchern
\^bibix< Ethpe trust, rely (on

r£xo&^& m combat
r^XAi Pe hang; Ethpe be erected,
hanged
JkAbi third
.i2*A& Pa instruct

K m disciple
&X& three
^»&Xdi thirty

mznbi Pe a/a be astonished
^a& there

r<±»Ai eight

»cu& / agreement, contract;

condition

»j Ai Pa recount, narrate
^i At here
Ao& Pe a/a weigh; Ethpe

stumble

r<±D& m safe place
^o^vrf Af set, place; prepare
r^jjuj9l& /growth
^•lAi straight, just
r<\3ko ~* 1& /straightness
^fAt, ^AtlAi two
^VAi second

^lAi Pe alo break through.
rditAi m gate, entrance
taL^lAi, r^toL*.&l& twelve
r^JujCLsLzAi / glory, praise
r^JCxMx^ / ministry, service
\ m torture
Ibi nine
^ txAj Tishri (see Text 1, n. 3)

PROPER NOUNS 1

ti^Abgar

-prntart Abraham

rC^Agga

>m*.ir^Edessene

w ^ • • • •

r6».ir^Edessa

• • • •

ca^o^cir* Eutychus EiJTvxos 1

c»daa>or^ Eusebius

•• « •

i<iAlar^Aurelia
•• •

a>cuAlor^ Aurelius

ceAlor^Aurelis

•• • • (

TcAjtlor<f Jerusalem

jiuour^ Isaac

ocu 3 ci t» r< Herod

r£!l.ijLmrLW Alexandria
• •• •

iio»f^Amorite

ir^ Ammath-Sin
a>o <1.tj n£ Andrew
qpciIj cl^j n£ Antonius

iij cl^j i^ Antoniniana

itai^j n£ Antiochus
q»oJL> r^ Annius

3o*tAt<Ephraim (place name);
Ephrem (personal name)

«CUtJlr^(=Q9ClJUlr^ ?)

Arrianus

Bethlehem
i Bethany

7***\- Bileam

o-Aa Belshu

• ••

-»&»-•*-' Bar-Ba'sha
^.-tla'Bardaisan

3 Bar-Yama
Injpta Bar-Samya
jLj9 t=J Bar-Ba ? eshamen
^^sLzta Beersheva
>»^a& la, >»^or^ ts'Bar-
tholomew

taj.io^Gudnaphar

tsLio^Gudaphar

oxfLLil^Gordianus

x» o.4 David

^.i Daisan, river flowing

through Edessa
A* f<»j .4 Daniel

o.tjcd India
iO.tj cd Indian

i.ia \ Zebedee

• - - «

^suj Habban
i^Nti Alphaeus
,nri°ui Haf sai

1 In many cases the vocalisation remains
uncertain.

88*

Proper Nouns

»j iu Harranaean

Judaea
Judas
».4ooou Jewish, Jew
Jew
John
r^Li^cu Jechoniah

••j

»cu Joseph
Josiah

cm±J Jacob, James
Jesus

i Cephas
J Chaldaean

Qtxna\ Lucas
1 u£X Lazarus

i Matthew
Moses
oi \**i Ma'nu
q&i+nzn Moqimu
TV tea Mary
qpciatea Marcus
r^oteiMarcia
rtiKtaa Martha
tScn Matthew

3 Mathsin
r<r&-*:i&*> Mat-Tar'atha

• •

pjj divine name (inscription)
Ail'-j Nazareth
Qgo\*nfinnf> Sebastus

c»cilcu» Severus

•• ••

iaoI.tia) Sandaruk

Hebrew
1 Avida

q^cl&JLa <x>aAAa Philip
cpaAa Papus
ii IB Pharisee

p»la Persian

i.id Kedar
>iio Canaanite
rd&lo Caiaphas
»»cicDl Roman
qe>cimo3 1 Romus

\ t=LLnx Shamenbaraz

• • •• •

i Shamnai
Simon

jt Shamashyab
r6jjo.ilx (inscription)

r&*ciT<b< Thomas
cil»& Tiro

• • •